Regal 2300, 2500, 2550 boat Owner's manual
Below you will find brief information for boat 2300, boat 2500, boat 2550. These models are built with the same attention to detail and quality of construction that we would expect in a boat we would purchase ourselves.
Advertisement
Advertisement
OWNER’S MANUAL
2300, 2500, 2550
Regal Marine Industries, Inc.
2300 Jetport Drive
Orlando, FL 32809-7895
(407) 851-4360
Internet Address: http://www.RegalBoats.com
EMail Address: [email protected]
OWNER’S MANUAL
2300
2500
2550
OWNER’S MANUAL
2300
2500
2550
230104 3/26/2010 230104 3/26/2010
Table Of Contents
INTRODUCTION
Your Regal Owner’s Manual Int-8
General Information Int-8
Regal Limited Warranty Int-18
4 SYSTEMS
Electrical 4-1
Fuel 4-13
Pressurized Fresh Water 4-16
Waste 4-17
1 SAFETY ON BOARD
5 VESSEL OPERATION
Safety Labels
General Boating Safety
Required Safety Equipment
Fire Extinguishers
Visual Distress Signals
Sound Protecting Devices
Navigation Lights
Marine Sanitation Devices
Exhaust & Carbon Monoxide
Boating Under The Infl luence
Boating Accidents
Water Sports
Weather & Water Conditions
2 RULES OF THE ROAD
Navigation Rules Defi ned
Navigation Rules
Navigation Aids
Night Running
Bridge Clearance
2-1
2-2
2-6
2-9
2-10
1-1
1-3
1-7
1-10
1-12
1-15
1-15
1-17
1-21
1-25
1-27
1-29
1-34
Getting Underway 5-1
Fueling 5-3
Starting & Stopping 5-6
Steering 5-8
Fenders 5-11
Dock Line Basics 5-12
Steps-Stern Drive Docking 5-15
Stern Drive Maneuvering 5-17
Trim Angle 5-20
Anchoring 5-25
Towing 5-26
Law of Salvage 5-27
Knots 5-28
Emergencies 5-29
First Aid 5-30
Hypothermia 5-31
Environmental Awareness 5-32
3 ENGINES & CONTROLS
Engines 3-1
Propulsion 3-3
Controls 3-5
Remote Control 3-16
Table Of Contents
INTRODUCTION
Your Regal Owner’s Manual Int-8
General Information Int-8
Regal Limited Warranty Int-18
4 SYSTEMS
Electrical 4-1
Fuel 4-13
Pressurized Fresh Water 4-16
Waste 4-17
1 SAFETY ON BOARD
5 VESSEL OPERATION
Safety Labels
General Boating Safety
Required Safety Equipment
Fire Extinguishers
Visual Distress Signals
Sound Protecting Devices
Navigation Lights
Marine Sanitation Devices
Exhaust & Carbon Monoxide
Boating Under The Infl luence
Boating Accidents
Water Sports
Weather & Water Conditions
2 RULES OF THE ROAD
Navigation Rules Defi ned
Navigation Rules
Navigation Aids
Night Running
Bridge Clearance
2-1
2-2
2-6
2-9
2-10
1-1
1-3
1-7
1-10
1-12
1-15
1-15
1-17
1-21
1-25
1-27
1-29
1-34
Getting Underway 5-1
Fueling 5-3
Starting & Stopping 5-6
Steering 5-8
Fenders 5-11
Dock Line Basics 5-12
Steps-Stern Drive Docking 5-15
Stern Drive Maneuvering 5-17
Trim Angle 5-20
Anchoring 5-25
Towing 5-26
Law of Salvage 5-27
Knots 5-28
Emergencies 5-29
First Aid 5-30
Hypothermia 5-31
Environmental Awareness 5-32
3 ENGINES & CONTROLS
Engines 3-1
Propulsion 3-3
Controls 3-5
Remote Control 3-16
Table Of Contents
6 EQUIPMENT
OPERATION
7 COSMETIC CARE &
MAINTENANCE
Air Compressor 6-2
Automatic Fire Extinguisher 6-3
Battery 6-7
Bilge Pump/Automatic Switch 6-10
Canvas 6-11
Cockpit Carpet/Table 6-18
Cockpit Refreshment Center 6-19
Compass 6-20
Drain Plug 6-21
Depth Finder/Sounder 6-22
Doors/Walk-Thru Bow 6-25
Electronics 6-26
Engine Hatch
Gas Vapor Detector
Grill
Gray Water
6-46
6-47
6-50
6-55
Ladder
Lighting-Docking
6-56
6-57
Lighting-Stern 6-58
Neutra-Salt System (Volvo) 6-59
Pressurized Fresh Water 6-61
Seating-Bucket Operation 6-63
Seating-Bow Filler 6-65
Seating-Cabin w/Berth 6-67
Seating-Sun Loungers 6-69
Seating/Walk-Thru Filler 6-70
Sirius Satellite Radio
Ski Pylon/Ski Tow
6-71
6-72
Sport Tower
Sport Tower Mirror
6-73
6-75
Sport Tower Wakeboard Racks 6-76
Stereo/CD Player 6-77
Stereo iPod 6-83,88
Stereo Performance Package 6-88
Stereo Remote
Swim Platform
6-85
6-90
Toilet
Trailer Switch
6-92
6-100
Windshield-Center Latch 6-101
Cosmetic Care 7-1
Maintenance 7-11
8 TROUBLESHOOTING
Diagnostic Charts
9 STORAGE &
WINTERIZATION
10 TRAILERING
12 TECHNICAL
INFORMATION/
DRAWINGS
8-1
Decomissioning Checklist 9-2
Recomissioning Checklist 9-5
Before Towing 10-1
Driving 10-6
Launching 10-7
Loading 10-9
11 GLOSSARY & INDEX
Glossary 11-1
Index 11-5
Table Of Contents
6 EQUIPMENT
OPERATION
7 COSMETIC CARE &
MAINTENANCE
Air Compressor 6-2
Automatic Fire Extinguisher 6-3
Battery 6-7
Bilge Pump/Automatic Switch 6-10
Canvas 6-11
Cockpit Carpet/Table 6-18
Cockpit Refreshment Center 6-19
Compass 6-20
Drain Plug 6-21
Depth Finder/Sounder 6-22
Doors/Walk-Thru Bow 6-25
Electronics 6-26
Engine Hatch
Gas Vapor Detector
Grill
Gray Water
6-46
6-47
6-50
6-55
Ladder
Lighting-Docking
6-56
6-57
Lighting-Stern 6-58
Neutra-Salt System (Volvo) 6-59
Pressurized Fresh Water 6-61
Seating-Bucket Operation 6-63
Seating-Bow Filler 6-65
Seating-Cabin w/Berth 6-67
Seating-Sun Loungers 6-69
Seating/Walk-Thru Filler 6-70
Sirius Satellite Radio
Ski Pylon/Ski Tow
6-71
6-72
Sport Tower
Sport Tower Mirror
6-73
6-75
Sport Tower Wakeboard Racks 6-76
Stereo/CD Player 6-77
Stereo iPod 6-83,88
Stereo Performance Package 6-88
Stereo Remote
Swim Platform
6-85
6-90
Toilet
Trailer Switch
6-92
6-100
Windshield-Center Latch 6-101
Cosmetic Care 7-1
Maintenance 7-11
8 TROUBLESHOOTING
Diagnostic Charts
9 STORAGE &
WINTERIZATION
10 TRAILERING
12 TECHNICAL
INFORMATION/
DRAWINGS
8-1
Decomissioning Checklist 9-2
Recomissioning Checklist 9-5
Before Towing 10-1
Driving 10-6
Launching 10-7
Loading 10-9
11 GLOSSARY & INDEX
Glossary 11-1
Index 11-5
Welcome To Regal
Dear Regal Owner,
I know I speak for everyone at Regal when I welcome you to the ever-growing family of Regal boat owners. You’ve chosen a boat that is recognized worldwide for its standard of excellence. Each step in construction has been carefully scrutinized to assure comfort, performance, reliability and safety for both your passengers and yourself.
Your boat is certified by the National Marine
Manufacturers Association. It also complies with the applicable standards set by the United States
Coast Guard and American Boat and Yacht Council.
Your Regal boat was built with the same attention to detail and quality of construction that we would expect in a boat we would purchase ourselves.
Whether you’re a veteran boater or a newcomer, we strongly urge you to read this boat owner’s manual thoroughly. Familiarize yourself with the various components of your boat, and heed the safety precautions noted herein.
If you have questions that are not covered in this manual, please consult your authorized Regal dealer for assistance or phone the Regal factory at
407-851-4360.
Thank you, and welcome to the “World of Regal !”
Duane Kuck
President & CEO
Regal Marine Industries, Inc.
1-4
Welcome To Regal
Dear Regal Owner,
I know I speak for everyone at Regal when I welcome you to the ever-growing family of Regal boat owners. You’ve chosen a boat that is recognized worldwide for its standard of excellence. Each step in construction has been carefully scrutinized to assure comfort, performance, reliability and safety for both your passengers and yourself.
Your boat is certified by the National Marine
Manufacturers Association. It also complies with the applicable standards set by the United States
Coast Guard and American Boat and Yacht Council.
Your Regal boat was built with the same attention to detail and quality of construction that we would expect in a boat we would purchase ourselves.
Whether you’re a veteran boater or a newcomer, we strongly urge you to read this boat owner’s manual thoroughly. Familiarize yourself with the various components of your boat, and heed the safety precautions noted herein.
If you have questions that are not covered in this manual, please consult your authorized Regal dealer for assistance or phone the Regal factory at
407-851-4360.
Thank you, and welcome to the “World of Regal !”
Duane Kuck
President & CEO
Regal Marine Industries, Inc.
1-4
Mission Statement
With God’s help and a steadfast commitment to integrity, we will develop a team of exceptional people and relationships to provide exceptional customer satisfaction.
1-5
Mission Statement
With God’s help and a steadfast commitment to integrity, we will develop a team of exceptional people and relationships to provide exceptional customer satisfaction.
1-5
THIS PAGE IS LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK.
THIS PAGE IS LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK.
1-6 1-6
Introduction
Boating is becoming more popular every year. There are numerous types of recreational vessels on our waterways today involved in an every growing number of activities. Therefore, as a new boat owner it is of the highest priority to learn about general boating practices before operating your craft.
Your Regal dealer will answer many questions and provide valuable
“hands on” information during the completion of the new boat delivery process. In addition, your dealer has received special factory training on the product line and his services should be employed to solve technical problems and periodic maintenance beyond the scope of this manual. Also, your Regal dealer carries a line of factory approved parts and accessories.
Your Regal dealer can provide information regarding national training organizations such as the U.S. Power Squadron and United States Coast
Guard Auxiliary. Along with other organizations and literature, they can help build your “boating savvy” by developing the necessary skills and awareness to be a safe and competent skipper. Your local library can also help in providing recommended boating literature such as Chapman
Piloting (Seamanship & Boat Handling by Elbert S. Maloney).
Remember, the waterways can change from normal to abnormal conditions in a heartbeat. Knowing how to react quickly comes from experience and knowledge which can be gained through boating education.
Welcome aboard!
1-7
Introduction
Boating is becoming more popular every year. There are numerous types of recreational vessels on our waterways today involved in an every growing number of activities. Therefore, as a new boat owner it is of the highest priority to learn about general boating practices before operating your craft.
Your Regal dealer will answer many questions and provide valuable
“hands on” information during the completion of the new boat delivery process. In addition, your dealer has received special factory training on the product line and his services should be employed to solve technical problems and periodic maintenance beyond the scope of this manual. Also, your Regal dealer carries a line of factory approved parts and accessories.
Your Regal dealer can provide information regarding national training organizations such as the U.S. Power Squadron and United States Coast
Guard Auxiliary. Along with other organizations and literature, they can help build your “boating savvy” by developing the necessary skills and awareness to be a safe and competent skipper. Your local library can also help in providing recommended boating literature such as Chapman
Piloting (Seamanship & Boat Handling by Elbert S. Maloney).
Remember, the waterways can change from normal to abnormal conditions in a heartbeat. Knowing how to react quickly comes from experience and knowledge which can be gained through boating education.
Welcome aboard!
1-7
YOUR REGAL OWNER’S MANUAL
Your Regal owner’s manual has been developed to assist you in operating your vessel with safety and pleasure. Be sure to read and become familiar with the contents before operating your craft. Your owner’s manual has been divided into general chapters to assist you in becoming more knowledgable with your Regal boat. Also, we have added a special technical drawing chapter which can be valuable in maintenance and troubleshooting. This manual is not intended to be a complete source of boating maintenance, boat handling techniques, boating safety or seamanship. These skills require education and experience levels beyond this manual.
In keeping with its commitment to continued improvement, Regal
Marine Industries Inc. notes that all drawings, specifi cations, models, standard and optional equipment referred to in this manual are subject to change without notice.
OWNER’S INFORMATION PACKET
Your Regal boat features an information pouch with vessel and engine owner’s manuals. In addition, this packet contains valuable literature on your propulsion package, standard and optional equipment systems, along with various care and cleaning instructions. Be sure to store the information pouch in a clean dry area aboard your vessel.
GENERAL INFORMATION
Hull Identifi cation Number (HIN)
The United States Coast Guard has established a universal system of numerically identifying vessels by using a hull identifi cation number or
“HIN.” This number identifi es your Regal boats model, hull number, month and year of manufacture. The HIN is normally found on your boat’s transom, on the starboard side, just below the rub rail.
INT-8
YOUR REGAL OWNER’S MANUAL
Your Regal owner’s manual has been developed to assist you in operating your vessel with safety and pleasure. Be sure to read and become familiar with the contents before operating your craft. Your owner’s manual has been divided into general chapters to assist you in becoming more knowledgable with your Regal boat. Also, we have added a special technical drawing chapter which can be valuable in maintenance and troubleshooting. This manual is not intended to be a complete source of boating maintenance, boat handling techniques, boating safety or seamanship. These skills require education and experience levels beyond this manual.
In keeping with its commitment to continued improvement, Regal
Marine Industries Inc. notes that all drawings, specifi cations, models, standard and optional equipment referred to in this manual are subject to change without notice.
OWNER’S INFORMATION PACKET
Your Regal boat features an information pouch with vessel and engine owner’s manuals. In addition, this packet contains valuable literature on your propulsion package, standard and optional equipment systems, along with various care and cleaning instructions. Be sure to store the information pouch in a clean dry area aboard your vessel.
GENERAL INFORMATION
Hull Identifi cation Number (HIN)
The United States Coast Guard has established a universal system of numerically identifying vessels by using a hull identifi cation number or
“HIN.” This number identifi es your Regal boats model, hull number, month and year of manufacture. The HIN is normally found on your boat’s transom, on the starboard side, just below the rub rail.
INT-8
Introduction
The HIN consists of 12 alpha or numeric characters imprinted on a metal band. Also, another location for the HIN could be under the extended swim platform on the transom.
It is recommended that you locate and write down the HIN for future reference in the owner’s manual. It can be especially useful when ordering parts from your Regal dealer. A second HIN number is found in a hidden location. This second HIN is useful to authorities if if the vessel is stolen and the original transom HIN is modifi ed or eliminated.
HULL IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
Introduction
The HIN consists of 12 alpha or numeric characters imprinted on a metal band. Also, another location for the HIN could be under the extended swim platform on the transom.
It is recommended that you locate and write down the HIN for future reference in the owner’s manual. It can be especially useful when ordering parts from your Regal dealer. A second HIN number is found in a hidden location. This second HIN is useful to authorities if if the vessel is stolen and the original transom HIN is modifi ed or eliminated.
HULL IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
Vessel Information Sheet
It is recommended that you fi ll out the information on the following page. It will supply vital statistics on your vessel. Make a copy of the data for safe keeping.
Vessel Float Plan
Fill out the fl oat plan on the following page before departing. Leave it with a responsible person who will notify the United States Coast
Guard or local law enforcement authorities if you do not return as planned. If you change your plans be sure to notify this person. Make copies of the fl oat plan and use one each time you go boating. This will help people know where to fi nd you should you not return on schedule.
Do not fi le the fl oat plan with the United States Coast Guard.
INT-9
Vessel Information Sheet
It is recommended that you fi ll out the information on the following page. It will supply vital statistics on your vessel. Make a copy of the data for safe keeping.
Vessel Float Plan
Fill out the fl oat plan on the following page before departing. Leave it with a responsible person who will notify the United States Coast
Guard or local law enforcement authorities if you do not return as planned. If you change your plans be sure to notify this person. Make copies of the fl oat plan and use one each time you go boating. This will help people know where to fi nd you should you not return on schedule.
Do not fi le the fl oat plan with the United States Coast Guard.
INT-9
VESSEL INFORMATION SHEET
Owner: ____________________________________________
Address: ___________________________________________
City & State: ________________________________________
Home Phone: Business Phone: ____________
In Case Of Emergency Notify: _________________________
Address: ___________________________________________
City:__________________________________State: ________
Phone: ____________________________________________
Insurance Agent’s Name: ______________________________
Policy#: __________________________________________
USCG Phone: ___________ Local Police:
Marina Phone: _________________ Slip (Dock#): _________
Hull Serial #: RGM __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
Key #:__________ Engine Serial #: _____________________
Outdrive Serial #:
Key #:__________ Cabin Door: (If Applicable) ___________
Selling Dealer:
Address:
City & State:
Phone: ______________________ Fax:
Servicing Dealer:
Address:
City & State:
Phone:
INT-10
Fax:
VESSEL INFORMATION SHEET
Owner: ____________________________________________
Address: ___________________________________________
City & State: ________________________________________
Home Phone: Business Phone: ____________
In Case Of Emergency Notify: _________________________
Address: ___________________________________________
City:__________________________________State: ________
Phone: ____________________________________________
Insurance Agent’s Name: ______________________________
Policy#: __________________________________________
USCG Phone: ___________ Local Police:
Marina Phone: _________________ Slip (Dock#): _________
Hull Serial #: RGM __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
Key #:__________ Engine Serial #: _____________________
Outdrive Serial #:
Key #:__________ Cabin Door: (If Applicable) ___________
Selling Dealer:
Address:
City & State:
Phone: ______________________ Fax:
Servicing Dealer:
Address:
City & State:
Phone:
INT-10
Fax:
Introduction
FLOAT PLAN
Address: Life Jackets
City & State: First Aid Kit
Person Filing Report:
Home Telephone#:
Cell Phone #:
Registration#:
Leave From:
VHF Radio
Anchor
Food
Water
Gel Color:
Fuel Level: 1/4, 1/2, 3/4, F
Trim Color: Est. Time Of Arrival:
Inboard/Outboard:
Fuel Capacity:
If not back by, call local authorities
Est. Time of Arrival:
Name Of Person(s) Aboard Age Address Phone#
INT-11
Introduction
FLOAT PLAN
Address: Life Jackets
City & State: First Aid Kit
Person Filing Report:
Home Telephone#:
Cell Phone #:
Registration#:
Leave From:
VHF Radio
Anchor
Food
Water
Gel Color:
Fuel Level: 1/4, 1/2, 3/4, F
Trim Color: Est. Time Of Arrival:
Inboard/Outboard:
Fuel Capacity:
If not back by, call local authorities
Est. Time of Arrival:
Name Of Person(s) Aboard Age Address Phone#
INT-11
LAUNCH & CRUISE CHECKLIST
Obtain a current weather report.
Inspect the hull and propeller for damage/foreign objects.
Check all electrical system switches for proper operation.
If your boat has been in the water, run the bilge pump until the water fl ow stops.
If your boat has been out of the water, check to see that all bilge water has drained out. Install the drain plug.
Check that all required safety equipment is on board and
in good working condition.
Check that all other equipment is on board such as basic gear, tool kit and extra parts (See next page).
Open engine compartment. Inspect for fuel odors and visible leaks in the fuel, oil, exhaust & power steering.
Visually inspect engine for cracked hoses, defective belts, loose fasteners such as bolts, nuts and hose clamps.
Check fuel level. Fuel tanks should be fi lled to near full
capacity.
Make sure all navigation charts and vessel registration paperwork is onboard and weatherproofed.
Check operation of bilge blower, steering system, navigation lights and horn.
Make sure passengers and crew know how to operate safety equipment and react toan emergency.
File a fl oat plan with a responsible party ashore.
INT-12
LAUNCH & CRUISE CHECKLIST
Obtain a current weather report.
Inspect the hull and propeller for damage/foreign objects.
Check all electrical system switches for proper operation.
If your boat has been in the water, run the bilge pump until the water fl ow stops.
If your boat has been out of the water, check to see that all bilge water has drained out. Install the drain plug.
Check that all required safety equipment is on board and
in good working condition.
Check that all other equipment is on board such as basic gear, tool kit and extra parts (See next page).
Open engine compartment. Inspect for fuel odors and visible leaks in the fuel, oil, exhaust & power steering.
Visually inspect engine for cracked hoses, defective belts, loose fasteners such as bolts, nuts and hose clamps.
Check fuel level. Fuel tanks should be fi lled to near full
capacity.
Make sure all navigation charts and vessel registration paperwork is onboard and weatherproofed.
Check operation of bilge blower, steering system, navigation lights and horn.
Make sure passengers and crew know how to operate safety equipment and react toan emergency.
File a fl oat plan with a responsible party ashore.
INT-12
Introduction
SUGGESTED TOOLS, PARTS & GEAR
SUGGESTED TOOLS SPARE PARTS
Jack Knife w/ Bottle-Can Opener Spark Plugs
Phillips Screwdriver Set
Slotted Screwdriver Set
Water Pump Belt
Propellers
Combination Wrench Set Anti-Siphon Set
Ratchet & Socket Set (3/8” drive) Propeller Nut & Hardware
Vise Grip Pliers
Nut Set
Oil & Fuel Filter Wrench
Spark Plug Socket (3/8” drive)
Extra Batteries
Power Steering Fluid
Water Pump Impeller
Tie Lines
Mooring Lines
Dock Fenders
First Aid Kit
Boat Hook
Foul Weather Gear
VHF Radio, EPRIB
Charts/Handheld GPS w/ extra batteries/12 volt charger
Cell Phone w/ 12 volt charger
Bailer (Bucket) Or Hand Pump
Fire Extinguisher
Personal Flotation Devices
Anchor & Line
Life Raft
Extra Food (Can Goods w/ Can Opener) & Water
INT-13
Introduction
SUGGESTED TOOLS, PARTS & GEAR
SUGGESTED TOOLS SPARE PARTS
Jack Knife w/ Bottle-Can Opener Spark Plugs
Phillips Screwdriver Set
Slotted Screwdriver Set
Water Pump Belt
Propellers
Combination Wrench Set Anti-Siphon Set
Ratchet & Socket Set (3/8” drive) Propeller Nut & Hardware
Vise Grip Pliers Extra Batteries
Nut Electrical
Oil & Fuel Filter Wrench
Spark Plug Socket (3/8” drive)
Power Steering Fluid
Water Pump Impeller
Tie Lines
Mooring Lines
Dock Fenders
First Aid Kit
Boat Hook
Foul Weather Gear
VHF Radio, EPRIB
Charts/Handheld GPS w/ extra batteries/12 volt charger
Cell Phone w/ 12 volt charger
Bailer (Bucket) Or Hand Pump
Fire Extinguisher
Personal Flotation Devices
Anchor & Line
Life Raft
Extra Food (Can Goods w/ Can Opener) & Water
INT-13
Capacity Plate
Close to the helm on Regal boats up to 26’ in length is a capacity plate.
This plate represents manufacturers who participate in the National
Marine Manufacturer’s Association small boat certifi cation program.
Your Regal boat model has been certified by NMMA approved inspectors to be in compliance with their system guidelines along with federal safety regulations. The driver of the craft shall read the plate information before operating the vessel.
The capacity plate data applies under normal conditions. Be sure to read and abide by the capacity limits. Remember, the boat operator is responsible for the vessel and passengers.
Note the following typical capacity plate information below:
• The plate states the maximum number of persons allowed on the boat.
• The total weight of persons, gear and other items under normal conditions that the vessel is capable of carrying.
• Overloading, improper loading and weight distribution are well documented causes of accidents. Provide for an extra margin of safety in rough sea conditions.
Capacity Plate
Close to the helm on Regal boats up to 26’ in length is a capacity plate.
This plate represents manufacturers who participate in the National
Marine Manufacturer’s Association small boat certifi cation program.
Your Regal boat model has been certified by NMMA approved inspectors to be in compliance with their system guidelines along with federal safety regulations. The driver of the craft shall read the plate information before operating the vessel.
The capacity plate data applies under normal conditions. Be sure to read and abide by the capacity limits. Remember, the boat operator is responsible for the vessel and passengers.
Note the following typical capacity plate information below:
• The plate states the maximum number of persons allowed on the boat.
• The total weight of persons, gear and other items under normal conditions that the vessel is capable of carrying.
• Overloading, improper loading and weight distribution are well documented causes of accidents. Provide for an extra margin of safety in rough sea conditions.
INT-14 INT-14
Introduction
Owner’s Registration & Systems Checklist
Please note that your Regal boat requires the proper registration by your authorized Regal dealer. To initiate your Regal express limited warranty the dealer must complete the owner’s registration form and systems checklist at the time of delivery. The owner must sign the paperwork to acknowledge that the dealer has reviewed the boat systems and
Regal express limited warranty provisions with the owner. The owner should keep the original paperwork that features a temporary Regal express limited warranty registration. A Regal express limited warranty certifi cate containing all relevant boat and engine serial numbers will be sent after the factory receives the paperwork.
Dealer’s Responsibility
Your boat has undergone rigid quality assurance inspections before leaving the factory. However, your dealer has been trained to perform fi nal pre-delivery checks and to service your Regal boat prior to your pickup. Your dealer’s responsibilities include:
A complete orientation in the operation of your Regal boat, including matters relating to the safe operation of your craft.
Completion and mailing of your Regal express limited registration warranty form to the factory.
Limited warranties, registration materials, owner’s manual, operation, installation and maintenance instructions for all auxiliary equipment supplied with or installed on your Regal boat.
Owner’s Responsibility
You are entitled to all the benefi ts and services outlined in your Regal express limited warranty. However, you have certain responsibilities to ensure Regal express limited warranty satisfaction. These are:
To read the Regal express limited warranty materials and
understand them fully.
INT-15
Introduction
Owner’s Registration & Systems Checklist
Please note that your Regal boat requires the proper registration by your authorized Regal dealer. To initiate your Regal express limited warranty the dealer must complete the owner’s registration form and systems checklist at the time of delivery. The owner must sign the paperwork to acknowledge that the dealer has reviewed the boat systems and
Regal express limited warranty provisions with the owner. The owner should keep the original paperwork that features a temporary Regal express limited warranty registration. A Regal express limited warranty certifi cate containing all relevant boat and engine serial numbers will be sent after the factory receives the paperwork.
Dealer’s Responsibility
Your boat has undergone rigid quality assurance inspections before leaving the factory. However, your dealer has been trained to perform fi nal pre-delivery checks and to service your Regal boat prior to your pickup. Your dealer’s responsibilities include:
A complete orientation in the operation of your Regal boat, including matters relating to the safe operation of your craft.
Completion and mailing of your Regal express limited registration warranty form to the factory.
Limited warranties, registration materials, owner’s manual, operation, installation and maintenance instructions for all auxiliary equipment supplied with or installed on your Regal boat.
Owner’s Responsibility
You are entitled to all the benefi ts and services outlined in your Regal express limited warranty. However, you have certain responsibilities to ensure Regal express limited warranty satisfaction. These are:
To read the Regal express limited warranty materials and
understand them fully.
INT-15
To examine the boat in detail at the time of delivery.
Apply the following: boating rules and regulations, safety equipment, environmental regulations, accident reports and Regal express limited warranty regulations terms and conditions.
To read thoroughly all literature supplied with your boat, including this owner’s manual and to follow the recommendations in the literature.
To return the boat after the recommended hours of engine operation for the proper dealer service inspections.
To provide proper maintenance and periodic servicing of your
boat and equipment as outlined in the various manuals supplied.
To examine the boat in detail at the time of delivery.
Apply the following: boating rules and regulations, safety equipment, environmental regulations, accident reports and Regal express limited warranty regulations terms and conditions.
To read thoroughly all literature supplied with your boat, including this owner’s manual and to follow the recommendations in the literature.
To return the boat after the recommended hours of engine operation for the proper dealer service inspections.
To provide proper maintenance and periodic servicing of your
boat and equipment as outlined in the various manuals supplied.
INT-16 INT-16
Introduction Introduction
INT-17 INT-17
REGAL MARINE INDUSTRIES, INC.
LIMITED WARRANTY
Welcome to the Worldwide Family of Regal Owners! We are very pleased that you have chosen a Regal
Powerboat!
This document is your Warranty Registration Certifi cate and Statement of Warranty. Please check the registration information section for accuracy. If this information is not correct or if you change your address at some future date, please notify us at the following address: Regal Marine Industries, Inc.
Attention: Warranty Registrations, 2300 Jetport Drive, Orlando, Florida 32809; or E-mail at customer. [email protected].
Please read the warranty carefully. It contains important information on Regal’s claims procedures and your rights and obligations under this warranty.
WHAT IS COVERED: This Limited Warranty applies to Regal boats beginning with model year 2008.
LIFETIME LIMITED STRUCTURAL HULL WARRANTY: Regal Marine
Industries, Inc. warrants to the original retail purchaser of this boat if purchased from an authorized
Regal dealer that the selling dealer or Regal will, repair or replace the fi berglass hull if it is found to be structurally defective in material or workmanship for as long as the original retail purchaser owns the boat.
For purposes of this warranty, the hull is defi ned as the single fi berglass casting which rests on the water.
This limited warranty is subject to all limitations and conditions explained below.
FIVE-YEAR TRANSFERABLE LIMITED STRUCTURAL HULL
WARRANTY: In addition to the Lifetime Limited Structural Hull Warranty, Regal offers a Transferable
Five-Year Limited Structural Hull Warranty. Under the Five-Year Transferable Limited Structural Hull
Warranty, the selling dealer or Regal will repair or replace the fi berglass hull if it is found to be structurally defective in material or workmanship within the fi rst (5) years after date of delivery to the original retail purchaser. Any remaining term of this Five-Year Limited Hull Warranty may be transferred to a second owner if within 60 days of purchase, the new owner registers the transfer with Regal and pays the established warranty transfer fee. Contact Regal Customer Service at the above address for details.
FIVE-YEAR LIMITED HULL BLISTER WARRANTY: Regal warrants that the selling dealer or Regal will repair any underwater gelcoated surfaces of the hull against laminate blisters which occur as a result of defects in material or workmanship within (5) years of the date of delivery, provided that the original factory gelcoat surface has not been altered. Alternation would include but is not limited to damage repair; excessive sanding, scraping, sandblasting; or from improper surface preparation for application of a marine barrier coating or bottom paint, any of which shall void this Five-Year
Limited Hull Blister Warranty. Proper preparation must be applied to the hull bottom if the boat is to be moored in the water for periods in excess of 60 days. Regal Marine shall repair or cause to be repaired any covered laminate blisters based on the following prorated schedule. Less than two (2) years from delivery date - 100%, Two (2) to three (3) years from delivery date - 75%, Three (3) to four (4) years from delivery date - 50%, Four (4) to fi ve (5) years from delivery date - 25%.
Reimbursement shall be limited to one repair, not to exceed ($100.00) dollars per foot of boat length prior to prorating. Regal’s prior authorization for the method and cost of repair, must be obtained before repairs are commenced. All costs to transport the boat for repairs are the responsibility of the owner.
INT-18
REGAL MARINE INDUSTRIES, INC.
LIMITED WARRANTY
Welcome to the Worldwide Family of Regal Owners! We are very pleased that you have chosen a Regal
Powerboat!
This document is your Warranty Registration Certifi cate and Statement of Warranty. Please check the registration information section for accuracy. If this information is not correct or if you change your address at some future date, please notify us at the following address: Regal Marine Industries, Inc.
Attention: Warranty Registrations, 2300 Jetport Drive, Orlando, Florida 32809; or E-mail at customer. [email protected].
Please read the warranty carefully. It contains important information on Regal’s claims procedures and your rights and obligations under this warranty.
WHAT IS COVERED: This Limited Warranty applies to Regal boats beginning with model year 2008.
LIFETIME LIMITED STRUCTURAL HULL WARRANTY: Regal Marine
Industries, Inc. warrants to the original retail purchaser of this boat if purchased from an authorized
Regal dealer that the selling dealer or Regal will, repair or replace the fi berglass hull if it is found to be structurally defective in material or workmanship for as long as the original retail purchaser owns the boat.
For purposes of this warranty, the hull is defi ned as the single fi berglass casting which rests on the water.
This limited warranty is subject to all limitations and conditions explained below.
FIVE-YEAR TRANSFERABLE LIMITED STRUCTURAL HULL
WARRANTY: In addition to the Lifetime Limited Structural Hull Warranty, Regal offers a Transferable
Five-Year Limited Structural Hull Warranty. Under the Five-Year Transferable Limited Structural Hull
Warranty, the selling dealer or Regal will repair or replace the fi berglass hull if it is found to be structurally defective in material or workmanship within the fi rst (5) years after date of delivery to the original retail purchaser. Any remaining term of this Five-Year Limited Hull Warranty may be transferred to a second owner if within 60 days of purchase, the new owner registers the transfer with Regal and pays the established warranty transfer fee. Contact Regal Customer Service at the above address for details.
FIVE-YEAR LIMITED HULL BLISTER WARRANTY: Regal warrants that the selling dealer or Regal will repair any underwater gelcoated surfaces of the hull against laminate blisters which occur as a result of defects in material or workmanship within (5) years of the date of delivery, provided that the original factory gelcoat surface has not been altered. Alternation would include but is not limited to damage repair; excessive sanding, scraping, sandblasting; or from improper surface preparation for application of a marine barrier coating or bottom paint, any of which shall void this Five-Year
Limited Hull Blister Warranty. Proper preparation must be applied to the hull bottom if the boat is to be moored in the water for periods in excess of 60 days. Regal Marine shall repair or cause to be repaired any covered laminate blisters based on the following prorated schedule. Less than two (2) years from delivery date - 100%, Two (2) to three (3) years from delivery date - 75%, Three (3) to four (4) years from delivery date - 50%, Four (4) to fi ve (5) years from delivery date - 25%.
Reimbursement shall be limited to one repair, not to exceed ($100.00) dollars per foot of boat length prior to prorating. Regal’s prior authorization for the method and cost of repair, must be obtained before repairs are commenced. All costs to transport the boat for repairs are the responsibility of the owner.
INT-18
Introduction
LIMITED GENERAL WARRANTY: In addition to above hull warranties, Regal warrants to the original purchaser of this boat if purchased from an authorized Regal dealer or Regal that the dealer or Regal will repair or replace any parts found to be defective in materials or workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of delivery, subject to all exceptions, limitations and conditions contained herein.
LIMITED EXTERIOR FINISH WARRANTY : Regal warrants that the selling dealer or Regal will repair cosmetic defects in the exterior gelcoat fi nish including cracks or crazing reported to
Regal within 90 days from the date of delivery to the original retail purchaser, subject to all limitations and conditions contained herein. All warranty work is to be performed at a Regal dealership or other location authorized by a Regal Customer Service Manager after it is established to Regal’s satisfaction that there is a defect in material or workmanship.
REGISTRATION INFORMATION:
CUSTOMER OBLIGATIONS: The following are conditions precedent to the availability of any benefi ts under these limited warranties:
(a) The purchaser must sign and the dealer must submit to Regal the “NEW BOAT
DELIVERY CHECKLIST” within fi fteen (15) days of the date of delivery and such information must be on fi le at Regal.
(b) The purchaser must fi rst notify the dealer from whom the boat was purchased of any claim under this warranty within the applicable warranty period and within a reasonable period of time (not to exceed thirty (30) days) after the defect is or should have been discovered; and (2) if such continued use causes other or additional damage to the boat or component parts of the boat.
(c) Regal will not be responsible to repair any condition or replace any part, (1) if the use of the boat is continued after the defect is or should have been discovered; and (2) if such continued use causes other or additional damage to the boat or component parts of the boat.
(d) Based on the dealer’s knowledge of Regal’s warranty policy and/or consultations with Regal, the dealer will accept the claim and arrange for appropriate repairs to be performed, or deny the claim if it is not within the warranty.
(e) The dealer will contact the Regal boat owner regarding instructions for delivery of boat or part for warranty repair if it is covered by the limited warranty. ALL COSTS
TO TRANSPORT THE BOAT FOR REPAIRS ARE THE RESPONSIBILITY
OF THE OWNER.
(f) If the Regal boat owner believes a claim has been denied in error or the dealer has performed the warranty work in an unsatisfactory manner, the owner must notify
Regal’s Customer Service Department in writing at the address listed for further consideration. Regal will then review the claim and take appropriate follow-up action.
INT-19
Introduction
LIMITED GENERAL WARRANTY: In addition to above hull warranties, Regal warrants to the original purchaser of this boat if purchased from an authorized Regal dealer or Regal that the dealer or Regal will repair or replace any parts found to be defective in materials or workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of delivery, subject to all exceptions, limitations and conditions contained herein.
LIMITED EXTERIOR FINISH WARRANTY : Regal warrants that the selling dealer or Regal will repair cosmetic defects in the exterior gelcoat fi nish including cracks or crazing reported to
Regal within 90 days from the date of delivery to the original retail purchaser, subject to all limitations and conditions contained herein. All warranty work is to be performed at a Regal dealership or other location authorized by a Regal Customer Service Manager after it is established to Regal’s satisfaction that there is a defect in material or workmanship.
REGISTRATION INFORMATION:
CUSTOMER OBLIGATIONS: The following are conditions precedent to the availability of any benefi ts under these limited warranties:
(a) The purchaser must sign and the dealer must submit to Regal the “NEW BOAT
DELIVERY CHECKLIST” within fi fteen (15) days of the date of delivery and such information must be on fi le at Regal.
(b) The purchaser must fi rst notify the dealer from whom the boat was purchased of any claim under this warranty within the applicable warranty period and within a reasonable period of time (not to exceed thirty (30) days) after the defect is or should have been discovered; and (2) if such continued use causes other or additional damage to the boat or component parts of the boat.
(c) Regal will not be responsible to repair any condition or replace any part, (1) if the use of the boat is continued after the defect is or should have been discovered; and (2) if such continued use causes other or additional damage to the boat or component parts of the boat.
(d) Based on the dealer’s knowledge of Regal’s warranty policy and/or consultations with Regal, the dealer will accept the claim and arrange for appropriate repairs to be performed, or deny the claim if it is not within the warranty.
(e) The dealer will contact the Regal boat owner regarding instructions for delivery of boat or part for warranty repair if it is covered by the limited warranty. ALL COSTS
TO TRANSPORT THE BOAT FOR REPAIRS ARE THE RESPONSIBILITY
OF THE OWNER.
(f) If the Regal boat owner believes a claim has been denied in error or the dealer has performed the warranty work in an unsatisfactory manner, the owner must notify
Regal’s Customer Service Department in writing at the address listed for further consideration. Regal will then review the claim and take appropriate follow-up action.
INT-19
WARRANTY EXCEPTIONS:
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY does not cover and the following are not warranted:
(a) Engines, metal plating or fi nishes, windshield breakage, leakage, fading and deterioration of paints, canvas, upholstery and fabrics;
(b) Gelcoat surfaces including, but not limited to, cracking, crazing, discoloration or blistering except as noted above;
(c) Accessories and items which were not part of the boat when shipped from the Regal factory, and/or any damage caused thereby;
(d) Damage caused by misuse, accident, galvanic corrosion, negligence, lack of proper maintenance, or improper trailering;
(e) Any boat used for racing, or used for rental or commercial purposes;
(f) Any boat operated contrary to any instructions furnished by Regal, or operated in violation of any federal, state, Coast Guard or other governmental agency laws, rules, or regulations;
(g) The limited warranty is void if alterations have been made to the boat;
(h) Transportation of boat or parts to and/or from the REGAL factory or service location;
(i) Travel time or haul outs, loss of time or inconvenience;
(j) Any published or announced catalog performance characteristics of speed, fuel and oil consumption, and static or dynamic transportation in the water;
(k) Any boat that has been repowered beyond Regal’s power recommendations;
(l) Boats damaged by accident and boats damaged while being loaded onto, transported upon or unloaded from trailers, cradles, or other devices used to place boats in water, remove boats from water or store or transport boats on or over land;
(m) Water damage to, dry rot to, condensation to, or absorption by interior surfaces, wood structures or polyurethane foam; interior wood including, but not limited to, bleeding and/ or discoloration as a result of condensation or moisture or water continually contacting the plywood causing staining to upholstery, carpet or other interior surfaces;
(n) Costs or charges derived from inconveniences or loss of use, commercial or monetary loss due to time loss, and any other special, incidental or consequential damage of any kind or nature whatsoever.
WARRANTY EXCEPTIONS:
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY does not cover and the following are not warranted:
(a) Engines, metal plating or fi nishes, windshield breakage, leakage, fading and deterioration of paints, canvas, upholstery and fabrics;
(b) Gelcoat surfaces including, but not limited to, cracking, crazing, discoloration or blistering except as noted above;
(c) Accessories and items which were not part of the boat when shipped from the Regal factory, and/or any damage caused thereby;
(d) Damage caused by misuse, accident, galvanic corrosion, negligence, lack of proper maintenance, or improper trailering;
(e) Any boat used for racing, or used for rental or commercial purposes;
(f) Any boat operated contrary to any instructions furnished by Regal, or operated in violation of any federal, state, Coast Guard or other governmental agency laws, rules, or regulations;
(g) The limited warranty is void if alterations have been made to the boat;
(h) Transportation of boat or parts to and/or from the REGAL factory or service location;
(i) Travel time or haul outs, loss of time or inconvenience;
(j) Any published or announced catalog performance characteristics of speed, fuel and oil consumption, and static or dynamic transportation in the water;
(k) Any boat that has been repowered beyond Regal’s power recommendations;
(l) Boats damaged by accident and boats damaged while being loaded onto, transported upon or unloaded from trailers, cradles, or other devices used to place boats in water, remove boats from water or store or transport boats on or over land;
(m) Water damage to, dry rot to, condensation to, or absorption by interior surfaces, wood structures or polyurethane foam; interior wood including, but not limited to, bleeding and/ or discoloration as a result of condensation or moisture or water continually contacting the plywood causing staining to upholstery, carpet or other interior surfaces;
(n) Costs or charges derived from inconveniences or loss of use, commercial or monetary loss due to time loss, and any other special, incidental or consequential damage of any kind or nature whatsoever.
INT-20 INT-20
Introduction
NO WAVIER OF THESE ITEMS:
The terms, conditions, limitations and disclaimers contained herein cannot be waived except by the Customer Service Manager of
Regal. Any such waiver shall be in writing. Neither the dealer, nor the customer, nor any service, sales and/or warranty representative of Regal is authorized to waive and/or to modify these conditions, limitations and/or disclaimers.
GENERAL PROVISIONS: ALL GENERAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCI-
DENTAL AND/OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARE EXCLUDED
FROM THIS WARRANTY AND ARE TOTALLY DISCLAIMED BY RE-
GAL
.
IT IS THE INTEREST OF THE PARTIES THAT THE OWNER’S
SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY IS THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT
OF THE VESSEL OR ITS ALLEGEDLY DEFECTIVE COMPONENT
PARTS AND THAT NO OTHER LEGAL OR EQUITABLE REMEDIES
SHALL BE AVAILABLE TO SAID OWNER. SOME STATES DO NOT
ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES SO THE INCLUSION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUEN-
TIAL DAMAGES MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
THIS IS A LIMITED WAR-
RANTY; REGAL MAKES NO WARRANTY, OTHER THAN CONTAINED
HEREIN;
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW ANY WARRANTIES OF MER-
CHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARISING
IN STATE LAW ARE EXPRESSLY EXCLUDED TO THE EXTENT AL-
LOWED BY LAW, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY
IS LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. ALL
OBLIGATIONS OF REGAL ARE SPECIFICALLY SET FORTH HEREIN.
REGAL DOES NOT AUTHORIZE ANY PERSON OR DEALER TO AS-
SUME ANY LIABILITY IN CONNECTION WITH REGAL BOATS.
Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, so the above limitation may not apply to you. Regal’s obligation with respect to this warranty is limited to making repairs to or replacing the defective parts and no claim for breach of warranty shall be cause for cancellation or rescission of the contract or sale for any boat manufactured by REGAL MARINE INDUSTRIES, INC.
Regal will discharge its obligations under this warranty as rapidly as possible, but cannot guarantee any specifi c completion date due to the different nature of claims which may be made and services which may be required. Regal reserves the right to change or improve the design of its boats without obligation to modify any boat previously manufactured. This limited warranty gives you specifi c legal rights, and you may also have other rights which may vary from state to state. Regal shall in no way be responsible for any repairs not PRE-AUTHORIZED by a Regal Customer Service Manager or repairs performed by a repair shop not PRE- AUTHORIZED by a Regal Customer Service Manager.
Introduction
NO WAVIER OF THESE ITEMS:
The terms, conditions, limitations and disclaimers contained herein cannot be waived except by the Customer Service Manager of
Regal. Any such waiver shall be in writing. Neither the dealer, nor the customer, nor any service, sales and/or warranty representative of Regal is authorized to waive and/or to modify these conditions, limitations and/or disclaimers.
GENERAL PROVISIONS: ALL GENERAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCI-
DENTAL AND/OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARE EXCLUDED
FROM THIS WARRANTY AND ARE TOTALLY DISCLAIMED BY RE-
GAL
.
IT IS THE INTEREST OF THE PARTIES THAT THE OWNER’S
SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY IS THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT
OF THE VESSEL OR ITS ALLEGEDLY DEFECTIVE COMPONENT
PARTS AND THAT NO OTHER LEGAL OR EQUITABLE REMEDIES
SHALL BE AVAILABLE TO SAID OWNER. SOME STATES DO NOT
ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES SO THE INCLUSION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUEN-
TIAL DAMAGES MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
THIS IS A LIMITED WAR-
RANTY; REGAL MAKES NO WARRANTY, OTHER THAN CONTAINED
HEREIN;
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW ANY WARRANTIES OF MER-
CHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARISING
IN STATE LAW ARE EXPRESSLY EXCLUDED TO THE EXTENT AL-
LOWED BY LAW, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY
IS LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. ALL
OBLIGATIONS OF REGAL ARE SPECIFICALLY SET FORTH HEREIN.
REGAL DOES NOT AUTHORIZE ANY PERSON OR DEALER TO AS-
SUME ANY LIABILITY IN CONNECTION WITH REGAL BOATS.
Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, so the above limitation may not apply to you. Regal’s obligation with respect to this warranty is limited to making repairs to or replacing the defective parts and no claim for breach of warranty shall be cause for cancellation or rescission of the contract or sale for any boat manufactured by REGAL MARINE INDUSTRIES, INC.
Regal will discharge its obligations under this warranty as rapidly as possible, but cannot guarantee any specifi c completion date due to the different nature of claims which may be made and services which may be required. Regal reserves the right to change or improve the design of its boats without obligation to modify any boat previously manufactured. This limited warranty gives you specifi c legal rights, and you may also have other rights which may vary from state to state. Regal shall in no way be responsible for any repairs not PRE-AUTHORIZED by a Regal Customer Service Manager or repairs performed by a repair shop not PRE- AUTHORIZED by a Regal Customer Service Manager.
INT-21 INT-21
Notes Notes
INT 22 INT 22
Safety On Board
Safety awareness can’t be over emphasized. Safety on board needs to be the skipper’s number one priority. In this manual you will fi nd many safety precautions and symbols to identify safety related items.
Heed all safety precaution information and labels. Remember, the skipper is responsible for the safety of his passengers and crew.
SAFETY LABELS
Safety Precaution Defi nition
Safety precautions are stated as caution, warning and danger signal words. They are highlighted in this manual by font design and symbol usage. Also, a notice heading is included which provides operation and maintenance information but is not hazard-related.
Become familiar and understand all safety precaution labels!
!
DANGER
IMMEDIATE HAZARDOUS SITUATION THAT,
IF NOT AVOIDED, WILL RESULT IN
DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY.
!
WARNING
POTENTIALLY HAZARDOUS SITUATION THAT, IF NOT
AVOIDED, COULD RESULT
IN DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY.
1-1
Safety On Board
Safety awareness can’t be over emphasized. Safety on board needs to be the skipper’s number one priority. In this manual you will fi nd many safety precautions and symbols to identify safety related items.
Heed all safety precaution information and labels. Remember, the skipper is responsible for the safety of his passengers and crew.
SAFETY LABELS
Safety Precaution Defi nition
Safety precautions are stated as caution, warning and danger signal words. They are highlighted in this manual by font design and symbol usage. Also, a notice heading is included which provides operation and maintenance information but is not hazard-related.
Become familiar and understand all safety precaution labels!
!
DANGER
IMMEDIATE HAZARDOUS SITUATION THAT,
IF NOT AVOIDED, WILL RESULT IN
DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY.
!
WARNING
POTENTIALLY HAZARDOUS SITUATION THAT, IF NOT
AVOIDED, COULD RESULT
IN DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY.
1-1
CHAPTER 1
!
CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation or unsafe practice that, if not avoided, may result in injury or property or product damage.
NOTICE
General or specifi c information which is important to correct operation or maintenance, but is not hazard related.
Precautionary Labels
Read and understand all safety labels affi xed to your Regal boat. Most of the safety labels are found close to the helm, aft cockpit and or swim platform. The location of the labels may vary by model and the label list does not cover everything! Use common sense to analyze the result of an action on board your vessel. Always think safety fi rst!
NOTICE
DO NOT REMOVE OR COVER ANY
PRECAUTIONARY LABELS.
KEEP HARSH CHEMICALS AWAY FROM LABELS.
IF A LABEL BECOMES ILLEGIBLE,
CONTACT YOUR REGAL DEALER
FOR ORDERING REPLACEMENTS.
CHAPTER 1
!
CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation or unsafe practice that, if not avoided, may result in injury or property or product damage.
NOTICE
General or specifi c information which is important to correct operation or maintenance, but is not hazard related.
Precautionary Labels
Read and understand all safety labels affi xed to your Regal boat. Most of the safety labels are found close to the helm, aft cockpit and or swim platform. The location of the labels may vary by model and the label list does not cover everything! Use common sense to analyze the result of an action on board your vessel. Always think safety fi rst!
NOTICE
DO NOT REMOVE OR COVER ANY
PRECAUTIONARY LABELS.
KEEP HARSH CHEMICALS AWAY FROM LABELS.
IF A LABEL BECOMES ILLEGIBLE,
CONTACT YOUR REGAL DEALER
FOR ORDERING REPLACEMENTS.
1-2 1-2
Safety On Board
GENERAL BOATING SAFETY
We understand that you are eager to get your Regal boat on the water.
However, we strongly suggest that you thoroughly familiarize yourself and friends or members of your family with safe boating practices before setting out.
Remember, that along with the freedom and exhilaration of boating comes the responsibility that you have for the safety of your passengers and other boaters who share the water with you.
Boating regulations vary from state to state. Check with your local state and local authorities for the regulations pertaining to your area.
Check with local weather stations, the U. S. Coast Guard, or weather station broadcasts for the latest conditions. Remember, being caught in severe weather is hazardous. Check weather conditions periodically while you are boating and before your outing. If you are forced to operate your boat in a storm condition, take common sense precautions; wear PFD’s, store gear, reduce speed and head for safe refuge.
It is best to avoid operating your boat in foggy weather. When fog sets in, take bearings, log courses and speeds. You are required to emit a fi ve second blast from your horn or whistle once a minute.
Also, have your passengers wear PFD’s and observe for oncoming vessels.
Operating in shallow water presents a number of hazards including sand bars and water levels infl uenced by tides. If the vessel strikes an underwater hazard, check for boat and engine damage. If the engine vibrates excessively after striking an underwater obstruction, it may indicate a damaged propeller. If you run aground, seek help by radio or fl ares.
Make sure your boat and equipment are in top condition. Do this by frequently inspecting the hull, engine and gear.
1-3
Safety On Board
GENERAL BOATING SAFETY
We understand that you are eager to get your Regal boat on the water.
However, we strongly suggest that you thoroughly familiarize yourself and friends or members of your family with safe boating practices before setting out.
Remember, that along with the freedom and exhilaration of boating comes the responsibility that you have for the safety of your passengers and other boaters who share the water with you.
Boating regulations vary from state to state. Check with your local state and local authorities for the regulations pertaining to your area.
Check with local weather stations, the U. S. Coast Guard, or weather station broadcasts for the latest conditions. Remember, being caught in severe weather is hazardous. Check weather conditions periodically while you are boating and before your outing. If you are forced to operate your boat in a storm condition, take common sense precautions; wear PFD’s, store gear, reduce speed and head for safe refuge.
It is best to avoid operating your boat in foggy weather. When fog sets in, take bearings, log courses and speeds. You are required to emit a fi ve second blast from your horn or whistle once a minute.
Also, have your passengers wear PFD’s and observe for oncoming vessels.
Operating in shallow water presents a number of hazards including sand bars and water levels infl uenced by tides. If the vessel strikes an underwater hazard, check for boat and engine damage. If the engine vibrates excessively after striking an underwater obstruction, it may indicate a damaged propeller. If you run aground, seek help by radio or fl ares.
Make sure your boat and equipment are in top condition. Do this by frequently inspecting the hull, engine and gear.
1-3
CHAPTER 1
You must provide a Coast Guard approved personal fl otation device (PFD) for every person on board. These PFD’s should be in good condition and easily accessible.
Insist that non-swimmers and children on board wear a PFD at all times. Any time you encounter rough weather conditions, make sure everyone on board is wearing a PFD, including yourself. Instruct your passengers in how to put on their PFDs and be sure they know their storage location on the boat. Remember, in an emergency, a PFD that cannot be quickly located and worn is useless.
Never allow anyone to sit anywhere on the boat not specifi cally designed a seat. While underway, ALWAYS insist passengers remain seated.
Use maximum caution when fueling. Never allow any smoke or fl ame nearby while you are fueling. ALWAYS check for fuel leaks and fumes when fueling is completed.
!
WARNING
GASOLINE VAPORS CAN EXPLODE.
BEFORE STARTING ENGINE, OPERATE
BLOWER 4 MINUTES AND CHECK
ENGINE COMPARTMENT FOR GASOLINE FUMES
OR LEAKS. RUN BLOWER MOTOR
BELOW CRUSING SPEEDS.
1-4
!
WARNING
USE OF ALCOHOL ENHANCED FUEL, OR ANY FUEL
OTHER THAN GASOLINE,
CAN LEAD TO DETERIORATION OF THE FUEL
SYSTEM COMPONENTS.
CAN RESULT IN FIRE AND POSSIBLE EXPLOSION
CHAPTER 1
You must provide a Coast Guard approved personal fl otation device (PFD) for every person on board. These PFD’s should be in good condition and easily accessible.
Insist that non-swimmers and children on board wear a PFD at all times. Any time you encounter rough weather conditions, make sure everyone on board is wearing a PFD, including yourself. Instruct your passengers in how to put on their PFDs and be sure they know their storage location on the boat. Remember, in an emergency, a PFD that cannot be quickly located and worn is useless.
Never allow anyone to sit anywhere on the boat not specifi cally designed a seat. While underway, ALWAYS insist passengers remain seated.
Use maximum caution when fueling. Never allow any smoke or fl ame nearby while you are fueling. ALWAYS check for fuel leaks and fumes when fueling is completed.
!
WARNING
GASOLINE VAPORS CAN EXPLODE.
BEFORE STARTING ENGINE, OPERATE
BLOWER 4 MINUTES AND CHECK
ENGINE COMPARTMENT FOR GASOLINE FUMES
OR LEAKS. RUN BLOWER MOTOR
BELOW CRUSING SPEEDS.
1-4
!
WARNING
USE OF ALCOHOL ENHANCED FUEL, OR ANY FUEL
OTHER THAN GASOLINE,
CAN LEAD TO DETERIORATION OF THE FUEL
SYSTEM COMPONENTS.
CAN RESULT IN FIRE AND POSSIBLE EXPLOSION
Safety On Board
Never drink and drive! As captain, you are responsible for the safety of your passengers and yourself. Alcohol and boating can be a dangerous combination. DO NOT mix them. Alcohol impairs the boat operators ability to make conscious decisions and react to emergency situations quickly.
Never overload your boat! An overloaded boat, or one with uneven weight distribution, can be diffi cult to steer.
Be certain there is enough fuel aboard
for your cruising needs. Include any reserve that might be needed should you change your plans due to weather or emergency. Practice
the “one-third rule: (Use one-third of your fuel going out, one-third to return and keep one-third as a reserve).
Check the weather before departure. Be particularly cautious of electrical storms and high winds.
Keep up-to-date charts aboard. Supplement any chart plotter charts with paper backups. Charts can be obtained at your closest marine outlet or store or by contacting one of three federal government agencies.
File a fl oat plan. Leave details of your trip with someone responsible who will be remaining on shore. Include expected return, plus name and phone number of a contact person in case of emergency.
Use care, courtesy and common sense when launching, docking or operating your boat.
1-5
Safety On Board
Never drink and drive! As captain, you are responsible for the safety of your passengers and yourself. Alcohol and boating can be a dangerous combination. DO NOT mix them. Alcohol impairs the boat operators ability to make conscious decisions and react to emergency situations quickly.
Never overload your boat! An overloaded boat, or one with uneven weight distribution, can be diffi cult to steer.
Be certain there is enough fuel aboard
for your cruising needs. Include any reserve that might be needed should you change your plans due to weather or emergency. Practice
the “one-third rule: (Use one-third of your fuel going out, one-third to return and keep one-third as a reserve).
Check the weather before departure. Be particularly cautious of electrical storms and high winds.
Keep up-to-date charts aboard. Supplement any chart plotter charts with paper backups. Charts can be obtained at your closest marine outlet or store or by contacting one of three federal government agencies.
File a fl oat plan. Leave details of your trip with someone responsible who will be remaining on shore. Include expected return, plus name and phone number of a contact person in case of emergency.
Use care, courtesy and common sense when launching, docking or operating your boat.
1-5
CHAPTER 1
Learn and obey the “Rules of the Road”. A copy of the “Rules of the Road” can be obtained from the U. S. Coast Guard Auxiliary or local Power Squadron organizations.
In case of emergency: Know the international distress signals if you have a VHF radio aboard. The spoken word “MAYDAY” is the international signal of distress and is for emergency use only. Under no circumstances should this word be used, unless there is danger at hand.
Posted speed limits, swimming areas, “no wake” zones and other restrictions should be red-fl agged. They are so noted for a reason.
Sensible boat use plus courtesy fosters enjoyable and safe boating.
It is your responsibility to stay abreast of all federal, state and local rules, as some laws or regulations may change or be different from state to state. Contact your local boating agencies for updated information.
We can not stress safety enough! Remember, there are no brakes on your boat, and the water current and wind velocity all affect your ability to respond. The driver must use caution at all times to maintain control of his vessel and especially to maintain a safe distance from other boats and obstacles.
Always keep all safety gear in optimum condition. Pay special attention to attached tags and plates indicating expiration dates on equipment such as fi re extinguishers, and personal fl otation devices.
Encourage a periodic maintenance check on all safety equipment.
Contact your Regal dealer or marine professional for more information. Again, remember that the captain is responsible for his passengers and vessel.
1-6
CHAPTER 1
Learn and obey the “Rules of the Road”. A copy of the “Rules of the Road” can be obtained from the U. S. Coast Guard Auxiliary or local Power Squadron organizations.
In case of emergency: Know the international distress signals if you have a VHF radio aboard. The spoken word “MAYDAY” is the international signal of distress and is for emergency use only. Under no circumstances should this word be used, unless there is danger at hand.
Posted speed limits, swimming areas, “no wake” zones and other restrictions should be red-fl agged. They are so noted for a reason.
Sensible boat use plus courtesy fosters enjoyable and safe boating.
It is your responsibility to stay abreast of all federal, state and local rules, as some laws or regulations may change or be different from state to state. Contact your local boating agencies for updated information.
We can not stress safety enough! Remember, there are no brakes on your boat, and the water current and wind velocity all affect your ability to respond. The driver must use caution at all times to maintain control of his vessel and especially to maintain a safe distance from other boats and obstacles.
Always keep all safety gear in optimum condition. Pay special attention to attached tags and plates indicating expiration dates on equipment such as fi re extinguishers, and personal fl otation devices.
Encourage a periodic maintenance check on all safety equipment.
Contact your Regal dealer or marine professional for more information. Again, remember that the captain is responsible for his passengers and vessel.
1-6
Safety On Board
REQUIRED SAFETY EQUIPMENT
Personal Flotation Devices
All personal fl otation devices (PFD’s) must be Coast Guard approved, in good working condition, and must be the correct size for the wearer.
All PFD’s must be readily accessible. This means being able to wear them in a reasonable amount of time in case of an emergency (fi re, boat sinking, etc.). They should not be stored or locked in closed areas.
Also, make sure that all coverings are removed, such as plastic from any PFD’s. Throwable devices such as a ring buoys need to be available for immediate deployment. A PFD should be worn at all times when your boat is operating on the water. A PFD may save your life, but it must be worn to do so.
As minimum U. S. Coast Guard requirements all recreational boats must carry one type I, II, III, or V PFD (wearable) for each
person aboard. See the explanation following for each type. For type V to be counted they must be used according to the label instructions. In addition, all boats over 16’ must carry one Type IV (throwable) PFD.
Some states require that PFD’s be worn by children of specifi c ages at all times. Check with state boating agencies for particular requirements in your state before taking children on the water.
Remember PFD’s will not necessarily keep you from drowning, even though they are designed to keep a person from sinking. When purchasing PFD’s make sure it safely fi ts the person wearing it. It is a good idea to test PFD’s in a shallow pool before venturing on the water.
Refer to the USCG minimum equipment requirements at the end of this chapter. It is meant to be a guide only. Contact state and local
agencies for additional equipment requirements. Remember as the captain of your vessel you are responsible for its safe operation.
1-7
Safety On Board
REQUIRED SAFETY EQUIPMENT
Personal Flotation Devices
All personal fl otation devices (PFD’s) must be Coast Guard approved, in good working condition, and must be the correct size for the wearer.
All PFD’s must be readily accessible. This means being able to wear them in a reasonable amount of time in case of an emergency (fi re, boat sinking, etc.). They should not be stored or locked in closed areas.
Also, make sure that all coverings are removed, such as plastic from any PFD’s. Throwable devices such as a ring buoys need to be available for immediate deployment. A PFD should be worn at all times when your boat is operating on the water. A PFD may save your life, but it must be worn to do so.
As minimum U. S. Coast Guard requirements all recreational boats must carry one type I, II, III, or V PFD (wearable) for each
person aboard. See the explanation following for each type. For type V to be counted they must be used according to the label instructions. In addition, all boats over 16’ must carry one Type IV (throwable) PFD.
Some states require that PFD’s be worn by children of specifi c ages at all times. Check with state boating agencies for particular requirements in your state before taking children on the water.
Remember PFD’s will not necessarily keep you from drowning, even though they are designed to keep a person from sinking. When purchasing PFD’s make sure it safely fi ts the person wearing it. It is a good idea to test PFD’s in a shallow pool before venturing on the water.
Refer to the USCG minimum equipment requirements at the end of this chapter. It is meant to be a guide only. Contact state and local
agencies for additional equipment requirements. Remember as the captain of your vessel you are responsible for its safe operation.
1-7
1-8
CHAPTER 1
•
TYPE I- Also known as an offshore jacket, it provides the most buoyancy. It is a PFD for all waters and is especially useful in rough waters where rescue may encompass additional time.
It is designed to turn most unconscious users in the water to a face-up position. Type I PFD is available in adult & child sizes.
• TYPE II- Also known as near-shore buoyant vest, it is recommended for calm, inland water where rescue time will be minimal. It will turn some unconscious people face-up in the water but not as numerous as Type I. They are available in adult, medium child, along with infant and small child sizes.
• TYPE III- Known as a fl otation aid it is good for calm, inland water or where there is a chance for quick rescue. It is designed so wearers can place themselves in a face-up position in the water. The wearer may have to tilt their head back to avoid turning facedown in the water.
•
TYPE IV- Intended for calm, inland water with heavy vessel traffic, where help is constantly present. It is designed to be thrown into the water for someone to grab on to and held until rescued. It should not be worn. Type
IV includes ring buoys, buoyant cushions, and horseshoe buoys.
1-8
CHAPTER 1
•
TYPE I- Also known as an offshore jacket, it provides the most buoyancy. It is a PFD for all waters and is especially useful in rough waters where rescue may encompass additional time.
It is designed to turn most unconscious users in the water to a face-up position. Type I PFD is available in adult & child sizes.
• TYPE II- Also known as near-shore buoyant vest, it is recommended for calm, inland water where rescue time will be minimal. It will turn some unconscious people face-up in the water but not as numerous as Type I. They are available in adult, medium child, along with infant and small child sizes.
• TYPE III- Known as a fl otation aid it is good for calm, inland water or where there is a chance for quick rescue. It is designed so wearers can place themselves in a face-up position in the water. The wearer may have to tilt their head back to avoid turning facedown in the water.
•
TYPE IV- Intended for calm, inland water with heavy vessel traffic, where help is constantly present. It is designed to be thrown into the water for someone to grab on to and held until rescued. It should not be worn. Type
IV includes ring buoys, buoyant cushions, and horseshoe buoys.
Safety On Board
• TYPE V- This is the least bulky of all
PFD’s. It contains a small amount of inherent buoyancy, and an infl atable chamber. It is rated even to a Type I, II, or III PFD (as noted on the jacket label) when infl ated. Hybrid PFD’s must be worn to be acceptable.
Maintaining your PFD’s
A PFD is only useful if it’s well maintained. Always be aware of PFD age since it has a life expectancy.
Do a periodic operation check of all PFD’s in shallow water.
Be sure to air dry all PFD’s after each use. Store in a dry, easily
accessible location.
Check periodically for broken zippers, frayed webbing, water
soaked kapok bags, missing straps, and sewing that is
undone.
Clean each PFD with mild soap and water only. Again, let dry
suffi ciently before storing.
Keep PFD’s out of grease and oil since they can deteriorate the
jacket inner and outer materials.
Check any kapok-bagged jackets by squeezing. If jacket loses air
the bag is defective and the PFD should be thrown away.
Grab the cover with the fi ngers. If the cover material rips, the
PFD is rotted and should be thrown away.
If the kapok bag is hard the PFD should be discarded.
1-9
Safety On Board
• TYPE V- This is the least bulky of all
PFD’s. It contains a small amount of inherent buoyancy, and an infl atable chamber. It is rated even to a Type I, II, or III PFD (as noted on the jacket label) when infl ated. Hybrid PFD’s must be worn to be acceptable.
Maintaining your PFD’s
A PFD is only useful if it’s well maintained. Always be aware of PFD age since it has a life expectancy.
Do a periodic operation check of all PFD’s in shallow water.
Be sure to air dry all PFD’s after each use. Store in a dry, easily
accessible location.
Check periodically for broken zippers, frayed webbing, water
soaked kapok bags, missing straps, and sewing that is
undone.
Clean each PFD with mild soap and water only. Again, let dry
suffi ciently before storing.
Keep PFD’s out of grease and oil since they can deteriorate the
jacket inner and outer materials.
Check any kapok-bagged jackets by squeezing. If jacket loses air
the bag is defective and the PFD should be thrown away.
Grab the cover with the fi ngers. If the cover material rips, the
PFD is rotted and should be thrown away.
If the kapok bag is hard the PFD should be discarded.
1-9
CHAPTER 1
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
General Information
Fire extinguishers are classifi ed by a letter and numeric symbol. The letter references the type of fi re the unit is designed to extinguish.
For example, type B extinguishers commonly used on boats are designed to put out fl ammable liquids such as grease, oil and gasoline.
The number indicates the general size of the extinguisher and minimum extinguishing agent weight.
CLASS
FIRE EXTINGUISHER CONTENTS
FOAM
IN GALS.
C02
IN LBS.
DRY CHEM HALON
IN LBS. IN LBS.
4 2.5
MINIMUM PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
REQUIRED
VESSEL NO FIXED WITH FIXED
LENGTH SYSTEM SYSTEM
LESS THAN 26’ 1 B-1
26’ TO LESS THAN 40’ 2 B-1 OR 1 B-II
40’ TO 65’ 3 B-1 OR 1 B-II
1-10
0
1 B-1
2 B-1
AND 1 B-1
OR 1 B-II
CHAPTER 1
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
General Information
Fire extinguishers are classifi ed by a letter and numeric symbol. The letter references the type of fi re the unit is designed to extinguish.
For example, type B extinguishers commonly used on boats are designed to put out fl ammable liquids such as grease, oil and gasoline.
The number indicates the general size of the extinguisher and minimum extinguishing agent weight.
CLASS
FIRE EXTINGUISHER CONTENTS
FOAM
IN GALS.
C02
IN LBS.
DRY CHEM HALON
IN LBS. IN LBS.
4 2.5
MINIMUM PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
REQUIRED
VESSEL NO FIXED WITH FIXED
LENGTH SYSTEM SYSTEM
LESS THAN 26’ 1 B-1
26’ TO LESS THAN 40’ 2 B-1 OR 1 B-II
40’ TO 65’ 3 B-1 OR 1 B-II
1-10
0
1 B-1
2 B-1
AND 1 B-1
OR 1 B-II
Safety On Board
U. S. Coast Guard approved fi re extinguishers are required on all Regal boats. Besides the minimum Coast Guard requirements always check state and local agencies for additional requirements and equipment.
Coast Guard approved extinguishers are hand-portable, either B-I or B-II classifi cation. U. S. Coast Guard approved hand-portable and semi-portable extinguishers contain a metal plate that shows the manufacturer’s name and extinguisher type, capacity and operating instructions. They have a special marine type mounting bracket which keeps the extinguisher solidly mounted until needed.
The extinguisher needs to be mounted in a readily accessible location but one out of being bumped by people while underway. All approved extinguishers need to feature an indication gauge.
USCG- Approved Fire Extinguisher Types & Features
The dry chemical agent is widely used because of its convenience and low cost. The extinguisher canister is fi lled with a white dry chemical power along with a pressurized gas. It is a good idea to shake this type periodically because they tend to
“pack” on the canister bottom.
The foam type uses a chemical foaming agent plus water and is best when used for fi res involving fl ammable liquids- solvents, gasoline,oil, grease and various paints. It will work on fi res involving rubber, plastics, cloth, wood, and paper. It leaves a messy residue. Not for electric fi res.
The carbon dioxide unit uses CO 2 gas under high pressure, with a funnel discharge hose usually swivel mounted. This extinguisher leaves no residue and does not cause interior engine harm.
To ensure workability, weigh the unit annually.
10% maximum weight variance is allowed.
1-11
Safety On Board
U. S. Coast Guard approved fi re extinguishers are required on all Regal boats. Besides the minimum Coast Guard requirements always check state and local agencies for additional requirements and equipment.
Coast Guard approved extinguishers are hand-portable, either B-I or B-II classifi cation. U. S. Coast Guard approved hand-portable and semi-portable extinguishers contain a metal plate that shows the manufacturer’s name and extinguisher type, capacity and operating instructions. They have a special marine type mounting bracket which keeps the extinguisher solidly mounted until needed.
The extinguisher needs to be mounted in a readily accessible location but one out of being bumped by people while underway. All approved extinguishers need to feature an indication gauge.
USCG- Approved Fire Extinguisher Types & Features
The dry chemical agent is widely used because of its convenience and low cost. The extinguisher canister is fi lled with a white dry chemical power along with a pressurized gas. It is a good idea to shake this type periodically because they tend to
“pack” on the canister bottom.
The foam type uses a chemical foaming agent plus water and is best when used for fi res involving fl ammable liquids- solvents, gasoline,oil, grease and various paints. It will work on fi res involving rubber, plastics, cloth, wood, and paper. It leaves a messy residue. Not for electric fi res.
The carbon dioxide unit uses CO 2 gas under high pressure, with a funnel discharge hose usually swivel mounted. This extinguisher leaves no residue and does not cause interior engine harm.
To ensure workability, weigh the unit annually.
10% maximum weight variance is allowed.
1-11
CHAPTER 1
Another type of liquefi ed gas used today is Halon. This gas is colorless and odorless, heavier than air and sinks to the lower bilge to extinguish fi res. Since the year 2000 ingredients for Halon has changed to a more environmental friendly formula. Halon is used in portable-hand units along with making up the majority of boat automatic fi re extinguishing systems. The canister shall be weighed once a year. Halon units must feature a dash mount indicator.
Refer to the information regarding fi re prevention in this manual.
VISUAL DISTRESS SIGNALS
All vessels used on coastal waters, any of the Great Lakes, territorial seas, and those waters connected directly to them , up to point where a body of water is less than two miles wide, must have Coast Guard approved visual distress signals.
Pyrotechnic Devices
Pyrotechnic visual distress signals must be Coast Guard approved, be ready for service and must be readily accessible. They all display a marking which is the service life, which must not have expired. A minimum of 3 devices are required for the day and night. Some devices meet both day and night requirements. Pyrotechnic devices should be stored in a cool, dry location. Most of these devices can be purchased in an highly visible (orange) watertight container. Types of Coast Guard approved pyrotechnic distress signals and associated devices are:
Pyrotechnic red fl ares, hand- held or aerial type.
Pyrotechnic orange smoke, hand-held or fl oating type.
Launchers for parachute fl ares or aerial red meteors.
1-12
CHAPTER 1
Another type of liquefi ed gas used today is Halon. This gas is colorless and odorless, heavier than air and sinks to the lower bilge to extinguish fi res. Since the year 2000 ingredients for Halon has changed to a more environmental friendly formula. Halon is used in portable-hand units along with making up the majority of boat automatic fi re extinguishing systems. The canister shall be weighed once a year. Halon units must feature a dash mount indicator.
Refer to the information regarding fi re prevention in this manual.
VISUAL DISTRESS SIGNALS
All vessels used on coastal waters, any of the Great Lakes, territorial seas, and those waters connected directly to them , up to point where a body of water is less than two miles wide, must have Coast Guard approved visual distress signals.
Pyrotechnic Devices
Pyrotechnic visual distress signals must be Coast Guard approved, be ready for service and must be readily accessible. They all display a marking which is the service life, which must not have expired. A minimum of 3 devices are required for the day and night. Some devices meet both day and night requirements. Pyrotechnic devices should be stored in a cool, dry location. Most of these devices can be purchased in an highly visible (orange) watertight container. Types of Coast Guard approved pyrotechnic distress signals and associated devices are:
Pyrotechnic red fl ares, hand- held or aerial type.
Pyrotechnic orange smoke, hand-held or fl oating type.
Launchers for parachute fl ares or aerial red meteors.
1-12
Safety On Board
All in all, each distress signal has certain pros and cons. There is no distress signal that is best under all situations. Pyrotechnics are recognized worldwide as superior distress signals. A downfall is they emit a very hot fl ame that can cause burns and or ignite fl ammable materials. Pistol launched and hand-held parachute fl ares operate consistent with fi rearms and therefore must be carefully handled.
Check with local and state regulations since some of these device are considered fi rearms and are prohibited.
Non-Pyrotechnic Devices
Non-pyrotechnic devices must all be in serviceable condition, readily accessible, and must be certifi ed by the manufacturer to comply with
Coast Guard standards. They include:
Orange distress fl ag.
Electric distress fl ag.
The distress fl ag is for day use only. It must be 3 x 3 or larger with a black square and ball on an orange background. It can be spotted when attached to a boat hook, long fi shing rod, or paddle with the person waving the fl ag back and forth overhead.
The electric distress fl ag is for night use only fl ashing the international
SOS distress signal (..._ _ _ ...).
Under Inland Navigation Rules, a high intensity white light that fl ashes at regular intervals from 50-70 times per minute is considered a distress signal.
Remember that regulations prohibit the display of visual distress signals on the water under any circumstances except when assistance is required to prevent immediate or potential danger to passengers on a vessel.
1-13
Safety On Board
All in all, each distress signal has certain pros and cons. There is no distress signal that is best under all situations. Pyrotechnics are recognized worldwide as superior distress signals. A downfall is they emit a very hot fl ame that can cause burns and or ignite fl ammable materials. Pistol launched and hand-held parachute fl ares operate consistent with fi rearms and therefore must be carefully handled.
Check with local and state regulations since some of these device are considered fi rearms and are prohibited.
Non-Pyrotechnic Devices
Non-pyrotechnic devices must all be in serviceable condition, readily accessible, and must be certifi ed by the manufacturer to comply with
Coast Guard standards. They include:
Orange distress fl ag.
Electric distress fl ag.
The distress fl ag is for day use only. It must be 3 x 3 or larger with a black square and ball on an orange background. It can be spotted when attached to a boat hook, long fi shing rod, or paddle with the person waving the fl ag back and forth overhead.
The electric distress fl ag is for night use only fl ashing the international
SOS distress signal (..._ _ _ ...).
Under Inland Navigation Rules, a high intensity white light that fl ashes at regular intervals from 50-70 times per minute is considered a distress signal.
Remember that regulations prohibit the display of visual distress signals on the water under any circumstances except when assistance is required to prevent immediate or potential danger to passengers on a vessel.
1-13
CHAPTER 1
INTERNATIONAL DISTRESS SIGNALS
CHAPTER 1
INTERNATIONAL DISTRESS SIGNALS
1-14
POSITION
INDICATING
RADIO BEACON
DYE MARKER
(ANY COLOR)
HAND-HELD
FLARE
1-14
POSITION
INDICATING
RADIO BEACON
DYE MARKER
(ANY COLOR)
HAND-HELD
FLARE
Safety On Board
SOUND PRODUCING DEVICES
According to both Inland and International Rules, all boats must carry some way of producing an effi cient sound signal. If your vessel is 12 meters
(39’ 4”) or longer, a power whistle, power horn or bell must be carried. The bell must be 7 7/8” in diameter.
Boats less than 12 meters a horn or whistle is
recommended to signal intentions or signal position. The sound signal made in all cases must be capable of a four or six second blast audible for one half mile. See the section discussing bridge and whistle signals.
RADIO COMMUNICATIONS
VHF radios are used for distress and ship to shore and ship to ship communications today. Learn the specialized messages such as
Mayday, Mayday, Mayday is only used when life or vessel is in imminent danger.
NAVIGATION LIGHTS
The U. S. Coast Guard requires recreational boats operating at night to display navigation lights between sunset and sunrise. Navigation lights help avoid collisions by improving the night visibility of vessels. Red and green directional lights, white stern lights, white masthead lights and white all-around lights must be displayed in specifi ed positions, depending on boat size, and mode of operation.
The confi guration of visible lights tells and operator the size, direction of travel and means of propulsion (sail, power, rowing or at anchor) of another vessel.
This helps both operators determine who has the right of way.
1-15
Safety On Board
SOUND PRODUCING DEVICES
According to both Inland and International Rules, all boats must carry some way of producing an effi cient sound signal. If your vessel is 12 meters
(39’ 4”) or longer, a power whistle, power horn or bell must be carried. The bell must be 7 7/8” in diameter.
Boats less than 12 meters a horn or whistle is
recommended to signal intentions or signal position. The sound signal made in all cases must be capable of a four or six second blast audible for one half mile. See the section discussing bridge and whistle signals.
RADIO COMMUNICATIONS
VHF radios are used for distress and ship to shore and ship to ship communications today. Learn the specialized messages such as
Mayday, Mayday, Mayday is only used when life or vessel is in imminent danger.
NAVIGATION LIGHTS
The U. S. Coast Guard requires recreational boats operating at night to display navigation lights between sunset and sunrise. Navigation lights help avoid collisions by improving the night visibility of vessels. Red and green directional lights, white stern lights, white masthead lights and white all-around lights must be displayed in specifi ed positions, depending on boat size, and mode of operation.
The confi guration of visible lights tells and operator the size, direction of travel and means of propulsion (sail, power, rowing or at anchor) of another vessel.
This helps both operators determine who has the right of way.
1-15
CHAPTER 1
NAVIGATION LIGHT RULES
CHAPTER 1
NAVIGATION LIGHT RULES
1-16 1-16
Safety On Board
MARINE SANITATION DEVICES
Recreational vessels under 65’ with installed toilet facilities must have an operable marine sanitation device (MSD) on board. Vessels 65’ and under may use Type I, II, or III MSD. All installed MSD’s must be
U.S. Coast Guard certifi ed. Normally the devices are labeled to show conformity to the regulations.
POLLUTION REGULATIONS
The Federal Water Pollution Control Act prohibits the discharge of oil or hazardous substances which may be harmful into U. S. navigable waters. Vessels 26’ and over must display a placard at least 5” x 8”, made of durable material, fi xed in a conspicuous machinery space laocation, stating the following:
NOTICE
DISCHARGE OF OIL PROHIBITED
THE FEDERAL WATER POLLUTION CONTROL ACT
PROHIBITS THE DISCHARGE OF OIL OR OILY WASTE
INTO OR UPON THE NAVIGABLE WATERS AND
CONTIGUOUS ZONE OF THE UNITED STATES IF
SUCH DISCHARGE CAUSES A FILM OR SHEEN
UPON, OR DISCOLORATION OF THE SURFACE OF
THE WATER, OR CAUSES A SLUDGE OR EMULSION
BENEATH THE SURFACE OF THE WATER
VIOLATORS ARE SUBJECT TO
A PENALTY OF $5,000
1-17
Safety On Board
MARINE SANITATION DEVICES
Recreational vessels under 65’ with installed toilet facilities must have an operable marine sanitation device (MSD) on board. Vessels 65’ and under may use Type I, II, or III MSD. All installed MSD’s must be
U.S. Coast Guard certifi ed. Normally the devices are labeled to show conformity to the regulations.
POLLUTION REGULATIONS
The Federal Water Pollution Control Act prohibits the discharge of oil or hazardous substances which may be harmful into U. S. navigable waters. Vessels 26’ and over must display a placard at least 5” x 8”, made of durable material, fi xed in a conspicuous machinery space laocation, stating the following:
NOTICE
DISCHARGE OF OIL PROHIBITED
THE FEDERAL WATER POLLUTION CONTROL ACT
PROHIBITS THE DISCHARGE OF OIL OR OILY WASTE
INTO OR UPON THE NAVIGABLE WATERS AND
CONTIGUOUS ZONE OF THE UNITED STATES IF
SUCH DISCHARGE CAUSES A FILM OR SHEEN
UPON, OR DISCOLORATION OF THE SURFACE OF
THE WATER, OR CAUSES A SLUDGE OR EMULSION
BENEATH THE SURFACE OF THE WATER
VIOLATORS ARE SUBJECT TO
A PENALTY OF $5,000
1-17
CHAPTER 1
You must immediately notify the U. S. Coast Guard if your vessel discharges oil or hazardous substances in the water. Call toll free 800-
424-8802. Report the following information: location, source, size, color, substances and time observed.
Garbage
The Act to Prevent Pollution from Ships places limitations on the discharge of garbage from vessels. It is illegal to dump plastic trash anywhere in the ocean or navigable waters of the United States. Also, it is illegal to discharge garbage in the navigable waters of the United
States, including the Great Lakes. The discharge of other types of garbage is allowed outside certain specifi ed distances from shore as determined by the nature of that garbage.
Garbage Type Discharge
Plastics- includes synthetic ropes, Prohibited in all areas
fi shing nets, and plastic bags
Floating dunnage, lining and
packing materials
Food, waste, paper bags, rags,
glass, metal, bottles, crockery
Comminuted or ground food
waste, paper, rags, glass, etc
Prohibited less than 25 miles from nearest land
Prohibited less than 12 miles from nearest land
Prohibited less than 3 miles from the nearest land
United States vessels of 26 feet or longer must display in a prominent location, a durable placard at least 4” x 9” notifying crew and passengers of discharge restrictions.
1-18
CHAPTER 1
You must immediately notify the U. S. Coast Guard if your vessel discharges oil or hazardous substances in the water. Call toll free 800-
424-8802. Report the following information: location, source, size, color, substances and time observed.
Garbage
The Act to Prevent Pollution from Ships places limitations on the discharge of garbage from vessels. It is illegal to dump plastic trash anywhere in the ocean or navigable waters of the United States. Also, it is illegal to discharge garbage in the navigable waters of the United
States, including the Great Lakes. The discharge of other types of garbage is allowed outside certain specifi ed distances from shore as determined by the nature of that garbage.
Garbage Type Discharge
Plastics- includes synthetic ropes, Prohibited in all areas
fi shing nets, and plastic bags
Floating dunnage, lining and
packing materials
Food, waste, paper bags, rags,
glass, metal, bottles, crockery
Comminuted or ground food
waste, paper, rags, glass, etc
Prohibited less than 25 miles from nearest land
Prohibited less than 12 miles from nearest land
Prohibited less than 3 miles from the nearest land
United States vessels of 26 feet or longer must display in a prominent location, a durable placard at least 4” x 9” notifying crew and passengers of discharge restrictions.
1-18
Safety On Board Safety On Board
1-19 1-19
CHAPTER 1
Communications
EPIRB
It is a good idea to carry communication gear such as a VHF-FM and/or HF transceivers set up for your operating area. Also, cell phones are useful in many coastal areas. Be sure to carry extra batteries. Also, mainly for offshore vessels,
EPIRB’s are designed to quickly and accurately alert rescue forces, indicate an accurate distress position, and guide units to the distress scene. These devices operate from satellite signals sent to a ground station where the signal is downloaded. The downside is that they are relatively expensive but they are reliable even when other communications have been exhausted.
Life Rafts
I n f l a t a b l e l i f e r a f t s a r e recommended for oceangoing and operating a vessel in a large body of water like the Great
Lakes. They provide a shelter for extended periods. If used, make sure it is large enough for all aboard and contains the proper emergency equipment pack. Periodically fi nd a professional to service the life raft. Store it on board in an area safe from sharp objects. Make sure the life raft is Coast Guard approved.
Remember the U. S. Coast Guard requirements are minimal
standards. They are an excellent starting point. Check with local and state boating agencies for further required safety equipment. You are best prepared for emergencies by a well equipped vessel. Don’t skimp when purchasing equipment for your boat.!
1-20
CHAPTER 1
Communications
EPIRB
It is a good idea to carry communication gear such as a VHF-FM and/or HF transceivers set up for your operating area. Also, cell phones are useful in many coastal areas. Be sure to carry extra batteries. Also, mainly for offshore vessels,
EPIRB’s are designed to quickly and accurately alert rescue forces, indicate an accurate distress position, and guide units to the distress scene. These devices operate from satellite signals sent to a ground station where the signal is downloaded. The downside is that they are relatively expensive but they are reliable even when other communications have been exhausted.
Life Rafts
I n f l a t a b l e l i f e r a f t s a r e recommended for oceangoing and operating a vessel in a large body of water like the Great
Lakes. They provide a shelter for extended periods. If used, make sure it is large enough for all aboard and contains the proper emergency equipment pack. Periodically fi nd a professional to service the life raft. Store it on board in an area safe from sharp objects. Make sure the life raft is Coast Guard approved.
Remember the U. S. Coast Guard requirements are minimal
standards. They are an excellent starting point. Check with local and state boating agencies for further required safety equipment. You are best prepared for emergencies by a well equipped vessel. Don’t skimp when purchasing equipment for your boat.!
1-20
Safety On Board
EXHAUST & CARBON MONOXIDE
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust can be hazardous. It is important for you and your passengers to be aware of the potential safety hazard created by exhaust gases. Familiarize yourself with the symptoms of carbon monoxide poisoning.
For safety sake avoid the following:
1. Do not allow the boat to remain stationary with the engine idling for an extended period of time.
2. Do not disable the carbon monoxide alarms that come with your
Regal boat. Test the unit in accordance with the alarm manufacturers instructions.
3. Do not operate the engine for extended periods of time while in a confi ned area or where exhaust outlets face a wall or bulkhead.
4. Do not operate the engine for an extended period of time with the canvas in the upright and installed position.
5. Have the engine exhaust system inspected when the boat is in for service.
6. Persons sleeping can easily be overcome by carbon monoxide without realizing it. Do not sleep on board while the engine is running.
!
WARNING
AVOID SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH
FROM CO POISONING!
DO NOT OPERATE THE BOAT WITH PEOPLE
HOLDING ON TO THE SWIM PLATFORM
WHILE IN THE WATER
1-21
Safety On Board
EXHAUST & CARBON MONOXIDE
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust can be hazardous. It is important for you and your passengers to be aware of the potential safety hazard created by exhaust gases. Familiarize yourself with the symptoms of carbon monoxide poisoning.
For safety sake avoid the following:
1. Do not allow the boat to remain stationary with the engine idling for an extended period of time.
2. Do not disable the carbon monoxide alarms that come with your
Regal boat. Test the unit in accordance with the alarm manufacturers instructions.
3. Do not operate the engine for extended periods of time while in a confi ned area or where exhaust outlets face a wall or bulkhead.
4. Do not operate the engine for an extended period of time with the canvas in the upright and installed position.
5. Have the engine exhaust system inspected when the boat is in for service.
6. Persons sleeping can easily be overcome by carbon monoxide without realizing it. Do not sleep on board while the engine is running.
!
WARNING
AVOID SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH
FROM CO POISONING!
DO NOT OPERATE THE BOAT WITH PEOPLE
HOLDING ON TO THE SWIM PLATFORM
WHILE IN THE WATER
1-21
CHAPTER 1
Blockage of exhaust outlets can cause carbon monoxide to accumulate in the cabin and cockpit area even when the hatches, windows, portholes and doors are open.
Exhaust from another vessel alongside your boat, while docked or anchored, can emit poisonous CO gas inside the cabin and cockpit areas of your boat.
The “station wagon effect” or backdrafting can cause CO gas to accumulate inside the cabin, cockpit or bridge areas when the boat is under-way, using protective weather coverings, high bow angle, improper or heavy loading, slow speeds, or when boat is at rest.
Typical Carbon Monoxide Label At Helm
CHAPTER 1
Blockage of exhaust outlets can cause carbon monoxide to accumulate in the cabin and cockpit area even when the hatches, windows, portholes and doors are open.
Exhaust from another vessel alongside your boat, while docked or anchored, can emit poisonous CO gas inside the cabin and cockpit areas of your boat.
The “station wagon effect” or backdrafting can cause CO gas to accumulate inside the cabin, cockpit or bridge areas when the boat is under-way, using protective weather coverings, high bow angle, improper or heavy loading, slow speeds, or when boat is at rest.
Typical Carbon Monoxide Label At Helm
Typical Carbon Monoxide Label At Transom
1-22
Typical Carbon Monoxide Label At Transom
1-22
Safety On Board
Typical Carbon Monoxide Label In Cabin/Head
Safety On Board
Typical Carbon Monoxide Label In Cabin/Head
In high concentrations, CO can be fatal in minutes. However, lower concentrations over an extended period of time can be just as lethal.
Symptoms of excessive exposure to carbon monoxide are:
•
Dizziness
• Drowsiness
•
Watering, itchy eyes
• Flushed appearance
• Nausea
• Headache
• Ringing in the ears
•
Throbbing temples
•
•
•
• Inattentiveness
Incoherence
Fatigue or vomiting
Convulsions
Carbon monoxide accumulation requires immediate attention!
Thoroughly ventilate cabin and cockpit areas. Determine the probable source of the carbon monoxide and correct the condition immediately.
Regal has installed CO detectors on your boat. Have these detectors professionally calibrated at regular intervals.
DESIRED AIR FLOW
THROUGH BOAT
To help prevent carbon monoxide accumulation, ventilate your cabin and cockpit while underway. Open a forward hatch, porthole or window to allow air to travel through the boat’s interior. See the illustration below for desired air fl ow.
1-23
In high concentrations, CO can be fatal in minutes. However, lower concentrations over an extended period of time can be just as lethal.
Symptoms of excessive exposure to carbon monoxide are:
•
Dizziness
• Drowsiness
•
Watering, itchy eyes
• Flushed appearance
• Nausea
• Headache
• Ringing in the ears
•
Throbbing temples
•
•
•
• Inattentiveness
Incoherence
Fatigue or vomiting
Convulsions
Carbon monoxide accumulation requires immediate attention!
Thoroughly ventilate cabin and cockpit areas. Determine the probable source of the carbon monoxide and correct the condition immediately.
Regal has installed CO detectors on your boat. Have these detectors professionally calibrated at regular intervals.
DESIRED AIR FLOW
THROUGH BOAT
To help prevent carbon monoxide accumulation, ventilate your cabin and cockpit while underway. Open a forward hatch, porthole or window to allow air to travel through the boat’s interior. See the illustration below for desired air fl ow.
1-23
CHAPTER 1
Each Trip
Make sure all exhaust clamps are in place and secure.
Look for exhaust leaking from the exhaust system components, indicated by rust and or black streaking, water leaks, or corroded or cracked fi ttings.
Inspect all rubber exhaust hoses for burned or cracked areas.
All rubber hoses should feel soft and be free of kinks.
Visually verify that water exits at the engine exhaust outlet.
Keep an ear tuned for any change in exhaust sound that could indicate an exhaust component malfunction.
DO NOT OPERATE THE VESSEL IF ANY OF THE ABOVE
ITEMS EXIST. CONTACT A MARINE PROFESSIONAL!
At Least Annually (To be performed by a marine professional)
Replace exhaust hoses or muffl ers if any evidence of cracking, charring or deterioration is found.
Replace the engine water pump impeller along with the plate and housing if necessary. This will help prevent cooling system and in turn exhaust system
overheating.
Inspect each of the metallic exhaust components for cracking, rusting, leaking or looseness. Pay detailed attention to the exhaust manifold, cylinder head and water injection elbows. Make sure all exhaust clamps are in place
1-24
CHAPTER 1
Each Trip
Make sure all exhaust clamps are in place and secure.
Look for exhaust leaking from the exhaust system components, indicated by rust and or black streaking, water leaks, or corroded or cracked fi ttings.
Inspect all rubber exhaust hoses for burned or cracked areas.
All rubber hoses should feel soft and be free of kinks.
Visually verify that water exits at the engine exhaust outlet.
Keep an ear tuned for any change in exhaust sound that could indicate an exhaust component malfunction.
DO NOT OPERATE THE VESSEL IF ANY OF THE ABOVE
ITEMS EXIST. CONTACT A MARINE PROFESSIONAL!
At Least Annually (To be performed by a marine professional)
Replace exhaust hoses or muffl ers if any evidence of cracking, charring or deterioration is found.
Replace the engine water pump impeller along with the plate and housing if necessary. This will help prevent cooling system and in turn exhaust system
overheating.
Inspect each of the metallic exhaust components for cracking, rusting, leaking or looseness. Pay detailed attention to the exhaust manifold, cylinder head and water injection elbows. Make sure all exhaust clamps are in place
1-24
Safety On Board
BOATING UNDER THE INFLUENCE
!
WARNING
FEDERAL LAWS PROHIBIT OPERATING A VESSEL
UNDER THE INFLUENCE OF ALCOHOL OR DRUGS.
THESE LAWS ARE VIGOROUSLY ENFORCED
BY ALL ENFORCEMENT AGENCIES.
Operating a vessel while intoxicated became a specifi c federal offense effective in 1988. The ruling set federal standards for determining when an individual is intoxicated. If the blood alcohol content (BAC) is .10% (.08 in some states) or higher for operators of recreational vessels being used only for pleasure are subject to a civil penalty up to $1,000 or criminal penalty up to
$5,000, one year imprisonment or both.
In some states the fi nes and imprisonment may increase signifi cantly.
The effects of alcohol and drugs account for the highest single cause of marine accidents and deaths. Most deaths in boating accidents occur when someone falls into the water. Balance is one of the fi rst things you lose when drinking alcohol or under the infl uence of drugs. The problem arises out of not knowing your balance is restricted.
Overall vision is reduced by alcohol especially at night, along with double or blurred vision. Peripheral vision is lessened which restricts seeing vessels or objects on the side. Also, color awareness decreases especially with red and green which happen to be the colors of boat navigation lights, buoys, and channel markers.
Alcohol will greatly increase your heat loss so it increases the effects of hypothermia. Finally, your ability to make correct judgements in emergency situations is greatly reduced. Alcohol takes away the brains ability to process information quickly and delays a persons reaction time. Don’t drink and drive!
1-25
Safety On Board
BOATING UNDER THE INFLUENCE
!
WARNING
FEDERAL LAWS PROHIBIT OPERATING A VESSEL
UNDER THE INFLUENCE OF ALCOHOL OR DRUGS.
THESE LAWS ARE VIGOROUSLY ENFORCED
BY ALL ENFORCEMENT AGENCIES.
Operating a vessel while intoxicated became a specifi c federal offense effective in 1988. The ruling set federal standards for determining when an individual is intoxicated. If the blood alcohol content (BAC) is .10% (.08 in some states) or higher for operators of recreational vessels being used only for pleasure are subject to a civil penalty up to $1,000 or criminal penalty up to
$5,000, one year imprisonment or both.
In some states the fi nes and imprisonment may increase signifi cantly.
The effects of alcohol and drugs account for the highest single cause of marine accidents and deaths. Most deaths in boating accidents occur when someone falls into the water. Balance is one of the fi rst things you lose when drinking alcohol or under the infl uence of drugs. The problem arises out of not knowing your balance is restricted.
Overall vision is reduced by alcohol especially at night, along with double or blurred vision. Peripheral vision is lessened which restricts seeing vessels or objects on the side. Also, color awareness decreases especially with red and green which happen to be the colors of boat navigation lights, buoys, and channel markers.
Alcohol will greatly increase your heat loss so it increases the effects of hypothermia. Finally, your ability to make correct judgements in emergency situations is greatly reduced. Alcohol takes away the brains ability to process information quickly and delays a persons reaction time. Don’t drink and drive!
1-25
CHAPTER 1
Alcohol Myths And Facts
Myth: Beer is less intoxicating than other alcoholic beverages.
Fact: One 12 oz. can of beer has about the same amount of alcohol as a 5oz. glass of wine or a shot of liquor.
Myth: Black coffee, fresh air, and a shower will sober the effects of alcohol.
Fact: After consuming alcohol time is the only thing that will sober you up. Our bodies average burning 1 oz. of alcohol every hour. If a person is drunk, it will take a person seven or more hours to sober up.
Myth: Telling if a person is too drunk to operate a vessel is easy.
Fact: Many experienced drinkers have learned to compensate for the visual effects of alcohol and can disguise their drunk condition.
Myth: You’re the best person to judge if you are fi t to operate a boat.
Fact: Judgement is one of the fi rst elements you lose when drinking
B L O O D A L C O H O L C O N T E N T C H A R T
B o d y W e i g h t
P o u n d s
I n
N u m b e r
( 1 2 o z .
o f b e e r = 5
D r i o z .
n k s I n w i n e = 1
A o z .
2
8 0
H o u r p r o o f
P e r i o d l i q u o r )
1 0 0
1 2 0
1 4 0
1 6 0
1 8 0
2 0 0
2 2 0
2 4 0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
B A C t o .
0 5 % B e C a r e f u l L o s s o f J u d g e m e n t & C o o r d i n a t i o n
A b i l i t i e s I m p a i r e d A c c i d e n t C h a n c e I n c r e a s e d
B A C .
0 5 % t o .
1 0 %
D o N o t O p e r a t e A B o a t H i g h A c c i d e n t R i s k
B A X .
O v e r 1 0 %
1-26
CHAPTER 1
Alcohol Myths And Facts
Myth: Beer is less intoxicating than other alcoholic beverages.
Fact: One 12 oz. can of beer has about the same amount of alcohol as a 5oz. glass of wine or a shot of liquor.
Myth: Black coffee, fresh air, and a shower will sober the effects of alcohol.
Fact: After consuming alcohol time is the only thing that will sober you up. Our bodies average burning 1 oz. of alcohol every hour. If a person is drunk, it will take a person seven or more hours to sober up.
Myth: Telling if a person is too drunk to operate a vessel is easy.
Fact: Many experienced drinkers have learned to compensate for the visual effects of alcohol and can disguise their drunk condition.
Myth: You’re the best person to judge if you are fi t to operate a boat.
Fact: Judgement is one of the fi rst elements you lose when drinking
B L O O D A L C O H O L C O N T E N T C H A R T
B o d y W e i g h t
P o u n d s
I n
N u m b e r o f D r i n k s
( 1 2 o z .
b e e r = 5
I n o z .
w i n e = 1
A o z .
2
8 0
H o u r p r o o f
P e r i o d l i q u o r )
1 0 0
1 2 0
1 4 0
1 6 0
1 8 0
2 0 0
2 2 0
2 4 0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
B A C t o .
0 5 % B e C a r e f u l L o s s o f J u d g e m e n t & C o o r d i n a t i o n
A b i l i t i e s I m p a i r e d A c c i d e n t C h a n c e I n c r e a s e d
B A C .
0 5 % t o .
1 0 %
D o N o t O p e r a t e A B o a t H i g h A c c i d e n t R i s k
B A X .
O v e r 1 0 %
1-26
Safety On Board
BOATING ACCIDENTS
The following is a list of common causes of boating accidents. Be aware of them and take the necessary steps to ensure that your crew and yourself are educated and prepared to act in an emergency.
Mixing boating and alcohol. Remember the skipper is responsible for his boat and crew.
Trying to reach the bow by the deck walk-around while the boat is moving too fast.
Someone sitting on the bow, deck, or swim platform while underway.
Choosing a boating outing day with inclement weather, especially with high winds and thunderstorms in the forecast or staying out when bad weather is approaching..
Disembarking without checking all fl uids or systems and especially fuel system components.
Not monitoring the boating traffi c or possible obstructions around you.
Emergency communications equipment, signaling devices, and navigation lights not working.
Improper boat handling especially high speed turns in rough water. Improper trim.
Being too far from shore with inadequate fuel supply or navigational aids.
1-27
Safety On Board
BOATING ACCIDENTS
The following is a list of common causes of boating accidents. Be aware of them and take the necessary steps to ensure that your crew and yourself are educated and prepared to act in an emergency.
Mixing boating and alcohol. Remember the skipper is responsible for his boat and crew.
Trying to reach the bow by the deck walk-around while the boat is moving too fast.
Someone sitting on the bow, deck, or swim platform while underway.
Choosing a boating outing day with inclement weather, especially with high winds and thunderstorms in the forecast or staying out when bad weather is approaching..
Disembarking without checking all fl uids or systems and especially fuel system components.
Not monitoring the boating traffi c or possible obstructions around you.
Emergency communications equipment, signaling devices, and navigation lights not working.
Improper boat handling especially high speed turns in rough water. Improper trim.
Being too far from shore with inadequate fuel supply or navigational aids.
1-27
CHAPTER 1
Passengers, especially children that are not wearing the proper life saving devices.
Skipper or passengers not seated in the boat.
Running a craft that is mechanically marginal.
Reporting Boating Accidents
According to the Federal Boat Safety Act of 1971 involving collision, accident or other casualty, the operator must make a formal report within 48 hours to the nearest state boating authority when the incident involves:
1. Death
2. Injury requiring treatment other than fi rst aid
3. The disappearance of someone from a boat under death or injury
circumstances.
A formal report must be made within 10 days for accidents involving more than $500 damage or complete loss of vessel.
For information regarding accident reporting, please call the
Boating
Safety Hotline at 800-368-5647.
Rendering Assistance
The operator of a vessel is obligated by law to provide assistance that can be provided safely to any individuals in dangerous situation on the waterways. The operator is subject to fi ne and or imprisonment for failure to do so. Move cautiously and think before acting.
1-28 1-28
CHAPTER 1
Passengers, especially children that are not wearing the proper life saving devices.
Skipper or passengers not seated in the boat.
Running a craft that is mechanically marginal.
Reporting Boating Accidents
According to the Federal Boat Safety Act of 1971 involving collision, accident or other casualty, the operator must make a formal report within 48 hours to the nearest state boating authority when the incident involves:
1. Death
2. Injury requiring treatment other than fi rst aid
3. The disappearance of someone from a boat under death or injury
circumstances.
A formal report must be made within 10 days for accidents involving more than $500 damage or complete loss of vessel.
For information regarding accident reporting, please call the
Boating
Safety Hotline at 800-368-5647.
Rendering Assistance
The operator of a vessel is obligated by law to provide assistance that can be provided safely to any individuals in dangerous situation on the waterways. The operator is subject to fi ne and or imprisonment for failure to do so. Move cautiously and think before acting.
Safety On Board
WATER SPORTS
Besides learning the safety precautions for safe boating, as well as understanding and knowing required rules and regulations, you are obligated to be particularly careful around other water sportsman, such as scuba divers, water skiers, wakeboarders, and fi sherman.
Skin & Scuba Divers
Whenever you see a “Diver Down” fl ag, maintain a distance of at least 100 feet on inland waters. In bays and open waters stay 300 feet away. The fl ag indicates a diver in the water. If a diver is operating from your boat, be certain to use this fl ag and post a lookout on board for a divers air bubbles.
Sometimes divers stray from the fl ag area.
Water Skiers & Wakeboarders
For information on water skiing and how to get started, we recommend you contact the American
Water Ski Association, P. O. Box 191, Winter
Haven, Florida 33880. They offer pamphets and instructional materials.
For more wakeboarding information there are numerous training schools, instructional videos available at libraries and the internet.
Safety On Board
WATER SPORTS
Besides learning the safety precautions for safe boating, as well as understanding and knowing required rules and regulations, you are obligated to be particularly careful around other water sportsman, such as scuba divers, water skiers, wakeboarders, and fi sherman.
Skin & Scuba Divers
Whenever you see a “Diver Down” fl ag, maintain a distance of at least 100 feet on inland waters. In bays and open waters stay 300 feet away. The fl ag indicates a diver in the water. If a diver is operating from your boat, be certain to use this fl ag and post a lookout on board for a divers air bubbles.
Sometimes divers stray from the fl ag area.
Water Skiers & Wakeboarders
For information on water skiing and how to get started, we recommend you contact the American
Water Ski Association, P. O. Box 191, Winter
Haven, Florida 33880. They offer pamphets and instructional materials.
For more wakeboarding information there are numerous training schools, instructional videos available at libraries and the internet.
1-29 1-29
CHAPTER 1
General safety procedures for towing skiers and wakeboarders include the following:
Know your hand signals and make sure all your passengers know them. See the illustration.
Do not allow non-swimmers to ski or wakeboard. You’re asking for trouble!
Always have an observer on board whose sole job is to watch the skier/wakeboarder and communicate with the driver.
If you plan to do alot of skiing/wakeboarding, it is advisable to have a ski pylon and driver’s rear view mirror installed.
Acquaint yourself with the ski site before skiing/wakeboarding.
Follow the speed limits and all posted signs- i.e. no wake, etc.
Keep the boat away from swimmers or other people in the water.
Avoid running near the shoreline or in heavily congested areas with skier/wakeboarder in tow.
Do not allow skier/wakeboarder to spray fi sherman or other parties.
Keep the engine speed steady while towing a skier/wakeboarder.
Make wide turns with skier/wakeboarder in tow.
Instruct skier/wakeboarder in case of a fall to raise his ski in the air to ensure his visibility.
Always turn your engine off when the skier/wakeboarder is near the platform or transom.
1-30
CHAPTER 1
General safety procedures for towing skiers and wakeboarders include the following:
Know your hand signals and make sure all your passengers know them. See the illustration.
Do not allow non-swimmers to ski or wakeboard. You’re asking for trouble!
Always have an observer on board whose sole job is to watch the skier/wakeboarder and communicate with the driver.
If you plan to do alot of skiing/wakeboarding, it is advisable to have a ski pylon and driver’s rear view mirror installed.
Acquaint yourself with the ski site before skiing/wakeboarding.
Follow the speed limits and all posted signs- i.e. no wake, etc.
Keep the boat away from swimmers or other people in the water.
Avoid running near the shoreline or in heavily congested areas with skier/wakeboarder in tow.
Do not allow skier/wakeboarder to spray fi sherman or other parties.
Keep the engine speed steady while towing a skier/wakeboarder.
Make wide turns with skier/wakeboarder in tow.
Instruct skier/wakeboarder in case of a fall to raise his ski in the air to ensure his visibility.
Always turn your engine off when the skier/wakeboarder is near the platform or transom.
1-30
Safety On Board
If the skier falls, return promptly to retrieve him, circling wide from the starboard side, to bring his rope within easy grasp. See illustration.
Ski Tow
Insert the ski tow line as shown for safe operation. It provides a tight fastening for skiing while allowing the line to be readily removed if needed. Check your tow line for abrasion and tow ring for tightness periodically.
The illustration shows a typical hookup.
!
WARNING
AVOID SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH!
DO NOT USE SKI TOW FITTING
FOR LIFTING OR PARASAILING.
FITTING COULD PULL OUT OF DECK
Swim Platform
On integrated or extended swim platforms you should make periodic inspections of the swim ladder and swim platform hardware to ensure that all connectors and fi ttings are tight and free from corrosion.
Check the laminated fi berglass under platform supports for fatigue and cracks. Never run the boat with someone holding on to or standing/ sitting on the platform. Use heed when operating the boat in reverse to insure that water does not accumulate excessively on the platform especially in rough seas or strong currents. Do not exceed the platform recommended maximum capacity label!
1-31
Safety On Board
If the skier falls, return promptly to retrieve him, circling wide from the starboard side, to bring his rope within easy grasp. See illustration.
Ski Tow
Insert the ski tow line as shown for safe operation. It provides a tight fastening for skiing while allowing the line to be readily removed if needed. Check your tow line for abrasion and tow ring for tightness periodically.
The illustration shows a typical hookup.
!
WARNING
AVOID SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH!
DO NOT USE SKI TOW FITTING
FOR LIFTING OR PARASAILING.
FITTING COULD PULL OUT OF DECK
Swim Platform
On integrated or extended swim platforms you should make periodic inspections of the swim ladder and swim platform hardware to ensure that all connectors and fi ttings are tight and free from corrosion.
Check the laminated fi berglass under platform supports for fatigue and cracks. Never run the boat with someone holding on to or standing/ sitting on the platform. Use heed when operating the boat in reverse to insure that water does not accumulate excessively on the platform especially in rough seas or strong currents. Do not exceed the platform recommended maximum capacity label!
1-31
CHAPTER 1
WATER SKI & WAKEBOARD SIGNALS
FASTER
SLOWER
CAUTION OR FALLEN
SKIER; PICK ME UP
SKIER OK
AFTER FALL
STOP SHUT ENGINE
OFF
SPEED OK
RETURN TO DROP
OFF AREA
STARBOARD
TURN
PORT TURN
1-32
CHAPTER 1
WATER SKI & WAKEBOARD SIGNALS
FASTER
SLOWER
CAUTION OR FALLEN
SKIER; PICK ME UP
SKIER OK
AFTER FALL
STOP SHUT ENGINE
OFF
SPEED OK
RETURN TO DROP
OFF AREA
STARBOARD
TURN
PORT TURN
1-32
Safety On Board
!
WARNING
AVOID SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH!
DO NOT OPERATE THE BOAT
WITH PEOPLE IN THE WATER
OR ON TOP OR HOLDING ON TO
THE SWIM PLATFORM STRUCTURE OR HARDWARE.
Fishing
Most boaters fi sh from time to time. With the propulsion systems of today it is possible to fi sh in out-of-the-way places. When cruising, stay clear of fi sherman. They may have lines or nets out which might be cut or get caught in your propeller if you come too close. Slow down when approaching fi shing boats.
Do not return to cruising speed until the boats have been passed. If a fi shing boat should be anchored, a large wake could fl ip or swamp the boat, upset fi shing gear, pull the anchor loose from the bottom or worse yet cause someone to fall overboard.
When fi shing from your boat, never anchor in shipping channel or tie up to any navigational aids. These must be kept clear of at all times.
Be sure to carry a chart of the area and be on the lookout for shallow water and hidden obstructions. Pick up a local tidal chart if appropriate so you do not end up grounded.
Remember, the skipper is responsible for any damage caused by his wake. Use common sense and be a responsible captain!
1-33
Safety On Board
!
WARNING
AVOID SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH!
DO NOT OPERATE THE BOAT
WITH PEOPLE IN THE WATER
OR ON TOP OR HOLDING ON TO
THE SWIM PLATFORM STRUCTURE OR HARDWARE.
Fishing
Most boaters fi sh from time to time. With the propulsion systems of today it is possible to fi sh in out-of-the-way places. When cruising, stay clear of fi sherman. They may have lines or nets out which might be cut or get caught in your propeller if you come too close. Slow down when approaching fi shing boats.
Do not return to cruising speed until the boats have been passed. If a fi shing boat should be anchored, a large wake could fl ip or swamp the boat, upset fi shing gear, pull the anchor loose from the bottom or worse yet cause someone to fall overboard.
When fi shing from your boat, never anchor in shipping channel or tie up to any navigational aids. These must be kept clear of at all times.
Be sure to carry a chart of the area and be on the lookout for shallow water and hidden obstructions. Pick up a local tidal chart if appropriate so you do not end up grounded.
Remember, the skipper is responsible for any damage caused by his wake. Use common sense and be a responsible captain!
1-33
CHAPTER 1
WEATHER & WATER CONDITIONS
Before a boating outing check the weather conditions. As we all know the weather can change rapidly in many parts of the country. It does so sometimes without being predicted. NOAA weather radio reports are continuously available on designated frequencies installed on VHF radios and various handheld devices. Also, many local radio stations carry weather reports.
Cloud Formations
HIGH CLOUDS cirrus
Clouds indicate the type of current weather and upcoming changes in cumulonimbus
(thunderstorm) cirrostratus
MIDDLE CLOUDS altostratus cirrocumulus
20,000 Ft.
altocumulus the weather. Knowing t h e t y p e o f c l o u d formations can assist you in choosing the appropriate boating day
LOW CLOUDS stratocumulus
6,500 Ft.
cumulus or if already on the water will help you understand any upcomingweather changes
Flat clouds (stratus) nibostratus stratus catspaw normally indicate stable air. Cumulus clouds indicate unstable air.
Many times a “cotton ball” or cumulus cloud builds vertical height in the afternoon and the result is a thunderstorm with increased winds and waves; sometimes these storms are quite violent. You can fi nd additional information on weather (meteorology) at your local library.
1-34
CHAPTER 1
WEATHER & WATER CONDITIONS
Before a boating outing check the weather conditions. As we all know the weather can change rapidly in many parts of the country. It does so sometimes without being predicted. NOAA weather radio reports are continuously available on designated frequencies installed on VHF radios and various handheld devices. Also, many local radio stations carry weather reports.
Cloud Formations
HIGH CLOUDS cirrus
Clouds indicate the type of current weather and upcoming changes in cumulonimbus
(thunderstorm) cirrostratus
MIDDLE CLOUDS altostratus cirrocumulus
20,000 Ft.
altocumulus the weather. Knowing t h e t y p e o f c l o u d formations can assist you in choosing the appropriate boating day
LOW CLOUDS stratocumulus
6,500 Ft.
cumulus or if already on the water will help you understand any upcomingweather changes
Flat clouds (stratus) nibostratus stratus catspaw normally indicate stable air. Cumulus clouds indicate unstable air.
Many times a “cotton ball” or cumulus cloud builds vertical height in the afternoon and the result is a thunderstorm with increased winds and waves; sometimes these storms are quite violent. You can fi nd additional information on weather (meteorology) at your local library.
1-34
Safety On Board
Waves & Fog
As the wind blows across water waves are created.
The stronger the wind and increased distance across the water enlarges the wave action.
Other factors that can cause problem situations for vessels are fog, currents, and tidal changes.
Fog can develop inland on clear, calm mornings.
Coastal areas see large “blankets” of fog roll in and stay for extended time periods causing sometimes hazardous navigation conditions. If you are caught in the fog, do not panic. Think of the best plan of action and proceed carefully. If you are limited in navigation equipment at the fi rst sign of fog proceed to the nearest shoreline and wait until the fog lifts.
Boats equipped with navigation equipment, local waterway experience and charts should proceed to a safe harbor. Use extreme caution, signal as needed, and reduce to a speed where you can stop within half of your forward vision range.
If foul weather catches you at sea do the following:
1. Slow down. Proceed with caution and put on your life vests.
2. Try to reach the nearest safe shoreline.
3. Navigate your vessel slowly into the waves at a 45 degree angle.
4. Passengers should sit low in the center of the vessel.
5. Monitor your bilge pump. Make sure sump stays free of water.
6. Secure loose gear. Make ready emergency equipment.
7. If the engine stops, throw the anchor over the bow. If needed
use a sea anchor. Never anchor off the stern.
1-35
Safety On Board
Waves & Fog
As the wind blows across water waves are created.
The stronger the wind and increased distance across the water enlarges the wave action.
Other factors that can cause problem situations for vessels are fog, currents, and tidal changes.
Fog can develop inland on clear, calm mornings.
Coastal areas see large “blankets” of fog roll in and stay for extended time periods causing sometimes hazardous navigation conditions. If you are caught in the fog, do not panic. Think of the best plan of action and proceed carefully. If you are limited in navigation equipment at the fi rst sign of fog proceed to the nearest shoreline and wait until the fog lifts.
Boats equipped with navigation equipment, local waterway experience and charts should proceed to a safe harbor. Use extreme caution, signal as needed, and reduce to a speed where you can stop within half of your forward vision range.
If foul weather catches you at sea do the following:
1. Slow down. Proceed with caution and put on your life vests.
2. Try to reach the nearest safe shoreline.
3. Navigate your vessel slowly into the waves at a 45 degree angle.
4. Passengers should sit low in the center of the vessel.
5. Monitor your bilge pump. Make sure sump stays free of water.
6. Secure loose gear. Make ready emergency equipment.
7. If the engine stops, throw the anchor over the bow. If needed
use a sea anchor. Never anchor off the stern.
1-35
CHAPTER 1
Marine Weather Symbols
CHAPTER 1
Marine Weather Symbols
Although the National Weather Service has discontinued the use of the day fl ags and night lights, many marinas and ports of call still display them.
Although the National Weather Service has discontinued the use of the day fl ags and night lights, many marinas and ports of call still display them.
1-36 1-36
Rules Of The Road
NAVIGATION RULES DEFINED
The Navigation Rules set forth actions to be followed by boats to avoid collision. They are referred to as the “Rules of the Road”. There are two main parts referred to as the inland and international rules. The inland rules apply to vessels operating inside the boundaries of the
United States. The international rules referred to as72 COLREGS apply to vessels operating on the high seas and all connected waters outside the established demarcation boundaries. Most navigational charts show the demarcation lines by red dotted lines and are published in the navigation rules. Remember to consult state and local agencies since areas such as “no wake zones” , swimming beaches, “diver down fl ag” and inland landlocked lakes fall under their jurisdiction. This section is only an introduction to the “rules of the road”. We strongly recommend additional training before getting behind the “wheel” of your boat.
!
WARNING
TO AVOID INJURY AND DEATH
FOLLOW THE NAVIGATION “RULES OF THE ROAD”
TO PREVENT COLLISIONS.
You can order the Inland & International Navigation Rules from:
Superintendent of Documents
U. S. Government Printing Offi ce
Washington, DC 20402
Telephone: (202-512-1800) Fax:(202-512-2250
2-1
Rules Of The Road
NAVIGATION RULES DEFINED
The Navigation Rules set forth actions to be followed by boats to avoid collision. They are referred to as the “Rules of the Road”. There are two main parts referred to as the inland and international rules. The inland rules apply to vessels operating inside the boundaries of the
United States. The international rules referred to as72 COLREGS apply to vessels operating on the high seas and all connected waters outside the established demarcation boundaries. Most navigational charts show the demarcation lines by red dotted lines and are published in the navigation rules. Remember to consult state and local agencies since areas such as “no wake zones” , swimming beaches, “diver down fl ag” and inland landlocked lakes fall under their jurisdiction. This section is only an introduction to the “rules of the road”. We strongly recommend additional training before getting behind the “wheel” of your boat.
!
WARNING
TO AVOID INJURY AND DEATH
FOLLOW THE NAVIGATION “RULES OF THE ROAD”
TO PREVENT COLLISIONS.
You can order the Inland & International Navigation Rules from:
Superintendent of Documents
U. S. Government Printing Offi ce
Washington, DC 20402
Telephone: (202-512-1800) Fax:(202-512-2250
2-1
CHAPTER 2
NAVIGATION RULES
Right Of Way
1. Cross waves at right angles.
2. When caught in heavy water or squalls, head either directly into the waves or at a slight angle. Reduce speed, but maintain enough power to maneuver your boat safely.
3. Keep your speed under control. Respect the rights of other boaters engaged in all water sports. Give them a “wide berth”.
4. Whenever meeting a boat head on, keep to the right where possible.
5. When two boats cross, the boat to the right (starboard) has the right of way.
6. When overtaking or passing, the boat being passed has the right of way.
In general, boats with less maneuverability have right-of-way over more agile craft. The skipper must keep his craft clear of the following vessels:
•
A vessel not under command or aground; due to their circumstances, these vessels have no maneuverability.
• A vessel restricted in its maneuverability; these vessels usually are performing work which limits their maneuverability such as surveying, dredging, laying pipe or cable, or servicing navigational markers among others.
• A vessel engaged in fi shing; these include boats fi shing with lines, trawls or nets, but not trolling lines.
2-2
CHAPTER 2
NAVIGATION RULES
Right Of Way
1. Cross waves at right angles.
2. When caught in heavy water or squalls, head either directly into the waves or at a slight angle. Reduce speed, but maintain enough power to maneuver your boat safely.
3. Keep your speed under control. Respect the rights of other boaters engaged in all water sports. Give them a “wide berth”.
4. Whenever meeting a boat head on, keep to the right where possible.
5. When two boats cross, the boat to the right (starboard) has the right of way.
6. When overtaking or passing, the boat being passed has the right of way.
In general, boats with less maneuverability have right-of-way over more agile craft. The skipper must keep his craft clear of the following vessels:
•
A vessel not under command or aground; due to their circumstances, these vessels have no maneuverability.
• A vessel restricted in its maneuverability; these vessels usually are performing work which limits their maneuverability such as surveying, dredging, laying pipe or cable, or servicing navigational markers among others.
• A vessel engaged in fi shing; these include boats fi shing with lines, trawls or nets, but not trolling lines.
2-2
Rules Of The Road
•
Sailboats; they have the right-of-way over power boats. However, if a sailboat is using a prop to move forward, it is considered a powerboat even if the sails are up.
• Remember the unwritten “rule of tonnage”. Basically a smaller tonnage vessel should take every effort to avoid close quarters with a larger tonnage vessel. One way to accomplish this is to have a designated human lookout to “eyeball” the horizon for any developing collision course.
•
Use defensive driving skills on the waterway just as you do on the roadway. The other vessel may not know the “rules of the road” Be alert and ready to take immediate action.
• If a collision course is unavoidable neither boat has the right of way.
Both boats must react to avoid an accident according to the rules of the road.
Signals
Rules Of The Road
•
Sailboats; they have the right-of-way over power boats. However, if a sailboat is using a prop to move forward, it is considered a powerboat even if the sails are up.
• Remember the unwritten “rule of tonnage”. Basically a smaller tonnage vessel should take every effort to avoid close quarters with a larger tonnage vessel. One way to accomplish this is to have a designated human lookout to “eyeball” the horizon for any developing collision course.
•
Use defensive driving skills on the waterway just as you do on the roadway. The other vessel may not know the “rules of the road” Be alert and ready to take immediate action.
• If a collision course is unavoidable neither boat has the right of way.
Both boats must react to avoid an accident according to the rules of the road.
Signals
2-3 2-3
CHAPTER 2
NAVIGATION RULES
The Navigation Rules set forth 3 types of crossing situations- crossing, meeting, and overtaking. In each case, both boats are governed by special procedures.
In a head-on meeting, both vessels must sound a single blast to give way toward starboard and pass to port.
These rules appear when there is a risk of collision. In a crossing situation be aware of the other craft's position. For safety, there should be a noticeable change in the angle, bow or stern; a gradual change in position indicates possible danger.
2-4
CHAPTER 2
NAVIGATION RULES
The Navigation Rules set forth 3 types of crossing situations- crossing, meeting, and overtaking. In each case, both boats are governed by special procedures.
In a head-on meeting, both vessels must sound a single blast to give way toward starboard and pass to port.
These rules appear when there is a risk of collision. In a crossing situation be aware of the other craft's position. For safety, there should be a noticeable change in the angle, bow or stern; a gradual change in position indicates possible danger.
2-4
Rules Of The Road
NAVIGATION RULES
An overtaking boat is burdened, and is not the privileged craft, even though it approaches the danger zone of the overtaken boat.
Rules Of The Road
NAVIGATION RULES
An overtaking boat is burdened, and is not the privileged craft, even though it approaches the danger zone of the overtaken boat.
The overtaking boat fi rst signals with a single blast if that boat desires to pass on the starboard side of the boat ahead, or a double blast if passing to port.
The overtaken craft responds with the same signal if it is safe, or with the danger signal (5 short blasts or more) if unsafe. The boat overtaking must not pass unless the appropriate signals are sounded.
The overtaking boat fi rst signals with a single blast if that boat desires to pass on the starboard side of the boat ahead, or a double blast if passing to port.
The overtaken craft responds with the same signal if it is safe, or with the danger signal (5 short blasts or more) if unsafe. The boat overtaking must not pass unless the appropriate signals are sounded.
2-5 2-5
CHAPTER 2
NAVIGATION AIDS
Navigation aids are placed along coasts and navigable waters as a guide for mariners in determining their position in reference to land and hidden danger. Each aid provides specifi c information. They form a continuous system of charted markers for accurate piloting on paper and on the water.
Nautical charts are provided by the National Ocean Service (NOS) and are distributed nationwide through marinas and outlet stores.
These charts show the geography of the coast, water depth, landmarks, navigation aids (buoys and markers), marine hazards, and port facilities.
Use only up-to-date charts for navigation. We recommend when purchasing a chart to look for the weather resistant ones.
Buoys provide a road map to keep the skipper on course and to avoid hazards. Buoys are identifi ed by light, shape, color and in severe weather conditions by sound.
Buoys or beacons called lateral markers indicate the port and starboard sides of the waterway to be followed. U. S markers follow the buoy system known as Red Right Returning. When returning from sea or traveling upstream, the green markers are to port (on your left) and the red markers are to the starboard side (on your right). When traveling downstream or out to sea the marker color would be reversed. The
Intercoastal waterway uses a different system of lateral markers for port and starboard. Before operating your vessel, learn to identify the various navigational aids such as lateral aids, mid-channel markers, information and regulatory markers.
NOTICE
2-6
SKIPPERS MUST NOT RELY ON BUOYS ALONE
TO MARK THEIR POSITION.
SEVERE WEATHER CONDITIONS
AND WAVE ACTION CAN ALTER A BUOYS POSITION.
NEVER TIE UP TO A BUOY.
IT IS ILLEGAL AND EXTREMELY DANGEROUS.
CHAPTER 2
NAVIGATION AIDS
Navigation aids are placed along coasts and navigable waters as a guide for mariners in determining their position in reference to land and hidden danger. Each aid provides specifi c information. They form a continuous system of charted markers for accurate piloting on paper and on the water.
Nautical charts are provided by the National Ocean Service (NOS) and are distributed nationwide through marinas and outlet stores.
These charts show the geography of the coast, water depth, landmarks, navigation aids (buoys and markers), marine hazards, and port facilities.
Use only up-to-date charts for navigation. We recommend when purchasing a chart to look for the weather resistant ones.
Buoys provide a road map to keep the skipper on course and to avoid hazards. Buoys are identifi ed by light, shape, color and in severe weather conditions by sound.
Buoys or beacons called lateral markers indicate the port and starboard sides of the waterway to be followed. U. S markers follow the buoy system known as Red Right Returning. When returning from sea or traveling upstream, the green markers are to port (on your left) and the red markers are to the starboard side (on your right). When traveling downstream or out to sea the marker color would be reversed. The
Intercoastal waterway uses a different system of lateral markers for port and starboard. Before operating your vessel, learn to identify the various navigational aids such as lateral aids, mid-channel markers, information and regulatory markers.
NOTICE
2-6
SKIPPERS MUST NOT RELY ON BUOYS ALONE
TO MARK THEIR POSITION.
SEVERE WEATHER CONDITIONS
AND WAVE ACTION CAN ALTER A BUOYS POSITION.
NEVER TIE UP TO A BUOY.
IT IS ILLEGAL AND EXTREMELY DANGEROUS.
LATERAL AIDS
Rules Of The Road
Port Side
Odd Numbers
Starboard Side
Even Numbers
Chart Symbol Chart Symbol
Lighted Buoy
(Green Light Only)
Chart Symbol
Lighted Buoy
(Red Light Only)
Chart Symbol
Can Buoy
(Unlighted)
Chart Symbol
Nun Buoy
(Unlighted)
Chart Symbol
Daymark Daymark
2-7
LATERAL AIDS
Rules Of The Road
Port Side
Odd Numbers
Starboard Side
Even Numbers
Chart Symbol Chart Symbol
Lighted Buoy
(Green Light Only)
Chart Symbol
Lighted Buoy
(Red Light Only)
Chart Symbol
Can Buoy
(Unlighted)
Chart Symbol
Nun Buoy
(Unlighted)
Chart Symbol
Daymark Daymark
2-7
CHAPTER 2
MID-CHANNEL MARKERS
Chart Symbol
Chart Symbol
Chart Symbol
REGULATORY MARKERS
CHAPTER 2
MID-CHANNEL MARKERS
Chart Symbol
Chart Symbol
Chart Symbol
REGULATORY MARKERS
Diamond Shape
Danger Warning
Diamond Shape With Cross-
Boats Keep Out
2-8
Circle Marks Area Controlled
As Indicated
For showing information such as locations, distances and directions
Diamond Shape
Danger Warning
Diamond Shape With Cross-
Boats Keep Out
2-8
Circle Marks Area Controlled
As Indicated
For showing information such as locations, distances and directions
Rules Of The Road
NIGHT RUNNING
Boats operating between sunset and sunrise ( hours vary by state), or in conditions of reduced visibility, must use navigation lights. Nighttime operation, especially during bad weather and fog, can be dangerous. All
Rules of the Road apply at night, but it is best to slow down and stay clear of all boats regardless of who has the right-of-way.
To see more easily at night, avoid bright lights when possible. Also, it is helpful to have a passenger keep watch for other boats, water hazards and navigational aids.
To determine the size, speed and direction of other vessels at night, you should use the running lights. A green light indicates starboard side, and a red light indicates port side. Generally, if you see a green light, you have the right-of-way. If you see a red light, give way to the other vessel.
WHITE
GREEN
Rules Of The Road
NIGHT RUNNING
Boats operating between sunset and sunrise ( hours vary by state), or in conditions of reduced visibility, must use navigation lights. Nighttime operation, especially during bad weather and fog, can be dangerous. All
Rules of the Road apply at night, but it is best to slow down and stay clear of all boats regardless of who has the right-of-way.
To see more easily at night, avoid bright lights when possible. Also, it is helpful to have a passenger keep watch for other boats, water hazards and navigational aids.
To determine the size, speed and direction of other vessels at night, you should use the running lights. A green light indicates starboard side, and a red light indicates port side. Generally, if you see a green light, you have the right-of-way. If you see a red light, give way to the other vessel.
WHITE
GREEN
IF YOU SEE GREEN;
CAUTIOUSLY HOLD
COURSE
WHITE
RED
IF YOU SEE GREEN;
CAUTIOUSLY HOLD
COURSE
WHITE
RED
IF YOU SEE RED;
GIVE WAY!
IF YOU SEE RED;
GIVE WAY!
2-9 2-9
CHAPTER 2
BRIDGE CLEARANCE
Be aware that your vessel requires a specifi ed bridge clearance height.
This height is a measured estimate from the waterline to the top of the highest object usually the tower, arch, radar or the masthead light depending on what equipment is installed. All canvas should be in the stored position. The estimated height can change because of variances in the loaded condition of the vessel. Consult the bridge clearance specifi cations located in Chapter 12 (technical information section).
As an alternative to be carried out at dockside have someone place a long straightedge such as a piece of wood at a 90 degree angle across the highest point of the boat with the boat in the water. Then with a tape rule measure the distance straight down (90 degrees) to the waterline. Take this measurement with the fuel and water tanks 1/2 full and only 1 person besides yourself on board. This will give you a safe measurement. As your boat is loaded down with people the bridge clearance needed will be slightly lower.
Some bridges are tendered. Know and use the proper bridge signals when approaching these bridges (see bridge signals on page 2-3). You can also monitor and communicate on channel 13 of a VHF radio for bridge information in most domestic locals. Other bridges are marked with a clearance measurement and you are on your own.
If your vessel has a tower with the potential to lower it , be sure it lays forward to a distance that will safely clear the bridge before attempting to proceed under the bridge. While activating the tower forward or returning it to the upright position, warn passengers to keep all body parts away from the
tower and related mechanisms. After determining your vessel will clear the bridge proceed with caution at a safe idle speed. Keep your eye on vessel traffi c at all times in order to react quickly. Resume a safe speed once clear of the bridge structure and acknowledgment of clear visibility.
Use common sense regarding bridge clearance because bodily injury and property damage could result if a mishap occurs with a bridge structure.
2-10
CHAPTER 2
BRIDGE CLEARANCE
Be aware that your vessel requires a specifi ed bridge clearance height.
This height is a measured estimate from the waterline to the top of the highest object usually the tower, arch, radar or the masthead light depending on what equipment is installed. All canvas should be in the stored position. The estimated height can change because of variances in the loaded condition of the vessel. Consult the bridge clearance specifi cations located in Chapter 12 (technical information section).
As an alternative to be carried out at dockside have someone place a long straightedge such as a piece of wood at a 90 degree angle across the highest point of the boat with the boat in the water. Then with a tape rule measure the distance straight down (90 degrees) to the waterline. Take this measurement with the fuel and water tanks 1/2 full and only 1 person besides yourself on board. This will give you a safe measurement. As your boat is loaded down with people the bridge clearance needed will be slightly lower.
Some bridges are tendered. Know and use the proper bridge signals when approaching these bridges (see bridge signals on page 2-3). You can also monitor and communicate on channel 13 of a VHF radio for bridge information in most domestic locals. Other bridges are marked with a clearance measurement and you are on your own.
If your vessel has a tower with the potential to lower it , be sure it lays forward to a distance that will safely clear the bridge before attempting to proceed under the bridge. While activating the tower forward or returning it to the upright position, warn passengers to keep all body parts away from the
tower and related mechanisms. After determining your vessel will clear the bridge proceed with caution at a safe idle speed. Keep your eye on vessel traffi c at all times in order to react quickly. Resume a safe speed once clear of the bridge structure and acknowledgment of clear visibility.
Use common sense regarding bridge clearance because bodily injury and property damage could result if a mishap occurs with a bridge structure.
2-10
Engines & Controls
ENGINE
Engine Basics
It is important that you read the engine manual carefully and become familiar with the operation as well as necessary maintenance on the engine and propulsion systems. Pay careful attention to the sections on winterization if you live in freezing climates. Extensive damage can result if proper winter storage is not followed. Consult your Regal dealer for further information.
!
WARNING
AVOID SERIOUS INJURY!
READ ALL MANUFACTURER’S ENGINE AND
PROPULSION OWNER MANUALS
BEFORE OPERATING YOUR VESSEL.
Engine Mounts
The engine is set in the boat on a group of metal or wooden platforms called mounts. These rubber isolation mounts keep the engine from moving laterally and athwartships (right angles to the center line).
The mounts help reduce the vibration caused by the engine and drive.
Periodically, the mount hardware should be checked for tightness.
3-1
Engines & Controls
ENGINE
Engine Basics
It is important that you read the engine manual carefully and become familiar with the operation as well as necessary maintenance on the engine and propulsion systems. Pay careful attention to the sections on winterization if you live in freezing climates. Extensive damage can result if proper winter storage is not followed. Consult your Regal dealer for further information.
!
WARNING
AVOID SERIOUS INJURY!
READ ALL MANUFACTURER’S ENGINE AND
PROPULSION OWNER MANUALS
BEFORE OPERATING YOUR VESSEL.
Engine Mounts
The engine is set in the boat on a group of metal or wooden platforms called mounts. These rubber isolation mounts keep the engine from moving laterally and athwartships (right angles to the center line).
The mounts help reduce the vibration caused by the engine and drive.
Periodically, the mount hardware should be checked for tightness.
3-1
CHAPTER 3
Engine Alignment
The engine uses a rubber splined hub to which the outdrive drive shaft is attached. This alignment specifi cation between the engine and out drive needs to checked periodically. It should be checked after each 50 hours of operation or if the vessel has run aground or hit a submerged object. Alignment should be checked by a Regal dealer or marine professional since special tools and procedures are required.
Engine Removal
In the event the engine or outdrive (sometimes referred to as stern drive) requires major service where it needs to be removed, consult your Regal dealer.
Engine Ventilation
Ventilation systems are required for engine compartments. Your boat features a set of deck vent shrouds with mesh covers which supply fresh air constantly to the engine compartment. A powered blower motor connected to ducts in the lower one third of the bilge evacuates air to the atmosphere. Pay close attention to the following warning.
!
WARNING
GASOLINE VAPORS CAN EXPLODE. BEFORE STARTING
ENGINE, OPERATE BLOWER 4 MINUTES AND CHECK
ENGINE COMPARTMENT FOR GASOLINE LEAKS OR
VAPORS. RUN BLOWER BELOW CRUSING SPEED.
All owners are responsible for keeping their boat’s ventilation systems in operating condition. This means making sure the ventilation covers are obstruction free, ducts are not blocked or tore, blower operates properly and any worn parts are replaced with approved marine parts.
3-2
CHAPTER 3
Engine Alignment
The engine uses a rubber splined hub to which the outdrive drive shaft is attached. This alignment specifi cation between the engine and out drive needs to checked periodically. It should be checked after each 50 hours of operation or if the vessel has run aground or hit a submerged object. Alignment should be checked by a Regal dealer or marine professional since special tools and procedures are required.
Engine Removal
In the event the engine or outdrive (sometimes referred to as stern drive) requires major service where it needs to be removed, consult your Regal dealer.
Engine Ventilation
Ventilation systems are required for engine compartments. Your boat features a set of deck vent shrouds with mesh covers which supply fresh air constantly to the engine compartment. A powered blower motor connected to ducts in the lower one third of the bilge evacuates air to the atmosphere. Pay close attention to the following warning.
!
WARNING
GASOLINE VAPORS CAN EXPLODE. BEFORE STARTING
ENGINE, OPERATE BLOWER 4 MINUTES AND CHECK
ENGINE COMPARTMENT FOR GASOLINE LEAKS OR
VAPORS. RUN BLOWER BELOW CRUSING SPEED.
All owners are responsible for keeping their boat’s ventilation systems in operating condition. This means making sure the ventilation covers are obstruction free, ducts are not blocked or tore, blower operates properly and any worn parts are replaced with approved marine parts.
3-2
Engines & Controls
!
WARNING
TO PREVENT FIRE OR EXPLOSION
USE ONLY APPROVED MARINE REPLACEMENT
PARTS THAT ARE IGNITION PROTECTED
PROPULSION
Stern Drive
It is important that you read the engine/stern drive manual carefully and become familiar with the operation as well as necessary maintenance on the drive unit components. Pay careful attention to the sections on winterization if you live in freezing climates. Extensive damage can result if proper winter storage is not followed. Refer to the maintenance section of this manual for more information or call your nearest Regal dealer.
Propellers
We have carefully tested and chosen the propellers to give your stern drive boat the best possible performance and have allowed for the additional weight in equipment that might be added to the boat. It is a good idea to carry a spare set of propellers and hand tools in order to handle an emergency propeller change. Refer to the engine manual for proper procedures since each stern drive application is unique. Call a marine professional or your Regal dealer for further information.
3-3
Engines & Controls
!
WARNING
TO PREVENT FIRE OR EXPLOSION
USE ONLY APPROVED MARINE REPLACEMENT
PARTS THAT ARE IGNITION PROTECTED
PROPULSION
Stern Drive
It is important that you read the engine/stern drive manual carefully and become familiar with the operation as well as necessary maintenance on the drive unit components. Pay careful attention to the sections on winterization if you live in freezing climates. Extensive damage can result if proper winter storage is not followed. Refer to the maintenance section of this manual for more information or call your nearest Regal dealer.
Propellers
We have carefully tested and chosen the propellers to give your stern drive boat the best possible performance and have allowed for the additional weight in equipment that might be added to the boat. It is a good idea to carry a spare set of propellers and hand tools in order to handle an emergency propeller change. Refer to the engine manual for proper procedures since each stern drive application is unique. Call a marine professional or your Regal dealer for further information.
3-3
CHAPTER 3
!
DANGER
PREVENT SEVERE INJURY OR DEATH!
SHUT OFF ENGINE NEAR SWIMMERS
TO AVOID ROTATING PROPELLER BLADES.
Propeller Checklist
At least twice a year check the propeller for:
Loose, missing or corroded hardware.
Nicks, dings or missing propeller material.
Bent propeller blades.
Objects wrapped around the prop such as fi sh line.
Decomposing propeller blades (electrolyisis symptom).
Aluminum prop with paint coming off near blade tip
Check the propeller pressed in rubber hubfor slippage.
Contact a propeller shop or your closest Regal dealer if any of the above symptoms exist. They have special equipment to refurbish both stainless steel and aluminum propellers. After making any blade alternations the propellers are “repitched” in special prop jigs.
3-4
CHAPTER 3
!
DANGER
PREVENT SEVERE INJURY OR DEATH!
SHUT OFF ENGINE NEAR SWIMMERS
TO AVOID ROTATING PROPELLER BLADES.
Propeller Checklist
At least twice a year check the propeller for:
Loose, missing or corroded hardware.
Nicks, dings or missing propeller material.
Bent propeller blades.
Objects wrapped around the prop such as fi sh line.
Decomposing propeller blades (electrolyisis symptom).
Aluminum prop with paint coming off near blade tip
Check the propeller pressed in rubber hubfor slippage.
Contact a propeller shop or your closest Regal dealer if any of the above symptoms exist. They have special equipment to refurbish both stainless steel and aluminum propellers. After making any blade alternations the propellers are “repitched” in special prop jigs.
3-4
Engines & Controls
CONTROLS
Instrumentation
Accessory Plug Ignition Switch
20 Amp Ignition Breaker
T h e h e l m s t a t i o n i s equipped with a complete set of instruments that allows you to monitor the condition of the engines.
Close observation of the gauges may stop engine damage.
The dash instrument panel is powered and protected by a main breaker located at the back of the battery switch panel in the bilge. It is connected through the key switch.
If a fuse “blows” fi nd the cause of the problem before replacing it.
Always use same type/size fuse.
The engine wiring is protected by a main breaker with a push button reset mounted on the engine. Refer to your specifi c engine manual for information on type and location. If a breaker “pops” fi gure out the reason why before resetting it.
Individual dash switches are protected by a breaker or fuse.
NOTICE
WITH BATTERY SWITCH IN THE “OFF” POSITION
THERE IS NO POWER TO THE DASH.
3-5
Engines & Controls
CONTROLS
Instrumentation
Accessory Plug Ignition Switch
20 Amp Ignition Breaker
T h e h e l m s t a t i o n i s equipped with a complete set of instruments that allows you to monitor the condition of the engines.
Close observation of the gauges may stop engine damage.
The dash instrument panel is powered and protected by a main breaker located at the back of the battery switch panel in the bilge. It is connected through the key switch.
If a fuse “blows” fi nd the cause of the problem before replacing it.
Always use same type/size fuse.
The engine wiring is protected by a main breaker with a push button reset mounted on the engine. Refer to your specifi c engine manual for information on type and location. If a breaker “pops” fi gure out the reason why before resetting it.
Individual dash switches are protected by a breaker or fuse.
NOTICE
WITH BATTERY SWITCH IN THE “OFF” POSITION
THERE IS NO POWER TO THE DASH.
3-5
CHAPTER 3
Typical Helm Overview
Switch Panel Steering Wheel Tilt Mechanism
Instrumentation
CHAPTER 3
Typical Helm Overview
Switch Panel Steering Wheel Tilt Mechanism
Instrumentation
Depth Gauge
Automatic Fire Extinguisher Gauge
Fuse Panel
(Behind Helm)
Accessory Plug
Ignition Switch
3-6
Depth Gauge
Automatic Fire Extinguisher Gauge
Fuse Panel
(Behind Helm)
Accessory Plug
Ignition Switch
3-6
Engines & Controls
Gauge Operation
Following is a general description of typical gauge operations. An alert skipper monitors his gauges constantly for any system malfunctions.
The gauges are lighted for night operation. Gauges are an early warning system for marine engines just as for automobiles. For more information, refer to the engine manufacturer’s manual in the owner’s pouch. Select Regal models use the multi-function gauge verses the single gauge.
Tachometer:
The tachometer indicates the speed of the engine in revolutions per minute (rpm). The tachometer allows you to monitor the engine speed so you can be sure not to exceed the recommended limits of the engine manufacturer. Selected tachometers have built in hour meters.
Multi-Function Gauge
The multi-function gauge reads 4 separate engine functions which makes viewing much easier especially when cruising. The parameters covered are fuel, volt, oil, and temperature. Refer to the individual gauges on the next page for a full description of gauge operation.
3-7
Engines & Controls
Gauge Operation
Following is a general description of typical gauge operations. An alert skipper monitors his gauges constantly for any system malfunctions.
The gauges are lighted for night operation. Gauges are an early warning system for marine engines just as for automobiles. For more information, refer to the engine manufacturer’s manual in the owner’s pouch. Select Regal models use the multi-function gauge verses the single gauge.
Tachometer:
The tachometer indicates the speed of the engine in revolutions per minute (rpm). The tachometer allows you to monitor the engine speed so you can be sure not to exceed the recommended limits of the engine manufacturer. Selected tachometers have built in hour meters.
Multi-Function Gauge
The multi-function gauge reads 4 separate engine functions which makes viewing much easier especially when cruising. The parameters covered are fuel, volt, oil, and temperature. Refer to the individual gauges on the next page for a full description of gauge operation.
3-7
CHAPTER 3
Fuel Gauge:
The fuel gauge indicates the level of fuel inside the fuel tank. It is a good idea to keep the fuel tanks “topped off ” when possible to reduce fuel vapors inside the tank. It is also a good idea not to run the fuel level close to empty in order to leave an adequate “safety” factor.
Volt Meter:
The volt meter monitors the battery condition as well as the alternator performance. Normal voltage is between 12.0 and 15.0 volts. Readings outside of this range may indicate a charging system or battery problem.
Oil Pressure:
The oil pressure gauge indicates the pressure of the oil inside the engine lubrication system. A drop in oil pressure may be an indication of a low oil situation or a leak. Continued operation of the engines with low oil pressure could lead to engine damage. Refer to appropriate manufacturer’s engine manual for more information.
Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge monitors the cooling system of the engine.
A sudden increase in the temperature could be a sign that the engine cooling system is malfunctioning. Shut down the engine immediately and investigate the problem. Consult your engine manual for allowable limits.
CHAPTER 3
Fuel Gauge:
The fuel gauge indicates the level of fuel inside the fuel tank. It is a good idea to keep the fuel tanks “topped off ” when possible to reduce fuel vapors inside the tank. It is also a good idea not to run the fuel level close to empty in order to leave an adequate “safety” factor.
Volt Meter:
The volt meter monitors the battery condition as well as the alternator performance. Normal voltage is between 12.0 and 15.0 volts. Readings outside of this range may indicate a charging system or battery problem.
Oil Pressure:
The oil pressure gauge indicates the pressure of the oil inside the engine lubrication system. A drop in oil pressure may be an indication of a low oil situation or a leak. Continued operation of the engines with low oil pressure could lead to engine damage. Refer to appropriate manufacturer’s engine manual for more information.
Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge monitors the cooling system of the engine.
A sudden increase in the temperature could be a sign that the engine cooling system is malfunctioning. Shut down the engine immediately and investigate the problem. Consult your engine manual for allowable limits.
3-8 3-8
Engines & Controls
Trim Gauge:
This gauge measures the stern drive tilt and indicates the relative position of the bow, up or down when the boat is on plane. The power trim normally begins in the down position when used to accelerate the boat onto a plane position. The gauge can be helpful in achieving the most economical running condition.
Depth Gauge:
The depth gauge is standard equipment on selected models.
The depth gauge indicates the water depth under the keel of the boat. It features an shallow water alarm. By monitoring the water depth closely, damage to props and underwater hardware can be avoided.
Speedometer:
The speedometer used on selected models indicates kilometers per hour and miles per hour by measuring water pressure against a small hole in a device mounted under the boat.
Consult the owner’s packet for further information.
3-9
Engines & Controls
Trim Gauge:
This gauge measures the stern drive tilt and indicates the relative position of the bow, up or down when the boat is on plane. The power trim normally begins in the down position when used to accelerate the boat onto a plane position. The gauge can be helpful in achieving the most economical running condition.
Depth Gauge:
The depth gauge is standard equipment on selected models.
The depth gauge indicates the water depth under the keel of the boat. It features an shallow water alarm. By monitoring the water depth closely, damage to props and underwater hardware can be avoided.
Speedometer:
The speedometer used on selected models indicates kilometers per hour and miles per hour by measuring water pressure against a small hole in a device mounted under the boat.
Consult the owner’s packet for further information.
3-9
CHAPTER 3
Optional Gauges & Indicators
The optional gas vapor detector determines if there is a level of gasoline vapors that is unsafe in the engine room of the boat. If installed, turn on the unit and wait about one minute for it to do its safety test. If all is well it will give you a green light.
You must run the test before you start the engines. In the event the detector does not show a green light, you must investigate the bilge of the boat for gas fumes or signs of a fuel leak before starting the engines. If uncertain, consult a marine service professional
The automatic fire extinguishing system utilizes an instrument display unit (gauge) that provides the operator with a system status of charged or uncharged condition by an audible alarm. With the ignition turned on the indicator light shows system is charged and operating properly. With the ignition on and no light indicates the system has discharged. If the system should discharge the ignition system will be instantaneously interrupted. Should this occur shut down the engine, ventilation blower and any electrical system components. Investigate the source of the shutdown immediately and take appropriate action. For more information, refer to the owner’s pouch.
3-10
CHAPTER 3
Optional Gauges & Indicators
The optional gas vapor detector determines if there is a level of gasoline vapors that is unsafe in the engine room of the boat. If installed, turn on the unit and wait about one minute for it to do its safety test. If all is well it will give you a green light.
You must run the test before you start the engines. In the event the detector does not show a green light, you must investigate the bilge of the boat for gas fumes or signs of a fuel leak before starting the engines. If uncertain, consult a marine service professional
The automatic fire extinguishing system utilizes an instrument display unit (gauge) that provides the operator with a system status of charged or uncharged condition by an audible alarm. With the ignition turned on the indicator light shows system is charged and operating properly. With the ignition on and no light indicates the system has discharged. If the system should discharge the ignition system will be instantaneously interrupted. Should this occur shut down the engine, ventilation blower and any electrical system components. Investigate the source of the shutdown immediately and take appropriate action. For more information, refer to the owner’s pouch.
3-10
Engines & Controls
Volvo Engine Alarm
Alarm display light functions
Not Used
Oil Pressure
Serious Fault
Not Used
Battery
Coolant
Tempature
Not Used
Orange light= fault
Red light= serious fault. Refer to the “in case of emergency” in the Volvo engine operator manual.
Selected Volvo engines feature an engine system alarm. The alarm display warns of possible engine malfunctions.
When the engine is fi rst energized each of the alarm panel lights will light up. The captain should acknowledge that each of the lamps is glowing indicating that the diagnostic circuit is in the alert mode. When the engine starts the lamps will go out.
Note: To prevent possible engine damage in the event of an alarm fl ashing immediately shut down the engine and check for the indicated malfunction.
3-11
Engines & Controls
Volvo Engine Alarm
Alarm display light functions
Not Used
Oil Pressure
Serious Fault
Not Used
Battery
Coolant
Tempature
Not Used
Orange light= fault
Red light= serious fault. Refer to the “in case of emergency” in the Volvo engine operator manual.
Selected Volvo engines feature an engine system alarm. The alarm display warns of possible engine malfunctions.
When the engine is fi rst energized each of the alarm panel lights will light up. The captain should acknowledge that each of the lamps is glowing indicating that the diagnostic circuit is in the alert mode. When the engine starts the lamps will go out.
Note: To prevent possible engine damage in the event of an alarm fl ashing immediately shut down the engine and check for the indicated malfunction.
3-11
CHAPTER 3
Volvo EVC Tachometer
Volvo EVC Tachometer Main Menu
Tachometer Overview
Selected Volvo engines feature the EVC tachometer for monitoring specified engine functions. The EVC tachometer displays relevant vessel and engine information to the operator. The display can be obtained for the engine by using the EVC control panel designated by turning the navigation wheel.
Volvo
Penta
Start-Up Screen
CHAPTER 3
Volvo EVC Tachometer
Volvo EVC Tachometer Main Menu
Tachometer Overview
Selected Volvo engines feature the EVC tachometer for monitoring specified engine functions. The EVC tachometer displays relevant vessel and engine information to the operator. The display can be obtained for the engine by using the EVC control panel designated by turning the navigation wheel.
Volvo
Penta
Start-Up Screen
3-12 3-12
Engines & Controls
Tachometer Operation
Volvo Penta will display as the start-up screen. After a short period of time the fi rst item in the main menu will appear.
Main Menu
Note: Refer to the EVC control panel later in this chapter to supplement the
information below.
Navigate the various menus by turning the EVC navigation wheel clockwise or counter-clockwise. Views using the pointing hand symbol indicates a Sub-Menu.
To enter a Sub-Menu, push the navigation wheel.
Gauges Menu
This menu displays the engine data parameters.
Settings
The settings menu allows the user to set various options in the EVC system and to calibrate selected settings.
Faults List
The number shown after the word Faults displays the number of faults stored in the Faults List. List is reset after the system is rebooted.
Note: If no faults are registered, then no Faults List will be shown.
3-13
Engines & Controls
Tachometer Operation
Volvo Penta will display as the start-up screen. After a short period of time the fi rst item in the main menu will appear.
Main Menu
Note: Refer to the EVC control panel later in this chapter to supplement the
information below.
Navigate the various menus by turning the EVC navigation wheel clockwise or counter-clockwise. Views using the pointing hand symbol indicates a Sub-Menu.
To enter a Sub-Menu, push the navigation wheel.
Gauges Menu
This menu displays the engine data parameters.
Settings
The settings menu allows the user to set various options in the EVC system and to calibrate selected settings.
Faults List
The number shown after the word Faults displays the number of faults stored in the Faults List. List is reset after the system is rebooted.
Note: If no faults are registered, then no Faults List will be shown.
3-13
CHAPTER 3
Audible Alarms
Most Mercruiser and Volvo engines use audible alarms. They are designed to use sensors which pick up deviations from the normal operating parameters. Oil pressure and temperature sensors send a signal to a buzzer under the dash which sounds a high pitched alarm indicating a possible problem. In addition to the dash, some engines use buzzers at the engine itself.
NOTICE
PREVENT POSSIBLE ENGINE DAMAGE
WHEN AN AUDIBLE ALARM SOUNDS
SHUT DOWN ENGINE IMMEDIATELY,
INVESTIGATE & REPAIR THE PROBLEM
On start up it is not unusual to hear an audible alarm sound when cranking the engine over. This occurs normally because it takes a second or two to build up the engine oil pressure. Then the alarm will stop.
A seasoned skipper monitors his instrument panel often while cruising.
Instrument Lighting
Each gauge is designed with a light bulb so it can be seen at night. On most models you activate the instrument lighting by energizing the navigation light switch. Eliminate condensation inside the gauges by activating the gauge lights in high humidity environments.
CHAPTER 3
Audible Alarms
Most Mercruiser and Volvo engines use audible alarms. They are designed to use sensors which pick up deviations from the normal operating parameters. Oil pressure and temperature sensors send a signal to a buzzer under the dash which sounds a high pitched alarm indicating a possible problem. In addition to the dash, some engines use buzzers at the engine itself.
NOTICE
PREVENT POSSIBLE ENGINE DAMAGE
WHEN AN AUDIBLE ALARM SOUNDS
SHUT DOWN ENGINE IMMEDIATELY,
INVESTIGATE & REPAIR THE PROBLEM
On start up it is not unusual to hear an audible alarm sound when cranking the engine over. This occurs normally because it takes a second or two to build up the engine oil pressure. Then the alarm will stop.
A seasoned skipper monitors his instrument panel often while cruising.
Instrument Lighting
Each gauge is designed with a light bulb so it can be seen at night. On most models you activate the instrument lighting by energizing the navigation light switch. Eliminate condensation inside the gauges by activating the gauge lights in high humidity environments.
3-14 3-14
Engines & Controls
Ignition Switch
A typical ignition switch features 4 positions. In a clockwise direction they are auxiliary, off, run, and start. The start position is spring loaded and the key should be held in this position to engage the starter.
Once the engine has started release the key from the start position.
The electrical system will then be energized in the run position. The auxiliary position is counterclockwise from the “off ” position. When it is activated the stereo and dash switches can be energized without the instrumentation engine ignition wiring and engine warning buzzers being energized. Be a smart skipper and remove the ignition key from the ignition switch with children aboard and/or when there are people in the water.
AUX
Engines & Controls
Ignition Switch
A typical ignition switch features 4 positions. In a clockwise direction they are auxiliary, off, run, and start. The start position is spring loaded and the key should be held in this position to engage the starter.
Once the engine has started release the key from the start position.
The electrical system will then be energized in the run position. The auxiliary position is counterclockwise from the “off ” position. When it is activated the stereo and dash switches can be energized without the instrumentation engine ignition wiring and engine warning buzzers being energized. Be a smart skipper and remove the ignition key from the ignition switch with children aboard and/or when there are people in the water.
AUX
TYPICAL IGNITION SWITCH
WITH 4 KEY POSITIONS
NOTICE
TO AVOID DRAINING THE BATTERY
DO NOT LEAVE IGNITION KEY
IN THE “ON” POSITION
WHEN THE ENGINE IS NOT RUNNING.
3-15
TYPICAL IGNITION SWITCH
WITH 4 KEY POSITIONS
NOTICE
TO AVOID DRAINING THE BATTERY
DO NOT LEAVE IGNITION KEY
IN THE “ON” POSITION
WHEN THE ENGINE IS NOT RUNNING.
3-15
CHAPTER 3
STD. REMOTE CONTROL OVERVIEW
11
Forward Reverse
12
NEUTRAL
INTERLOCK
BUTTON
1
Vessels without EVC or DTS electronic controls use a single lever remote control similar to the illustration.
To help visualize the operating principals we have used a clock mode. The lever in the straight-up or 12 o’clock
9
S
AFETY
L
ANYARD
(PUSH BUTTON)
3
(neutral) position uses a detent push button (see illustration) which allows advancing the throttle for neutral or starting the engine without engaging the gearshift. This feature is useful when trying to start a cold engine.
Pushing the throttle lever forward from the neutral 12 o’clock position to the 11 o’clock position will engage forward gear with minimum throttle. From the 11 o’clock position to the 9 o’clock position the vessel is in forward gear with forward throttle selections.
Pulling the throttle back from the neutral 12 o’clock position to the 1 o’clock position will engage reverse gear with minimum throttle. From the 1 o’clock position to the 3 o’clock position the vessel is in reverse gear with reverse throttle selections.
As you shift from neutral to forward or reverse positions, push up on the
neutral interlock button located under the gearshift knob. This will allow the control to shift into the desired gear.
Neutral Safety Switch
The remote control features a neutral safety switch which ensures the stern drive and control handle are in the detented neutral position for starting the engine.
3-16
CHAPTER 3
STD. REMOTE CONTROL OVERVIEW
11
Forward Reverse
12
NEUTRAL
INTERLOCK
BUTTON
1
Vessels without EVC or DTS electronic controls use a single lever remote control similar to the illustration.
To help visualize the operating principals we have used a clock mode. The lever in the straight-up or 12 o’clock
9
S
AFETY
L
ANYARD
(PUSH BUTTON)
3
(neutral) position uses a detent push button (see illustration) which allows advancing the throttle for neutral or starting the engine without engaging the gearshift. This feature is useful when trying to start a cold engine.
Pushing the throttle lever forward from the neutral 12 o’clock position to the 11 o’clock position will engage forward gear with minimum throttle. From the 11 o’clock position to the 9 o’clock position the vessel is in forward gear with forward throttle selections.
Pulling the throttle back from the neutral 12 o’clock position to the 1 o’clock position will engage reverse gear with minimum throttle. From the 1 o’clock position to the 3 o’clock position the vessel is in reverse gear with reverse throttle selections.
As you shift from neutral to forward or reverse positions, push up on the
neutral interlock button located under the gearshift knob. This will allow the control to shift into the desired gear.
Neutral Safety Switch
The remote control features a neutral safety switch which ensures the stern drive and control handle are in the detented neutral position for starting the engine.
3-16
Engines & Controls
Typical Remote Control
Shift
Interlock
Button
Power Trim
Toggle
Neutral
Handle
Position
Throttle Only
Button
You will hear a distinct sound and will “feel” the remote control in the detent neutral position. If you turn the key to the “start” position and the engine starter doesn’t crank over the engine make sure the remote control is in the detent neutral position.
Remember these points when shifting :
1. Do not shift quickly from forward to reverse gear position.
Drive system damage may occur.
Safety Lanyard
2. Do not “pump” the throttle in neutral or fl ooding will result.
Today’s engines require very little starting throttle.
3. Do not try to shift into forward or reverse gear at high rpm’s as
personal injury, drive system or property damage may result.
4. Remember to squeeze the shift interlock button to engage the
remote control into forward or reverse.
4. Only use idle throttle positions when docking or maneuvering in
tight quarters.
5. Wear your safety lanyard at all times.
6. Never shift the controls with the engine not running. Control,
linkage, and/or stern drive damage may occur.
For more information read your engine operator’s manual for
more details on controls.
3-17
Engines & Controls
Typical Remote Control
Shift
Interlock
Button
Power Trim
Toggle
Neutral
Handle
Position
Throttle Only
Button
You will hear a distinct sound and will “feel” the remote control in the detent neutral position. If you turn the key to the “start” position and the engine starter doesn’t crank over the engine make sure the remote control is in the detent neutral position.
Remember these points when shifting :
1. Do not shift quickly from forward to reverse gear position.
Drive system damage may occur.
Safety Lanyard
2. Do not “pump” the throttle in neutral or fl ooding will result.
Today’s engines require very little starting throttle.
3. Do not try to shift into forward or reverse gear at high rpm’s as
personal injury, drive system or property damage may result.
4. Remember to squeeze the shift interlock button to engage the
remote control into forward or reverse.
4. Only use idle throttle positions when docking or maneuvering in
tight quarters.
5. Wear your safety lanyard at all times.
6. Never shift the controls with the engine not running. Control,
linkage, and/or stern drive damage may occur.
For more information read your engine operator’s manual for
more details on controls.
3-17
CHAPTER 3
MERCURY DTS REMOTE CONTROL
OVERVIEW
Selected MerCruiser propulsion systems feature the DTS ( Digital throttle and shift) control. This system electronically controls the throttle and shift with solid state technology. Be sure to read and understand all the remote control information and safety warnings
before starting a cruise. It is important that the captain appoint and train a back-up to operate the helm should the captain be unable to conduct his duties as skipper.
D T S R e m o t e C o n t r o l
Features
Trim Control
Shift Lock- Press the lock in while moving the handle out of neutral.
Shift Lock- Press the lock in while moving the handle out of neutral.
Used only where a push button is installed for starting verses using the key switch
“start” position.
3-18
CHAPTER 3
MERCURY DTS REMOTE CONTROL
OVERVIEW
Selected MerCruiser propulsion systems feature the DTS ( Digital throttle and shift) control. This system electronically controls the throttle and shift with solid state technology. Be sure to read and understand all the remote control information and safety warnings
before starting a cruise. It is important that the captain appoint and train a back-up to operate the helm should the captain be unable to conduct his duties as skipper.
D T S R e m o t e C o n t r o l
Features
Trim Control
Shift Lock- Press the lock in while moving the handle out of neutral.
Shift Lock- Press the lock in while moving the handle out of neutral.
Used only where a push button is installed for starting verses using the key switch
“start” position.
3-18
Engines & Controls
DTS Remote Control- Engine Start-Up Procedure
To start the engine the remote control handle must be positioned in neutral.
Next, position the lanyard stop switch to the “run” position. If it is in the off position the engine will crank over in neutral but it will not start. Always ensure the lanyard stop switch is attached to a secure piece of clothing such as a belt. For more information, refer to the safety lanyard section later in this chapter.
Turn the ignition switch to the start position. The engine starter will crank over the engine which will allow it to start. Note there is a 20 amp breaker located next to the ignition switch.
20 Amp Breaker
The breaker protects the ignition switch circuitry against any overload conditions or voltage surges. Should an overcurrent situation develop the key switch will not engage the starter when it is in the “start” position.
Engines & Controls
DTS Remote Control- Engine Start-Up Procedure
To start the engine the remote control handle must be positioned in neutral.
Next, position the lanyard stop switch to the “run” position. If it is in the off position the engine will crank over in neutral but it will not start. Always ensure the lanyard stop switch is attached to a secure piece of clothing such as a belt. For more information, refer to the safety lanyard section later in this chapter.
Turn the ignition switch to the start position. The engine starter will crank over the engine which will allow it to start. Note there is a 20 amp breaker located next to the ignition switch.
20 Amp Breaker
The breaker protects the ignition switch circuitry against any overload conditions or voltage surges. Should an overcurrent situation develop the key switch will not engage the starter when it is in the “start” position.
3-19 3-19
CHAPTER 3
DTS Remote Control- Throttle Only Mode
The throttle only feature permits the captain to operate the throttle without shifting the engine into a gear. This is especially useful to properly warm up the engine before an outing. To use the throttle only feature fi rst assumes the engine has been started.
1. Ensure the control handle is in the straight up or neutral position.
2. Press and hold the throttle only button located on the control handle.
3.Squeeze the shift lock button inward and advance the control handle to the forward detent position.
4. Hold in the throttle only button until the horn sounds twice. The horn is located under the helm and it alerts the operator that they are in the neutral throttle only mode.
5. Push the control handle forward to advance the throttle. Monitor the tachometer as needed for proper revolutions per minute (RPM).
6. To disengage from the throttle only position, bring the control handle back to the neutral position.
Note: You can use the start/stop switch on the control handle to restart the engine and to stop a running engine. Make sure the contol handle is in the neutral position. Simply press the start switch to crank over the engine. The ignition must be in the “on” position for the engine to start.
3-20
CHAPTER 3
DTS Remote Control- Throttle Only Mode
The throttle only feature permits the captain to operate the throttle without shifting the engine into a gear. This is especially useful to properly warm up the engine before an outing. To use the throttle only feature fi rst assumes the engine has been started.
1. Ensure the control handle is in the straight up or neutral position.
2. Press and hold the throttle only button located on the control handle.
3.Squeeze the shift lock button inward and advance the control handle to the forward detent position.
4. Hold in the throttle only button until the horn sounds twice. The horn is located under the helm and it alerts the operator that they are in the neutral throttle only mode.
5. Push the control handle forward to advance the throttle. Monitor the tachometer as needed for proper revolutions per minute (RPM).
6. To disengage from the throttle only position, bring the control handle back to the neutral position.
Note: You can use the start/stop switch on the control handle to restart the engine and to stop a running engine. Make sure the contol handle is in the neutral position. Simply press the start switch to crank over the engine. The ignition must be in the “on” position for the engine to start.
3-20
Engines & Controls
VOLVO EVC REMOTE CONTROL
OVERVIEW
Selected Volvo propulsion systems feature the EVC ( Electronic Vessel
Control) remote control. This system electronically controls the throttle and shift with solid state technology. Be sure to read and understand all the remote control information and safety warnings before
starting a cruise. It is important that the captain appoint and train a back-up to operate the helm should the captain be unable to conduct his duties as skipper.
EVC Remote Control Features
Neutral Interlock Button- This button keeps the shifter in neutral. When depressed it allows the operator to move the control handle from neutral to forward or reverse positions.
Trim Control- Upper toggle moves drive out & raiseds bow.
Lower toggle moves drive in & lowers drive.
EVC Control
Handle
Note: The remote control handle must be in the neutral position to start the engine.
Engines & Controls
VOLVO EVC REMOTE CONTROL
OVERVIEW
Selected Volvo propulsion systems feature the EVC ( Electronic Vessel
Control) remote control. This system electronically controls the throttle and shift with solid state technology. Be sure to read and understand all the remote control information and safety warnings before
starting a cruise. It is important that the captain appoint and train a back-up to operate the helm should the captain be unable to conduct his duties as skipper.
EVC Remote Control Features
Neutral Interlock Button- This button keeps the shifter in neutral. When depressed it allows the operator to move the control handle from neutral to forward or reverse positions.
Trim Control- Upper toggle moves drive out & raiseds bow.
Lower toggle moves drive in & lowers drive.
EVC Control
Handle
Note: The remote control handle must be in the neutral position to start the engine.
3-21 3-21
CHAPTER 3
EVC Control Panel Features
The padlock when depressed and lit indicates a locked position and the engine can only be controlled by the control panel.
The key is used to energize and lock the control panel.
Indicator: (Red light):
Off: Panel not energized
Lit: Panel energized
Flashing: Indicates the control is not in the neutral & panel not energized.
Indicator
Lights This is the neutral button which is used with the control handle to advance the throttle in the neutral position or to simply disengage from forward or reverse gears.
Typical EVC
Remote Control
The navigation wheel is used to
“surf ” through various menus as part of the EVC tachometer display. Turn the wheel to the desired menu and depress the navigation wheel button.
The multi-function button is a dimmer switch for the display panel backlighting. Depress the button for 1 second to turn the backlighting on and off. Depress the button up to 5 times for different brightness levels.
3-22
The back button is used to revert back one step in the menu.
CHAPTER 3
EVC Control Panel Features
The padlock when depressed and lit indicates a locked position and the engine can only be controlled by the control panel.
The key is used to energize and lock the control panel.
Indicator: (Red light):
Off: Panel not energized
Lit: Panel energized
Flashing: Indicates the control is not in the neutral & panel not energized.
Indicator
Lights This is the neutral button which is used with the control handle to advance the throttle in the neutral position or to simply disengage from forward or reverse gears.
Typical EVC
Remote Control
The navigation wheel is used to
“surf ” through various menus as part of the EVC tachometer display. Turn the wheel to the desired menu and depress the navigation wheel button.
The multi-function button is a dimmer switch for the display panel backlighting. Depress the button for 1 second to turn the backlighting on and off. Depress the button up to 5 times for different brightness levels.
3-22
The back button is used to revert back one step in the menu.
Engines & Controls
EVC Control- Operating In Throttle Only Mode
Make sure the control handle is in the neutral position. On the EVC control panel press the neutral button and hold it down. Move the conrol handle slightly forward (about in forward gear position without any additional throttle which will advance the throttle for engine
Control Shown warm-up in the neutral position.
In Neutral Idle
Release the neutral button. On
Position the EVC panel you will see the green indicator light begin to fl ash which indicates the shift function is disengaged.
The handle is now positioned in the throttle only mode. The engine can be started and warmed up properly at a low rpm.
When the control lever is returned to the neutral position it will re-engage automatically. At that point the indicator light will show a constant green light.
EVC Control- Shifting From Neutral Into Forward Or
Reverse
With the control handle in the neutral position and the engine running at idle, depress the interlock button. While holding the interlock button in move the control handle out of neutral to either forward or reverse.
As a safety feature the control reaches the forward or reverse detent positions before picking up any throttle.
Engines & Controls
EVC Control- Operating In Throttle Only Mode
Make sure the control handle is in the neutral position. On the EVC control panel press the neutral button and hold it down. Move the conrol handle slightly forward (about in forward gear position without any additional throttle which will advance the throttle for engine
Control Shown warm-up in the neutral position.
In Neutral Idle
Release the neutral button. On
Position the EVC panel you will see the green indicator light begin to fl ash which indicates the shift function is disengaged.
The handle is now positioned in the throttle only mode. The engine can be started and warmed up properly at a low rpm.
When the control lever is returned to the neutral position it will re-engage automatically. At that point the indicator light will show a constant green light.
EVC Control- Shifting From Neutral Into Forward Or
Reverse
With the control handle in the neutral position and the engine running at idle, depress the interlock button. While holding the interlock button in move the control handle out of neutral to either forward or reverse.
As a safety feature the control reaches the forward or reverse detent positions before picking up any throttle.
3-23 3-23
CHAPTER 3
Safety Lanyard (Interrupt Switch)
The safety lanyard (used on selected remote controls) sometimes called an interrupter switch is attached to the operator and the remote control panel (See the illustrations). Should the operator lose control of the vessel and become dislodged from his seat or fall overboard the lanyard will shut the engine off.
ATTACH TO
OPERATOR
CHAPTER 3
Safety Lanyard (Interrupt Switch)
The safety lanyard (used on selected remote controls) sometimes called an interrupter switch is attached to the operator and the remote control panel (See the illustrations). Should the operator lose control of the vessel and become dislodged from his seat or fall overboard the lanyard will shut the engine off.
ATTACH TO
OPERATOR
Make sure the lanyard is installed to a part of clothing such as a belt before operating the vessel. Never disconnect the hook from attached clothing while the engine is running.
NOTICE
IF THE INTERRUPT SWITCH
IS IN THE “OFF” POSITION
THE ENGINE WILL CRANK OVER
BUT WILL NOT START.
!
WARNING
INTERRUPT SWITCH MUST BE ATTACHED TO
OPERATOR WHILE ENGINE IS RUNNING.
QUALIFIED OPERATOR MUST BE IN CONTROL
AT ALL TIMES. READ OWNER'S MANUAL BEFORE USE
3-24
Make sure the lanyard is installed to a part of clothing such as a belt before operating the vessel. Never disconnect the hook from attached clothing while the engine is running.
NOTICE
IF THE INTERRUPT SWITCH
IS IN THE “OFF” POSITION
THE ENGINE WILL CRANK OVER
BUT WILL NOT START.
!
WARNING
INTERRUPT SWITCH MUST BE ATTACHED TO
OPERATOR WHILE ENGINE IS RUNNING.
QUALIFIED OPERATOR MUST BE IN CONTROL
AT ALL TIMES. READ OWNER'S MANUAL BEFORE USE
3-24
Systems
ELECTRICAL
The electrical system on board your vessel is known as direct current
(DC for short). It is referred to as DC because electricity fl ows oneway in the circuit. Most DC circuits identify positive (+) wires as red and negative (-) wires as black.
Direct Current (12 volts)
Storage batteries (sometimes called lead-acid cell batteries) furnish 12 volts of electricity to boat components. Storage batteries use 2 dissimilar metals immersed in an liquid to carry current
(acid). The engines require large reserve amounts of battery power for starting purposes. The automobile battery is charged up by the engine alternator as is the marine battery. The dash volt meter displays the battery voltage. If the volt meter shows less than 12 volts there could be a charging system malfunction. This condition needs to be investigated before the battery(ies) become completely drained. The typical battery is maintenance free and features 650 to 1000 cold cranking amps (CCA).
Check chapter 7 for battery maintenance information.
Note: Never disconnect a batery terminal with the engine running as charging system damage may result.
4-1
Systems
ELECTRICAL
The electrical system on board your vessel is known as direct current
(DC for short). It is referred to as DC because electricity fl ows oneway in the circuit. Most DC circuits identify positive (+) wires as red and negative (-) wires as black.
Direct Current (12 volts)
Storage batteries (sometimes called lead-acid cell batteries) furnish 12 volts of electricity to boat components. Storage batteries use 2 dissimilar metals immersed in an liquid to carry current
(acid). The engines require large reserve amounts of battery power for starting purposes. The automobile battery is charged up by the engine alternator as is the marine battery. The dash volt meter displays the battery voltage. If the volt meter shows less than 12 volts there could be a charging system malfunction. This condition needs to be investigated before the battery(ies) become completely drained. The typical battery is maintenance free and features 650 to 1000 cold cranking amps (CCA).
Check chapter 7 for battery maintenance information.
Note: Never disconnect a batery terminal with the engine running as charging system damage may result.
4-1
CHAPTER 4
WIRE COLOR CODES (solid color/stripe)
Battery Engine
Brown/White 16
Brown/Red 16
Aft Auto Bilge Pump
Fwd. Auto Bilge Pump
Refrigerator, Ram
CHAPTER 4
WIRE COLOR CODES (solid color/stripe)
Battery Engine
Brown/White 16
Brown/Red 16
Aft Auto Bilge Pump
Fwd. Auto Bilge Pump
Refrigerator, Ram
4-2 4-2
Systems
WIRE COLOR CODES (CON’T.)
Blue/White 16
Gray/White 16
Gray/Black 16
Transom Courtesy Lights
Mast Light (Fwd. Running)
Mast Light (Anchor Light)
Gas Stereo
Red 6 Positive Feed, Alt. Charge
Systems
WIRE COLOR CODES (CON’T.)
Blue/White 16
Gray/White 16
Gray/Black 16
Transom Courtesy Lights
Mast Light (Fwd. Running)
Mast Light (Anchor Light)
Gas Stereo
Red 6 Positive Feed, Alt. Charge
4-3 4-3
CHAPTER 4
The standard wire color, gauge size and function shown is used throughout the marine industry. The charts are helpful in identifying wire circuitry during troubleshooting or the adding of marine accessories. Never replace a wire with a size other than shown in the chart. This practice could result in fi re or component failure.
DC Switches
Following are the direct current switches used on your Regal boat. Your boat may not use some of the switches mentioned because they represent optional
equipment not installed on your vessel. These switches are located on the dash switch panel. Note: electrical components and specifi cations may change at any time.
Typical Port Switch Panel
CHAPTER 4
The standard wire color, gauge size and function shown is used throughout the marine industry. The charts are helpful in identifying wire circuitry during troubleshooting or the adding of marine accessories. Never replace a wire with a size other than shown in the chart. This practice could result in fi re or component failure.
DC Switches
Following are the direct current switches used on your Regal boat. Your boat may not use some of the switches mentioned because they represent optional
equipment not installed on your vessel. These switches are located on the dash switch panel. Note: electrical components and specifi cations may change at any time.
Typical Port Switch Panel
Typical Starboard Switch Panel
4-4
Typical Starboard Switch Panel
4-4
Systems
Horn
This switch controls the audible horn signal. Your vessel features an electric horn. It is located at the starboard forward hull. It is protected by a stainless grille cover. Be sure to test the horn before each outing and learn horn and bridge signals.
Bilge Blower
This switch controls the bilge ventilation blower. The blower’s function is to evaculate any fumes and engine exhaust gases that have accumulated in the lower bilge. The blower must be activated at least 4
minutes prior to starting the engine. Check the ventilation ducts and black bilge hose to ensure they are not obstructed. Be careful not to step on the bilge hoses when doing bilge maintenance. The blower shall be used below cruising speeds.
!
WARNING
GASOLINE VAPORS CAN EXPLODE. BEFORE STARTING
ENGINE, OPERATE BLOWER 4 MINUTES AND CHECK
ENGINE COMPARTMENT FOR GASOLINE LEAKS OR
VAPORS. RUN BLOWER BELOW CRUSING SPEED.
Nav/Anc
This switch controls the running and stern lights. It is a two position switch. Activate the forward section and the running lights (navigation and stern lights) are activated along with the instrumentation and switch lights for night running. Activate the aft portion and the stern light (360 degree light) is activated. Remember the navigation lights, sometimes called running lights must be used between sunset and sunrise. Should you anchor or stop the vessel at night the 360 degree light is required to be lit.
4-5
Systems
Horn
This switch controls the audible horn signal. Your vessel features an electric horn. It is located at the starboard forward hull. It is protected by a stainless grille cover. Be sure to test the horn before each outing and learn horn and bridge signals.
Bilge Blower
This switch controls the bilge ventilation blower. The blower’s function is to evaculate any fumes and engine exhaust gases that have accumulated in the lower bilge. The blower must be activated at least 4
minutes prior to starting the engine. Check the ventilation ducts and black bilge hose to ensure they are not obstructed. Be careful not to step on the bilge hoses when doing bilge maintenance. The blower shall be used below cruising speeds.
!
WARNING
GASOLINE VAPORS CAN EXPLODE. BEFORE STARTING
ENGINE, OPERATE BLOWER 4 MINUTES AND CHECK
ENGINE COMPARTMENT FOR GASOLINE LEAKS OR
VAPORS. RUN BLOWER BELOW CRUSING SPEED.
Nav/Anc
This switch controls the running and stern lights. It is a two position switch. Activate the forward section and the running lights (navigation and stern lights) are activated along with the instrumentation and switch lights for night running. Activate the aft portion and the stern light (360 degree light) is activated. Remember the navigation lights, sometimes called running lights must be used between sunset and sunrise. Should you anchor or stop the vessel at night the 360 degree light is required to be lit.
4-5
CHAPTER 4
Bilge Pump
This switch controls the bilge pump located in the engine compartment. Mechanically, the switch features a manual position forward and an off position. When the switch is manually activated the bilge pump sends the accumulated bilge water overboard. There is an outlet on the starboard aft hull where you can visually monitor the bilge water.
The bilge pump uses an automatic fl oat switch. In the “off ” position the fl oat switch activates the bilge pump as needed. This feature is especially useful when the vessel is moored and vacant. There is a built-in lighted icon on the bilge pump switch that illuminates when the automatic mode is activated. The operator should monitor this icon periodically while operating the vessel. If the light activates stop the vessel and investigate the problem. Check the bilge pump before each outing and remove any foreign objects caught in the fl oat switch or bilge pump grating. Never run the bilge pump in a dry mode since it may shorten the pump life. The bilge pump is energized even with the battery switch turned to the “off ” position.
Docking Lights
This switch controls the forward hull docking lights. They are very useful for night maneuvering and docking.
Cockpit Lights
This switch controls the courtesy lights in the cockpit area. Using these lights is especially useful for night boarding or exiting.
Accessory (Acc.)
This switch controls any after market equipment installed. Make sure any components are matched to the over current protection (fuse).
4-6
CHAPTER 4
Bilge Pump
This switch controls the bilge pump located in the engine compartment. Mechanically, the switch features a manual position forward and an off position. When the switch is manually activated the bilge pump sends the accumulated bilge water overboard. There is an outlet on the starboard aft hull where you can visually monitor the bilge water.
The bilge pump uses an automatic fl oat switch. In the “off ” position the fl oat switch activates the bilge pump as needed. This feature is especially useful when the vessel is moored and vacant. There is a built-in lighted icon on the bilge pump switch that illuminates when the automatic mode is activated. The operator should monitor this icon periodically while operating the vessel. If the light activates stop the vessel and investigate the problem. Check the bilge pump before each outing and remove any foreign objects caught in the fl oat switch or bilge pump grating. Never run the bilge pump in a dry mode since it may shorten the pump life. The bilge pump is energized even with the battery switch turned to the “off ” position.
Docking Lights
This switch controls the forward hull docking lights. They are very useful for night maneuvering and docking.
Cockpit Lights
This switch controls the courtesy lights in the cockpit area. Using these lights is especially useful for night boarding or exiting.
Accessory (Acc.)
This switch controls any after market equipment installed. Make sure any components are matched to the over current protection (fuse).
4-6
Systems
Fresh Water Pump
This switch controls the pressurized water system fresh water pump for the head or cockpit refreshment faucet and transom shower.
Periodically check and clean the in-line fi lter on the inlet side of the fresh water pump. Make sure this switch is turned to the “off ” position before debarking. Be sure to winterize the fresh water system in colder climates. See the storage chapter.
Sport Tower/Arch
This switch is used to lower the sport tower to a forward position as needed for bridge clearance and for highway towing. Be sure to read and understand the warning below before operating the (Tower) arch switch.
Systems
Fresh Water Pump
This switch controls the pressurized water system fresh water pump for the head or cockpit refreshment faucet and transom shower.
Periodically check and clean the in-line fi lter on the inlet side of the fresh water pump. Make sure this switch is turned to the “off ” position before debarking. Be sure to winterize the fresh water system in colder climates. See the storage chapter.
Sport Tower/Arch
This switch is used to lower the sport tower to a forward position as needed for bridge clearance and for highway towing. Be sure to read and understand the warning below before operating the (Tower) arch switch.
!
WARNING
TO AVOID PERSONAL INJURY
KEEP ALL BODY PARTS AWAY
FROM THE SPORT TOWER AND LIFT COMPONENTS
WHILE OPERATING THE SPORT TOWER SWITCH.
4-7
!
WARNING
TO AVOID PERSONAL INJURY
KEEP ALL BODY PARTS AWAY
FROM THE SPORT TOWER AND LIFT COMPONENTS
WHILE OPERATING THE SPORT TOWER SWITCH.
4-7
CHAPTER 4
DC BREAKER & FUSE LISTING
Function Breaker/Fuse Size Fuse Or Breaker
Ignition 20
Water Pressure Pump 5
Breaker
Fuse
Docking Lights
Breaker
Cockpit
7.5 Fuse
Nav/Anchor Lights 10
Stereo Performance 30
Fuse
Breaker
Fuse
Fuse
Horn Fuse
Automatic Fire Ext. .5 Fuse
Fuse
12 Volt Outlet 15
Main Dash Feed (red) 50/60
Fuse
Breaker
4-8
CHAPTER 4
DC BREAKER & FUSE LISTING
Function Breaker/Fuse Size Fuse Or Breaker
Ignition 20
Water Pressure Pump 5
Breaker
Fuse
Docking Lights
Breaker
Cockpit
7.5 Fuse
Nav/Anchor Lights 10
Stereo Performance 30
Fuse
Breaker
Fuse
Fuse
Horn Fuse
Automatic Fire Ext. .5 Fuse
Fuse
12 Volt Outlet 15
Main Dash Feed (red) 50/60
Fuse
Breaker
4-8
Fuse
Systems
Stereo Performance 30
Package
Breaker
Fuse
Systems
Stereo Performance 30
Package
Breaker
4-9 4-9
CHAPTER 4
DC Circuit Protection
As part of the direct current circuitry (DC for short) the engine features a breaker with a reset button. This breaker protects the engine wiring from overloads. Refer to the engine manufacturer’s manual for the breaker location and operation.
In addition, there are fuses protecting the individual switches located under the helm accessible at the port bow backrest or found under the dash itself. See page 11. Always fi nd the reason a breaker or fuse fails and repair the problem before replacing the parts. Replace with the same amperage and type breaker or fuse. Carry extra ones which are available at marine supply stores or your closest Regal dealer’s parts department.
Battery Switch
The battery switch displays 2 functions; off and on.
Turn the knob to the “on” position before cranking over the engine. Never turn the battery switch to the “off ” position with the engine running.
The battery switch is located under the rear bench seat on the starboard side of the cockpit. Since the automatic bilge pump fl oat switch and stereo memory are wired directly to the battery switch you can leave the vessel and still have the vessel bilge pump energized with the battery switch in the “off ” position along with the stereo retaining its pre-set functions and stations.
Main DC Breaker
Near the battery switch are several electrical components. One of the items is a breaker normally 50/60 amps with a red reset button. This breaker protects the main red power lead running up to the dash.
4-10
CHAPTER 4
DC Circuit Protection
As part of the direct current circuitry (DC for short) the engine features a breaker with a reset button. This breaker protects the engine wiring from overloads. Refer to the engine manufacturer’s manual for the breaker location and operation.
In addition, there are fuses protecting the individual switches located under the helm accessible at the port bow backrest or found under the dash itself. See page 11. Always fi nd the reason a breaker or fuse fails and repair the problem before replacing the parts. Replace with the same amperage and type breaker or fuse. Carry extra ones which are available at marine supply stores or your closest Regal dealer’s parts department.
Battery Switch
The battery switch displays 2 functions; off and on.
Turn the knob to the “on” position before cranking over the engine. Never turn the battery switch to the “off ” position with the engine running.
The battery switch is located under the rear bench seat on the starboard side of the cockpit. Since the automatic bilge pump fl oat switch and stereo memory are wired directly to the battery switch you can leave the vessel and still have the vessel bilge pump energized with the battery switch in the “off ” position along with the stereo retaining its pre-set functions and stations.
Main DC Breaker
Near the battery switch are several electrical components. One of the items is a breaker normally 50/60 amps with a red reset button. This breaker protects the main red power lead running up to the dash.
4-10
Systems
A stereo memory fuse is located near the battery switch or under the dash. Should the batteries be disconnected for a short period of time the stereo memory of selected stations and other functions remains intact.
The aft bilge pump fuse protects the bilge pump normally located under the dash or on the fuse block under the starboard helm.
If the vessel features the stereo performance package a 30 amp breaker protects the stereo system wiring. The resettable breaker is normally found near the battery switch beside the main DC breaker.
50 AMP MAIN
BREAKER
30 AMP STEREO
P E R F O R M A N C E
BREAKER
NOTICE
AVOID DAMAGE TO THE ALTERNATOR
AND OR CHARGING SYSTEM COMPONENTS.
NEVER TURN THE BATTERY SWITCH TO THE “OFF”
POSITION WITH THE ENGINE RUNNING.
Systems
A stereo memory fuse is located near the battery switch or under the dash. Should the batteries be disconnected for a short period of time the stereo memory of selected stations and other functions remains intact.
The aft bilge pump fuse protects the bilge pump normally located under the dash or on the fuse block under the starboard helm.
If the vessel features the stereo performance package a 30 amp breaker protects the stereo system wiring. The resettable breaker is normally found near the battery switch beside the main DC breaker.
50 AMP MAIN
BREAKER
30 AMP STEREO
P E R F O R M A N C E
BREAKER
NOTICE
AVOID DAMAGE TO THE ALTERNATOR
AND OR CHARGING SYSTEM COMPONENTS.
NEVER TURN THE BATTERY SWITCH TO THE “OFF”
POSITION WITH THE ENGINE RUNNING.
4-11 4-11
CHAPTER 4
Electrical Components Under Helm
CHAPTER 4
Electrical Components Under Helm
The main DC fuse block is located under the helm or dash. It may be accessible by lifting up the starboard bow backrest. The fuse block offers over protection to on-board equipment components through color coded fuses. Notice that each component protected is labeled.
When replacing fuses use the same amperage. Fuses are available from your Regal dealer or automotive parts outlets. Periodically check all electrical connections at the fuse block for tightness.
In addition, a satellite tuner/antenna may be located under the helm.
If a stereo performance package is installed one amplifi er is normally located under the helm or may be in the cockpit refreshment center cabinet on select models. With tower speakers a second amplifi er is added.
4-12
The main DC fuse block is located under the helm or dash. It may be accessible by lifting up the starboard bow backrest. The fuse block offers over protection to on-board equipment components through color coded fuses. Notice that each component protected is labeled.
When replacing fuses use the same amperage. Fuses are available from your Regal dealer or automotive parts outlets. Periodically check all electrical connections at the fuse block for tightness.
In addition, a satellite tuner/antenna may be located under the helm.
If a stereo performance package is installed one amplifi er is normally located under the helm or may be in the cockpit refreshment center cabinet on select models. With tower speakers a second amplifi er is added.
4-12
Systems
FUEL
The fuel system consists of a fuel tank, fuel fi ll fi ttings marked “gas” or
“diesel”, fuel hoses, fuel vents, anti-siphon valve, fuel fi lter, fuel gauge and sender. Each one of these components plays an important role in providing an uninterrupted fl ow of fuel while operating your boat.
Refer to the technical drawing section for system specifi cs.
Fuel Tank
Your boat uses an aluminum or polyester fuel tank. These tanks are tested several times along with the fuel system components for safety requirements and dependability in house and inspected independently by National Marine Manufacturers Association personnel.
Fuel Fill
The fuel fi ll is labeled “gas” or “diesel” and is located at the starboard deck for more convenient fi lling. When fueling the boat keep the fi ll nozzle in contact with the fuel fi ll pipe since it decreases static electricity.
Always use the recommended fuel octane rating as specifi ed in your engine owners manual. Extinguish all fl ame producing agents
before fueling! Read the fueling section in chapter 5.
Systems
FUEL
The fuel system consists of a fuel tank, fuel fi ll fi ttings marked “gas” or
“diesel”, fuel hoses, fuel vents, anti-siphon valve, fuel fi lter, fuel gauge and sender. Each one of these components plays an important role in providing an uninterrupted fl ow of fuel while operating your boat.
Refer to the technical drawing section for system specifi cs.
Fuel Tank
Your boat uses an aluminum or polyester fuel tank. These tanks are tested several times along with the fuel system components for safety requirements and dependability in house and inspected independently by National Marine Manufacturers Association personnel.
Fuel Fill
The fuel fi ll is labeled “gas” or “diesel” and is located at the starboard deck for more convenient fi lling. When fueling the boat keep the fi ll nozzle in contact with the fuel fi ll pipe since it decreases static electricity.
Always use the recommended fuel octane rating as specifi ed in your engine owners manual. Extinguish all fl ame producing agents
before fueling! Read the fueling section in chapter 5.
4-13 4-13
CHAPTER 4
Fuel Vent
Fuel tanks are vented overboard for the fumes to escape. While the tank is fi lled, air displaced by the incoming fuel is relieved through the fuel vent.
The fuel fill is located at the starboard deck.
Your vessel uses a combo type
(internal vented) fuel fi ll. Both the fuel fi ll and vent occupy the same cavity under a protective cover. If fuel overfl ows through the vent the design forces it back into the
COMBO FUEL FILL W/
INTERNAL VENT fuel fi ll hose and tank.
A seasoned skipper will hear a distinct sound as the tank nears the “top out” or full mode and may see fuel overfl owing back into the fuel hose through the vent. This helps avoid any overboard spills which harm the environment. There is a key that fi ts the fuel fi ll. Use it to secure the fi tting from leaking fuel. Store the key in a safe place so it can be easily found for fueling.
Check the vent fi ll screen periodically for debris.
Anti-Siphon Valve
The fuel feed line is equipped with an anti-siphon valve.The valve is screwed into the fuel tank fi tting at the feed line. The valve is pulled off its seat by fuel pump pressure as the engine is cranking or running.
It allows a one-way fuel roadway to the engine fuel pump . It prevents fuel from siphoning out of the tank in the event of a fuel line rupture or disconnected fuel feed hose. See the fuel tank maintenance chapter for more specifi c information on the anti-siphon valve location. Never remove the anti-siphon valve as it is a fuel system safety item.
4-14
CHAPTER 4
Fuel Vent
Fuel tanks are vented overboard for the fumes to escape. While the tank is fi lled, air displaced by the incoming fuel is relieved through the fuel vent.
The fuel fill is located at the starboard deck.
Your vessel uses a combo type
(internal vented) fuel fi ll. Both the fuel fi ll and vent occupy the same cavity under a protective cover. If fuel overfl ows through the vent the design forces it back into the
COMBO FUEL FILL W/
INTERNAL VENT fuel fi ll hose and tank.
A seasoned skipper will hear a distinct sound as the tank nears the “top out” or full mode and may see fuel overfl owing back into the fuel hose through the vent. This helps avoid any overboard spills which harm the environment. There is a key that fi ts the fuel fi ll. Use it to secure the fi tting from leaking fuel. Store the key in a safe place so it can be easily found for fueling.
Check the vent fi ll screen periodically for debris.
Anti-Siphon Valve
The fuel feed line is equipped with an anti-siphon valve.The valve is screwed into the fuel tank fi tting at the feed line. The valve is pulled off its seat by fuel pump pressure as the engine is cranking or running.
It allows a one-way fuel roadway to the engine fuel pump . It prevents fuel from siphoning out of the tank in the event of a fuel line rupture or disconnected fuel feed hose. See the fuel tank maintenance chapter for more specifi c information on the anti-siphon valve location. Never remove the anti-siphon valve as it is a fuel system safety item.
4-14
Systems
To clean or replace a clogged or stuck anti-siphon valve contact your closest Regal dealer or marine professional.
Fuel Gauge & Sender
The dash fuel gauge is an estimate of the on board fuel supply. They are not exact reading instruments. Therefore, use the one third rule discussed earlier for monitoring your fuel supply. The fuel sender located in the fuel tank sends a signal to the dash fuel gauge. The signal is shown through a gauge needle movement which indicates estimated fuel. Remember, there are not many fi lling stations on the open waterways!
Fuel Filter
A fuel fi lter is installed on marine engines. They are of the spin on type similar to an automobile oil fi lter. Their main purpose is to trap dirt particles and water in fuel. It is a good idea to keep an extra fuel fi lter on board along with a fi lter wrench, catch pan and clean rags for emergencies. Dispose of all fuel residue materials in an environmentally safe fashion.
Diesel Fuel System
Diesel boats use special fuel fi lters. Most of these fi lters have a thumb screw to drain settled particles via the bottom of the fi lter. Refer to your engine owner’s manual for further information.
!
CAUTION
ALGAE CAN GROW IN DIESEL FUEL.
PERIODICALLY ADD A CONDITIONER
TO THE DIESEL FUEL SYSTEM.
4-15
Systems
To clean or replace a clogged or stuck anti-siphon valve contact your closest Regal dealer or marine professional.
Fuel Gauge & Sender
The dash fuel gauge is an estimate of the on board fuel supply. They are not exact reading instruments. Therefore, use the one third rule discussed earlier for monitoring your fuel supply. The fuel sender located in the fuel tank sends a signal to the dash fuel gauge. The signal is shown through a gauge needle movement which indicates estimated fuel. Remember, there are not many fi lling stations on the open waterways!
Fuel Filter
A fuel fi lter is installed on marine engines. They are of the spin on type similar to an automobile oil fi lter. Their main purpose is to trap dirt particles and water in fuel. It is a good idea to keep an extra fuel fi lter on board along with a fi lter wrench, catch pan and clean rags for emergencies. Dispose of all fuel residue materials in an environmentally safe fashion.
Diesel Fuel System
Diesel boats use special fuel fi lters. Most of these fi lters have a thumb screw to drain settled particles via the bottom of the fi lter. Refer to your engine owner’s manual for further information.
!
CAUTION
ALGAE CAN GROW IN DIESEL FUEL.
PERIODICALLY ADD A CONDITIONER
TO THE DIESEL FUEL SYSTEM.
4-15
CHAPTER 4
PRESSURIZED FRESH WATER SYSTEM
If equipped, a fresh water supply system consists of a water tank, fi ll/vent, head and/or cockpit refreshment sink, drain hose, faucet and transom shower. Water is supplied by a pressurized fresh water fi ll with an internal vent. When the water tank reaches full capacity water will be seen cycling from the vent into the fi ll hose. To energize the
DECK WATER FILL system there is a dash switch marked fresh water pump. When activated the switch sends power to the pressure pump which supplies on demand fresh water.
When the water supply line is full a pressure valve switch releases and the fresh water pump stops.
We recommend turning the dash fresh water pressure switch “off ” when the vessel is left for extended periods. For initial fi lling of the freshwater system and winterizing refer to the operation and maintenance sections.
CHAPTER 4
PRESSURIZED FRESH WATER SYSTEM
If equipped, a fresh water supply system consists of a water tank, fi ll/vent, head and/or cockpit refreshment sink, drain hose, faucet and transom shower. Water is supplied by a pressurized fresh water fi ll with an internal vent. When the water tank reaches full capacity water will be seen cycling from the vent into the fi ll hose. To energize the
DECK WATER FILL system there is a dash switch marked fresh water pump. When activated the switch sends power to the pressure pump which supplies on demand fresh water.
When the water supply line is full a pressure valve switch releases and the fresh water pump stops.
We recommend turning the dash fresh water pressure switch “off ” when the vessel is left for extended periods. For initial fi lling of the freshwater system and winterizing refer to the operation and maintenance sections.
4-16 4-16
Systems
WASTE SYSTEM
Chemical Toilet
The waste system consists of a self-contained sanitation device known as a chemical toilet. It features an upper fresh water tank and a lower deodorized tank. These two components can be separated for waste disposal, cleaning and refi lling. The lower tank contains a capacity gauge. Before each outing, check the waste level since it is illegal to dump waste within and extending out to the United States territorial limit.
Be sure to use the proper chemicals and paper in the unit that are biodegradable and environmentally friendly.
Chemical toilet supplies are available at most marine oultlet stores and marinas. If installed, a pump out waste fi tting is located on the deck that permits a pump out station hookup for removing waste. This procedure saves manually dumping the tank. Pump-out stations can be found at selected marinas.
VacuFlush® Toilet
If the vacufl ush toilet is installed on your vessel reference chaper 6 for further information.
Systems
WASTE SYSTEM
Chemical Toilet
The waste system consists of a self-contained sanitation device known as a chemical toilet. It features an upper fresh water tank and a lower deodorized tank. These two components can be separated for waste disposal, cleaning and refi lling. The lower tank contains a capacity gauge. Before each outing, check the waste level since it is illegal to dump waste within and extending out to the United States territorial limit.
Be sure to use the proper chemicals and paper in the unit that are biodegradable and environmentally friendly.
Chemical toilet supplies are available at most marine oultlet stores and marinas. If installed, a pump out waste fi tting is located on the deck that permits a pump out station hookup for removing waste. This procedure saves manually dumping the tank. Pump-out stations can be found at selected marinas.
VacuFlush® Toilet
If the vacufl ush toilet is installed on your vessel reference chaper 6 for further information.
4-17 4-17
4-18
CHAPTER 4
TYPICAL CHEMICAL TOILET
FLUSHING BELLOWS
FRESH WATER TANK
DEODORIZED WASTE TANK
HOLD DOWN
BRACKET
LIFT & PULL FORWARD
TO REMOVE HEAD UNIT
CHAPTER 4
TYPICAL CHEMICAL TOILET
FLUSHING BELLOWS
FRESH WATER TANK
DEODORIZED WASTE TANK
HOLD DOWN
BRACKET
LIFT & PULL FORWARD
TO REMOVE HEAD UNIT
4-18
Vessel Operation
This chapter explores the many faucets of running your vessel from casting off to docking and handling emergencies. We cover the basics but suggest you read other information on the chapter topics. Also, become familiar with your engine owner’s manual since many of the items discussed here are found there in more detail.
GETTING UNDERWAY
Pre-Departure Questionnaire
Have all fl uid levels been topped off?
Is the fuel tank full?
Is all safety equipment accounted for and easily accessible?
Are navigation lights and horn in good working condition?
Is the bilge free of water and does the bilge pump operate?
Is the engine, stern drive, and propeller in good working
condition?
Is the drain plug in place ?
Have all passengers been briefed on emergency procedures and
seated for departure? Is the boat load balanced?
5-1
Vessel Operation
This chapter explores the many faucets of running your vessel from casting off to docking and handling emergencies. We cover the basics but suggest you read other information on the chapter topics. Also, become familiar with your engine owner’s manual since many of the items discussed here are found there in more detail.
GETTING UNDERWAY
Pre-Departure Questionnaire
Have all fl uid levels been topped off?
Is the fuel tank full?
Is all safety equipment accounted for and easily accessible?
Are navigation lights and horn in good working condition?
Is the bilge free of water and does the bilge pump operate?
Is the engine, stern drive, and propeller in good working
condition?
Is the drain plug in place ?
Have all passengers been briefed on emergency procedures and
seated for departure? Is the boat load balanced?
5-1
CHAPTER 5
Is the operator sober, alert and ready to skipper the vessel?
Have all passengers been fi tted for life jackets?
Has a fl oat plan been fi led and left with a component person?
Has the bilge been sniffed and the fuel system leak checked?
Are the seacocks open (if applicable)?
Is all communication equipment in good operating condition?
Has a second person been briefed on operational procedures
should the skipper become disabled?
Are all gauges and electrical switches functioning properly?
Has weather information been gathered and analyzed?
Underway Questionnaire
After casting off have all dock lines and fenders been stowed?
Are all passengers seated and all transom doors closed?
As skipper are you monitoring the dash gauges for changes?
As skipper are you on the lookout for changing weather?
As skipper are you checking for abnormal vibration?
Is the remote control safety lanyard (if equipped) tightly
secured to your belt or clothing?
5-2
CHAPTER 5
Is the operator sober, alert and ready to skipper the vessel?
Have all passengers been fi tted for life jackets?
Has a fl oat plan been fi led and left with a component person?
Has the bilge been sniffed and the fuel system leak checked?
Are the seacocks open (if applicable)?
Is all communication equipment in good operating condition?
Has a second person been briefed on operational procedures
should the skipper become disabled?
Are all gauges and electrical switches functioning properly?
Has weather information been gathered and analyzed?
Underway Questionnaire
After casting off have all dock lines and fenders been stowed?
Are all passengers seated and all transom doors closed?
As skipper are you monitoring the dash gauges for changes?
As skipper are you on the lookout for changing weather?
As skipper are you checking for abnormal vibration?
Is the remote control safety lanyard (if equipped) tightly
secured to your belt or clothing?
5-2
Vessel Operation
Disembarking Questionnaire
Have you removed the keys from the ignition and secured them?
Have all systems been checked for leaks?
Has the battery switch been turned to the “off ” position?
Are all hatches and portholes secured and seacocks closed?
Has the fuel tank been fi lled enough to prevent condensation?
Is the vessel properly tied and covered with equipment stored?
FUELING
!
DANGER
AVOID PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH!
GASOLINE IS A HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
AND EXPLOSIVE MATERIAL.
PRACTICE “NO SMOKING” AND EXTINGUISH ALL
FLAMMABLE MATERIALS WITHIN 75 FEET
OF THE FUEL DOCK.
!
WARNING
AVOID SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH
FROM EXPLOSION OR FIRE
RESULTING FROM LEAKING FUEL.
INSPECT ENTIRE FUEL SYSTEM
AT LEAST ONCE A YEAR.
5-3
Vessel Operation
Disembarking Questionnaire
Have you removed the keys from the ignition and secured them?
Have all systems been checked for leaks?
Has the battery switch been turned to the “off ” position?
Are all hatches and portholes secured and seacocks closed?
Has the fuel tank been fi lled enough to prevent condensation?
Is the vessel properly tied and covered with equipment stored?
FUELING
!
DANGER
AVOID PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH!
GASOLINE IS A HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
AND EXPLOSIVE MATERIAL.
PRACTICE “NO SMOKING” AND EXTINGUISH ALL
FLAMMABLE MATERIALS WITHIN 75 FEET
OF THE FUEL DOCK.
!
WARNING
AVOID SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH
FROM EXPLOSION OR FIRE
RESULTING FROM LEAKING FUEL.
INSPECT ENTIRE FUEL SYSTEM
AT LEAST ONCE A YEAR.
5-3
CHAPTER 5
NOTICE
SINCE GASOLINE IS AVAILABLE IN SEVERAL GRADES
INCLUDING ETHENOL & VARIOUS OCTANE LEVELS,
REFER TO THE ENGINE MANUFACTURER’S OWNER’S
MANUAL FOR THE CORRECT ONE FOR YOUR ENGINE.
USING IMPROPER OCTANE FUEL CAN CAUSE
ENGINE DAMAGE AND VOID THE WARRANTY.
Before Fueling
Make sure a working fi re extinguisher is at close hand.
Stop engines and any device that can cause a spark.
Disembark all passengers and crew not needed for fueling.
Fuel if possible during the daylight hours.
Check to ensure nobody is smoking in the boat or near the
fueling dock.
Close all portholes, hatches and doors to keep vapors from
blowing aboard and settling in the bilge.
Tie up your boat securely at the fuel dock.
Identify the fuel fi ll. Unfortunately, people have mistakenly
fi lled the water or waste with fuel.
Visually inspect all fuel system components before each fi lling.
Consult engine owner’s manual for recommendations when
using fuels with alcohol additives.
5-4
CHAPTER 5
NOTICE
SINCE GASOLINE IS AVAILABLE IN SEVERAL GRADES
INCLUDING ETHENOL & VARIOUS OCTANE LEVELS,
REFER TO THE ENGINE MANUFACTURER’S OWNER’S
MANUAL FOR THE CORRECT ONE FOR YOUR ENGINE.
USING IMPROPER OCTANE FUEL CAN CAUSE
ENGINE DAMAGE AND VOID THE WARRANTY.
Before Fueling
Make sure a working fi re extinguisher is at close hand.
Stop engines and any device that can cause a spark.
Disembark all passengers and crew not needed for fueling.
Fuel if possible during the daylight hours.
Check to ensure nobody is smoking in the boat or near the
fueling dock.
Close all portholes, hatches and doors to keep vapors from
blowing aboard and settling in the bilge.
Tie up your boat securely at the fuel dock.
Identify the fuel fi ll. Unfortunately, people have mistakenly
fi lled the water or waste with fuel.
Visually inspect all fuel system components before each fi lling.
Consult engine owner’s manual for recommendations when
using fuels with alcohol additives.
5-4
Vessel Operation
During Fueling
Keep the fuel nozzle in contact with the fuel fi ll to guard against static sparks. The fuel fi ll pipe is grounded through the fuel system wiring to protect against static electricity.
Avoid overfi lling the fuel tank. Leave room for expansion. Also, if fuel exits the fuel vent indicating the tank is full, this situation is dangerous and unfriendly to the environment.
Avoid spilling any fuel. Clean up any fuel accidently spilled with a clean rag and dispose of it onshore.
After Fueling
Close all fuel fi ll openings tightly. Use a fuel key if needed.
Open all portholes, hatches and doors.
Energize the blower for a minimum of 4 minutes.
Sniff in the lower bilge and engine compartment for gas fumes.
If fumes are detected continue to ventilate until the odor is gone.
Look for any traces of fuel droplets or spillage. Do not start the engines, smoke or run any electrical components except the blower until the fumes can no longer be detected.
!
WARNING
AVOID SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH!
THE OPERATOR OF THE CRAFT MUST HAVE
COMPLETE CONTROL OF THE HELM STEERING
STATION WHILE THE VESSEL IS MOVING.
NEVER LEAVE THE HELM STATION UNATTENDED
WHILE THE VESSEL IS MOVING.
5-5
Vessel Operation
During Fueling
Keep the fuel nozzle in contact with the fuel fi ll to guard against static sparks. The fuel fi ll pipe is grounded through the fuel system wiring to protect against static electricity.
Avoid overfi lling the fuel tank. Leave room for expansion. Also, if fuel exits the fuel vent indicating the tank is full, this situation is dangerous and unfriendly to the environment.
Avoid spilling any fuel. Clean up any fuel accidently spilled with a clean rag and dispose of it onshore.
After Fueling
Close all fuel fi ll openings tightly. Use a fuel key if needed.
Open all portholes, hatches and doors.
Energize the blower for a minimum of 4 minutes.
Sniff in the lower bilge and engine compartment for gas fumes.
If fumes are detected continue to ventilate until the odor is gone.
Look for any traces of fuel droplets or spillage. Do not start the engines, smoke or run any electrical components except the blower until the fumes can no longer be detected.
!
WARNING
AVOID SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH!
THE OPERATOR OF THE CRAFT MUST HAVE
COMPLETE CONTROL OF THE HELM STEERING
STATION WHILE THE VESSEL IS MOVING.
NEVER LEAVE THE HELM STATION UNATTENDED
WHILE THE VESSEL IS MOVING.
5-5
CHAPTER 5
STARTING & STOPPING
The following general information covers starting and stopping your engine. Read and understand all previous information on remote controls, fueling and operational procedures. Pay particular attention to all labels. Refer to the engine owner’s manual for in depth propulsion system information.
Starting Guidelines
Review all pre-departure information. Before starting your engine make sure all canvas is removed and stored. Start engine only in a well ventilated location to avoid CO buildup. Turn the battery switch to the number 1 or 2 position.
Set the remote control handle in the neutral position. Advance the neutral throttle position as instructed in the engine owner’s manual.
Connect the safety lanyard to a belt or secure to clothing such as a pants belt loop. Keep passengers seated and away from controls.
!
DANGER
AVOID PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH!
WHEN ENGINE IS RUNNING TRANSOM DOOR MUST
BE CLOSED AND LOCKED. SWIM PLATFORM
AND LADDER MUST NOT BE IN USE.
!
WARNING
GASOLINE VAPORS CAN EXPLODE. BEFORE STARTING
ENGINE, OPERATE BLOWER 4 MINUTES AND CHECK
ENGINE COMPARTMENT FOR GASOLINE LEAKS OR
VAPORS. RUN BLOWER BELOW CRUSING SPEED.
5-6
CHAPTER 5
STARTING & STOPPING
The following general information covers starting and stopping your engine. Read and understand all previous information on remote controls, fueling and operational procedures. Pay particular attention to all labels. Refer to the engine owner’s manual for in depth propulsion system information.
Starting Guidelines
Review all pre-departure information. Before starting your engine make sure all canvas is removed and stored. Start engine only in a well ventilated location to avoid CO buildup. Turn the battery switch to the number 1 or 2 position.
Set the remote control handle in the neutral position. Advance the neutral throttle position as instructed in the engine owner’s manual.
Connect the safety lanyard to a belt or secure to clothing such as a pants belt loop. Keep passengers seated and away from controls.
!
DANGER
AVOID PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH!
WHEN ENGINE IS RUNNING TRANSOM DOOR MUST
BE CLOSED AND LOCKED. SWIM PLATFORM
AND LADDER MUST NOT BE IN USE.
!
WARNING
GASOLINE VAPORS CAN EXPLODE. BEFORE STARTING
ENGINE, OPERATE BLOWER 4 MINUTES AND CHECK
ENGINE COMPARTMENT FOR GASOLINE LEAKS OR
VAPORS. RUN BLOWER BELOW CRUSING SPEED.
5-6
Vessel Operation
Turn the ignition key to the momentarily start position. You will hear the starter cranking over the engine. When the engine starts release the key switch. It will automatically align itself in the run position (ignition).
If the engine does not start, refrain from cranking the engine over 10-
12 seconds. Allow the starter and battery a chance to recover. Advance the remote control in the neutral throttle position as recommended in the engine manual. Do not use excessive remote control throttle in the neutral position.
!
CAUTION
TO AVOID ENGINE DAMAGE!
CHECK THE OIL GAUGE IMMEDIATELY AFTER
STARTING. IF LOW OR NO READING SHUT DOWN
ENGINE IMMEDIATELY AND
INVESTIGATE THE PROBLEM.
Shifting Guidelines
Before shifting into reverse or forward gear positions make sure the coast is clear. When shifting to either gear from neutral make sure the throttle is in the idle position. Allow your vessel to lose all headway before shifting into reverse or forward gear. Practice shifting! You will become more familiar with the procedure and selfconfi dence will build especially in tight docking situations. Stay alert at all times!
Vessel Operation
Turn the ignition key to the momentarily start position. You will hear the starter cranking over the engine. When the engine starts release the key switch. It will automatically align itself in the run position (ignition).
If the engine does not start, refrain from cranking the engine over 10-
12 seconds. Allow the starter and battery a chance to recover. Advance the remote control in the neutral throttle position as recommended in the engine manual. Do not use excessive remote control throttle in the neutral position.
!
CAUTION
TO AVOID ENGINE DAMAGE!
CHECK THE OIL GAUGE IMMEDIATELY AFTER
STARTING. IF LOW OR NO READING SHUT DOWN
ENGINE IMMEDIATELY AND
INVESTIGATE THE PROBLEM.
Shifting Guidelines
Before shifting into reverse or forward gear positions make sure the coast is clear. When shifting to either gear from neutral make sure the throttle is in the idle position. Allow your vessel to lose all headway before shifting into reverse or forward gear. Practice shifting! You will become more familiar with the procedure and selfconfi dence will build especially in tight docking situations. Stay alert at all times!
5-7 5-7
CHAPTER 5
Stopping
Before stopping the engine make sure it is in neutral and idle speed.
After an outing let the engine cool down at idle speeds for a few minutes before turning the ignition off. Glance at the gauges one last time to monitor their readings. Do not pull on the safety lanyard verses the ignition switch to stop the engine. Never turn off the engine while in forward or reverse gear since water could enter the engine through the exhaust system and cause extensive damage. The same holds true for running the boat in reverse. Above all, use common sense.
STEERING
Your Regal features a rotary or rack style steering system. These systems transfer helm mechanical motion to the engine. There is a hydraulic steering cylinder which with the assistance of a steering pump sends fl uid force to the stern drive steering arm changing the course of the boat, depending on the direction the steering wheel is turned.
Since the steering system is the primary link for engine control, it must be periodically inspected and maintained. The hardware at both the helm and engine must be checked periodically for tightness.
Check the steering system for full steering port and starboard before disembarking. Refer to the steering manufacturer’s literature in the owner’s pouch and the maintenance chapter for more information.
!
WARNING
AVOID PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE!
LOOSENING OR LOSS OF ONE OR MORE FASTENERS
MAY CAUSE FAILURE OF THE STEERING SYSTEM
OR DAMAGE TO THE STEERING CABLE,
RESULTING IN LOSS OF STEERING CONTROL.
PERIODICALLY INSPECT THE STEERING SYSTEM.
5-8
CHAPTER 5
Stopping
Before stopping the engine make sure it is in neutral and idle speed.
After an outing let the engine cool down at idle speeds for a few minutes before turning the ignition off. Glance at the gauges one last time to monitor their readings. Do not pull on the safety lanyard verses the ignition switch to stop the engine. Never turn off the engine while in forward or reverse gear since water could enter the engine through the exhaust system and cause extensive damage. The same holds true for running the boat in reverse. Above all, use common sense.
STEERING
Your Regal features a rotary or rack style steering system. These systems transfer helm mechanical motion to the engine. There is a hydraulic steering cylinder which with the assistance of a steering pump sends fl uid force to the stern drive steering arm changing the course of the boat, depending on the direction the steering wheel is turned.
Since the steering system is the primary link for engine control, it must be periodically inspected and maintained. The hardware at both the helm and engine must be checked periodically for tightness.
Check the steering system for full steering port and starboard before disembarking. Refer to the steering manufacturer’s literature in the owner’s pouch and the maintenance chapter for more information.
!
WARNING
AVOID PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE!
LOOSENING OR LOSS OF ONE OR MORE FASTENERS
MAY CAUSE FAILURE OF THE STEERING SYSTEM
OR DAMAGE TO THE STEERING CABLE,
RESULTING IN LOSS OF STEERING CONTROL.
PERIODICALLY INSPECT THE STEERING SYSTEM.
5-8
Vessel Operation
!
CAUTION
AVOID PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE!
ABRUPT TURNS ABOVE 30 M.P.H. MAY RESULT
IN LOSS OF CONTROL.
STEERING RESPONSE AT HIGH SPEEDS
CAN BE VERY SUDDEN.
ABRUPT TURNS MAY CAUSE YOU
TO CROSS YOUR OWN WAKE.
JUMPING A WAKE, SUDDEN TURNS, AND INCREASES
OR DECREASES IN SPEEDS MAY BE DANGEROUS.
THE OPERATOR MUST MAKE SURE THAT ALL
PASSENGERS ARE SEATED SECURELY
BEFORE MAKING SPEED CHANGES.
Vessel Operation
!
CAUTION
AVOID PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE!
ABRUPT TURNS ABOVE 30 M.P.H. MAY RESULT
IN LOSS OF CONTROL.
STEERING RESPONSE AT HIGH SPEEDS
CAN BE VERY SUDDEN.
ABRUPT TURNS MAY CAUSE YOU
TO CROSS YOUR OWN WAKE.
JUMPING A WAKE, SUDDEN TURNS, AND INCREASES
OR DECREASES IN SPEEDS MAY BE DANGEROUS.
THE OPERATOR MUST MAKE SURE THAT ALL
PASSENGERS ARE SEATED SECURELY
BEFORE MAKING SPEED CHANGES.
5-9 5-9
CHAPTER 5 CHAPTER 5
5-10 5-10
Vessel Operation
FENDERS
Fender Usage
Fenders are normally made of a rubberized plastic and are usually fi lled with air. Most have a fi tting like a basketball so they can be infl ated or defl ated. Fenders are available in a wide range of sizes and shapes to fi t both small and large vessels. Fenders are normally designated in inches. They are used between piers, docks, sea walls and the boat.
They protect the top sides of the boat from rubbing against rough objects. Most fenders have eyes of attachment which allow a line to be inserted vertically or horizontally. This will permit the fender to be tied off to fi t a variety of marina, dock and tidal situations. Be sure the fender is correct for the vessel size. It is a good idea to carry extra fenders but half a dozen is normally an acceptable number. Remember to store fenders on board so they can be easily accessed. Some people incorrectly call fenders “bumpers”.
Fender Types
There is a variety of fender styles and types, each selected for specifi ed uses. When choosing fenders, contact a marine dealer or supply house. Explain how you moor and use your vessel so they can recommend the best fender type for you. We suggest the type with a fi ll plug so you can infl ate them with a hand pump like the ones used for bicycles.
Vessel Operation
FENDERS
Fender Usage
Fenders are normally made of a rubberized plastic and are usually fi lled with air. Most have a fi tting like a basketball so they can be infl ated or defl ated. Fenders are available in a wide range of sizes and shapes to fi t both small and large vessels. Fenders are normally designated in inches. They are used between piers, docks, sea walls and the boat.
They protect the top sides of the boat from rubbing against rough objects. Most fenders have eyes of attachment which allow a line to be inserted vertically or horizontally. This will permit the fender to be tied off to fi t a variety of marina, dock and tidal situations. Be sure the fender is correct for the vessel size. It is a good idea to carry extra fenders but half a dozen is normally an acceptable number. Remember to store fenders on board so they can be easily accessed. Some people incorrectly call fenders “bumpers”.
Fender Types
There is a variety of fender styles and types, each selected for specifi ed uses. When choosing fenders, contact a marine dealer or supply house. Explain how you moor and use your vessel so they can recommend the best fender type for you. We suggest the type with a fi ll plug so you can infl ate them with a hand pump like the ones used for bicycles.
5-11 5-11
CHAPTER 5
DOCK LINE BASICS
Most skippers use dock line terminology fairly loose but there is more to the basics than just bow or stern lines. There are several lines that can be secured to the bow and stern and depending on their direction and use, can be called other names.
Remember that “forward” and “aft” refer to the direction that a spring line runs from the vessel, and not where it is secured on board.
Bow & Stern Lines
There is only one true bow line. It is secured to the forward cleat and run forward along the dock to prevent the vessel from moving to the stern. The stern line leads from a rear cleat to a piling or cleat on the dock astern of the vessel. This line keeps the boat from moving ahead.
For small vessels these are the only lines needed for normal wind and current conditions. If located in a tidal environment, keep slack in the lines.
Breast Lines
These lines are attached to the bow and stern that lead to nearly right angles from the center of the vessel to the dock. They help keep larger vessels from moving away from the dock, or are pulled in to help people board the vessel. Larger vessels may use bow or quarter breast lines.
Spring Lines
Most small boats use two spring lines although it is possible to have four.
They are called the after bow spring and forward quarter spring.
5-12
CHAPTER 5
DOCK LINE BASICS
Most skippers use dock line terminology fairly loose but there is more to the basics than just bow or stern lines. There are several lines that can be secured to the bow and stern and depending on their direction and use, can be called other names.
Remember that “forward” and “aft” refer to the direction that a spring line runs from the vessel, and not where it is secured on board.
Bow & Stern Lines
There is only one true bow line. It is secured to the forward cleat and run forward along the dock to prevent the vessel from moving to the stern. The stern line leads from a rear cleat to a piling or cleat on the dock astern of the vessel. This line keeps the boat from moving ahead.
For small vessels these are the only lines needed for normal wind and current conditions. If located in a tidal environment, keep slack in the lines.
Breast Lines
These lines are attached to the bow and stern that lead to nearly right angles from the center of the vessel to the dock. They help keep larger vessels from moving away from the dock, or are pulled in to help people board the vessel. Larger vessels may use bow or quarter breast lines.
Spring Lines
Most small boats use two spring lines although it is possible to have four.
They are called the after bow spring and forward quarter spring.
5-12
Vessel Operation
Bow springs are secured at the vessels bow area. Forward spring lines lead forward from the boat to the dock and control movement toward the stern. After springs stem aft from the vessel, and stop movement ahead. Spring lines are used to prevent movement in a berth, ahead or astern. They are really useful in controlling the effects of a real active tidal surge. Spring lines are useful where fenders need to be kept in place against piles.
1.
2.
TYPICAL PIER MOORING
3.
4.
=FENDER
1. Bow line
2. After bow spring
3.Forward quarter spring
4. Stern line
TYPICAL PILING MOORING
Vessel Operation
Bow springs are secured at the vessels bow area. Forward spring lines lead forward from the boat to the dock and control movement toward the stern. After springs stem aft from the vessel, and stop movement ahead. Spring lines are used to prevent movement in a berth, ahead or astern. They are really useful in controlling the effects of a real active tidal surge. Spring lines are useful where fenders need to be kept in place against piles.
1.
2.
TYPICAL PIER MOORING
3.
4.
=FENDER
1. Bow line
2. After bow spring
3.Forward quarter spring
4. Stern line
TYPICAL PILING MOORING
Boat Mooring
Most boats can be secured to a dock using four lines. The after bow spring is crossed with the forward quarter spring and secured to individual dock cleats or pilings. This ensures longer springs and can be snugged up tighter for more effi cient tidal control. Remember, if you only have one piling available, position the vessel so this point is opposite admidships. Run both spring lines to it. These lines will be shorter but still useful.
5-13
Boat Mooring
Most boats can be secured to a dock using four lines. The after bow spring is crossed with the forward quarter spring and secured to individual dock cleats or pilings. This ensures longer springs and can be snugged up tighter for more effi cient tidal control. Remember, if you only have one piling available, position the vessel so this point is opposite admidships. Run both spring lines to it. These lines will be shorter but still useful.
5-13
CHAPTER 5
The bow and stern lines should be relatively at a 45 degree angle with the dock. The stern line can be attached to the near-shore quarter cleat, but will work more effi ciently to the offshore quarter cleat.
The longer line will allow the boat fl ow with the tide with less time checking the vessel.
Dock Line Sizing
Most dock lines today are made of nylon, either of twisted rope or braided core and cover. The most often used material is nylon because of its stretching abilities absorbing shock loads. It is chafe resistant for extended life and is easier on bare hands.
The line’s size varies with the vessel. Normally, a vessel in the 20’ to 40’ boats will use 1/2” diameter nylon lines. Larger yachts use 5/8” and
3/4” diameter nylon lines. Smaller boats can use 3/8” nylon lines.
Dock lines need to have the strength to hold the vessel and have enough density to resist chafi ng. They shouldn’t be too heavy that they lose their shock-absorbing capabilities. Use the right size line for the vessel since a line to large for the boat will pull hard against the vessel since it won’t be forced to stretch. If the line is too small for the vessel, there is no margin for wear and chafe when under strain.
Securing Lines
When mooring your boat, make sure the dock lines are secured at both ends. Depending on your situation you may need to loop the eye splice of the dock line around a piling. Sometimes the mooring line will lead down sharply from the piling to the deck cleat. Loop the eye splice around the piling twice to keep it from being pulled up off the pile.
Pull the line through the looped eye if the mooring line is too small to go around the piling twice or too small to fi t over once.
If you must drop a line over a piling that already holds another boat’s line, run the eye of the line up through the fi rst eye from below, then loop it over the pile. This will allow either line to be removed without disturbing the other. If another line is dropped over yours, simply
5-14
CHAPTER 5
The bow and stern lines should be relatively at a 45 degree angle with the dock. The stern line can be attached to the near-shore quarter cleat, but will work more effi ciently to the offshore quarter cleat.
The longer line will allow the boat fl ow with the tide with less time checking the vessel.
Dock Line Sizing
Most dock lines today are made of nylon, either of twisted rope or braided core and cover. The most often used material is nylon because of its stretching abilities absorbing shock loads. It is chafe resistant for extended life and is easier on bare hands.
The line’s size varies with the vessel. Normally, a vessel in the 20’ to 40’ boats will use 1/2” diameter nylon lines. Larger yachts use 5/8” and
3/4” diameter nylon lines. Smaller boats can use 3/8” nylon lines.
Dock lines need to have the strength to hold the vessel and have enough density to resist chafi ng. They shouldn’t be too heavy that they lose their shock-absorbing capabilities. Use the right size line for the vessel since a line to large for the boat will pull hard against the vessel since it won’t be forced to stretch. If the line is too small for the vessel, there is no margin for wear and chafe when under strain.
Securing Lines
When mooring your boat, make sure the dock lines are secured at both ends. Depending on your situation you may need to loop the eye splice of the dock line around a piling. Sometimes the mooring line will lead down sharply from the piling to the deck cleat. Loop the eye splice around the piling twice to keep it from being pulled up off the pile.
Pull the line through the looped eye if the mooring line is too small to go around the piling twice or too small to fi t over once.
If you must drop a line over a piling that already holds another boat’s line, run the eye of the line up through the fi rst eye from below, then loop it over the pile. This will allow either line to be removed without disturbing the other. If another line is dropped over yours, simply
5-14
Vessel Operation reverse the process. Secure a little slack in the other dock line, then slip your eye up through its loop and over the top of the pile. Your line can be dropped through the other eye.
When debarking from a dock, it is easier to release the line from a cleat or piling, from on board the boat, as soon as you leave the dock. Loop a long line around the cleat or pier and leading both ends on board you can release the line easily. Slip one end around the cleat or pile, then pull it back on board. Release the line without the eye splice, so it will run freely from around the pile without hanging up on the splice.
STEPS TO STERN DRIVE DOCKING
Stern drive powered boats are fairly easy to back up and maneuver with a little knowledge and docking practice. One of the most important aspects of the process is to keep your calm in the wake of a busy marina.
Basically, the reversing propeller is turned in the direction you want to go by using the wheel.
Some boats tend to be infl uenced by the wind. When backing down in a crosswind, allow room to maneuver and watch the bow. Try not to overreact or get excited, but use your knowledge and experience. If the wind begins to swing the bow, you need to stop backing, turn the wheel to port and go forward to straighten the boat. Use a quick burst of power but not too much to knock your crew off balance.
Vessel Operation reverse the process. Secure a little slack in the other dock line, then slip your eye up through its loop and over the top of the pile. Your line can be dropped through the other eye.
When debarking from a dock, it is easier to release the line from a cleat or piling, from on board the boat, as soon as you leave the dock. Loop a long line around the cleat or pier and leading both ends on board you can release the line easily. Slip one end around the cleat or pile, then pull it back on board. Release the line without the eye splice, so it will run freely from around the pile without hanging up on the splice.
STEPS TO STERN DRIVE DOCKING
Stern drive powered boats are fairly easy to back up and maneuver with a little knowledge and docking practice. One of the most important aspects of the process is to keep your calm in the wake of a busy marina.
Basically, the reversing propeller is turned in the direction you want to go by using the wheel.
Some boats tend to be infl uenced by the wind. When backing down in a crosswind, allow room to maneuver and watch the bow. Try not to overreact or get excited, but use your knowledge and experience. If the wind begins to swing the bow, you need to stop backing, turn the wheel to port and go forward to straighten the boat. Use a quick burst of power but not too much to knock your crew off balance.
A. Stop the boat by shifting in reverse. Put the wheel over to the port and begin backing in. Slow down your speed by momentarily shifting into reverse.
* Control in reverse idle position, Outdrive to port.
5-15
A. Stop the boat by shifting in reverse. Put the wheel over to the port and begin backing in. Slow down your speed by momentarily shifting into reverse.
* Control in reverse idle position, Outdrive to port.
5-15
CHAPTER 5
B. Continue backing up the boat with the wheel hard to port. Keep an eye on the bow, and begin to straighten the wheel as the boat enters the slip.
* Control in reverse idle position, Outdrive to port.
C. Center the wheel to align the boat parallel with the dock.
If the stern is too far from the dock, shift to neutral, then put the wheel hard over to port and then go forward
a second or two.
* Control in neutral idle position. Drive centered.
D. When the boat is completely into the dock, stop stern movement by shifting into forward. Put the wheel to port to kick the stern over
close to the dock if necessary. Shift into neutral and tie up the boat.
* Control in forward idle position. Drive to port.
5-16
CHAPTER 5
B. Continue backing up the boat with the wheel hard to port. Keep an eye on the bow, and begin to straighten the wheel as the boat enters the slip.
* Control in reverse idle position, Outdrive to port.
C. Center the wheel to align the boat parallel with the dock.
If the stern is too far from the dock, shift to neutral, then put the wheel hard over to port and then go forward
a second or two.
* Control in neutral idle position. Drive centered.
D. When the boat is completely into the dock, stop stern movement by shifting into forward. Put the wheel to port to kick the stern over
close to the dock if necessary. Shift into neutral and tie up the boat.
* Control in forward idle position. Drive to port.
5-16
Vessel Operation
STERN DRIVE MANEUVERING
Stern drive boats do not have rudders. The boat uses a steering system that directs the propeller thrust, by turning the stern drive unit where the propeller is mounted. Normally maneuvering an I/O boat is easier than a similar single screw vessel.
Directing propeller energy (thrust) makes slower speed maneuvering easier. The propeller discharge current is turned from one side to the other which results in turning forces. Rudder boats need water to fl ow by the rudder to be effi cient. Stern drive units are designed to have reduced shaft angle, so the propeller does not produce as much unequal blade thrust and resistance as does a propeller on a single screw boat. Large horsepower stern drive boats produce more thrust and steering torque but Regal boats use power steering. Below is some basic information on how single stern drive boats handle in normal conditions.
Gathering Headway
When a stern drive is not moving forward or reverse in the water and the propeller is not turning, (shift in neutral) the boat will not react to the helm steering wheel.
As soon as the vessel is shifted into forward gear the propellers action creates a discharge motion and generates energy in the form of thrust.
If the stern drive is centered, the discharge motion is directed straight back causing the vessel to advance forward.
You may notice that if you advance the throttle quickly in initial take-off
(make sure you have a fi rm grip on the wheel), the boat has a tendency to pull the stern of the vessel to starboard. There is a trim tab (also serves as a sacrifi cial anode) located on the vertical drive housing just to the top of the propeller blade. This trim tab helps compensate for the low speed steering torque. Once the boat increases headway the propeller is operating in a faster water fl ow this torque effect decreases.
Sometimes the trim tab may need adjustment on stern drive models.
Contact your Regal dealer for further information or consult your engine manufacturer’s manual.
5-17
Vessel Operation
STERN DRIVE MANEUVERING
Stern drive boats do not have rudders. The boat uses a steering system that directs the propeller thrust, by turning the stern drive unit where the propeller is mounted. Normally maneuvering an I/O boat is easier than a similar single screw vessel.
Directing propeller energy (thrust) makes slower speed maneuvering easier. The propeller discharge current is turned from one side to the other which results in turning forces. Rudder boats need water to fl ow by the rudder to be effi cient. Stern drive units are designed to have reduced shaft angle, so the propeller does not produce as much unequal blade thrust and resistance as does a propeller on a single screw boat. Large horsepower stern drive boats produce more thrust and steering torque but Regal boats use power steering. Below is some basic information on how single stern drive boats handle in normal conditions.
Gathering Headway
When a stern drive is not moving forward or reverse in the water and the propeller is not turning, (shift in neutral) the boat will not react to the helm steering wheel.
As soon as the vessel is shifted into forward gear the propellers action creates a discharge motion and generates energy in the form of thrust.
If the stern drive is centered, the discharge motion is directed straight back causing the vessel to advance forward.
You may notice that if you advance the throttle quickly in initial take-off
(make sure you have a fi rm grip on the wheel), the boat has a tendency to pull the stern of the vessel to starboard. There is a trim tab (also serves as a sacrifi cial anode) located on the vertical drive housing just to the top of the propeller blade. This trim tab helps compensate for the low speed steering torque. Once the boat increases headway the propeller is operating in a faster water fl ow this torque effect decreases.
Sometimes the trim tab may need adjustment on stern drive models.
Contact your Regal dealer for further information or consult your engine manufacturer’s manual.
5-17
CHAPTER 5
Turning
Once the boat has gathered headway, with the boat planing at the correct bow angle and the stern drive unit and helm straight the boat tends to stay on a uniform course heading. To assure the boat trim angle is correct use the trim gauge as a guide while activating the trim button on the remote control panel.
When the helm wheel is turned to the right or starboard, the stern drive unit is turned in the same direction. The propeller’s discharge force is directed to starboard forcing the boats stern to port. Water fl owing past the hull strikes the stern drive gear housing in its starboard side, creating additional turning torque. The stern starts a move to port, forcing the bow to starboard.
If the helm is turned to the left or port the stern drive turns to port, the stern of the boat goes starboard as the bow turns to port.
As the vessel operator gains experience, he will better gauge each maneuver and speed situation. In this way he will understand the handling characteristics of his boat. He needs to keep the safety of his passengers in the highest priority.
Backing Down
Stern drive boats do not have rudders. The boat uses a steering system that directs the propeller thrust, by turning the stern drive unit where the propeller is mounted. Normally maneuvering the I/O boat is easier than a similar single screw vessel.
If your boat has the steering wheel and stern drive straight with the control in reverse, the stern will be pushed a bit to port by the reversing propeller thrust. This tendency to back to port can be eliminated by turning the stern drive to starboard.
5-18
CHAPTER 5
Turning
Once the boat has gathered headway, with the boat planing at the correct bow angle and the stern drive unit and helm straight the boat tends to stay on a uniform course heading. To assure the boat trim angle is correct use the trim gauge as a guide while activating the trim button on the remote control panel.
When the helm wheel is turned to the right or starboard, the stern drive unit is turned in the same direction. The propeller’s discharge force is directed to starboard forcing the boats stern to port. Water fl owing past the hull strikes the stern drive gear housing in its starboard side, creating additional turning torque. The stern starts a move to port, forcing the bow to starboard.
If the helm is turned to the left or port the stern drive turns to port, the stern of the boat goes starboard as the bow turns to port.
As the vessel operator gains experience, he will better gauge each maneuver and speed situation. In this way he will understand the handling characteristics of his boat. He needs to keep the safety of his passengers in the highest priority.
Backing Down
Stern drive boats do not have rudders. The boat uses a steering system that directs the propeller thrust, by turning the stern drive unit where the propeller is mounted. Normally maneuvering the I/O boat is easier than a similar single screw vessel.
If your boat has the steering wheel and stern drive straight with the control in reverse, the stern will be pushed a bit to port by the reversing propeller thrust. This tendency to back to port can be eliminated by turning the stern drive to starboard.
5-18
Vessel Operation
When the vessel begins to gather speed to stern, the water passing by the lower gearcase housing will continue to increase steering torque. If the helm wheel is turned to starboard, it will direct the propeller thrust to port, tracking the stern to starboard.
Wind and current will affect how a vessel backs. Stern drive boats tend to be light displacements and when backing down in a strong crosswind; the bow will tend to fall toward the windward. This may cause steering problems.
Once increased headway is gathered in reverse gear, the force of the lower hull moving through the water is enough to track straight. When backing, the stern will lead as it heads to port or starboard, before the vessel actually starts to turn.
When the control is put in forward gear position, the stern is pushed to starboard; the amount of push depends on the hull design and the amount of throttle advance.
See illustration.
Stopping
Remember that your boat does not have any brakes. It uses reverse thrust from the propeller to stop. If the vessel has headway, with the helm and propeller in reverse the propeller thrust is directed backwards, past the lower gearcase of the stern drive.
Depending on how far the throttle is advanced, the discharged thrust may not be strong enough to reverse the water fl owing by the gearcase.
As the power is increased, the propeller thrust becomes strong enough to stop the fl ow of water past the lower unit, and, as the throttle is advanced it reverses its fl ow more completely.
When water is fl owing past the gearcase, steering torque is increased, but when the thrust stops the water fl ow, the boat will not respond to the helm. This is a short lived event and is overcome quickly when the water again fl ows past the gearcase.
5-19
Vessel Operation
When the vessel begins to gather speed to stern, the water passing by the lower gearcase housing will continue to increase steering torque. If the helm wheel is turned to starboard, it will direct the propeller thrust to port, tracking the stern to starboard.
Wind and current will affect how a vessel backs. Stern drive boats tend to be light displacements and when backing down in a strong crosswind; the bow will tend to fall toward the windward. This may cause steering problems.
Once increased headway is gathered in reverse gear, the force of the lower hull moving through the water is enough to track straight. When backing, the stern will lead as it heads to port or starboard, before the vessel actually starts to turn.
When the control is put in forward gear position, the stern is pushed to starboard; the amount of push depends on the hull design and the amount of throttle advance.
See illustration.
Stopping
Remember that your boat does not have any brakes. It uses reverse thrust from the propeller to stop. If the vessel has headway, with the helm and propeller in reverse the propeller thrust is directed backwards, past the lower gearcase of the stern drive.
Depending on how far the throttle is advanced, the discharged thrust may not be strong enough to reverse the water fl owing by the gearcase.
As the power is increased, the propeller thrust becomes strong enough to stop the fl ow of water past the lower unit, and, as the throttle is advanced it reverses its fl ow more completely.
When water is fl owing past the gearcase, steering torque is increased, but when the thrust stops the water fl ow, the boat will not respond to the helm. This is a short lived event and is overcome quickly when the water again fl ows past the gearcase.
5-19
CHAPTER 5
Furthermore, added to the energy of the water hitting the lower gear case, the propeller thrust is directed by turning the stern drive, which can add to the steering torque.
The prop tends to throw the stern to port.
This is why experienced skippers undertake a portside landing when wind and current conditions permit. They allow the prop to move the stern to port toward the dock.
With a forward motion when the helm wheel is turned hard to one side, the vessel pivots around a point about 1/3 its length abaft to stern. See illustration.
TRIM ANGLE
Stern drive boats have the ability to angle in or out their drive unit in relationship to the transom. This is accomplished by hydraulic shocks located on the stern drive along with an electrical sender unit that reads the drive angle and sends information to the dash trim gauge showing a reading.
Purpose Of Power Trim
The purpose of the power trim/tilt is to enable the operator to change the angle of the drive while at the helm. Changing the angle of the drive or “trimming” provides the following benefi ts:
l. Improves acceleration onto a plane.
2. Maintains boat on plane at reduced throttle settings.
3. Increases fuel economy.
4. Provides smoother ride in choppy water.
5. Increases top speed.
5-20
CHAPTER 5
Furthermore, added to the energy of the water hitting the lower gear case, the propeller thrust is directed by turning the stern drive, which can add to the steering torque.
The prop tends to throw the stern to port.
This is why experienced skippers undertake a portside landing when wind and current conditions permit. They allow the prop to move the stern to port toward the dock.
With a forward motion when the helm wheel is turned hard to one side, the vessel pivots around a point about 1/3 its length abaft to stern. See illustration.
TRIM ANGLE
Stern drive boats have the ability to angle in or out their drive unit in relationship to the transom. This is accomplished by hydraulic shocks located on the stern drive along with an electrical sender unit that reads the drive angle and sends information to the dash trim gauge showing a reading.
Purpose Of Power Trim
The purpose of the power trim/tilt is to enable the operator to change the angle of the drive while at the helm. Changing the angle of the drive or “trimming” provides the following benefi ts:
l. Improves acceleration onto a plane.
2. Maintains boat on plane at reduced throttle settings.
3. Increases fuel economy.
4. Provides smoother ride in choppy water.
5. Increases top speed.
5-20
Vessel Operation
In short, power trim is a way of fi ne-tuning the ride of your boat and will enable you to get the most effi cient and comfortable ride possible, whatever the conditions.
Use Of Power Trim
The power trim is normally used prior to accelerating onto a plane, after reaching the desired RPM or boat speed and when there is a change in water or boating conditions. Position passengers and equipment in the boat so that the weight is balanced correctly fore and aft as well as side to side. Trimming will not compensate for an unbalanced load.
To operate the trim, push the switch until the desired bow position is reached. The trim may be operated at any boat speed or at rest.
Avoid operating the trim system when running in reverse. Observe the trimgauge which indicates the boat’s bow position achieved by the trim angle of the vertical drive unit. “Bow Up” corresponds to the upper portion of the trim range on the gauge while “Bow Down” corresponds to the lower portion of the trim range on the gauge.
To determine the proper trim angle, experiment a little until you are familiar with the changes in your boat. The vessel will be properly trimmed when the trim angle provides the best boat performance for the particular operating conditions. A trim position that provides a balanced steering load is desirable.
To familiarize yourself with the power trim, make test runs at slower speeds and at various trim positions to see the effect of trimming.
Note the time it takes for the boat to plane. Watch the tachometer and speedometer readings as well as the ride action of the boat.
Vessel Operation
In short, power trim is a way of fi ne-tuning the ride of your boat and will enable you to get the most effi cient and comfortable ride possible, whatever the conditions.
Use Of Power Trim
The power trim is normally used prior to accelerating onto a plane, after reaching the desired RPM or boat speed and when there is a change in water or boating conditions. Position passengers and equipment in the boat so that the weight is balanced correctly fore and aft as well as side to side. Trimming will not compensate for an unbalanced load.
To operate the trim, push the switch until the desired bow position is reached. The trim may be operated at any boat speed or at rest.
Avoid operating the trim system when running in reverse. Observe the trimgauge which indicates the boat’s bow position achieved by the trim angle of the vertical drive unit. “Bow Up” corresponds to the upper portion of the trim range on the gauge while “Bow Down” corresponds to the lower portion of the trim range on the gauge.
To determine the proper trim angle, experiment a little until you are familiar with the changes in your boat. The vessel will be properly trimmed when the trim angle provides the best boat performance for the particular operating conditions. A trim position that provides a balanced steering load is desirable.
To familiarize yourself with the power trim, make test runs at slower speeds and at various trim positions to see the effect of trimming.
Note the time it takes for the boat to plane. Watch the tachometer and speedometer readings as well as the ride action of the boat.
5-21 5-21
CHAPTER 5
Operation In “Bow Up” Position
The “Bow Up” or out position is normally used for cruising, running with a choppy wave condition, or running at full
DN
TRIM
UP speed. Excessive “bow up” trim will cause propeller ventilation resulting in propeller slippage. Use caution when operating in rough water or crossing another boat’s wake. Excessive “bow up” trim may result in the boat’s bow rising rapidly, creating a hazardous condition.
Operation In “Bow Down” Position
DN UP
The “Bow Down” or in position is normally used for acceleration onto a plane, operating at slow planning speeds, and running against a choppy wave condition. It is also used when pulling water skiers, tubers, kneeboarders, etc. In this position
TRIM the boats’ bow will want to go deeper into the water. If the boat is operated at a high speed and/ or against high waves, the bow of the boat will plow into the water.
Operation In “Level” Position
DN
TRIM
UP
In normal running conditions, distribute passengers and gear so boat is level. At or below cruising speeds, trim the vessel for optimum performance.
The trim gauge neddle will display somewhere in the center of the gauge. This position will also enhance running visibility and overall stability. Again, each outing provides different wave, load and running conditions. Be prepared to make trim changes as needed.
5-22
CHAPTER 5
Operation In “Bow Up” Position
The “Bow Up” or out position is normally used for cruising, running with a choppy wave condition, or running at full
DN
TRIM
UP speed. Excessive “bow up” trim will cause propeller ventilation resulting in propeller slippage. Use caution when operating in rough water or crossing another boat’s wake. Excessive “bow up” trim may result in the boat’s bow rising rapidly, creating a hazardous condition.
Operation In “Bow Down” Position
DN UP
The “Bow Down” or in position is normally used for acceleration onto a plane, operating at slow planning speeds, and running against a choppy wave condition. It is also used when pulling water skiers, tubers, kneeboarders, etc. In this position
TRIM the boats’ bow will want to go deeper into the water. If the boat is operated at a high speed and/ or against high waves, the bow of the boat will plow into the water.
Operation In “Level” Position
DN
TRIM
UP
In normal running conditions, distribute passengers and gear so boat is level. At or below cruising speeds, trim the vessel for optimum performance.
The trim gauge neddle will display somewhere in the center of the gauge. This position will also enhance running visibility and overall stability. Again, each outing provides different wave, load and running conditions. Be prepared to make trim changes as needed.
5-22
Vessel Operation
!
CAUTION
THE BOAT TRIM SHOULD BE ADJUSTED TO PROVIDE
BALANCED STEERING AS SOON AS POSSIBLE EACH
TIME YOU GET UNDERWAY. SOME BOAT/ENGINE/
PROPELLER COMBINATIONS MAY CREATE BOAT
INSTABILITY AND/ OR HIGH STEERING TORQUE WHEN
OPERATED AT OR NEAR THE LIMITS OF THE “BOW
UP” OR “BOW DOWN” POSITIONS. BOAT STABILITY
AND STEERING TORQUE CAN ALSO VARY DUE TO
CHANGING WATER CONDITIONS. IF YOU EXPERIENCE
BOAT INSTABILITY AND/OR HIGH STEERING TORQUE,
SEE YOUR AUTHORIZED REGAL DEALER.
Shallow Water Operation
DANGER
Operating your vessel in shallow water presents various hazards. You are more apt to hit a submerged object such as a rock, sand bar, stump, logs, coral, or other unmarked objects.
Pay close attention to your chart for descriptions of any shallow areas along with marked submerged objects. Always post a lookout when operating in shallow water. Trim your outdrive up as needed to provide adequate draft. Set the alarm on your depth sounder and travel at a speed that keeps the boat level in these shallow areas.
If your boat strikes a submerged object stop immediately and check for hull, outdrive and propeller damage.
Vessel Operation
!
CAUTION
THE BOAT TRIM SHOULD BE ADJUSTED TO PROVIDE
BALANCED STEERING AS SOON AS POSSIBLE EACH
TIME YOU GET UNDERWAY. SOME BOAT/ENGINE/
PROPELLER COMBINATIONS MAY CREATE BOAT
INSTABILITY AND/ OR HIGH STEERING TORQUE WHEN
OPERATED AT OR NEAR THE LIMITS OF THE “BOW
UP” OR “BOW DOWN” POSITIONS. BOAT STABILITY
AND STEERING TORQUE CAN ALSO VARY DUE TO
CHANGING WATER CONDITIONS. IF YOU EXPERIENCE
BOAT INSTABILITY AND/OR HIGH STEERING TORQUE,
SEE YOUR AUTHORIZED REGAL DEALER.
Shallow Water Operation
DANGER
Operating your vessel in shallow water presents various hazards. You are more apt to hit a submerged object such as a rock, sand bar, stump, logs, coral, or other unmarked objects.
Pay close attention to your chart for descriptions of any shallow areas along with marked submerged objects. Always post a lookout when operating in shallow water. Trim your outdrive up as needed to provide adequate draft. Set the alarm on your depth sounder and travel at a speed that keeps the boat level in these shallow areas.
If your boat strikes a submerged object stop immediately and check for hull, outdrive and propeller damage.
5-23 5-23
CHAPTER 5
TRIMMED “TO FAR IN” POSITION
DN UP
TRIM
TRIMMED “TOO FAR OUT” POSITION
DN UP
TRIM
WELL TRIMMED “LEVEL” POSITION
DN
TRIM
UP
!
CAUTION
DO NOT RUN ENGINE ABOVE 1000 RPM
WITH THE STERN DRIVE TRIMMED
FOR SHALLOW WATER MANEUVERING SINCE THE
STERN DRIVE IS OUT BEYOND THE GIMBAL RING
SIDE SUPPORT BRACKETS.
OPERATING IN ABOVE MANNER MAY PRODUCE A
DANGEROUS STEERING CONDITION OR MAY
DAMAGE THE STERN DRIVE COMPONENTS.
5-24
CHAPTER 5
TRIMMED “TO FAR IN” POSITION
DN UP
TRIM
TRIMMED “TOO FAR OUT” POSITION
DN UP
TRIM
WELL TRIMMED “LEVEL” POSITION
DN
TRIM
UP
!
CAUTION
DO NOT RUN ENGINE ABOVE 1000 RPM
WITH THE STERN DRIVE TRIMMED
FOR SHALLOW WATER MANEUVERING SINCE THE
STERN DRIVE IS OUT BEYOND THE GIMBAL RING
SIDE SUPPORT BRACKETS.
OPERATING IN ABOVE MANNER MAY PRODUCE A
DANGEROUS STEERING CONDITION OR MAY
DAMAGE THE STERN DRIVE COMPONENTS.
5-24
Vessel Operation
ANCHORING
Selecting the correct anchor is an important decision. The anchor style in part depends on the usage and boat type.
Regal boats designate an anchor type and or model.
Some models incorporate chain, line with an optional windlass. Contact an authorized Regal dealer for more information.
Anchoring is easier with another person on board.
First be certain that the line for the anchor is properly attached, to avoid losing the anchor and anchor line overboard.
For most anchors to perform more effi ciently, you should attach 3 to
6 feet of chain. The chain will stand up to the abrasion of sand, rock, or mud on the bottom much better than a nylon line. It should be galvanized to reduce corrosion. Next, attach a length of nylon line to the other end of the chain.
The nylon will stretch under a heavy strain cushioning the impact of waves or wind on both the boat and the anchor.
To anchor, select a well protected area, preferably with a fl at bottom.
Contrary to modern belief, you do not throw the anchor over while the boat is making headway, or moving forward. In fact, the bow of the boat should be bought slowly backward, while easing the anchor slowly over the side of the boat until it hits the bottom. To “snub the line” means to stop its outward “pay” or movement. Usually the length of anchor line used should be 5 to 10 times the depth of the water.
After you have anchored, check your position with landmarks if possible. You need to continue to monitor these landmarks to make sure you are not drifting. Since anchoring can also be an emergency procedure, the anchor and line should be readily accessible.
For increased holding power in windy conditions, two anchors are sometimes set. If your primary anchor drags, you can run out your secondary anchor without picking up the primary one. The important thing is to lay them out at an angle. When setting two anchors, make sure they are fastened to separate rodes or cleats. This is done in case you need to adjust one later so the line is accessible.
5-25
Vessel Operation
ANCHORING
Selecting the correct anchor is an important decision. The anchor style in part depends on the usage and boat type.
Regal boats designate an anchor type and or model.
Some models incorporate chain, line with an optional windlass. Contact an authorized Regal dealer for more information.
Anchoring is easier with another person on board.
First be certain that the line for the anchor is properly attached, to avoid losing the anchor and anchor line overboard.
For most anchors to perform more effi ciently, you should attach 3 to
6 feet of chain. The chain will stand up to the abrasion of sand, rock, or mud on the bottom much better than a nylon line. It should be galvanized to reduce corrosion. Next, attach a length of nylon line to the other end of the chain.
The nylon will stretch under a heavy strain cushioning the impact of waves or wind on both the boat and the anchor.
To anchor, select a well protected area, preferably with a fl at bottom.
Contrary to modern belief, you do not throw the anchor over while the boat is making headway, or moving forward. In fact, the bow of the boat should be bought slowly backward, while easing the anchor slowly over the side of the boat until it hits the bottom. To “snub the line” means to stop its outward “pay” or movement. Usually the length of anchor line used should be 5 to 10 times the depth of the water.
After you have anchored, check your position with landmarks if possible. You need to continue to monitor these landmarks to make sure you are not drifting. Since anchoring can also be an emergency procedure, the anchor and line should be readily accessible.
For increased holding power in windy conditions, two anchors are sometimes set. If your primary anchor drags, you can run out your secondary anchor without picking up the primary one. The important thing is to lay them out at an angle. When setting two anchors, make sure they are fastened to separate rodes or cleats. This is done in case you need to adjust one later so the line is accessible.
5-25
CHAPTER 5
If two anchors are used ahead of a boat, make sure to set the rodes at an angle than in a straight line to reduce the chances of tangeling as the boat moves in wind and current.
CHAPTER 5
If two anchors are used ahead of a boat, make sure to set the rodes at an angle than in a straight line to reduce the chances of tangeling as the boat moves in wind and current.
TOWING
In case you fi nd yourself aground or in need of a tow, or should you want to tow another vessel, keep in mind that you never use deck hardware or cleats to secure lines for towing!
Deck hardware is intended for mooring and anchoring, and is not designed to withstand the strain and pull of towing. Rather than tie the line to your cleats on deck, it is suggested that you tie a bridle by passing a line completely around the hull of your boat to avoid damage.
When towing, always stand clear of a taut line, as any type of line breaking under stress can be extremely dangerous. The preferred line for towing is double-braided nylon, as it has suffi cient elasticity to cushion shock loads. Move slowly and cautiously.
5-26
TOWING
In case you fi nd yourself aground or in need of a tow, or should you want to tow another vessel, keep in mind that you never use deck hardware or cleats to secure lines for towing!
Deck hardware is intended for mooring and anchoring, and is not designed to withstand the strain and pull of towing. Rather than tie the line to your cleats on deck, it is suggested that you tie a bridle by passing a line completely around the hull of your boat to avoid damage.
When towing, always stand clear of a taut line, as any type of line breaking under stress can be extremely dangerous. The preferred line for towing is double-braided nylon, as it has suffi cient elasticity to cushion shock loads. Move slowly and cautiously.
5-26
Vessel Operation
Law Of Salvage
The Admiralty Law sometimes referred to as the Salvage Law was founded primarily on English law fundamentals and basically says that a vessel distressed, in danger of fl ounder, if rendered assistance from a towing company or private agency, can be forced to relinquish a portion of the vessels’ worth for the assistance received.
NOTICE
IN THE EVENT YOUR VESSEL IS IN DISTRESS,
PRIOR TO ALLOWING ANY TOWING COMPANY OR
PRIVATE AGENCY THE RIGHT TO PASS A LINE TO
YOUR VESSEL, BE SURE TO ESTABLISH THAT YOU
DO NOT AGREE TO ANY SALVAGE RIGHTS.
ESTABLISH WITH THE CAPTAIN OR OPERATOR
THAT YOU WISH TO BE ASSISTED IN A CONTRACT
BASIS AND ESTABLISH A PRICE.
OF COURSE IN CERTAIN SITUATIONS, YOU MAY
NOT HAVE THIS OPTION.
USE YOUR BEST JUDGEMENT!
Vessel Operation
Law Of Salvage
The Admiralty Law sometimes referred to as the Salvage Law was founded primarily on English law fundamentals and basically says that a vessel distressed, in danger of fl ounder, if rendered assistance from a towing company or private agency, can be forced to relinquish a portion of the vessels’ worth for the assistance received.
NOTICE
IN THE EVENT YOUR VESSEL IS IN DISTRESS,
PRIOR TO ALLOWING ANY TOWING COMPANY OR
PRIVATE AGENCY THE RIGHT TO PASS A LINE TO
YOUR VESSEL, BE SURE TO ESTABLISH THAT YOU
DO NOT AGREE TO ANY SALVAGE RIGHTS.
ESTABLISH WITH THE CAPTAIN OR OPERATOR
THAT YOU WISH TO BE ASSISTED IN A CONTRACT
BASIS AND ESTABLISH A PRICE.
OF COURSE IN CERTAIN SITUATIONS, YOU MAY
NOT HAVE THIS OPTION.
USE YOUR BEST JUDGEMENT!
5-27 5-27
CHAPTER 5
!
DANGER
AVOID DEATH OR SERIOUS BODILY INJURY!
DO NOT USE DECK HARDWARE INCLUDING
CLEATS FOR TOWING.
Knots
Knots are useful in docking, towing and other emergency situations.
Learning to tie knots requires practice. As they say “Practice makes perfect”. Some of the knots used in boating are the square, bowline, anchor bend, clove hitch, fi gure eight and half hitch. There are several periodicals available that explain various knots and how to tie them effectively. An experienced skipper will know the basic nautical knots and will use them when on the water. Take the time to know the basic knots.
Figure 8 Knot
Tied To Cleat
CHAPTER 5
!
DANGER
AVOID DEATH OR SERIOUS BODILY INJURY!
DO NOT USE DECK HARDWARE INCLUDING
CLEATS FOR TOWING.
Knots
Knots are useful in docking, towing and other emergency situations.
Learning to tie knots requires practice. As they say “Practice makes perfect”. Some of the knots used in boating are the square, bowline, anchor bend, clove hitch, fi gure eight and half hitch. There are several periodicals available that explain various knots and how to tie them effectively. An experienced skipper will know the basic nautical knots and will use them when on the water. Take the time to know the basic knots.
Figure 8 Knot
Tied To Cleat
A useful knot to learn for general docking is the fi gure eight with one end reversed. By turning the free end of the line back under, the knot can be released without disturbing the boat. After some practice one person can secure a vessel easily to a dock or pier in a variety of weather conditions. This knot normally is used to tie the bow and stern. Then the vessel can further be fastened by tying the spring line(s) in the fi gure eight knot. Wrap it around the cleat 2 or 3 times.
5-28
A useful knot to learn for general docking is the fi gure eight with one end reversed. By turning the free end of the line back under, the knot can be released without disturbing the boat. After some practice one person can secure a vessel easily to a dock or pier in a variety of weather conditions. This knot normally is used to tie the bow and stern. Then the vessel can further be fastened by tying the spring line(s) in the fi gure eight knot. Wrap it around the cleat 2 or 3 times.
5-28
Vessel Operation
EMERGENCIES
Always be ready to help others on the water if possible, but do not take any unnecessary risks. Use equipment to save a life, but do not risk a life to save equipment. Consult earlier information in this manual concerning accidents, etc. Also, read other literature concerning on the water emergencies. Be alert and prepared!
Fire
Fire aboard a vessel can spread quickly and can cause tremendous alarm among everyone. Most fi res can be prevented by keeping the bilge free from oil and debris. Keep all equipment stowed and maintained in working order. Carry a backup fi re extinguisher on board. If something becomes a possible fi re hazard, remove that possibility at once.
Never use water on gasoline, oil or electrical fi res. When you dump water on an electrical fi re you can be shocked. Follow these instructions if a fi re breaks out:
Fit everyone aboard with a life jacket. Turn off the ignition.
Try to keep the fi re downwind. If the fi re is to the stern, head the bow toward the wind. If forward, put the stern to the wind.
If the engine should catch fi re, shut off the fuel supply. Usually there is a fuel tank access that you can crimp the fuel feed line.
Use a hand fi re extinguisher or pull the cable on the automatic fi re extinguishing system. Make sure to point it at the base of the fl ames.
Use short bursts and sweep the extinguisher side to side.
Remember : (4 lb. extinguisher discharges in 20 seconds)
These actions help prevent the fi re from spreading to other parts of the boat. You can extinguish fi res quickly if you act swiftly. Have a plan of action in motion in case a fi re breaks out.
5-29
Vessel Operation
EMERGENCIES
Always be ready to help others on the water if possible, but do not take any unnecessary risks. Use equipment to save a life, but do not risk a life to save equipment. Consult earlier information in this manual concerning accidents, etc. Also, read other literature concerning on the water emergencies. Be alert and prepared!
Fire
Fire aboard a vessel can spread quickly and can cause tremendous alarm among everyone. Most fi res can be prevented by keeping the bilge free from oil and debris. Keep all equipment stowed and maintained in working order. Carry a backup fi re extinguisher on board. If something becomes a possible fi re hazard, remove that possibility at once.
Never use water on gasoline, oil or electrical fi res. When you dump water on an electrical fi re you can be shocked. Follow these instructions if a fi re breaks out:
Fit everyone aboard with a life jacket. Turn off the ignition.
Try to keep the fi re downwind. If the fi re is to the stern, head the bow toward the wind. If forward, put the stern to the wind.
If the engine should catch fi re, shut off the fuel supply. Usually there is a fuel tank access that you can crimp the fuel feed line.
Use a hand fi re extinguisher or pull the cable on the automatic fi re extinguishing system. Make sure to point it at the base of the fl ames.
Use short bursts and sweep the extinguisher side to side.
Remember : (4 lb. extinguisher discharges in 20 seconds)
These actions help prevent the fi re from spreading to other parts of the boat. You can extinguish fi res quickly if you act swiftly. Have a plan of action in motion in case a fi re breaks out.
5-29
CHAPTER 5
FIRST AID
Knowing fi rst aid can save lives. A fi rst aid kit and the ability to use it are important ingredients for the safety of a skippers’ passengers, crew and vessel. Having confi dence and competence in handling medical emergencies on board is a must for the skipper. Invest your time in a fi rst aid course available at the American Red Cross.
CPR (Basic Life Support)
If someone is seriously injured call for help while the injured person is being attended.
Check for possible danger signs; loss of breathing, unconsciousness, severe bleeding and heartbeat. If you determine the individual is not breathing or unconscious place the victim on their back on a hard surface and do the following:
1. If unconscious, open the airway. Neck lift, head lift or chin head
lift.
2. If not breathing, begin artifi cial breathing. Pinch the nose. Give 4
quick breaths. If airway is blocked, try back blows, abdominal or
chest thrusts and fi nger probe until airway is open.
3. Check for pulse. begin artifi cial circulation. Depress sternum 2”.
15 compressions rate 80 per minute. 2 quick breaths. Continue
uninterrupted until advanced medical support is available.
Follow up immediately with medical authorities!
5-30
CHAPTER 5
FIRST AID
Knowing fi rst aid can save lives. A fi rst aid kit and the ability to use it are important ingredients for the safety of a skippers’ passengers, crew and vessel. Having confi dence and competence in handling medical emergencies on board is a must for the skipper. Invest your time in a fi rst aid course available at the American Red Cross.
CPR (Basic Life Support)
If someone is seriously injured call for help while the injured person is being attended.
Check for possible danger signs; loss of breathing, unconsciousness, severe bleeding and heartbeat. If you determine the individual is not breathing or unconscious place the victim on their back on a hard surface and do the following:
1. If unconscious, open the airway. Neck lift, head lift or chin head
lift.
2. If not breathing, begin artifi cial breathing. Pinch the nose. Give 4
quick breaths. If airway is blocked, try back blows, abdominal or
chest thrusts and fi nger probe until airway is open.
3. Check for pulse. begin artifi cial circulation. Depress sternum 2”.
15 compressions rate 80 per minute. 2 quick breaths. Continue
uninterrupted until advanced medical support is available.
Follow up immediately with medical authorities!
5-30
Vessel Operation
HYPOTHERMIA
Hypothermia is a condition where the body temperature decreases because the body can’t generate enough heat to maintain its normal temperature. It can be serious and usually occurs where victims have been immersed in water (under 68 degrees) for extended periods of time. If you encounter a possible hypothermia victim call for help on the radio and get the person out of the water.
Symptoms are:
1. Shivering that if condition is advanced may stop.
2. Confusion, clumsiness or slurred speech.
3. Rigid muscles.
4. Semiconscious to unconscious.
Treat hypothermia by the following:
Remove wet clothing.
Monitor the victim’s pulse and breathing.
Rapidly apply heat to the body core by using blankets, naked
bodies or warm water.
Do not give the person any food or drink.
Do not warm the arms and legs. Warming of these extremities
can be fatal.
Follow up immediately with medical authorities!
5-31
Vessel Operation
HYPOTHERMIA
Hypothermia is a condition where the body temperature decreases because the body can’t generate enough heat to maintain its normal temperature. It can be serious and usually occurs where victims have been immersed in water (under 68 degrees) for extended periods of time. If you encounter a possible hypothermia victim call for help on the radio and get the person out of the water.
Symptoms are:
1. Shivering that if condition is advanced may stop.
2. Confusion, clumsiness or slurred speech.
3. Rigid muscles.
4. Semiconscious to unconscious.
Treat hypothermia by the following:
Remove wet clothing.
Monitor the victim’s pulse and breathing.
Rapidly apply heat to the body core by using blankets, naked
bodies or warm water.
Do not give the person any food or drink.
Do not warm the arms and legs. Warming of these extremities
can be fatal.
Follow up immediately with medical authorities!
5-31
CHAPTER 5
ENVIRONMENTAL AWARENESS
There are numerous vessels operating on our waterways on a daily basis.
Each boat has as impact on our environment. Boat operation habits, marine sanitation, and maintenance all play a role in a delicate battle to keep the ecosystem clean. Each of us has a role in doing our part as environmentally conscious skippers to conserve our waterways.
The National Marine Manufacturer’s Association lists their top ten of
Eco-Boating Practices as follows:
1. Observe all regulatory agency policies regarding marine toilets.
2. If equipped with a holding tank, use marina pump-out facilities.
3. If used, make sure bottom paints are legal and ecosystem friendly.
4. Use only biodegradable cleaning agents.
5. Dispose of all garbage and liter on shore properly, not on the water.
6. Don’t top off fuel tanks. Leave expansion room. Clean up spills.
7. Watch your wake and propeller wash.
8. Make sure your engines are well tuned and maintained.
9. Control your bilge water.
10. When fi shing, practice the “catch and release” principle.
Follow these basics practices when on the waterways. Treat the environment in a way that you would like to be treated.
5-32
CHAPTER 5
ENVIRONMENTAL AWARENESS
There are numerous vessels operating on our waterways on a daily basis.
Each boat has as impact on our environment. Boat operation habits, marine sanitation, and maintenance all play a role in a delicate battle to keep the ecosystem clean. Each of us has a role in doing our part as environmentally conscious skippers to conserve our waterways.
The National Marine Manufacturer’s Association lists their top ten of
Eco-Boating Practices as follows:
1. Observe all regulatory agency policies regarding marine toilets.
2. If equipped with a holding tank, use marina pump-out facilities.
3. If used, make sure bottom paints are legal and ecosystem friendly.
4. Use only biodegradable cleaning agents.
5. Dispose of all garbage and liter on shore properly, not on the water.
6. Don’t top off fuel tanks. Leave expansion room. Clean up spills.
7. Watch your wake and propeller wash.
8. Make sure your engines are well tuned and maintained.
9. Control your bilge water.
10. When fi shing, practice the “catch and release” principle.
Follow these basics practices when on the waterways. Treat the environment in a way that you would like to be treated.
5-32
Equipment Operation
INTRODUCTION
This chapter assists the operator in understanding typical standard and optional equipment which may be installed on the 2300, 2500, and
2550. A portion of the equipment described may not be installed on your boat or the pictorials may not exactly match your equipment. A portion of the Regal boat
illustrations in the owner’s manual may represent typical examples.
Regal is constantly improving its product line and therefore may make changes in vendors, parts and specifi cations at any time without notice. For further equipment information, refer to the individual vendor literature provided in the owner’s packet. Read and understand all equipment information before attempting to use the components.
For your convenience, typical standard and optional equipment is listed alphabetically.
Equipment Operation
INTRODUCTION
This chapter assists the operator in understanding typical standard and optional equipment which may be installed on the 2300, 2500, and
2550. A portion of the equipment described may not be installed on your boat or the pictorials may not exactly match your equipment. A portion of the Regal boat
illustrations in the owner’s manual may represent typical examples.
Regal is constantly improving its product line and therefore may make changes in vendors, parts and specifi cations at any time without notice. For further equipment information, refer to the individual vendor literature provided in the owner’s packet. Read and understand all equipment information before attempting to use the components.
For your convenience, typical standard and optional equipment is listed alphabetically.
6-1 6-1
CHAPTER 6
Air Compressor
Attachments
If equipped on your boat the air compressor/inflater provides 12 volt blower capacity for various aquatic toys, etc. To use, remove the unit from its stand and insert the cord plug into the
12 receptacle located at the ignition panel. Turn on the component.
There are attachments to fi t various fittings. After use return the compressor to its stand.
CHAPTER 6
Air Compressor
Attachments
If equipped on your boat the air compressor/inflater provides 12 volt blower capacity for various aquatic toys, etc. To use, remove the unit from its stand and insert the cord plug into the
12 receptacle located at the ignition panel. Turn on the component.
There are attachments to fi t various fittings. After use return the compressor to its stand.
6-2 6-2
Equipment Operation
Automatic Fire Extinguisher
The automatic fire extinguishing system is normally located in the bilge at the engine aft end. See t h e i l l u s t r a t i o n .
T he system uses an environmentally friendly agent FE-
241 which has been approved by the EPA to replace the old
Halon agent. This system is formulated only for use in the engine compartment of your vessel. FE-241 is to be used with gasoline fuel systems only since the agent will not “stall” diesel engines. This could cause a fi re to refl ash.
Operation-Automatic
Automatic fi re extinguisher systems are not nor are they intended to be explosion suppression devices. Boat owners still need to take normal precautions for checking gasoline fumes and using blowers.
Read the information regarding the dash and manual operation portions of the fi re extinguisher system. When the system actuation starts you may hear a loud sound simiar to that of small arms fi re, followed by a rushing air sound.
Equipment Operation
Automatic Fire Extinguisher
The automatic fire extinguishing system is normally located in the bilge at the engine aft end. See t h e i l l u s t r a t i o n .
T he system uses an environmentally friendly agent FE-
241 which has been approved by the EPA to replace the old
Halon agent. This system is formulated only for use in the engine compartment of your vessel. FE-241 is to be used with gasoline fuel systems only since the agent will not “stall” diesel engines. This could cause a fi re to refl ash.
Operation-Automatic
Automatic fi re extinguisher systems are not nor are they intended to be explosion suppression devices. Boat owners still need to take normal precautions for checking gasoline fumes and using blowers.
Read the information regarding the dash and manual operation portions of the fi re extinguisher system. When the system actuation starts you may hear a loud sound simiar to that of small arms fi re, followed by a rushing air sound.
6-3 6-3
CHAPTER 6
The system will show actuation whenever the ignition key is ON and the indicator light is OFF.
The actual actuation time when a fi re occurs is dependent on the severity of the fi re.
When the automatic fi re extinguisher activates
IMMEDIATELY SHUT DOWN ALL
ENGINES, POWERED VENTILATION
(BLOWER), ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND EXTINGUISH
ALL SMOKING MATERIALS. DO NOT OPEN THE ENGINE
COMPARTMENT IMMEDIATELY.
Allow the agent to “soak” the compartment for a period of time and wait for hot metals and any fuels to cool before inspecting for the fi re cause. Premature opening of the engine compartment allows an inrushing of oxygen and could result in a fl ash-back. When the engine compartment is opened have portable fi re extinguishers ready.
!
WARNING
AVOID SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH!
DO NOT BREATH FUMES OR VAPORS
CAUSED BY A FIRE AS THEY ARE
HAZARDOUS AND TOXIC.
CHAPTER 6
The system will show actuation whenever the ignition key is ON and the indicator light is OFF.
The actual actuation time when a fi re occurs is dependent on the severity of the fi re.
When the automatic fi re extinguisher activates
IMMEDIATELY SHUT DOWN ALL
ENGINES, POWERED VENTILATION
(BLOWER), ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND EXTINGUISH
ALL SMOKING MATERIALS. DO NOT OPEN THE ENGINE
COMPARTMENT IMMEDIATELY.
Allow the agent to “soak” the compartment for a period of time and wait for hot metals and any fuels to cool before inspecting for the fi re cause. Premature opening of the engine compartment allows an inrushing of oxygen and could result in a fl ash-back. When the engine compartment is opened have portable fi re extinguishers ready.
!
WARNING
AVOID SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH!
DO NOT BREATH FUMES OR VAPORS
CAUSED BY A FIRE AS THEY ARE
HAZARDOUS AND TOXIC.
6-4 6-4
Equipment Operation
Operation-Manual
“FIRE”
HANDLE
If a fire has started in the engine compartment where the automatic fire extinguisher system is located, do not wait for automatic activation. Release the system manually. Close any opened hatches leading to the engine compartment, s h u t d ow n a l l f o r c e d ventilation devices, engines, and electrical components. SAFETY
PIN Remove the safety pin from the “Fire” T-handle, and pull fi rmly on the “FIRE” cable handle which will activate the fi re extinguisher unit in the engine compartment. A loud “rushing” or air” sound may be heard. Complete discharge will take several seconds. Do not open the compartment immediately! Keep the compartment closed for a period of time suffi cient to allow the agent to soak all areas of the protected space.
This allows hot metals and fuel to cool.
KEEP ADDITIONAL MARINE APPROVED HAND HELD FIRE
EXTINGUISHERS ON BOARD AS BACKUPS. THESE UNITS
SHOULD BE SERVICED PERIODICALLY.
!
WARNING
AVOID SERIOUS INJURY!
ACCIDENTIAL DISCHARGE COULD OCCUR
DURING HANDLING, INSPECTION,
OR WORKING IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT.
WEAR EYE PROTECTION AT ALL TIMES!
6-5
Equipment Operation
Operation-Manual
“FIRE”
HANDLE
If a fire has started in the engine compartment where the automatic fire extinguisher system is located, do not wait for automatic activation. Release the system manually. Close any opened hatches leading to the engine compartment, s h u t d ow n a l l f o r c e d ventilation devices, engines, and electrical components. SAFETY
PIN Remove the safety pin from the “Fire” T-handle, and pull fi rmly on the “FIRE” cable handle which will activate the fi re extinguisher unit in the engine compartment. A loud “rushing” or air” sound may be heard. Complete discharge will take several seconds. Do not open the compartment immediately! Keep the compartment closed for a period of time suffi cient to allow the agent to soak all areas of the protected space.
This allows hot metals and fuel to cool.
KEEP ADDITIONAL MARINE APPROVED HAND HELD FIRE
EXTINGUISHERS ON BOARD AS BACKUPS. THESE UNITS
SHOULD BE SERVICED PERIODICALLY.
!
WARNING
AVOID SERIOUS INJURY!
ACCIDENTIAL DISCHARGE COULD OCCUR
DURING HANDLING, INSPECTION,
OR WORKING IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT.
WEAR EYE PROTECTION AT ALL TIMES!
6-5
CHAPTER 6 CHAPTER 6
Premature opening of the compartment could cause a refl ash. When opening the engine compartment for inspection have hand held portable extinguishers ready.
Inspect the pressure gauge and system before and after each outing.
Refer to the maintenance chapter for caring for your fi re extinguisher system.
The illustration opposite shows the actuator not discharged at the top and one which has been discharged at the bottom.
6-6
Premature opening of the compartment could cause a refl ash. When opening the engine compartment for inspection have hand held portable extinguishers ready.
Inspect the pressure gauge and system before and after each outing.
Refer to the maintenance chapter for caring for your fi re extinguisher system.
The illustration opposite shows the actuator not discharged at the top and one which has been discharged at the bottom.
6-6
Equipment Operation
Battery
The battery is the heartbeat of the on-board DC (direct current) electrical system. It supplies the power to crank over the engine (650 or 1000 Cold Cranking Ampres) and to operate the electrical equipment through the engine charging system.
The battery is a wet-cell design with maintenance free features. The battery system features red and black RED OR “+”
BOOT boots to protect the terminals and a battery tray with hold downs. Make sure the red (positive) and black
(negative) boot are completely covering their respective terminals of the battery. The boots and the terminal nuts should be checked periodically for tightness and corrosion. In colder climates battery removal for the winter months is to be considered. See chapter 7 for more specifi c information on the battery system or contact your closest Regal dealer for recommended battery size and amperage requirements.
Equipment Operation
Battery
The battery is the heartbeat of the on-board DC (direct current) electrical system. It supplies the power to crank over the engine (650 or 1000 Cold Cranking Ampres) and to operate the electrical equipment through the engine charging system.
The battery is a wet-cell design with maintenance free features. The battery system features red and black RED OR “+”
BOOT boots to protect the terminals and a battery tray with hold downs. Make sure the red (positive) and black
(negative) boot are completely covering their respective terminals of the battery. The boots and the terminal nuts should be checked periodically for tightness and corrosion. In colder climates battery removal for the winter months is to be considered. See chapter 7 for more specifi c information on the battery system or contact your closest Regal dealer for recommended battery size and amperage requirements.
6-7 6-7
CHAPTER 6
Battery Switch Circuitry
CHAPTER 6
Battery Switch Circuitry
Wiring To Helm
50 Amp Breaker
Battery
Switch
The battery components shown above feature a universal on/off battery switch with an overcurrent protection device (breaker). The battery switch is located in the engine compartment. The 50 amp breaker normally protects the main harness feed wiring (red).
The stereo memory fuse (15 amp) located in the same location protects the memory circuit and holds the stereo settings for a predetermined time frame should the stereo lose power due to a dead battery.
The aft bilge pump fuse (10 amp) protects the aft bilge pump and if the stereo performance package is installed a 30 amp breaker normally protects it.
Note: Should a breaker “pop” or fuse “blow” determine the cause of the problem before resetting the breaker or replacing the fuse. When replacing breakers and fuses use the correct type and amperage.
6-8
Wiring To Helm
50 Amp Breaker
Battery
Switch
The battery components shown above feature a universal on/off battery switch with an overcurrent protection device (breaker). The battery switch is located in the engine compartment. The 50 amp breaker normally protects the main harness feed wiring (red).
The stereo memory fuse (15 amp) located in the same location protects the memory circuit and holds the stereo settings for a predetermined time frame should the stereo lose power due to a dead battery.
The aft bilge pump fuse (10 amp) protects the aft bilge pump and if the stereo performance package is installed a 30 amp breaker normally protects it.
Note: Should a breaker “pop” or fuse “blow” determine the cause of the problem before resetting the breaker or replacing the fuse. When replacing breakers and fuses use the correct type and amperage.
6-8
Equipment Operation
The battery switch features ignition protection technology which makes it safe to use in the engine compartment. It features “on” and
“off ” positions.
To energize the battery switch simply rotate the knob to the “green” or “on” position. Current will now be available at the helm to start the engine and run the accessories. To denergize the battery switch rotate the knob to the “red” or “off ” position.
Note: Never turn off the battery switch with the engine running as damage to the engine charging circuit will occur.
With the battery switch in the “OFF” position (recommended for docking and mooring for extended periods) the aft bilge pump continues to function in the automatic position and the stereo memory continues to function as normal.
Equipment Operation
The battery switch features ignition protection technology which makes it safe to use in the engine compartment. It features “on” and
“off ” positions.
To energize the battery switch simply rotate the knob to the “green” or “on” position. Current will now be available at the helm to start the engine and run the accessories. To denergize the battery switch rotate the knob to the “red” or “off ” position.
Note: Never turn off the battery switch with the engine running as damage to the engine charging circuit will occur.
With the battery switch in the “OFF” position (recommended for docking and mooring for extended periods) the aft bilge pump continues to function in the automatic position and the stereo memory continues to function as normal.
6-9 6-9
CHAPTER 6
Bilge Pump/Automatic Float Switch
AUTOMATIC FLOAT SWITCH
CHECK
FOR DEBRIS
Before each outing check the operation of the bilge pump and automatic switch.
With the dash switch in the automatic position manually pick up the automatic switch or you can activate the switch
BILGE
PUMP by throwing a bucket of water in the bilge. The automatic switch should energize the bilge pump. Periodically, check for debris around the grates of bilge pump base. The bilge pump and automatic switch are located in the bilge in front of the engine.
By holding up the end of the fl oat switch, you can periodically test the unit. With the automatic fl oat switch held up the bilge pump should activate itself.
CHAPTER 6
Bilge Pump/Automatic Float Switch
AUTOMATIC FLOAT SWITCH
CHECK
FOR DEBRIS
Before each outing check the operation of the bilge pump and automatic switch.
With the dash switch in the automatic position manually pick up the automatic switch or you can activate the switch
BILGE
PUMP by throwing a bucket of water in the bilge. The automatic switch should energize the bilge pump. Periodically, check for debris around the grates of bilge pump base. The bilge pump and automatic switch are located in the bilge in front of the engine.
By holding up the end of the fl oat switch, you can periodically test the unit. With the automatic fl oat switch held up the bilge pump should activate itself.
6-10 6-10
Equipment Operation
Canvas
Canvas packages may include a bimini top with boot, bows and hardware. In addition, canvas may include a tonneau cover for the bow
(open bow rider models only) and a cockpit cover which encloses an area from the windshield to the stern.
To install a typical bimini top on models without the optional sport tower, unzip the top boot and remove it from the bimini top. Store it for future use. Unroll the canvas and install both of the front bimini canvas straps. Adjust the straps to make them equal in length.
Install the aft support stanchions and place them in the arch mount located on the deck. Lock each stanchion with a pin. Make sure the pin is completely inserted through the ball and socket mount.
!
CAUTION
TO PREVENT BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTY
DAMAGE,DO NOT TOW BOAT
WITH CANVAS UP. TOW BOAT WITH
CANVAS DOWN AND STORED IN THE COCKPIT.
FOR WATER CRUISE USE,
PLACE THE BIMINI OR CONVERTIBLE TOP
IN THE CRUISE POSITION.
6-11
Equipment Operation
Canvas
Canvas packages may include a bimini top with boot, bows and hardware. In addition, canvas may include a tonneau cover for the bow
(open bow rider models only) and a cockpit cover which encloses an area from the windshield to the stern.
To install a typical bimini top on models without the optional sport tower, unzip the top boot and remove it from the bimini top. Store it for future use. Unroll the canvas and install both of the front bimini canvas straps. Adjust the straps to make them equal in length.
Install the aft support stanchions and place them in the arch mount located on the deck. Lock each stanchion with a pin. Make sure the pin is completely inserted through the ball and socket mount.
!
CAUTION
TO PREVENT BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTY
DAMAGE,DO NOT TOW BOAT
WITH CANVAS UP. TOW BOAT WITH
CANVAS DOWN AND STORED IN THE COCKPIT.
FOR WATER CRUISE USE,
PLACE THE BIMINI OR CONVERTIBLE TOP
IN THE CRUISE POSITION.
6-11
CHAPTER 6
Canvas-Bimini Top w/Sport Tower
CHAPTER 6
Canvas-Bimini Top w/Sport Tower
6-12
TYPICAL INSTALLATION
6-12
TYPICAL INSTALLATION
Equipment Operation
Canvas Enclosure
To install the optional canvas enclosure to a vessel without the sport tower follow these steps:
1. Install the bimini top per previous page.
2. Zip the windscreen to the bimini top. Then attach the windscreen to the windshield snaps. It may be necessary to unzip a portion of the top to access the snaps.
2. Next, install the port and starboard side curtains. They may be marked for easy identifi cation. If not, a visual inspection will indicate their port or starboard location.
3. Finally, install the aft curtain to the bimini top rear section and zip it in place. Finish installing any remaining snaps as you exit the boat.
4. Do not operate the vessel on the water or highway with the canvas enclosure in place.
5. When breaking down the canvas enclosure make sure each canvas piece is dry especially the clear window glass material. Roll all canvas parts before stowing them. Folding clear glass canvas parts could permanently damage them.
Equipment Operation
Canvas Enclosure
To install the optional canvas enclosure to a vessel without the sport tower follow these steps:
1. Install the bimini top per previous page.
2. Zip the windscreen to the bimini top. Then attach the windscreen to the windshield snaps. It may be necessary to unzip a portion of the top to access the snaps.
2. Next, install the port and starboard side curtains. They may be marked for easy identifi cation. If not, a visual inspection will indicate their port or starboard location.
3. Finally, install the aft curtain to the bimini top rear section and zip it in place. Finish installing any remaining snaps as you exit the boat.
4. Do not operate the vessel on the water or highway with the canvas enclosure in place.
5. When breaking down the canvas enclosure make sure each canvas piece is dry especially the clear window glass material. Roll all canvas parts before stowing them. Folding clear glass canvas parts could permanently damage them.
6-13 6-13
CHAPTER 6
Canvas Enclosure w/Sport Tower
TYPICAL CANVAS ENCLOSURE
BIMINI TOP
AFT CURTAIN WINDSCREEN
CHAPTER 6
Canvas Enclosure w/Sport Tower
TYPICAL CANVAS ENCLOSURE
BIMINI TOP
AFT CURTAIN WINDSCREEN
SIDE CURTAIN TRACK/ZIPPERS
AFT BIMINI TOP
To install full enclosure canvas on vessels with the optional tower follow the process as indicated on the illustration.
1. Find the zippered canvas strips and insert each in the sport tower track. Make sure they line up with the actual zippered counterparts on the front and aft bimini tops. Failure to properly match the ends will be noticed as you will not be able to zip the top to the canvas strip.
2. The front bimini top must be zipped to the canvas piece located in the front track on the sport tower during the installation process.
3. The aft bimini top must be zipped to the canvas piece located in the aft track on the sport tower during the installation process.
6-14
SIDE CURTAIN TRACK/ZIPPERS
AFT BIMINI TOP
To install full enclosure canvas on vessels with the optional tower follow the process as indicated on the illustration.
1. Find the zippered canvas strips and insert each in the sport tower track. Make sure they line up with the actual zippered counterparts on the front and aft bimini tops. Failure to properly match the ends will be noticed as you will not be able to zip the top to the canvas strip.
2. The front bimini top must be zipped to the canvas piece located in the front track on the sport tower during the installation process.
3. The aft bimini top must be zipped to the canvas piece located in the aft track on the sport tower during the installation process.
6-14
Cockpit Cover
Equipment Operation
Cockpit Cover
Equipment Operation
COCKPIT COVER TONNEAU COVER
The cockpit cover installs over the windshield and snaps to the deck.
To install the cockpit cover, note that at the bow end of the cover there is a seam on the inside which separates the port and starboard sides.
Align this seam with the center snap below the windshield. Complete snapping the canvas to the outside and then down each gunnel to admidships.
This type of canuvas cover requires several cockpit poles. Their purpose is to keep the canvas tight and water out of the interior. Notice on the underside of the cover there are areas of reinforced canvas material.
These are for the cockpit cover poles. Each pole is adjustable by opening it to the desired length and tightening the thumb screw. You may fi nd it helpful to mark the poles so you can install them in the same location each time.
The cockpit cover is not designed to be used at highway speeds.
Do not tow your Regal boat with a cockpit cover as personal
injury and/or property damage could result. Purchase a suitable travel cover designed for highway use before towing your vessel. They can be ordered from your authorized Regal dealer.
6-15
COCKPIT COVER TONNEAU COVER
The cockpit cover installs over the windshield and snaps to the deck.
To install the cockpit cover, note that at the bow end of the cover there is a seam on the inside which separates the port and starboard sides.
Align this seam with the center snap below the windshield. Complete snapping the canvas to the outside and then down each gunnel to admidships.
This type of canuvas cover requires several cockpit poles. Their purpose is to keep the canvas tight and water out of the interior. Notice on the underside of the cover there are areas of reinforced canvas material.
These are for the cockpit cover poles. Each pole is adjustable by opening it to the desired length and tightening the thumb screw. You may fi nd it helpful to mark the poles so you can install them in the same location each time.
The cockpit cover is not designed to be used at highway speeds.
Do not tow your Regal boat with a cockpit cover as personal
injury and/or property damage could result. Purchase a suitable travel cover designed for highway use before towing your vessel. They can be ordered from your authorized Regal dealer.
6-15
CHAPTER 6
Canvas- Travel/Storage Cover
CHAPTER 6
Canvas- Travel/Storage Cover
6-16 6-16
Equipment Operation
TYPICAL TRAVEL/STORAGE
COVER
Equipment Operation
TYPICAL TRAVEL/STORAGE
COVER
RATCHET STRAP
Ensure the ratchet strap is tight and the velcro fl ap is closed on the travel cover before pulling boat at highway speeds. Tie cover securely to bow and stern eyes. Do not exceed manufacturer’s 65 miles per hour speed limit. Once on the road periodically pull over and check cover, ratchet strap and pertinent hardware for tightness.
6-17
RATCHET STRAP
Ensure the ratchet strap is tight and the velcro fl ap is closed on the travel cover before pulling boat at highway speeds. Tie cover securely to bow and stern eyes. Do not exceed manufacturer’s 65 miles per hour speed limit. Once on the road periodically pull over and check cover, ratchet strap and pertinent hardware for tightness.
6-17
CHAPTER 6
Cockpit Carpet/Table
Cockpit carpet features a forty ounce weight with a heavy duty backing.
As required, snaps are installed.
When storing the carpet, roll it up verses folding it. If the carpet gets wet dry out before storing it. Unsnap individual fasteners carefully when storing carpet to help protect the snaps from pulling out. Do not yank on the carpet to remove it.
A teak dining table may be installed in the cockpit or cabin.When installing the teak table ensure the nylon sleeve is installed in th table pedestal located under the table. It locks the table and provides additional stability.
TYPICAL RECEIVER
NYLON SLEEVE
TEAK COCKPIT TABLE
CHAPTER 6
Cockpit Carpet/Table
Cockpit carpet features a forty ounce weight with a heavy duty backing.
As required, snaps are installed.
When storing the carpet, roll it up verses folding it. If the carpet gets wet dry out before storing it. Unsnap individual fasteners carefully when storing carpet to help protect the snaps from pulling out. Do not yank on the carpet to remove it.
A teak dining table may be installed in the cockpit or cabin.When installing the teak table ensure the nylon sleeve is installed in th table pedestal located under the table. It locks the table and provides additional stability.
TYPICAL RECEIVER
NYLON SLEEVE
TEAK COCKPIT TABLE
6-18 6-18
Equipment Operation
Cockpit Refreshment Center
The cockpit refreshment available on select m o d e l s f e a t u r e s a
Corian countertop with backsplash, stainless steel sink, strainer, FRP cabinet with under storage. All parts are made to resist the harsh marine environment.
The fresh water tank is
11 gallon capacity with a 12 volt helm switch to activate the system. A fresh water pump is included in the pressurized fresh water package. It features a fresh water fi lter that needs to be changed periodically. See the section on the fresh water system for further information.
See the winterization cha;pter for vessels in colder climates. Follow the procedure for “laying up” the system to prevent system and component damage.
The CRC as it is called serves as a weather resistant home for any stereo amplifi ers on select models.
Equipment Operation
Cockpit Refreshment Center
The cockpit refreshment available on select m o d e l s f e a t u r e s a
Corian countertop with backsplash, stainless steel sink, strainer, FRP cabinet with under storage. All parts are made to resist the harsh marine environment.
The fresh water tank is
11 gallon capacity with a 12 volt helm switch to activate the system. A fresh water pump is included in the pressurized fresh water package. It features a fresh water fi lter that needs to be changed periodically. See the section on the fresh water system for further information.
See the winterization cha;pter for vessels in colder climates. Follow the procedure for “laying up” the system to prevent system and component damage.
The CRC as it is called serves as a weather resistant home for any stereo amplifi ers on select models.
6-19 6-19
CHAPTER 6
Compass
The compass is set by the m a nu f a c t u r e r t o e n s u r e its accuracy. If in doubt it can be zeroed in by using a nonmagnetic screwdriver to turn the compensator screws as recommended. Refer to the compass manual in the owner’s information pouch. Also, a compass can be checked while underway for variance and deviation by comparing your heading with a nautical chart. Compass error is part of the calculation.
CHAPTER 6
Compass
The compass is set by the m a nu f a c t u r e r t o e n s u r e its accuracy. If in doubt it can be zeroed in by using a nonmagnetic screwdriver to turn the compensator screws as recommended. Refer to the compass manual in the owner’s information pouch. Also, a compass can be checked while underway for variance and deviation by comparing your heading with a nautical chart. Compass error is part of the calculation.
6-20 6-20
Equipment Operation
Drain Plug
!
CAUTION
TO PREVENT VESSEL FROM SINKING,
INSTALL DRAIN PLUG!
TIGHTEN-CLOCKWISE
Your boat is equipped with a garboard style drain plug. Make sure it is tightly installed before launching. Tighten
with a wrench. Do not use your fi ngers alone. After your outing while the boat is angled on the ramp remove the drain plug to help eliminate any bilge water accumulation or run the bilge pump. When the water stream is diminished, remove foreign objects stuck in the drain hole. Pull the drain plug if dry storing the boat for extended periods especially in colder climates.
Equipment Operation
Drain Plug
!
CAUTION
TO PREVENT VESSEL FROM SINKING,
INSTALL DRAIN PLUG!
TIGHTEN-CLOCKWISE
Your boat is equipped with a garboard style drain plug. Make sure it is tightly installed before launching. Tighten
with a wrench. Do not use your fi ngers alone. After your outing while the boat is angled on the ramp remove the drain plug to help eliminate any bilge water accumulation or run the bilge pump. When the water stream is diminished, remove foreign objects stuck in the drain hole. Pull the drain plug if dry storing the boat for extended periods especially in colder climates.
6-21 6-21
CHAPTER 6
Depth Finder/Sounder
In theory the depth fi nder picks up a bottom signal sent through a transducer to the helm gauge unit which is converted to readings in feet, meters, or fathoms and displayed on the gauge. The unit features shallow or deep water alarms, both of the audio and visual type, and keel offset.
General Description
If equipped the depth fi nder will display depths of 2-199 feet, 1-92 meters, or 1-54 fathoms. To accommodate greater depths to be displayed in the “ft” feet mode the depth sounder will automatically change to “F” fathoms mode and continue to display depths to around
54 fathoms.
When the depth decreases below 200 feet the display will return to the
“ft” mode. Limits on depth will vary depending on transducers and bottom conditions.
If the reading is less than 19.9 feet, meters, or fathoms, 1/10th increments will be displayed. If the reading is more than 19.9 feet, all readings will be in whole numbers.
The depth fi nder features an audible and LCD displayed depth alarm with adjustable shallow and deep limits and a depth below keel offset feature. These settings once made are stored in memory and will remain even if the battery is not connected.
6-22
CHAPTER 6
Depth Finder/Sounder
In theory the depth fi nder picks up a bottom signal sent through a transducer to the helm gauge unit which is converted to readings in feet, meters, or fathoms and displayed on the gauge. The unit features shallow or deep water alarms, both of the audio and visual type, and keel offset.
General Description
If equipped the depth fi nder will display depths of 2-199 feet, 1-92 meters, or 1-54 fathoms. To accommodate greater depths to be displayed in the “ft” feet mode the depth sounder will automatically change to “F” fathoms mode and continue to display depths to around
54 fathoms.
When the depth decreases below 200 feet the display will return to the
“ft” mode. Limits on depth will vary depending on transducers and bottom conditions.
If the reading is less than 19.9 feet, meters, or fathoms, 1/10th increments will be displayed. If the reading is more than 19.9 feet, all readings will be in whole numbers.
The depth fi nder features an audible and LCD displayed depth alarm with adjustable shallow and deep limits and a depth below keel offset feature. These settings once made are stored in memory and will remain even if the battery is not connected.
6-22
Equipment Operation
Operation
Power On. When the helm is powered up by the key switch 12 volt
DC energy is available at the depth gauge along with the remainder of the instrument cluster. You do not need to press the “ON/OFF
MODE” keypad.
The LCD will illuminate showing the depth and the type of units selected; feet (FT), meters (M), or fathoms (F). To deactivate the depth sounder, hold the “ON/OFF MODE” keypad for 4 seconds.
If you press the “ON/OFF MODE keypad again the unit will be reactivated.
Depth Alarm. Shallow mode: If you press the “ON/OFF” MODE” keypad again the “SH” shallow depth alarm setting is displayed. This is the shallowest water that will energize the alarm. Press and hold the up or down arrow keypads to adjust the reading to the desired depth.
Depth Alarm. Deep Mode: By pressing the “ON/OFF MODE” keypad displays again the “DP” deep depth alarm setting. This is the deepest water that will energize the alarm.
Press and hold the “UP” or “DOWN” keypads to adjust the reading to the desired depth. When the shallow depth setting is read by the depth fi nder, the “SH” will fl ash on the LCD and the audible alarm will sound in a rapid sequence. When the deep depth setting is read by the depth fi nder the “DP” will fl ash on the LCD and the audible alarm will sound at 2 beeps per second.
Note: To fully deactivate the alarm, reset it to zero. Pressing the “ON/
OFF MODE” keypad temporarily deactivates the alarm. To reactivate the alarm press the “ON/OFF MODE” keypad until the depth reading appears.
6-23
Equipment Operation
Operation
Power On. When the helm is powered up by the key switch 12 volt
DC energy is available at the depth gauge along with the remainder of the instrument cluster. You do not need to press the “ON/OFF
MODE” keypad.
The LCD will illuminate showing the depth and the type of units selected; feet (FT), meters (M), or fathoms (F). To deactivate the depth sounder, hold the “ON/OFF MODE” keypad for 4 seconds.
If you press the “ON/OFF MODE keypad again the unit will be reactivated.
Depth Alarm. Shallow mode: If you press the “ON/OFF” MODE” keypad again the “SH” shallow depth alarm setting is displayed. This is the shallowest water that will energize the alarm. Press and hold the up or down arrow keypads to adjust the reading to the desired depth.
Depth Alarm. Deep Mode: By pressing the “ON/OFF MODE” keypad displays again the “DP” deep depth alarm setting. This is the deepest water that will energize the alarm.
Press and hold the “UP” or “DOWN” keypads to adjust the reading to the desired depth. When the shallow depth setting is read by the depth fi nder, the “SH” will fl ash on the LCD and the audible alarm will sound in a rapid sequence. When the deep depth setting is read by the depth fi nder the “DP” will fl ash on the LCD and the audible alarm will sound at 2 beeps per second.
Note: To fully deactivate the alarm, reset it to zero. Pressing the “ON/
OFF MODE” keypad temporarily deactivates the alarm. To reactivate the alarm press the “ON/OFF MODE” keypad until the depth reading appears.
6-23
CHAPTER 6
Keel Offset. By pressing the “ON/OFF MODE” keypad again displays the “KL” keel offset setting. It can be set so the depth fi nder shows the depth below the transducer or the depth under the keel. Press the
“UP” or “DOWN” arrow keypads to adjust the reading to the desired depth no further than 19.9 feet.
An example would be if the keel bottom is 3 feet below the transducer and you desire the depth sounder to read the depth below the keel, the display should be adjusted to read 3.0 FT.
Note: Once the keel offset is programmed, the shallow and deep alarms will be energized by the depth under the keel.
Units. Pressing the “ON/OFF MODE” keypad again displays “UN” on the LCD indicating the units mode.
Press either the up or down arrow keypads to set the units desired to
(FT) feet, (M) meters, or (F) fathoms. Once these units are set, they will remain the same for all modes. By pressing the “ON/OFF MODE” keypad again returns the depth fi nder to normal operation.
Transducer Note: At the step area there is an access plate. Under the plate near the keel is the depth sounder transducer.
It bounces a constant signal off the bottom and sends it to the dash head unit. Never use bottom paint on the hull side of the transducer since it will effect the unit’s operation.
CHAPTER 6
Keel Offset. By pressing the “ON/OFF MODE” keypad again displays the “KL” keel offset setting. It can be set so the depth fi nder shows the depth below the transducer or the depth under the keel. Press the
“UP” or “DOWN” arrow keypads to adjust the reading to the desired depth no further than 19.9 feet.
An example would be if the keel bottom is 3 feet below the transducer and you desire the depth sounder to read the depth below the keel, the display should be adjusted to read 3.0 FT.
Note: Once the keel offset is programmed, the shallow and deep alarms will be energized by the depth under the keel.
Units. Pressing the “ON/OFF MODE” keypad again displays “UN” on the LCD indicating the units mode.
Press either the up or down arrow keypads to set the units desired to
(FT) feet, (M) meters, or (F) fathoms. Once these units are set, they will remain the same for all modes. By pressing the “ON/OFF MODE” keypad again returns the depth fi nder to normal operation.
Transducer Note: At the step area there is an access plate. Under the plate near the keel is the depth sounder transducer.
It bounces a constant signal off the bottom and sends it to the dash head unit. Never use bottom paint on the hull side of the transducer since it will effect the unit’s operation.
6-24 6-24
Equipment Operation
Doors/Walk-Thru Bow
Equipment Operation
Doors/Walk-Thru Bow
STORED POSITION CLOSED POSITION
Walk-thru bow doors are great for foul weather. With the tonneau cover in place, simply open the doors and pull across the bow opening. Secure shut by lining up the latch and pushing down to catch both doors. Snap the tonneau cover to the fasteners provided on the center windshield frame.
To store, fold against the walk-thru and secure with snaps, snap strap or latch.
STORED POSITION CLOSED POSITION
Walk-thru bow doors are great for foul weather. With the tonneau cover in place, simply open the doors and pull across the bow opening. Secure shut by lining up the latch and pushing down to catch both doors. Snap the tonneau cover to the fasteners provided on the center windshield frame.
To store, fold against the walk-thru and secure with snaps, snap strap or latch.
6-25 6-25
CHAPTER 6
Electronics- Garmin VHF
Your vessel may be equipped with an optional VHF marine radio. The unit features ship to ship, ship to shore, weather station and U. S. Coast
Guard channels.
The unit features DSC technology (Digitial Selective Calling) when activated by a nine digit MMSI number. When set-up properly it can transmit your GPS position (GPS input required).
The radio uses three soft keys linked to onscreen menus that permit the operator to see and easily select the information they desire. The sound is of the highest quality to enhance every message sent and received.
Also, the messages are displayed on a 3.2 inch screen.
Before each outing check to make sure it is operating properly along with receiving weather data. This check should be part of the pre departure routine. Make sure someone beside the captain knows how to use the radio. Refer to the Garmin owner’s manual.
To activate the VHF radio do the following:
1. Turn the boat battery switch located in the engine compartment to the “on” or green position.
2. On selected Regal models activate the electronics dash switch.
3. To turn on the radio, press and hold the 16/9 key. If you have not entered a Mobile Maritime Safety Identity (MMSI) number, you must press the CLEAR key to access the HOME screen.
4. To turn off the radio, press and hold the 16/9 key.
A general description of the button functions and features are found in the next pages. Refer to the Garmin owner’s manual for more detailed information and instructional aids. Garmin can be easily accessed through the internet at www.garmin.com
6-26
CHAPTER 6
Electronics- Garmin VHF
Your vessel may be equipped with an optional VHF marine radio. The unit features ship to ship, ship to shore, weather station and U. S. Coast
Guard channels.
The unit features DSC technology (Digitial Selective Calling) when activated by a nine digit MMSI number. When set-up properly it can transmit your GPS position (GPS input required).
The radio uses three soft keys linked to onscreen menus that permit the operator to see and easily select the information they desire. The sound is of the highest quality to enhance every message sent and received.
Also, the messages are displayed on a 3.2 inch screen.
Before each outing check to make sure it is operating properly along with receiving weather data. This check should be part of the pre departure routine. Make sure someone beside the captain knows how to use the radio. Refer to the Garmin owner’s manual.
To activate the VHF radio do the following:
1. Turn the boat battery switch located in the engine compartment to the “on” or green position.
2. On selected Regal models activate the electronics dash switch.
3. To turn on the radio, press and hold the 16/9 key. If you have not entered a Mobile Maritime Safety Identity (MMSI) number, you must press the CLEAR key to access the HOME screen.
4. To turn off the radio, press and hold the 16/9 key.
A general description of the button functions and features are found in the next pages. Refer to the Garmin owner’s manual for more detailed information and instructional aids. Garmin can be easily accessed through the internet at www.garmin.com
6-26
Equipment Operation
TYPICAL GARMIN VHF
Equipment Operation
TYPICAL GARMIN VHF
6-27 6-27
CHAPTER 6 CHAPTER 6
6-28 6-28
Equipment Operation Equipment Operation
6-29 6-29
CHAPTER 6 CHAPTER 6
6-30 6-30
Equipment Operation
!
CAUTION
Operation on channels not designated for use by your classifi cation of vessel or on International channels within the US territorial waters is a violation of FCC Rules &
Regulations and may result in severe penalties.
!
CAUTION
The transmitter of your VHF is disabled when channel 15, 75, 76, or WX0-WX9 is displayed.
NOTICE
Initial communication contacts are usually made over channel 16 as all ships and shore stations monitor this channel. Then a shift to a working channel will be necessary.
Equipment Operation
!
CAUTION
Operation on channels not designated for use by your classifi cation of vessel or on International channels within the US territorial waters is a violation of FCC Rules &
Regulations and may result in severe penalties.
!
CAUTION
The transmitter of your VHF is disabled when channel 15, 75, 76, or WX0-WX9 is displayed.
NOTICE channel 16 as all ships and shore stations monitor this channel. Then a shift to a working channel will be necessary.
6-31 6-31
CHAPTER 6
U.S. VHF MARINE CHANNELS
1 8 A
1 9 A
2 0 A
2 1 A
1 4
1 5
1 6
1 7
1 0
1 1
1 2
0 6
0 7 A
0 8
0 9
S E L E C T E D M A R I N E C H A N N E L S & T H E I R U S A G E
C h a n n e l N u m b e r
0 1 A
C h a n n e l U s a g e
P o r t O
F o u n d p
O e r a t n l y i o n s i n N
& e w
C o m m e r c i a l
O r l e a n s / L o w e r M i s s i s s i p p i A r e a
0 2 t h r o u g h 0 4
0 5
P o r t O p e r a t i o n s
P o r t O p e r a t i o n s
F o u n d O n l y i n H o u s t o n , N e w O r l e a n s & S e a t t l e
I n t e r s h i p S a f e t y
C
C o m m e r c i a l
B o m m e r o a t C c i a l a l l i n g ,
C o m m e r c i a l
( I n t e r s h i p O n l y )
C o m m e r c i a l & N o n c o m m e r c i a l
1 3
C o m m e
P o r t r c i a
O p e
.l
V T S r a t i o n s .
i n s e l e c t
V T S i n a r e a s s e l e c t
.
a r e a s .
I n t e r s h i p N a v i g a t i o n S a f e t y ( B r i d g e t o B r i d g e ) .
S h i p s g r e a t e r t h a n 2 0 m e t e r s i n l e n g t h m a i n t a i n l i s t e n i n g w a t c h
P o r t O p e r a t i o n s .
V T S i n s e l e c t a r e a s .
E n v i r o n m e n t a l ( R e c e i v e O n l y ) U s e d b y c l a s s C E P I R B S
I n t e r n a t i o n a l D i s t r e s s , S a f e t y & C a l l i n g .
S t a t e C o n t r o l
C o m m e r c i a l
C o m m e r c i a l
2
2
2
2
3
4
A
A
2 8
P o r t O p e r a t i o n s
U .
S .
C o a s t G u a r d O n l y
C o a s t G u a r d L i a i s o n & M a r i t i m e S a f e t y I n f o r m a t i o n
B r o a d c a s t s a s a n n o u n c e d o n c h a n n e l 1 6
U .
S .
C o a s t G u a r d O n l y
P u b l i c C o r r e s p o n d e n c e ( M a r i n e O p e r a t o r )
P o r t O p e r a t i o n s 6 0 6 2
6-32
CHAPTER 6
U.S. VHF MARINE CHANNELS
1 8 A
1 9 A
2 0 A
2 1 A
1 4
1 5
1 6
1 7
1 0
1 1
1 2
0 6
0 7 A
0 8
0 9
S E L E C T E D M A R I N E C H A N N E L S & T H E I R U S A G E
C h a n n e l N u m b e r
0 1 A
C h a n n e l U s a g e
P o r t O
F o u n d p
O e r a t n l y i o n s i n N
& e w
C o m m e r c i a l
O r l e a n s / L o w e r M i s s i s s i p p i A r e a
0 2 t h r o u g h 0 4
0 5
P o r t O p e r a t i o n s
P o r t O p e r a t i o n s
F o u n d O n l y i n H o u s t o n , N e w O r l e a n s & S e a t t l e
I n t e r s h i p S a f e t y
C
C o m m e r c i a l
B o m m e r o a t C c i a l a l l i n g ,
C o m m e r c i a l
( I n t e r s h i p O n l y )
C o m m e r c i a l & N o n c o m m e r c i a l
1 3
C o m m e
P o r t r c i a
O p e
.l
V T S r a t i o n s .
i n s e l e c t
V T S i n a r e a s s e l e c t
.
a r e a s .
I n t e r s h i p N a v i g a t i o n S a f e t y ( B r i d g e t o B r i d g e ) .
S h i p s g r e a t e r t h a n 2 0 m e t e r s i n l e n g t h m a i n t a i n l i s t e n i n g w a t c h
P o r t O p e r a t i o n s .
V T S i n s e l e c t a r e a s .
E n v i r o n m e n t a l ( R e c e i v e O n l y ) U s e d b y c l a s s C E P I R B S
I n t e r n a t i o n a l D i s t r e s s , S a f e t y & C a l l i n g .
S t a t e C o n t r o l
C o m m e r c i a l
C o m m e r c i a l
2
2
2
2
3
4
A
A
2 8
P o r t O p e r a t i o n s
U .
S .
C o a s t G u a r d O n l y
C o a s t G u a r d L i a i s o n & M a r i t i m e S a f e t y I n f o r m a t i o n
B r o a d c a s t s a s a n n o u n c e d o n c h a n n e l 1 6
U .
S .
C o a s t G u a r d O n l y
P u b l i c C o r r e s p o n d e n c e ( M a r i n e O p e r a t o r )
P o r t O p e r a t i o n s 6 0 6 2
6-32
Equipment Operation
7 5 , 7 6
7 7
7 8 A
7 9 A
8 0 A
8 1 A
8 2 A
8 3 A
8 4 8 7
8 8 A
7 0
7 1
7 2
7 3 , 7 4
U.S. VHF MARINE CHANNELS CONTINUED
C h a n n e l N u m b e r
6 3 A
6 4 , 6 5 A , 6 6 A
6 7
6 8 , 6 9
C h a n n e l U s a g e
P o r t
V T S .
O p e r a t i o n s
A v a i l a b l e
& i n
C o
N e w m m e
O r l r c i a e a n
.l
s / L o w e r M i s s i s s i p p i
P o r t O p e r a t i o n s
C o m m e r c i a .l
U s e d f o r b r i d g e t o b r i d g e i n l o w e r
M i s s i s s i p p i R i v e r .
I n t e r s h i p O n l y
N o n C o m m e r c i a l
D i g i t a l S e l e c t C a l l i n g ( V o i c e T r a f f i c N o t A l l o w e d )
N o n C o m m e r c i a l
N o n C o m m e r c i a l ( I n t e r s h i p O n l y )
P o r t O p e r a t i o n s
C h 1 6 G u a r d B a n d .
R X O n l y
P o r t O p e r a t i o n s .
( I n t e r s h i p O n l y )
N o n C o m m e r c i a l
C o m m e r c i a .l
N o n C o m m e r c i a l i n G r e a t L a k e s .
U .
S .
G o v e r n m e n t O n l y .
O p e r a t i o n s
E n v i r o n m e n t a l P r o t e c t i o n
U .
S .
G o v e r n m e n t O n l y .
P u b l i c C o r r e s p o n d e n c e .
( M a r i n e O p e r a t o r )
C o m m e r c i a .l
( I n t e r s h i p O n l y )
6-33
Equipment Operation
7 5 , 7 6
7 7
7 8 A
7 9 A
8 0 A
8 1 A
8 2 A
8 3 A
8 4 8 7
8 8 A
7 0
7 1
7 2
7 3 , 7 4
U.S. VHF MARINE CHANNELS CONTINUED
C h a n n e l N u m b e r
6 3 A
6 4 , 6 5 A , 6 6 A
6 7
6 8 , 6 9
C h a n n e l U s a g e
P o r t
V T S .
O p e r a t i o n s
A v a i l a b l e
& i n
C o
N e w m m e
O r l r c i a e a n
.l
s / L o w e r M i s s i s s i p p i
P o r t O p e r a t i o n s
C o m m e r c i a .l
U s e d f o r b r i d g e t o b r i d g e i n l o w e r
M i s s i s s i p p i R i v e r .
I n t e r s h i p O n l y
N o n C o m m e r c i a l
D i g i t a l S e l e c t C a l l i n g ( V o i c e T r a f f i c N o t A l l o w e d )
N o n C o m m e r c i a l
N o n C o m m e r c i a l ( I n t e r s h i p O n l y )
P o r t O p e r a t i o n s
C h 1 6 G u a r d B a n d .
R X O n l y
P o r t O p e r a t i o n s .
( I n t e r s h i p O n l y )
N o n C o m m e r c i a l
C o m m e r c i a .l
N o n C o m m e r c i a l i n G r e a t L a k e s .
U .
S .
G o v e r n m e n t O n l y .
O p e r a t i o n s
E n v i r o n m e n t a l P r o t e c t i o n
U .
S .
G o v e r n m e n t O n l y .
P u b l i c C o r r e s p o n d e n c e .
( M a r i n e O p e r a t o r )
C o m m e r c i a .l
( I n t e r s h i p O n l y )
6-33
CHAPTER 6
CHANNEL DESCRIPTION & USAGE GUIDE
CHAPTER 6
CHANNEL DESCRIPTION & USAGE GUIDE
6-34 6-34
Equipment Operation Equipment Operation
6-35 6-35
CHAPTER 6 CHAPTER 6
6-36 6-36
Equipment Operation Equipment Operation
6-37 6-37
CHAPTER 6 CHAPTER 6
6-38 6-38
Equipment Operation Equipment Operation
6-39 6-39
CHAPTER 6
Electronics- Garmin Chart Plotter
INSERT KEY
INTO LOCKING SCREW
RELEASE-
BUTTON
LOCKING LATCH
ON-OFF
SWITCH
CHAPTER 6
Electronics- Garmin Chart Plotter
INSERT KEY
INTO LOCKING SCREW
RELEASE-
BUTTON
LOCKING LATCH
ON-OFF
SWITCH
6-40
MARINE
HELM MOUNT
CRADLE
6-40
MARINE
HELM MOUNT
CRADLE
Equipment Operation
Introduction
The optional Garmin chart plotter features the latest touchscreen technology and satellite imagery. It includes software with the latest
U.S. coastal charts and street maps visible on the crisp 5.2 inch WVGA display.
An automotive mount kit complete with power cord is available from
Garmin or your closest authorized Regal dealer. Once the automotive mount is installed you can start to enjoy the dual-use advantage of highway navigation.
As a security enhancement, the head unit is fastened in the vessel mounting bracket with a special key.
NOTE: As part of the standard software coastal charts include Alaska,
Hawaii, and the Bahamas. Canada and Puerto Rico are integrated into the street map selections.
Note: The manufacturer recommends that the head unit be removed after each cruise as direct sunlight could cause battery pack damage.
In the following pages you will fi nd information for installing the battery,
SD card, and powering up the unit. For more detailed information, refer to the Garmin owner’s manual located in the information packet.
KEY To remove the Garmin chart plotter from the dash or to remove the battery or change SD cards a key is required,
Located in the Regal owner’s packet is a key to unlock the unit. Unscrew the key assembly to fi nd the special tool to loosen the locking screw.
Engage the tool into the locking screw and turn it counterclockwise. Find a safe place to keep the screw. This will allow the release button to be depressed and the unit will hinge forward to access the locking latch.
Lift the locking latch to release the unit. Pull the unit up toward you which will release it completely from the bottom cradle mount.
6-41
Equipment Operation
Introduction
The optional Garmin chart plotter features the latest touchscreen technology and satellite imagery. It includes software with the latest
U.S. coastal charts and street maps visible on the crisp 5.2 inch WVGA display.
An automotive mount kit complete with power cord is available from
Garmin or your closest authorized Regal dealer. Once the automotive mount is installed you can start to enjoy the dual-use advantage of highway navigation.
As a security enhancement, the head unit is fastened in the vessel mounting bracket with a special key.
NOTE: As part of the standard software coastal charts include Alaska,
Hawaii, and the Bahamas. Canada and Puerto Rico are integrated into the street map selections.
Note: The manufacturer recommends that the head unit be removed after each cruise as direct sunlight could cause battery pack damage.
In the following pages you will fi nd information for installing the battery,
SD card, and powering up the unit. For more detailed information, refer to the Garmin owner’s manual located in the information packet.
KEY To remove the Garmin chart plotter from the dash or to remove the battery or change SD cards a key is required,
Located in the Regal owner’s packet is a key to unlock the unit. Unscrew the key assembly to fi nd the special tool to loosen the locking screw.
Engage the tool into the locking screw and turn it counterclockwise. Find a safe place to keep the screw. This will allow the release button to be depressed and the unit will hinge forward to access the locking latch.
Lift the locking latch to release the unit. Pull the unit up toward you which will release it completely from the bottom cradle mount.
6-41
CHAPTER 6
Battery Information
The Garmin chart plotter uses a removable lithium-ion rechargable battery. Replacement batteries can be found at marine supply stores, authorized Regal dealers or from Garmin on-line.
The battery will generally last from 6-8 hours before recharging becomes necessary. Normally the battery is charged through the engine battery/ charging system. Before using the battery for the 1st time charge it for at least 6 hours. Remember this is a back-up battery. Use external power whenever possible. If device is not to be used for periods longer than
1 week remove the battery pack.
To Remove Battery Pack:
1. The battery is located on the back face of the plotter unit. Lift up the battery locking ring and turn it counter-clockwise.
2. Tilt the battery pack away from the device and lift it out.
To Insert Battery Pack:
1. On the back of the chart plotter, fi t the bottom of the battery pack into the device.
2. Tilt the battery pack toward the device until it is tight.
3. Turn the locking ring clockwise to lock the battery pack in place.
To Remove SD Card:
1. Remove the battery.
2. Press the SD card until it clicks softly and releases from card slot.
3. Remove the SD card.
6-42
CHAPTER 6
Battery Information
The Garmin chart plotter uses a removable lithium-ion rechargable battery. Replacement batteries can be found at marine supply stores, authorized Regal dealers or from Garmin on-line.
The battery will generally last from 6-8 hours before recharging becomes necessary. Normally the battery is charged through the engine battery/ charging system. Before using the battery for the 1st time charge it for at least 6 hours. Remember this is a back-up battery. Use external power whenever possible. If device is not to be used for periods longer than
1 week remove the battery pack.
To Remove Battery Pack:
1. The battery is located on the back face of the plotter unit. Lift up the battery locking ring and turn it counter-clockwise.
2. Tilt the battery pack away from the device and lift it out.
To Insert Battery Pack:
1. On the back of the chart plotter, fi t the bottom of the battery pack into the device.
2. Tilt the battery pack toward the device until it is tight.
3. Turn the locking ring clockwise to lock the battery pack in place.
To Remove SD Card:
1. Remove the battery.
2. Press the SD card until it clicks softly and releases from card slot.
3. Remove the SD card.
6-42
Equipment Operation Equipment Operation
6-43 6-43
CHAPTER 6
To Install SD Card:
1. Remove the battery. The SD card slot is in the bottom of the battery compartment, on the opposite side from the battery contacts.
2. Place a SD card into the opening with the label showing, with the
SD card contacts facing away from the battery contacts.
3. Slide the SD card into the SD slot, and press until it clicks softly and locks in place.
4. Insert the battery pack.
CHAPTER 6
To Install SD Card:
1. Remove the battery. The SD card slot is in the bottom of the battery compartment, on the opposite side from the battery contacts.
2. Place a SD card into the opening with the label showing, with the
SD card contacts facing away from the battery contacts.
3. Slide the SD card into the SD slot, and press until it clicks softly and locks in place.
4. Insert the battery pack.
SD CARD
NOTICE
TO HELP AVOID THEFT AND/OR UV BATTERY DAMAGE
REMOVE THE CHART PLOTTER UNIT
FROM ON BOARD THE VESSEL.
STORE IN A COOL, DRY ENVIRONMENT.
DO NOT STORE CHART PLOTTER
IN THE BOAT OR AUTO GLOVE COMPARTMENT.
6-44
SD CARD
NOTICE
TO HELP AVOID THEFT AND/OR UV BATTERY DAMAGE
REMOVE THE CHART PLOTTER UNIT
FROM ON BOARD THE VESSEL.
STORE IN A COOL, DRY ENVIRONMENT.
DO NOT STORE CHART PLOTTER
IN THE BOAT OR AUTO GLOVE COMPARTMENT.
6-44
Equipment Operation
Powering Up Chart Plotter
Once your engine is started the chart plotter can be turned “on” by pressing and holding the power key. See the illustration at the beginning of this chapter for power key location. To power off press and hold the power key.
The unit may take a few minutes to pick up a satellite signal. The green bars on the top display indicate signal strength. Only one bar is required to select destinations and navigation to them.
The home screen permits the user to choose marine or auto modes.
The operator now can navigate to the desired category or action.
Refer to Garmin owner’s manual for more operational information.
Equipment Operation
Powering Up Chart Plotter
Once your engine is started the chart plotter can be turned “on” by pressing and holding the power key. See the illustration at the beginning of this chapter for power key location. To power off press and hold the power key.
The unit may take a few minutes to pick up a satellite signal. The green bars on the top display indicate signal strength. Only one bar is required to select destinations and navigation to them.
The home screen permits the user to choose marine or auto modes.
The operator now can navigate to the desired category or action.
Refer to Garmin owner’s manual for more operational information.
6-45 6-45
CHAPTER 6
Engine Hatch
Your vessel features an engine compartment hatch latch located under the center walk-through cushion on the aft deck hatch. The hatch utilizes a forward opening design which permits accessing the engine from the swim platform.
Accessing the hatch is a real plus when performing pre-cruise and latch and turn it 90 degrees.
To close the engine hatch lower it and then turn the latch and lock it in place. maintenance inspections.
To open the hatch lift up on the
Note: To aid in opening or closing the hatch, use your hand to push the hatch unit down while turning the latch in the closed or open position.
CHAPTER 6
Engine Hatch
Your vessel features an engine compartment hatch latch located under the center walk-through cushion on the aft deck hatch. The hatch utilizes a forward opening design which permits accessing the engine from the swim platform.
Accessing the hatch is a real plus when performing pre-cruise and latch and turn it 90 degrees.
To close the engine hatch lower it and then turn the latch and lock it in place. maintenance inspections.
To open the hatch lift up on the
Note: To aid in opening or closing the hatch, use your hand to push the hatch unit down while turning the latch in the closed or open position.
6-46 6-46
Equipment Operation
Gas Vapor Detector
If equipped, a gas vapor detector is a state of the art fume montoring and alarm system. It ia highly effective detector of engine compartment gasoline fumes from unburned hydrocarbons wmitted from faulty exhaust systems and hydrogen battery vapors.
The unit operates with a head unit at the helm, a sensor located in the bilge installed just above the normal accumulation of oily bilge water.
A .5 amp buss fuse (for overcurrent protection) is located behind the helm head unit.
Operation
The display panel at the helm features 3 windows. The left window is a green power on indicator. The right window is and opening for the Var-a-Brite light intensity detector. The center window is the red warning indicator.
To check for fumes, turn the ignition key to the “on” position. the green power on LED will show on and the red warning LED may light momentarily to indicate a warm-up period for the sensor. The alarm horn will not sound during this period.
If a vapor build-up reaches 10-20% of lower explosion limit the red warning LED will light indicating a detection of fumes. Should this condition last for longer than 10 seconds, the alarm horn will sound.
The alarm will continue as long as vapors are present. The alarm horn may be silenced by pressing the “mute” switch, the the Red warning light will remain on until the vapor problem has been resolved.
NOTE: THE PROBLEM SHOULD NEVER BE CONSIDERED
CORRECTED UNTIL THE RED WARNING LIGHT GOES
OUT.
If the red LED begins to glow softly and or intermittently, it is an indication that the gasoline vapor build-up is beginning to occur and you can anticipate a full alarm momentarily.
6-47
Equipment Operation
Gas Vapor Detector
If equipped, a gas vapor detector is a state of the art fume montoring and alarm system. It ia highly effective detector of engine compartment gasoline fumes from unburned hydrocarbons wmitted from faulty exhaust systems and hydrogen battery vapors.
The unit operates with a head unit at the helm, a sensor located in the bilge installed just above the normal accumulation of oily bilge water.
A .5 amp buss fuse (for overcurrent protection) is located behind the helm head unit.
Operation
The display panel at the helm features 3 windows. The left window is a green power on indicator. The right window is and opening for the Var-a-Brite light intensity detector. The center window is the red warning indicator.
To check for fumes, turn the ignition key to the “on” position. the green power on LED will show on and the red warning LED may light momentarily to indicate a warm-up period for the sensor. The alarm horn will not sound during this period.
If a vapor build-up reaches 10-20% of lower explosion limit the red warning LED will light indicating a detection of fumes. Should this condition last for longer than 10 seconds, the alarm horn will sound.
The alarm will continue as long as vapors are present. The alarm horn may be silenced by pressing the “mute” switch, the the Red warning light will remain on until the vapor problem has been resolved.
NOTE: THE PROBLEM SHOULD NEVER BE CONSIDERED
CORRECTED UNTIL THE RED WARNING LIGHT GOES
OUT.
If the red LED begins to glow softly and or intermittently, it is an indication that the gasoline vapor build-up is beginning to occur and you can anticipate a full alarm momentarily.
6-47
CHAPTER 6
Immediately have all passengers and crew exit the passenger compartment. If an explosion or fi re should occur, the probability of injury will be greatly reduced if no one is in a confi ned area of the vessel.
IN THE EVENT OF AN ALARM:
NOTE: IT IS IMPORTANT TO UNDERSTAND THAT AN
ALARM WOULD NOT OCCUR UNLESS A PROBLEM EXISTED.
CAREFULLY CHECK ALL FUEL LINES, GAS LINES, AND ANY
OTHER POTENTIAL SOURCES OF GAS LEAKS.
Testing System
The head unit can be tested for electrical continuity by pressing the “Test” switch. The Red LED will come on. The light will glow as long as the switch is held down. If the test switch is held down longer than 10 seconds the horn will sound and the “MUTE” switch must be pushed to silence the horn.
Unplug the sensor wire from the helm display head while the unit is powered up. The Red LED will illluminate and within 10-15 seconds the alarm horn will sound. If warning Red LED fails to come on & horn fails to sound, remove display head & return to factory for repair.
6-48
CHAPTER 6
Immediately have all passengers and crew exit the passenger compartment. If an explosion or fi re should occur, the probability of injury will be greatly reduced if no one is in a confi ned area of the vessel.
IN THE EVENT OF AN ALARM:
NOTE: IT IS IMPORTANT TO UNDERSTAND THAT AN
ALARM WOULD NOT OCCUR UNLESS A PROBLEM EXISTED.
CAREFULLY CHECK ALL FUEL LINES, GAS LINES, AND ANY
OTHER POTENTIAL SOURCES OF GAS LEAKS.
Testing System
The head unit can be tested for electrical continuity by pressing the “Test” switch. The Red LED will come on. The light will glow as long as the switch is held down. If the test switch is held down longer than 10 seconds the horn will sound and the “MUTE” switch must be pushed to silence the horn.
Unplug the sensor wire from the helm display head while the unit is powered up. The Red LED will illluminate and within 10-15 seconds the alarm horn will sound. If warning Red LED fails to come on & horn fails to sound, remove display head & return to factory for repair.
6-48
Equipment Operation
!
WARNING
AVOID INJURY AND DEATH!
GASOLINE VAPORS CAN EXPLODE!
OPERATE BLOWER FOR AT LEAST 4 MINUTES
AND CHECK THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT
AND BILGE FOR GASOLINE VAPORS.
RUN BLOWER BELOW CRUISING SPEEDS.
Equipment Operation
!
WARNING
AVOID INJURY AND DEATH!
GASOLINE VAPORS CAN EXPLODE!
OPERATE BLOWER FOR AT LEAST 4 MINUTES
AND CHECK THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT
AND BILGE FOR GASOLINE VAPORS.
RUN BLOWER BELOW CRUISING SPEEDS.
6-49 6-49
CHAPTER 6
Grill
The optional marine gas grill uses small bottles of propane as a fuel similar to home units. On selected models the grill receiver is located on the deck. Read and understand all instructions before using the grill. Make sure grill is mounted securely to rail before using.
Gas Grill- Barbecue Safety Instructions
1. The unit is designed to cook food like meat, fi sh or vegetables. Do not use it for any other purpose since it could be improper or dangerous.
2. Do not operate the barbecue in rough seas or while under power.
3. Do not use burning type charcoal bricketts or volcanic stones.
4. Never light the barbecue with the lid closed.
5. Use mitts or gloves when handling a hot barbecue.
6. Keep combustible material away from the barbecue.
7. Keep children away from barbecue hot parts.
8. Do not store propane bottles on board the vessel.
9. Let the unit cool down before attemping to store the grill.
10. Always change propane tank away from any ignition source.
11. Turn off the grill after each use.
12. Do not tamper or modify any parts adjusted or sealed by the manufacturer.
13. Periodically check all components for leaks and wear.
6-50
CHAPTER 6
Grill
The optional marine gas grill uses small bottles of propane as a fuel similar to home units. On selected models the grill receiver is located on the deck. Read and understand all instructions before using the grill. Make sure grill is mounted securely to rail before using.
Gas Grill- Barbecue Safety Instructions
1. The unit is designed to cook food like meat, fi sh or vegetables. Do not use it for any other purpose since it could be improper or dangerous.
2. Do not operate the barbecue in rough seas or while under power.
3. Do not use burning type charcoal bricketts or volcanic stones.
4. Never light the barbecue with the lid closed.
5. Use mitts or gloves when handling a hot barbecue.
6. Keep combustible material away from the barbecue.
7. Keep children away from barbecue hot parts.
8. Do not store propane bottles on board the vessel.
9. Let the unit cool down before attemping to store the grill.
10. Always change propane tank away from any ignition source.
11. Turn off the grill after each use.
12. Do not tamper or modify any parts adjusted or sealed by the manufacturer.
13. Periodically check all components for leaks and wear.
6-50
Equipment Operation
14. When installing a propane bottle make sure it is screwed into the receptacle tightly. Use a spray bottle with soapy water to check for leaks.
See the information on gas leaks.
15. Never try to adjust the regulator. It is factory set for best operation.
16. Use common sense around the grill.
A fi re extinguisher should be readily available.
!
WARNING
GASOLINE VAPORS ARE EXPLOSIVE!
OPEN FLAME APPLIANCES CAN IGNITE GASOLINE
VAPORS. TO AVOID INJURY OR DEATH FROM
EXPLOSION OR FIRE,
TURN OFF ALL OPEN FLAME DEVICES
!
WARNING
OPEN FLAME COOKING APPLIANCES CONSUME
OXYGEN AND PRODUCE CARBON MONOXIDE.
TO AVOID ASPHYXIATION, OR INJURY OR DEATH
FROM EXPOSURE TO CARBON MONOXIDE,
MAINTAIN OPEN VENTILATION
WHEN USING THESE APPLIANCES.
DO NOT USE THIS APPLIANCE
FOR COMFORT HEATING.
6-51
Equipment Operation
14. When installing a propane bottle make sure it is screwed into the receptacle tightly. Use a spray bottle with soapy water to check for leaks.
See the information on gas leaks.
15. Never try to adjust the regulator. It is factory set for best operation.
16. Use common sense around the grill.
A fi re extinguisher should be readily available.
!
WARNING
GASOLINE VAPORS ARE EXPLOSIVE!
OPEN FLAME APPLIANCES CAN IGNITE GASOLINE
VAPORS. TO AVOID INJURY OR DEATH FROM
EXPLOSION OR FIRE,
TURN OFF ALL OPEN FLAME DEVICES
!
WARNING
OPEN FLAME COOKING APPLIANCES CONSUME
OXYGEN AND PRODUCE CARBON MONOXIDE.
TO AVOID ASPHYXIATION, OR INJURY OR DEATH
FROM EXPOSURE TO CARBON MONOXIDE,
MAINTAIN OPEN VENTILATION
WHEN USING THESE APPLIANCES.
DO NOT USE THIS APPLIANCE
FOR COMFORT HEATING.
6-51
CHAPTER 6
Note: Grill Shown Upside Down To Clarify Features
CHAPTER 6
Note: Grill Shown Upside Down To Clarify Features
Screw Propane
Tank Clockwise
To Tighten
Regulator
Fish-On Mount
Thumb Screws
Square Insert
Gas Grill-Operating Instructions
•
A universal mount is required to attach the grill to the deck fi tting.
• Attach the “fi sh-on” mount top to the two thumb screws. Tighten securely.
• Fit the grill-mount assembly in the square deck fi tting. Make sure the grill is tightened in place.
• Screw on the propane bottle until tight.
• With a long match or propane starter apply fl ame to the burner. Always apply the fl ame to the burner before turning on the gas. A lighting hole is located below the lid’s handle.
• If locked, push the center burner down to unlock. The control knob now can be turned to start the grill.
6-52
Screw Propane
Tank Clockwise
To Tighten
Regulator
Fish-On Mount
Thumb Screws
Square Insert
Gas Grill-Operating Instructions
•
A universal mount is required to attach the grill to the deck fi tting.
• Attach the “fi sh-on” mount top to the two thumb screws. Tighten securely.
• Fit the grill-mount assembly in the square deck fi tting. Make sure the grill is tightened in place.
• Screw on the propane bottle until tight.
• With a long match or propane starter apply fl ame to the burner. Always apply the fl ame to the burner before turning on the gas. A lighting hole is located below the lid’s handle.
• If locked, push the center burner down to unlock. The control knob now can be turned to start the grill.
6-52
Equipment Operation
• Turn the grill on high. Make sure there is heat coming from the unit.
If after 10 seconds the burner has not ignited or your fl ame has gone out turn the unit off and wait 1 minute for the propane to dissipate.
• Once lit, adjust the fl ame to the desired temperature. No preheating time is necessary.
• Do not operate the grill with the vent shutters and lid completely closed. Keep the vent shutters open abit to allow adequate combustible air.
• If you close the lid and vents for long periods of time the fl ame may be extinguished from excess smoke.
• Do not leave the grill operating unattended.
• After cooking , shut off the grill and allow the unit to cool.
• After cooling, clean up any grease build-up. Clean after every use to keep the grill operating correctly.
Equipment Operation
• Turn the grill on high. Make sure there is heat coming from the unit.
If after 10 seconds the burner has not ignited or your fl ame has gone out turn the unit off and wait 1 minute for the propane to dissipate.
• Once lit, adjust the fl ame to the desired temperature. No preheating time is necessary.
• Do not operate the grill with the vent shutters and lid completely closed. Keep the vent shutters open abit to allow adequate combustible air.
• If you close the lid and vents for long periods of time the fl ame may be extinguished from excess smoke.
• Do not leave the grill operating unattended.
• After cooking , shut off the grill and allow the unit to cool.
• After cooling, clean up any grease build-up. Clean after every use to keep the grill operating correctly.
6-53 6-53
CHAPTER 6
Gas Leaks
1. Extinguish all fl ames and smoking materials.
2. Turn off the grill knob.
To determine the source of the gas leak:
1. Ventilate the propane tank storage compartment by opening the locker door.
2. With the locker well ventilated and the burner valve turned off, open the propane container valve.
3. Apply a mixture of liquid detergent and water to all connections checking for bubbles indicating a leak. If a leak is found tighten the connection and verify with soap solution as above that the leak is stopped before attempting to light the barbecue.
CHAPTER 6
Gas Leaks
1. Extinguish all fl ames and smoking materials.
2. Turn off the grill knob.
To determine the source of the gas leak:
1. Ventilate the propane tank storage compartment by opening the locker door.
2. With the locker well ventilated and the burner valve turned off, open the propane container valve.
3. Apply a mixture of liquid detergent and water to all connections checking for bubbles indicating a leak. If a leak is found tighten the connection and verify with soap solution as above that the leak is stopped before attempting to light the barbecue.
6-54 6-54
Equipment Operation
Gray Water System
The gray water system option consists of a 6 gallon holding tank along with a deck mounted waste pump out fi tting. Water from a cockpit refreshment center or head sink normally exits the boat at a thru hull fi tting. With the gray water system any used potable water is stored via the drain hoses to a holding tank. Once the gray water holding tank is full it is pumped overboard by a pumping station vacuum pump much the same way a toilet holding tank is pumped out.
This system is environmentally friendly as it keeps many soap related alkalines and harsh detergents out of the water supply.
Equipment Operation
Gray Water System
The gray water system option consists of a 6 gallon holding tank along with a deck mounted waste pump out fi tting. Water from a cockpit refreshment center or head sink normally exits the boat at a thru hull fi tting. With the gray water system any used potable water is stored via the drain hoses to a holding tank. Once the gray water holding tank is full it is pumped overboard by a pumping station vacuum pump much the same way a toilet holding tank is pumped out.
This system is environmentally friendly as it keeps many soap related alkalines and harsh detergents out of the water supply.
6-55 6-55
CHAPTER 6
Ladder
Your vessel features a stainless steel boarding ladder. Use the appropriate hand rails and ladder rungs. Be sure all body parts are clear of the ladder when folding the ladder up or down and repositioning it on the swim platform. Keep body parts clear of any hinged parts. Be sure to read and adhere to any written warnings posted at the helm area or swim platform regarding ladder load limits.
Always turn the engine off and remove the ignition keys while people are in the water near the boat, or using the swim
platform and/or the boarding ladder.
Also, insist people always use the ladder not the stern drive ventilation plate for entering and exiting the vessel. Again, safety fi rst!
TYPICAL LADDER
!
WARNING
AVOID BODILY INJURY DUE TO MOVING PARTS!
KEEP ALL BODY PARTS CLEAR OF THE LADDER’S
MOVING AND ROTATING PARTS!
CHAPTER 6
Ladder
Your vessel features a stainless steel boarding ladder. Use the appropriate hand rails and ladder rungs. Be sure all body parts are clear of the ladder when folding the ladder up or down and repositioning it on the swim platform. Keep body parts clear of any hinged parts. Be sure to read and adhere to any written warnings posted at the helm area or swim platform regarding ladder load limits.
Always turn the engine off and remove the ignition keys while people are in the water near the boat, or using the swim
platform and/or the boarding ladder.
Also, insist people always use the ladder not the stern drive ventilation plate for entering and exiting the vessel. Again, safety fi rst!
TYPICAL LADDER
!
WARNING
AVOID BODILY INJURY DUE TO MOVING PARTS!
KEEP ALL BODY PARTS CLEAR OF THE LADDER’S
MOVING AND ROTATING PARTS!
6-56 6-56
Equipment Operation
Lighting-Docking
The docking lights are integrated into the hull. They are very useful for night docking and maneuvering. To operate turn on the helm switch marked “docking lights”.
DOCKING
LIGHTS
Equipment Operation
Lighting-Docking
The docking lights are integrated into the hull. They are very useful for night docking and maneuvering. To operate turn on the helm switch marked “docking lights”.
DOCKING
LIGHTS
Lighting-Courtesy
LED cockpit courtesy lights are standard equipment on your vessel.
They are located along the cockpit at various locations. To operate, turn the “cockpit light” helm switch to the “on” position.
Lighting-Courtesy
LED cockpit courtesy lights are standard equipment on your vessel.
They are located along the cockpit at various locations. To operate, turn the “cockpit light” helm switch to the “on” position.
6-57 6-57
CHAPTER 6
Lighting-Stern
The stern light is normally stored in the ski locker under the starbard side. It must be used between dusk and dawn. It is controlled by the navigation light switch located at the helm. Simply remove the light from the holders and install it in the stern light receptacle located at the aft starboard deck and activate the top portion of the switch.
STERN LIGHT
CHAPTER 6
Lighting-Stern
The stern light is normally stored in the ski locker under the starbard side. It must be used between dusk and dawn. It is controlled by the navigation light switch located at the helm. Simply remove the light from the holders and install it in the stern light receptacle located at the aft starboard deck and activate the top portion of the switch.
STERN LIGHT
6-58 6-58
Equipment Operation
Neutra-Salt System-Volvo
Neutra-Salt Engine Flushing System is available as an option on Volvo gasoline engines only. It’s purpose is to fl ush salt deposits that develop in the engine cooling system. It is intended for engines that operate in brackish or salt water areas only. The system is not intended for fresh water use.
!
CAUTION
THE NEUTRA-SALT SOLUTION WILL FREEZE.
IF FREEZING CONDITIONS ARE POSSIBLE,
DRAIN THE ENTIRE SYSTEM.
The Neutra-Salt solution leaves a corrosion inhibiting coating on all metal engine parts. The solution travels through the engine via a solenoid (after a rocker switch is activated) and a set of connecting hoses. The manufacturer recommends using the system at the end of the boating outing. Extra solution (Volvo # 41103103 available in quarts and gallons) should be available from your Regal dealer.
FILL & TEST SYSTEM
1. Pour the quart bottle of Neutra-Salt concentrate into the reservoir.
Wear protective eye-wear and gloves since the concentrate may cause eye irritation. In case of contact, fl ush eyes thoroughly with water for
15 minutes.
2. Mark the fl uid level on the reservoir. To prevent hearing loss, avoid prolonged exposure to the audible alarm on the engine, particularly in confi ned spaces. The alarm can reach 120 decibels.
3. Re-connect the power supply.
4. Connect water supply (fl ushete) so that the engine can be run.
5. Start the engine. Run at idle.
6-59
Equipment Operation
Neutra-Salt System-Volvo
Neutra-Salt Engine Flushing System is available as an option on Volvo gasoline engines only. It’s purpose is to fl ush salt deposits that develop in the engine cooling system. It is intended for engines that operate in brackish or salt water areas only. The system is not intended for fresh water use.
!
CAUTION
THE NEUTRA-SALT SOLUTION WILL FREEZE.
IF FREEZING CONDITIONS ARE POSSIBLE,
DRAIN THE ENTIRE SYSTEM.
The Neutra-Salt solution leaves a corrosion inhibiting coating on all metal engine parts. The solution travels through the engine via a solenoid (after a rocker switch is activated) and a set of connecting hoses. The manufacturer recommends using the system at the end of the boating outing. Extra solution (Volvo # 41103103 available in quarts and gallons) should be available from your Regal dealer.
FILL & TEST SYSTEM
1. Pour the quart bottle of Neutra-Salt concentrate into the reservoir.
Wear protective eye-wear and gloves since the concentrate may cause eye irritation. In case of contact, fl ush eyes thoroughly with water for
15 minutes.
2. Mark the fl uid level on the reservoir. To prevent hearing loss, avoid prolonged exposure to the audible alarm on the engine, particularly in confi ned spaces. The alarm can reach 120 decibels.
3. Re-connect the power supply.
4. Connect water supply (fl ushete) so that the engine can be run.
5. Start the engine. Run at idle.
6-59
CHAPTER 6
6. Hold the rocker switch on for 45 seconds. Turn the engine off and then release the switch.
7. Check the reservoir, the fl uid level should have dropped 1/4”.
If the reservoir does not drop 1/4” it may be necessary to repeat steps
1-6. Run the engine at 1500-2000 rpm”s to help begin the fl uid fl ow.
For normal operation, run engine at idle.
8. If the fl uid is still not fl owing from the reservoir, check as follows: a. Hoses for knicks and leaking clamps.
b. Check the vent hole in the reservoir cap for blockage.
c. Check that the solenoid opens when the switch is on and key is in run position.
d. Check the fuse.
e. Check the solenoid connection.
f. Check for a secure ground connection.
CHAPTER 6
6. Hold the rocker switch on for 45 seconds. Turn the engine off and then release the switch.
7. Check the reservoir, the fl uid level should have dropped 1/4”.
If the reservoir does not drop 1/4” it may be necessary to repeat steps
1-6. Run the engine at 1500-2000 rpm”s to help begin the fl uid fl ow.
For normal operation, run engine at idle.
8. If the fl uid is still not fl owing from the reservoir, check as follows: a. Hoses for knicks and leaking clamps.
b. Check the vent hole in the reservoir cap for blockage.
c. Check that the solenoid opens when the switch is on and key is in run position.
d. Check the fuse.
e. Check the solenoid connection.
f. Check for a secure ground connection.
6-60 6-60
Equipment Operation
Pressurized Fresh Water System
TYPICAL FRESHWATER SYSTEM
Hold Down
Bracket
Fill Hose
Feed Hose
Equipment Operation
Pressurized Fresh Water System
TYPICAL FRESHWATER SYSTEM
Hold Down
Bracket
Fill Hose
Feed Hose
Pressure Pump
Water Filter
Pressure Pump
Water Filter
Vent Hose Water Tank
Note: The fresh water tank represented by the one above can be visually monitored for fullness. Monitor the tank level as part of your pre-cruise checklist. It is always a good idea to fi ll the fresh water tank before an outing.
6-61
Vent Hose Water Tank
Note: The fresh water tank represented by the one above can be visually monitored for fullness. Monitor the tank level as part of your pre-cruise checklist. It is always a good idea to fi ll the fresh water tank before an outing.
6-61
CHAPTER 6
If equipped, the pressurized water system needs to be initially fi lled to operate properly.
1. Unscrew the “water fi ll” deck fi tting. Fill the fresh water tank with approximately 10 gallons of fresh water with a suitable container or hose. Make sure the water is safe for drinking.
2. Find the helm fresh water pump switch and energize to the “on” position. Pressurized water tank will fi ll entire system with fresh water.
3. Open the faucet to allow any air to escape. Close the faucet when there is a steady stream of water without air. You will hear the pressure switch shut off the pump indicating the system is full.
4. If equipped with a cold water transom shower and/or bow washdown repeat step #3.
5. After these initial procedures, “top” the system off with fresh water.
6. Check for system leaks as evidenced by the pressure water pump
recycling even though no water is being used from the faucet.
7. It is a good idea to turn “off ” the fresh water pump switch after each use.
!
CAUTION
AVOID PRESSURE PUMP BURN OUT!
DO NOT ACTIVATE THE FRESH WATER
SYSTEM WITH THE WATER TANK EMPTY.
6-62
CHAPTER 6
If equipped, the pressurized water system needs to be initially fi lled to operate properly.
1. Unscrew the “water fi ll” deck fi tting. Fill the fresh water tank with approximately 10 gallons of fresh water with a suitable container or hose. Make sure the water is safe for drinking.
2. Find the helm fresh water pump switch and energize to the “on” position. Pressurized water tank will fi ll entire system with fresh water.
3. Open the faucet to allow any air to escape. Close the faucet when there is a steady stream of water without air. You will hear the pressure switch shut off the pump indicating the system is full.
4. If equipped with a cold water transom shower and/or bow washdown repeat step #3.
5. After these initial procedures, “top” the system off with fresh water.
6. Check for system leaks as evidenced by the pressure water pump
recycling even though no water is being used from the faucet.
7. It is a good idea to turn “off ” the fresh water pump switch after each use.
!
CAUTION
AVOID PRESSURE PUMP BURN OUT!
DO NOT ACTIVATE THE FRESH WATER
SYSTEM WITH THE WATER TANK EMPTY.
6-62
Equipment Operation
Seating-Bucket Operation
The bucket seat features a handle mechanism that operates multiple seat functions. The separate handles prevent the seat from rotating and sliding fore and aft during operation of the vessel. This provides the operator with a safety margin. Do not alter the seat slide mechanism.
To adjust the seat slider follow the instructions and refer the illustration.
1. To adjust fore and aft seat positions, pull up on handle “A”, slide seat to desired location and release the handle. The slide will lock in position.
2. To rotate seat and adjust the drag control feature for rotation, pull handle “B” up to the horizontal position and release. The handle will maintain the horizontal position. The seat is now able to be rotated
360 degrees. To increase the drag on rotation, turn handle “C” clockwise to desired resistance. To decrease drag, turn handle “C” counterclockwise.
3. To lock the rotational feature, push handle “B” down and the positive quick lock feature looks for the next available locking spline.
Always use the positive lock feature when your vessel is underway.
!
CAUTION
TO PREVENT BODILY INJURY!
PERIODICALLY CHECK AND TIGHTEN
THE MOUNTING BOLTS
BETWEEN THE SEAT SLIDER
AND THE BUCKET SEAT BOTTOM
ALSO, CHECK THE FLOOR INSERT BOLTS.
6-63
Equipment Operation
Seating-Bucket Operation
The bucket seat features a handle mechanism that operates multiple seat functions. The separate handles prevent the seat from rotating and sliding fore and aft during operation of the vessel. This provides the operator with a safety margin. Do not alter the seat slide mechanism.
To adjust the seat slider follow the instructions and refer the illustration.
1. To adjust fore and aft seat positions, pull up on handle “A”, slide seat to desired location and release the handle. The slide will lock in position.
2. To rotate seat and adjust the drag control feature for rotation, pull handle “B” up to the horizontal position and release. The handle will maintain the horizontal position. The seat is now able to be rotated
360 degrees. To increase the drag on rotation, turn handle “C” clockwise to desired resistance. To decrease drag, turn handle “C” counterclockwise.
3. To lock the rotational feature, push handle “B” down and the positive quick lock feature looks for the next available locking spline.
Always use the positive lock feature when your vessel is underway.
!
CAUTION
TO PREVENT BODILY INJURY!
PERIODICALLY CHECK AND TIGHTEN
THE MOUNTING BOLTS
BETWEEN THE SEAT SLIDER
AND THE BUCKET SEAT BOTTOM
ALSO, CHECK THE FLOOR INSERT BOLTS.
6-63
CHAPTER 6
BUCKET SEAT
HANDLE A
HANDLE B
SEAT SLIDER
HANDLE C
PEDESTAL
6-64
FLOOR INSERT
TYPICAL BUCKET SEAT LOCK MECHANISM
CHAPTER 6
BUCKET SEAT
HANDLE A
HANDLE B
SEAT SLIDER
HANDLE C
PEDESTAL
6-64
FLOOR INSERT
TYPICAL BUCKET SEAT LOCK MECHANISM
Equipment Operation
Seating/Bow Filler Cushion
To use the bow fi ller cushion locate the support bars found under the bow cushions. One is longer than the other. Make sure both bars are seated in the liner detents (Typical bow seating shown).
SUPPORT BARS
Equipment Operation
Seating/Bow Filler Cushion
To use the bow fi ller cushion locate the support bars found under the bow cushions. One is longer than the other. Make sure both bars are seated in the liner detents (Typical bow seating shown).
SUPPORT BARS
Place cushion on bars. Make sure the cushion is completely seated on the bars before attempting to sit or lay on it.
Place cushion on bars. Make sure the cushion is completely seated on the bars before attempting to sit or lay on it.
6-65 6-65
CHAPTER 6
Seating/Bow Arm Rests
On bow rider models the seating features arm rests. The arm rests utilize a tracking system that permit the arm rests to slide down. To extend the arm rest simply pull up on the bottom of the arm rest until it snaps in the lock position. ARM REST- UP POSITION
BLACK KNOB
ARM REST- DOWN POSITION
To unlock the arm rest tracking mechanism simply push up on the black knob with one hand and while holding the knob up push down on the front end of the arm rest until it rests in the arm rest-up position. Keep body parts away from the track itself to avoid injury.
CHAPTER 6
Seating/Bow Arm Rests
On bow rider models the seating features arm rests. The arm rests utilize a tracking system that permit the arm rests to slide down. To extend the arm rest simply pull up on the bottom of the arm rest until it snaps in the lock position. ARM REST- UP POSITION
BLACK KNOB
ARM REST- DOWN POSITION
To unlock the arm rest tracking mechanism simply push up on the black knob with one hand and while holding the knob up push down on the front end of the arm rest until it rests in the arm rest-up position. Keep body parts away from the track itself to avoid injury.
6-66 6-66
Equipment Operation
Seating/Cabin w/Berth Conversion
The 2550 cabin seating serves a dual function. It provides dinette seating with the optional teak cockpit table.
Insert the leg into the cabin receiver and insert the table into the leg top.
The hatch provides cabin cross ventilation. See the illustration.
The cabin can be converted to a berth. There are 5 detented scallops in the cabin liner to accept a set of support bars. Under the middle starboard cushion 3 berth support bars are stored. Follow these steps to set up the berth once the bars are located.
1. Pull the port aft backrest cushion up to release the cushion from its holder.
This cushion will serve as one of the berth fi llers.
2. Pull the starboard backrest cushion up to release the cushion from its holder. This cushion will be used as the other berth fi ller.
3. Insert 1 of the 2 short support bars in the forward most liner detent.
4. Insert the other short support bar in the next liner detent.
5. Place the longer support bar diagonally from the port aft detent to the starboard aft detent.
6. Place the port aft backrest on the support bars with the angle aft.
7. Place the starboard backrest cushion on the support bar with the angle aft which completes the berth conversion.
6-67
Equipment Operation
Seating/Cabin w/Berth Conversion
The 2550 cabin seating serves a dual function. It provides dinette seating with the optional teak cockpit table.
Insert the leg into the cabin receiver and insert the table into the leg top.
The hatch provides cabin cross ventilation. See the illustration.
The cabin can be converted to a berth. There are 5 detented scallops in the cabin liner to accept a set of support bars. Under the middle starboard cushion 3 berth support bars are stored. Follow these steps to set up the berth once the bars are located.
1. Pull the port aft backrest cushion up to release the cushion from its holder.
This cushion will serve as one of the berth fi llers.
2. Pull the starboard backrest cushion up to release the cushion from its holder. This cushion will be used as the other berth fi ller.
3. Insert 1 of the 2 short support bars in the forward most liner detent.
4. Insert the other short support bar in the next liner detent.
5. Place the longer support bar diagonally from the port aft detent to the starboard aft detent.
6. Place the port aft backrest on the support bars with the angle aft.
7. Place the starboard backrest cushion on the support bar with the angle aft which completes the berth conversion.
6-67
Longest Bar
CHAPTER 6
To disassemble the berth reverse the process. Make sure that the backrest cushion clip plates are fi rmly pushed into the backrest holders.
When storing the support bars the longest bar must be placed in the most inside slots or it will not fi t.
Push the bars completely down in the rubber holders.
See the illustrations below.
CLIP PLATE
TYPICAL CUSHION BACKREST HOLDER
TYPICAL BERTH
LONGEST SUPPORT
BAR
PORT
BERTH
CUSHION
STBD.
BERTH
CUSHION
Longest Bar
CHAPTER 6
To disassemble the berth reverse the process. Make sure that the backrest cushion clip plates are fi rmly pushed into the backrest holders.
When storing the support bars the longest bar must be placed in the most inside slots or it will not fi t.
Push the bars completely down in the rubber holders.
See the illustrations below.
CLIP PLATE
TYPICAL CUSHION BACKREST HOLDER
TYPICAL BERTH
LONGEST SUPPORT
BAR
PORT
BERTH
CUSHION
STBD.
BERTH
CUSHION
6-68 6-68
Equipment Operation
Seating/Sundeck Lounger
S e l e c t e d sundecks feature a r e m o v a b l e center cushion a l o n g w i t h a F l e x i t e e k transom walkt h r o u g h . O n
Removable Cushion
Sun Lounger the 2550 the s u n l o u n g e r e n t r y way i s designed to the starboard side and a cushion is not needed. Do not occupy the sun lounger when the boat is moving.
!
CAUTION
PREVENT FALLING OVERBOARD!
DO NOT OCCUPY THE SUNDECK LOUNGER
WHILE THE BOAT IS MOVING.
Equipment Operation
Seating/Sundeck Lounger
S e l e c t e d sundecks feature a r e m o v a b l e center cushion a l o n g w i t h a F l e x i t e e k transom walkt h r o u g h . O n
Removable Cushion
Sun Lounger the 2550 the s u n l o u n g e r e n t r y way i s designed to the starboard side and a cushion is not needed. Do not occupy the sun lounger when the boat is moving.
!
CAUTION
PREVENT FALLING OVERBOARD!
DO NOT OCCUPY THE SUNDECK LOUNGER
WHILE THE BOAT IS MOVING.
6-69 6-69
CHAPTER 6
Seating- Transom Walk-Through Filler Cushion
Receiver
The 2550 transom walk-through cushion is stored in the cockpit refreshment center. Under the cushion at the front corner is a round black grommet that holds the cushion in the stainless steel receiver located as indicated by the illustration.
Unlock the transom gate from the detent by pulling the gate up. Swing the gate closed. Make sure it is in the detented position which locks the mechanism. Place the cushion so the grommet pushes down in the receiver. Push on the transom gate again to ensure it is locked.
To convert to walk-through pull up on the cushion to free it from the receiver. Pull up on the transom gate to release it from the detent and swing open the gate until it locks in the detent.
!
CAUTION
PREVENT FALLING!
KEEP THE TRANSOM GATE LOCKED
WHILE THE BOAT IS MOVING.
6-70
CHAPTER 6
Seating- Transom Walk-Through Filler Cushion
Receiver
The 2550 transom walk-through cushion is stored in the cockpit refreshment center. Under the cushion at the front corner is a round black grommet that holds the cushion in the stainless steel receiver located as indicated by the illustration.
Unlock the transom gate from the detent by pulling the gate up. Swing the gate closed. Make sure it is in the detented position which locks the mechanism. Place the cushion so the grommet pushes down in the receiver. Push on the transom gate again to ensure it is locked.
To convert to walk-through pull up on the cushion to free it from the receiver. Pull up on the transom gate to release it from the detent and swing open the gate until it locks in the detent.
!
CAUTION
PREVENT FALLING!
KEEP THE TRANSOM GATE LOCKED
WHILE THE BOAT IS MOVING.
6-70
Equipment Operation
Sirius Satellite Radio
Sirius® satellite radio is an available option on all Regal models. Sirius satellite radio features over 120 channels of music entertainment completely commercial-free along with sports and news channels.
Sirius emphasizes the music and entertainment you want. Channels use the most updated digital fi ltering available for the clearest sound.
Sirius uses three satellites fl ying over the United States for coast to coast coverage with high elevation angles. The result is a clearer line of sight and less signal blocking.
The system consists of the stereo receiver (sometimes called the head unit), Sirius radio tuner and antenna. With these components and an active account (6 month initial free subscription initialized by the customer after delivery) your Sirius system should be activated.
Following are the activation steps to be taken:
A. Unit must be completely installed and the antenna must have a clear view of the sky.
B. Turn on the radio and go to satellite mode.
C. Confirm reception by tuning to SIRIUS WEATHER &
EMERGENCY//CHANNEL 184. If you are not receiving Channel
184, please refer to the radio manufacturer owner’s manual.
D. Call SIRIUS sales support 1-866-580-7234 or customer care 1-888-
539-7474
E. Please have your name, address, phone number and the SIRIUS
ID#ESN available for the agent.
6-71
Equipment Operation
Sirius Satellite Radio
Sirius® satellite radio is an available option on all Regal models. Sirius satellite radio features over 120 channels of music entertainment completely commercial-free along with sports and news channels.
Sirius emphasizes the music and entertainment you want. Channels use the most updated digital fi ltering available for the clearest sound.
Sirius uses three satellites fl ying over the United States for coast to coast coverage with high elevation angles. The result is a clearer line of sight and less signal blocking.
The system consists of the stereo receiver (sometimes called the head unit), Sirius radio tuner and antenna. With these components and an active account (6 month initial free subscription initialized by the customer after delivery) your Sirius system should be activated.
Following are the activation steps to be taken:
A. Unit must be completely installed and the antenna must have a clear view of the sky.
B. Turn on the radio and go to satellite mode.
C. Confirm reception by tuning to SIRIUS WEATHER &
EMERGENCY//CHANNEL 184. If you are not receiving Channel
184, please refer to the radio manufacturer owner’s manual.
D. Call SIRIUS sales support 1-866-580-7234 or customer care 1-888-
539-7474
E. Please have your name, address, phone number and the SIRIUS
ID#ESN available for the agent.
6-71
CHAPTER 6
Ski Tow/Pylon
A water sports ski pylon is loc a t e d c e n t e r line at the stern deck. Double loop the line fi rst through the hole and then around the ski pylon and cinch it tightly. This procedure helps to keep the line intact when there is no strain on it.
Always appoint a person to keep their “eye out” for the tow line when the vessel is running to prevent the line from being caught in the propeller.
If your vessel is equipped with a wakesport tower a universal roller type pylon is positioned at the top of the tower. This provides a higher angle to enhance water sport activities.
CHAPTER 6
Ski Tow/Pylon
A water sports ski pylon is loc a t e d c e n t e r line at the stern deck. Double loop the line fi rst through the hole and then around the ski pylon and cinch it tightly. This procedure helps to keep the line intact when there is no strain on it.
Always appoint a person to keep their “eye out” for the tow line when the vessel is running to prevent the line from being caught in the propeller.
If your vessel is equipped with a wakesport tower a universal roller type pylon is positioned at the top of the tower. This provides a higher angle to enhance water sport activities.
6-72 6-72
Equipment Operation
Sport Tower
The optional wakesport tower features a ski pylon roller system located high at the top center of the arch for water sports. As part of the innovative design the tower hinges forward for tight overhead clearances such as bridges and for highway towing.
Equipment Operation
Sport Tower
The optional wakesport tower features a ski pylon roller system located high at the top center of the arch for water sports. As part of the innovative design the tower hinges forward for tight overhead clearances such as bridges and for highway towing.
Tower Shown In Up Position Tower Shown In Up Position
Tower Shown In Forward Tilted Position
6-73
Tower Shown In Forward Tilted Position
6-73
CHAPTER 6
Hinging Mechanism
The wakesport tower can be hinged forward for clearance purposes or for highway towing.
There is a single pole switch labeled “arch” at the helm area that connects to a lift motor and a set of hydraulic rams that raise or lower the wakesport tower.
Before energizing the switch pay special a t t e n t i o n t h a t a l l passengers maintain a safe distance from the tower hinge mechanisms located at the base of the wakesport tower on the
deck. As the operator energizes the arch switch to hinge the tower forward visually monitor the port and starboard deck to ensure all passengers are clear of the hinge mechanism. This same procedure applies for lowering the mechanism to the original position.
Regal recommends hinging the tower completely forward before towing the vessel.
!
WARNING
WHEN OPERATING SPORT TOWER
KEEP ALL BODY PARTS CLEAR
OF TOWER HINGE MECHANISMS.
6-74
CHAPTER 6
Hinging Mechanism
The wakesport tower can be hinged forward for clearance purposes or for highway towing.
There is a single pole switch labeled “arch” at the helm area that connects to a lift motor and a set of hydraulic rams that raise or lower the wakesport tower.
Before energizing the switch pay special a t t e n t i o n t h a t a l l passengers maintain a safe distance from the tower hinge mechanisms located at the base of the wakesport tower on the
deck. As the operator energizes the arch switch to hinge the tower forward visually monitor the port and starboard deck to ensure all passengers are clear of the hinge mechanism. This same procedure applies for lowering the mechanism to the original position.
Regal recommends hinging the tower completely forward before towing the vessel.
!
WARNING
WHEN OPERATING SPORT TOWER
KEEP ALL BODY PARTS CLEAR
OF TOWER HINGE MECHANISMS.
6-74
Equipment Operation
Sport Tower Mirror
Select models offer a wide angle windshield mounted water sports mirror. The mirror offers the boat operator a crystal clear view of water sports activities. An observer is still required.
To loosen the mirror from the windshield turn both lock mechanisms counterclockwise.
To adjust the mirror simply move the mirror to the desired location. Clean the mirror with a soft, lint free cloth and rubbing alcohol. Do not use harsh cleaners which can stratch the fi nish.
Equipment Operation
Sport Tower Mirror
Select models offer a wide angle windshield mounted water sports mirror. The mirror offers the boat operator a crystal clear view of water sports activities. An observer is still required.
To loosen the mirror from the windshield turn both lock mechanisms counterclockwise.
To adjust the mirror simply move the mirror to the desired location. Clean the mirror with a soft, lint free cloth and rubbing alcohol. Do not use harsh cleaners which can stratch the fi nish.
6-75 6-75
CHAPTER 6
Sport Tower Racks
As an option sport tower racks mount on both port and starboard sides of the sport arch to carry wakeboards, aquatic toys, etc.
Strap equipment in place by using the tie downs buit into each rack. Periodically check the hardware for tightness.
CHAPTER 6
Sport Tower Racks
As an option sport tower racks mount on both port and starboard sides of the sport arch to carry wakeboards, aquatic toys, etc.
Strap equipment in place by using the tie downs buit into each rack. Periodically check the hardware for tightness.
6-76 6-76
Equipment Operation
Stereo/CD Player- Fusion
Regal boats feature Fusion® marine stereo audio systems.
Fusion stereo systems are designed and engineered to perform to the highest standards in the harsh marine environment. The head units feature easy to read displays and use
Typical iPod Player oversized rubber buttons and controls for easier operation on a moving vessel. Being at the leading edge in stereo technology the head unit opens to a truly unique internal iPod dock. The iPod dock handles many generations of iPods through a set of sleeves. These sleeeves hold the iPod in position ensuring ease-ofuse and protect the iPod from the marine environment.
The standard MS-IP600 provides 70 watts x 4 total output.
All components including the speakers comply with the international
IP waterproof standards. Selected optional system components include an amplifi er and additional speakers.
The system utilizes a 15 amp automotive style fuse located behind the stereo head unit.
See the amplifi er and remote information for vessels equipped with the optional sterreo performance package and remote controls.
Note: As standard equipment on Regal sport boats the stereo functions from the auxiliary key switch position which is located to the left of the normally “off ” position. Here the stereo can be operated without the typical draw on the ignition circuit which normallly occurs when the key switch is in the “on” position.
6-77
Equipment Operation
Stereo/CD Player- Fusion
Regal boats feature Fusion® marine stereo audio systems.
Fusion stereo systems are designed and engineered to perform to the highest standards in the harsh marine environment. The head units feature easy to read displays and use
Typical iPod Player oversized rubber buttons and controls for easier operation on a moving vessel. Being at the leading edge in stereo technology the head unit opens to a truly unique internal iPod dock. The iPod dock handles many generations of iPods through a set of sleeves. These sleeeves hold the iPod in position ensuring ease-ofuse and protect the iPod from the marine environment.
The standard MS-IP600 provides 70 watts x 4 total output.
All components including the speakers comply with the international
IP waterproof standards. Selected optional system components include an amplifi er and additional speakers.
The system utilizes a 15 amp automotive style fuse located behind the stereo head unit.
See the amplifi er and remote information for vessels equipped with the optional sterreo performance package and remote controls.
Note: As standard equipment on Regal sport boats the stereo functions from the auxiliary key switch position which is located to the left of the normally “off ” position. Here the stereo can be operated without the typical draw on the ignition circuit which normallly occurs when the key switch is in the “on” position.
6-77
CHAPTER 6 CHAPTER 6
6-78 6-78
Equipment Operation Equipment Operation
6-79 6-79
CHAPTER 6 CHAPTER 6
6-80 6-80
Equipment Operation Equipment Operation
6-81 6-81
CHAPTER 6 CHAPTER 6
6-82 6-82
Equipment Operation Equipment Operation
6-83 6-83
CHAPTER 6 CHAPTER 6
6-84 6-84
TYPICAL REMOTE
CONTROL.
Equipment Operation
If equipped, the Fusion remote control is normally mounted at the transom area which makes it easier to use during water activities.
It is a plug and play device and uses the same function buttons and rotary encoder as the helm head unit. It features the ability to select various speaker zones on the vessel. Refer to the Fusion owner’s manual for more detailed information.
TYPICAL REMOTE
CONTROL.
Equipment Operation
If equipped, the Fusion remote control is normally mounted at the transom area which makes it easier to use during water activities.
It is a plug and play device and uses the same function buttons and rotary encoder as the helm head unit. It features the ability to select various speaker zones on the vessel. Refer to the Fusion owner’s manual for more detailed information.
6-85 6-85
CHAPTER 6 CHAPTER 6
6-86 6-86
Equipment Operation Equipment Operation
6-87 6-87
CHAPTER 6
STEREO PERFORMANCE PACKAGE
The stereo performance package features extra speakers including a sub-woofer and a 2 channel amplifi er to provide leading edge performance in sound and power.
The simplicity of design contributes to low distortion and high effi ciency. Normally the amp is located under the starboard helm or may be in the cockpit refreshment center. The circuit is protected by twin 25 amp automobile type fuses. It is a good idea to carry extra fuses which are available at local marine or automotive stores. The amplifi er does not require any type of maintenance other than periodic checking of the wiring connectors for tightness. Contact your Fusion owner’s manual or closest Regal dealer for additional information.
Vessels with the optional sport arch speakers use an additional 4 channel amplifi er located under the helm or the cockpit refreshment center depending on the specifi c boat model.
CHAPTER 6
STEREO PERFORMANCE PACKAGE
The stereo performance package features extra speakers including a sub-woofer and a 2 channel amplifi er to provide leading edge performance in sound and power.
The simplicity of design contributes to low distortion and high effi ciency. Normally the amp is located under the starboard helm or may be in the cockpit refreshment center. The circuit is protected by twin 25 amp automobile type fuses. It is a good idea to carry extra fuses which are available at local marine or automotive stores. The amplifi er does not require any type of maintenance other than periodic checking of the wiring connectors for tightness. Contact your Fusion owner’s manual or closest Regal dealer for additional information.
Vessels with the optional sport arch speakers use an additional 4 channel amplifi er located under the helm or the cockpit refreshment center depending on the specifi c boat model.
6-88 6-88
Equipment Operation
Stereo iPod
An iPod adapter is located inside the face of the FUSION stereo as standard equipment. Using a set of top and bottom sleeves it is able to fi t most iPod versions.
Refer to the FUSION stereo instruction manual for further information on sleeve specifi cations.
Equipment Operation
Stereo iPod
An iPod adapter is located inside the face of the FUSION stereo as standard equipment. Using a set of top and bottom sleeves it is able to fi t most iPod versions.
Refer to the FUSION stereo instruction manual for further information on sleeve specifi cations.
6-89 6-89
CHAPTER 6
Swim Platform
On swim platforms follow periodic inspections of the swim ladder and platform support hardware to insure that all connections and fi ttings are tight and in a non-corrosive state. Never dive off the swim platform.
Do not store or add objects to the swim platform since additional weight will affect steering and maneuvering characteristics of the vessel.
!
WARNING
AVOID SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH!
DO NOT OPERATE THE BOAT
WITH PEOPLE ON TOP OR HOLDING ON TO
THE SWIM PLATFORM STRUCTURE OR HARDWARE.
Hand
Hold
Ladder
Hatch
Always close the ladder hatch once the ladder is extended. Remind passengers entering from the water to use the hatch handhold to aid in safe boarding. Never use the stern drive to access the swim platfor m since serious injury could result from propeller blades and/or stern drive parts.
6-90
CHAPTER 6
Swim Platform
On swim platforms follow periodic inspections of the swim ladder and platform support hardware to insure that all connections and fi ttings are tight and in a non-corrosive state. Never dive off the swim platform.
Do not store or add objects to the swim platform since additional weight will affect steering and maneuvering characteristics of the vessel.
!
WARNING
AVOID SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH!
DO NOT OPERATE THE BOAT
WITH PEOPLE ON TOP OR HOLDING ON TO
THE SWIM PLATFORM STRUCTURE OR HARDWARE.
Hand
Hold
Ladder
Hatch
Always close the ladder hatch once the ladder is extended. Remind passengers entering from the water to use the hatch handhold to aid in safe boarding. Never use the stern drive to access the swim platfor m since serious injury could result from propeller blades and/or stern drive parts.
6-90
Equipment Operation
Swim Platform- Flexiteek
Flexiteek decking available on selected models features significant advantages over similar wood products. It is made from synthetics.
Color is as natural as timber and uniform through the entire thickness adding to its appeal.
It sands like wood resulting in a natural wood look and feel. It provides superior grip making it great for boating in general and water sports.
It is stain resistant with most washing away with soap and water. The product is UV resistant.
Gentle sanding removes most marks on the decking with a minimum of product loss.
Equipment Operation
Swim Platform- Flexiteek
Flexiteek decking available on selected models features significant advantages over similar wood products. It is made from synthetics.
Color is as natural as timber and uniform through the entire thickness adding to its appeal.
It sands like wood resulting in a natural wood look and feel. It provides superior grip making it great for boating in general and water sports.
It is stain resistant with most washing away with soap and water. The product is UV resistant.
Gentle sanding removes most marks on the decking with a minimum of product loss.
6-91 6-91
CHAPTER 6
Toilet-Chemical
Bellows
Holding Tank
Fill
Before each outing make sure the chemical toilet is fi lled with the proper chemicals, paper is available, and the holding tank is empty.
To fill the toilet follow t h e m a n u f a c t u r e r ’ s recommendations for mixing the solution. Use the fi ll to pour in the deodorant chemical and water. By pushing down on the bellows the chemical mix in released to rinse and help fl ush the toilet bowl. When the fl ush valve is pulled forward the toilet bowl waste water empties into the holding tank. Close the fl ush valve after each use.
The chemical toilet features a holding tank level indicator. When full the lower holding tank must be emptied by fi rst separating it from the upper toilet bowl assembly. Before proceeding, ensure the fl ush valve in completely closed. Find the latches that allow the 2 units to be separated. Once separated, fi nd an environmentally friendly facility to dispose of the waste.
CHAPTER 6
Toilet-Chemical
Bellows
Holding Tank
Fill
Before each outing make sure the chemical toilet is fi lled with the proper chemicals, paper is available, and the holding tank is empty.
To fill the toilet follow t h e m a n u f a c t u r e r ’ s recommendations for mixing the solution. Use the fi ll to pour in the deodorant chemical and water. By pushing down on the bellows the chemical mix in released to rinse and help fl ush the toilet bowl. When the fl ush valve is pulled forward the toilet bowl waste water empties into the holding tank. Close the fl ush valve after each use.
The chemical toilet features a holding tank level indicator. When full the lower holding tank must be emptied by fi rst separating it from the upper toilet bowl assembly. Before proceeding, ensure the fl ush valve in completely closed. Find the latches that allow the 2 units to be separated. Once separated, fi nd an environmentally friendly facility to dispose of the waste.
6-92 6-92
Equipment Operation
Toilet-Chemical/Pump Out Fittings
As an option chemical toilets feature a deck fi tting that permits a marina or waste station to pump out the vessel holding tank. A hose attachment screws into the deck fitting and removes the waste in the vessel toilet holding tank when a land pump is activated. The pumpout fi ttings eliminate the need to remove the holding tank manually from the vessel.
After the pump-out procedure rinse the waste hose briefl y to eliminate a build-up of debris and odor before closing the pump-out deck fi tting.
Refurbish the holding tank chemical per the manufacturer’s directions immediately after the pump-out procedure. For extended cruising, carry extra holding tank chemical and paper recommended by the manufacturer since household varieties are not usually “friendly” to the environment.
As part of your pre-cruise inspection monitor the chemical toilet by reading the monitor indicator level located on the toilet holding tank.
Equipment Operation
Toilet-Chemical/Pump Out Fittings
As an option chemical toilets feature a deck fi tting that permits a marina or waste station to pump out the vessel holding tank. A hose attachment screws into the deck fitting and removes the waste in the vessel toilet holding tank when a land pump is activated. The pumpout fi ttings eliminate the need to remove the holding tank manually from the vessel.
After the pump-out procedure rinse the waste hose briefl y to eliminate a build-up of debris and odor before closing the pump-out deck fi tting.
Refurbish the holding tank chemical per the manufacturer’s directions immediately after the pump-out procedure. For extended cruising, carry extra holding tank chemical and paper recommended by the manufacturer since household varieties are not usually “friendly” to the environment.
As part of your pre-cruise inspection monitor the chemical toilet by reading the monitor indicator level located on the toilet holding tank.
6-93 6-93
CHAPTER 6
Toilet-Vacuum Flush
A vacuum flush style toilet is available on select models. The
Vacufl ush® toilet operates in a different way from other marine toilets.
The system uses around 16 ounces per fl ush plus a simple vacuum to complete each fl ush which is a substantial water savings over other systems. The toilet is connected to a pressurized fresh water supply.
Fresh water is the key to an odor-free bathroom compartment. Selected other systems use intake water from wherever the vessel is sitting which may carry an odor. The Vacufl ush® units are equipped with a special vacuum breaker which prevents the possible contamination of the potable water system.
Vacuum Tank- This tank stores the vacuum energy used in the system.
When a switch senses a drop in the vacuum it automatically energizes the pump to upgrade the vacuum. This process in on-going between fl ushes.
Vacuum Pump- This unique bellows style pump is designed to handle solids without a problem. It uses two duckbill valves on each side of the pump chamber to prevent back fl ow of waste and vacuum.
Vacuum Generator- This unit houses the vacuum pump and tank in one unit.
Holding Tank- Unit features polyethylene composition 50% thicker than other holding tanks. A deodorant additive is required to keep the holding tank odor-free.
In-Line Vent Filter- Available on select models the fi lter uses special a charged fi lter media to remove odors and sanitize the vent system.
Fresh Water and Waste Monitor- Select vessels offer a monitor panel to display the waste level.
Overboard Discharge Pump- An optional overboard discharge pump vacates waste through the deck waste fi tting or a seacock (only used beyond the 3 mile limit in the USA).
6-94
CHAPTER 6
Toilet-Vacuum Flush
A vacuum flush style toilet is available on select models. The
Vacufl ush® toilet operates in a different way from other marine toilets.
The system uses around 16 ounces per fl ush plus a simple vacuum to complete each fl ush which is a substantial water savings over other systems. The toilet is connected to a pressurized fresh water supply.
Fresh water is the key to an odor-free bathroom compartment. Selected other systems use intake water from wherever the vessel is sitting which may carry an odor. The Vacufl ush® units are equipped with a special vacuum breaker which prevents the possible contamination of the potable water system.
Vacuum Tank- This tank stores the vacuum energy used in the system.
When a switch senses a drop in the vacuum it automatically energizes the pump to upgrade the vacuum. This process in on-going between fl ushes.
Vacuum Pump- This unique bellows style pump is designed to handle solids without a problem. It uses two duckbill valves on each side of the pump chamber to prevent back fl ow of waste and vacuum.
Vacuum Generator- This unit houses the vacuum pump and tank in one unit.
Holding Tank- Unit features polyethylene composition 50% thicker than other holding tanks. A deodorant additive is required to keep the holding tank odor-free.
In-Line Vent Filter- Available on select models the fi lter uses special a charged fi lter media to remove odors and sanitize the vent system.
Fresh Water and Waste Monitor- Select vessels offer a monitor panel to display the waste level.
Overboard Discharge Pump- An optional overboard discharge pump vacates waste through the deck waste fi tting or a seacock (only used beyond the 3 mile limit in the USA).
6-94
Equipment Operation
VACUUM FLUSH SYSTEM
Equipment Operation
VACUUM FLUSH SYSTEM
The Vacufl ush® head uses a combination of vacuum suction and water fl ow from the fresh water tank to clear the head of waste. Before using the Vacufl ush system turn the head switch located in the head to the “on” position at the main DC control panel.
Make sure that there is always a small amount of water left in the toilet head bowl. This acts as a trap and will reduce unwanted odors.
Before leaving the boat for an extended period, fl ush the head for at least 10 seconds. This ensures that waste has cleared the sanitation transfer hose and has entered the holding tank.
Waste left within the transfer hose tends to dry out and harden. This could restrict the internal size of the hose and hamper future operation. The system components including the hose are formulated for the transfer of sanitary waste only. Do not allow the following items in the system: Strong acid or caustics such as drain openers, petroleum solvents or fuels, alcohol based products such as antifreeze and pine oil products along with sanitary napkins and baby diapers.
System vacuum is monitored by a switch located on the outside of the vacuum generator’s tank. When the switch senses a vacuum drop, it automatically signals the pump to energize and bring the vacuum back to the operating level. This is normally a two minute process.
6-95
The Vacufl ush® head uses a combination of vacuum suction and water fl ow from the fresh water tank to clear the head of waste. Before using the Vacufl ush system turn the head switch located in the head to the “on” position at the main DC control panel.
Make sure that there is always a small amount of water left in the toilet head bowl. This acts as a trap and will reduce unwanted odors.
Before leaving the boat for an extended period, fl ush the head for at least 10 seconds. This ensures that waste has cleared the sanitation transfer hose and has entered the holding tank.
Waste left within the transfer hose tends to dry out and harden. This could restrict the internal size of the hose and hamper future operation. The system components including the hose are formulated for the transfer of sanitary waste only. Do not allow the following items in the system: Strong acid or caustics such as drain openers, petroleum solvents or fuels, alcohol based products such as antifreeze and pine oil products along with sanitary napkins and baby diapers.
System vacuum is monitored by a switch located on the outside of the vacuum generator’s tank. When the switch senses a vacuum drop, it automatically signals the pump to energize and bring the vacuum back to the operating level. This is normally a two minute process.
6-95
CHAPTER 6
In a properly operating system, the stored vacuum will “leak” down between fl ushes, causing the vacuum pump to run for a short period.
This is normal. The pump should not run for more than once every
(3) hours after the last fl ush.
To operate the Vacufl ush® head:
1. Activate the fresh water system switch at the helm since the fresh water tank is the main water source for the Vacufl ush® system.
2. Activate the vacuum pump switch located at the head aft wall. This will activate the vacuum generator pump which diminishes the size of the waste as it enters the holding tank. Remember to tell passengers using the toilet system to activate the vacuum pump switch before fl ushing the toilet or the waste entering the holding tank will not be diminished in size.
3. Lift the toilet lever until the desired water level is reached. The system requires more water for solid over liquid waste. See fi gure 1.
Vacuum Pump
Switch
4. To fl ush the toilet, press the fl ush lever in one swift motion down to the fl oor until contents in the bowl disappear. A distinct popping noise is normal when fl ushing action begins and the vacuum seal is broken.
Hold the lever down for at least 3 seconds.
If fl ush lever is accidentally released before waste clears the bowl, do not try to fl ush toilet again until vacuum pump stops running.
A small amount of water should remain in the bowl after fl ushing. See fi gure 2.
6-96
CHAPTER 6
In a properly operating system, the stored vacuum will “leak” down between fl ushes, causing the vacuum pump to run for a short period.
This is normal. The pump should not run for more than once every
(3) hours after the last fl ush.
To operate the Vacufl ush® head:
1. Activate the fresh water system switch at the helm since the fresh water tank is the main water source for the Vacufl ush® system.
2. Activate the vacuum pump switch located at the head aft wall. This will activate the vacuum generator pump which diminishes the size of the waste as it enters the holding tank. Remember to tell passengers using the toilet system to activate the vacuum pump switch before fl ushing the toilet or the waste entering the holding tank will not be diminished in size.
3. Lift the toilet lever until the desired water level is reached. The system requires more water for solid over liquid waste. See fi gure 1.
Vacuum Pump
Switch
4. To fl ush the toilet, press the fl ush lever in one swift motion down to the fl oor until contents in the bowl disappear. A distinct popping noise is normal when fl ushing action begins and the vacuum seal is broken.
Hold the lever down for at least 3 seconds.
If fl ush lever is accidentally released before waste clears the bowl, do not try to fl ush toilet again until vacuum pump stops running.
A small amount of water should remain in the bowl after fl ushing. See fi gure 2.
6-96
Equipment Operation Equipment Operation
5. Do not dispose of sanitary napkins or other non-dissolving items in the toilet. Do not attempt to fl ush facial tissue, wet strength tissue, paper towels, or excessive quantities of toilet paper down the toilet. These types of items do not dissolve and cause plugging of the system.
See fi gure 3.
6. Make sure all passengers are aware of the toilet operation.
7. If using holding tank deodorant, use the approved ones for the system.
8. See the maintenance section for cleaning and routine system inspections.
5. Do not dispose of sanitary napkins or other non-dissolving items in the toilet. Do not attempt to fl ush facial tissue, wet strength tissue, paper towels, or excessive quantities of toilet paper down the toilet. These types of items do not dissolve and cause plugging of the system.
See fi gure 3.
6. Make sure all passengers are aware of the toilet operation.
7. If using holding tank deodorant, use the approved ones for the system.
8. See the maintenance section for cleaning and routine system inspections.
6-97 6-97
CHAPTER 6
Overboard Discharge
MACERATOR/
WASTE DISCHARGE
PUMP
VACUUM GENERATOR
TANK
RELIEF
VALVE
VACUUM
PUMP
HOLDING TANK
A few notes regarding the vacuum generator tank:
A. The holding tank level can be easily monitored by a visual inspection. Before venturing out on a cruise it is a good idea to have the holding tank pumped out. The tank manufacturer has installed a shutdown relay into the holding tank to prevent overfi lling. When the holding tank reaches the “full” level the relay shuts down the vacuum generator and the toilet will not fl ush.
B. As a safety device there is a relief valve built into the vacuum system. It will activate if the pumping station pump is running too high a vacuum.
C. Since a small amount of water usually remains in the holding tank it is a good idea to rinse the tank especially after cleaning. Add water to the toilet bowl along with 8 ounces of manufacturer’s tank deodorant and cleaner until the discharge is clear. Do not use chlorine based or caustic cleaners along with drain openers as damage to the seals and hoses may occur.
6-98
CHAPTER 6
Overboard Discharge
MACERATOR/
WASTE DISCHARGE
PUMP
VACUUM GENERATOR
TANK
RELIEF
VALVE
VACUUM
PUMP
HOLDING TANK
A few notes regarding the vacuum generator tank:
A. The holding tank level can be easily monitored by a visual inspection. Before venturing out on a cruise it is a good idea to have the holding tank pumped out. The tank manufacturer has installed a shutdown relay into the holding tank to prevent overfi lling. When the holding tank reaches the “full” level the relay shuts down the vacuum generator and the toilet will not fl ush.
B. As a safety device there is a relief valve built into the vacuum system. It will activate if the pumping station pump is running too high a vacuum.
C. Since a small amount of water usually remains in the holding tank it is a good idea to rinse the tank especially after cleaning. Add water to the toilet bowl along with 8 ounces of manufacturer’s tank deodorant and cleaner until the discharge is clear. Do not use chlorine based or caustic cleaners along with drain openers as damage to the seals and hoses may occur.
6-98
Equipment Operation
Federal regulations prohibit pumping waste overboard within the territorial limits of the United States. Check with authorities regarding specifi c laws and regulations before attempting to pump waste overboard.
SEACOCK
The overboard discharge feature consists of a hull bottom mounted seacock, head key switch, and a macerator (overboard discharge pump)
HANDLE IN CLOSED POSITION to grind up the waste and deliver it through the seacock overboard.
The seacock is secured in the “closed” position and it must be “opened before operating the overboard discharge pump. Damage to system components and/or a potential leak could develop if the seacock is not in the “open” position before activating the pump.
1. Locate the seacock. Remove the locking mechanism from the seacock and turn the valve to the “open” position by aligning the seacock handle with the valve.
2. The overboard pump key switch is located in the head. To activate the macerator pump turn the switch on and completely to the right. At this point the macerator pump will sound starting the pump out process.
It will be required to hold the switch to the right until the tank is emptied. Once empty return the key switch to the “off ” position. Have someone monitor the waste tank level visually during the pump out process.
Avoid running the discharge pump “dry”.
3. Close the seacock by repositioning the seacock handle aligning it across the hose. Ensure the seacock is closed completely. Relock the seacock. Failure to relock the seacock within the territorial limits of the United States could result in boat operator fi nes.
6-99
Equipment Operation
Federal regulations prohibit pumping waste overboard within the territorial limits of the United States. Check with authorities regarding specifi c laws and regulations before attempting to pump waste overboard.
SEACOCK
The overboard discharge feature consists of a hull bottom mounted seacock, head key switch, and a macerator (overboard discharge pump)
HANDLE IN CLOSED POSITION to grind up the waste and deliver it through the seacock overboard.
The seacock is secured in the “closed” position and it must be “opened before operating the overboard discharge pump. Damage to system components and/or a potential leak could develop if the seacock is not in the “open” position before activating the pump.
1. Locate the seacock. Remove the locking mechanism from the seacock and turn the valve to the “open” position by aligning the seacock handle with the valve.
2. The overboard pump key switch is located in the head. To activate the macerator pump turn the switch on and completely to the right. At this point the macerator pump will sound starting the pump out process.
It will be required to hold the switch to the right until the tank is emptied. Once empty return the key switch to the “off ” position. Have someone monitor the waste tank level visually during the pump out process.
Avoid running the discharge pump “dry”.
3. Close the seacock by repositioning the seacock handle aligning it across the hose. Ensure the seacock is closed completely. Relock the seacock. Failure to relock the seacock within the territorial limits of the United States could result in boat operator fi nes.
6-99
CHAPTER 6
Trailer Switch
The trailer switch is located on the transom. It permits tilting the stern drive in the “up” or “down” positions from the stern of the boat. Always remove the keys from the ignition switch to prevent the unit from starting in the trailer “up” position. Make sure nobody is near the stern drive when using the trailer switch. Return the stern drive unit to the “down” position before starting the engine. Failure to do so may result in stern drive component damage.
Underwater Lighting
As an option light bars w/ LED bulbs make up the underwater lighting system. The lights are located on the transom on both port and starboard sides of the stern drive. There is a dash switch for energizing the lights. The underwater lights circuit protection fuse is found in the under dash fuse block and is rated at 10 amp.
CHAPTER 6
Trailer Switch
The trailer switch is located on the transom. It permits tilting the stern drive in the “up” or “down” positions from the stern of the boat. Always remove the keys from the ignition switch to prevent the unit from starting in the trailer “up” position. Make sure nobody is near the stern drive when using the trailer switch. Return the stern drive unit to the “down” position before starting the engine. Failure to do so may result in stern drive component damage.
Underwater Lighting
As an option light bars w/ LED bulbs make up the underwater lighting system. The lights are located on the transom on both port and starboard sides of the stern drive. There is a dash switch for energizing the lights. The underwater lights circuit protection fuse is found in the under dash fuse block and is rated at 10 amp.
6-100 6-100
Equipment Operation
Windshield-Center Latch
Equipment Operation
Windshield-Center Latch
Center
Windshield
Center
Windshield
Magnet
The center windshield shall be closed and locked at all times the boat is moving. Make sure the two locking latches are fi rmly seated in a horizontal position against the windshield framework.
In the open position at the dock make sure the center windshield is held securely by the magnet. See illustration.
!
WARNING
AVOID BODILY INJURY!
CLOSE AND SECURE CENTER WINDSHIELD
AT ALL TIMES THE VESSEL IS MOVING!
6-101
Magnet
The center windshield shall be closed and locked at all times the boat is moving. Make sure the two locking latches are fi rmly seated in a horizontal position against the windshield framework.
In the open position at the dock make sure the center windshield is held securely by the magnet. See illustration.
!
WARNING
AVOID BODILY INJURY!
CLOSE AND SECURE CENTER WINDSHIELD
AT ALL TIMES THE VESSEL IS MOVING!
6-101
CHAPTER 6
Notes
CHAPTER 6
Notes
6-102 6-102
Cosmetic Care &
Maintenance
COSMETIC CARE
This section covers the care and maintenance of your 2300, 2500 or 2550 Regal boat. Many cosmetic care topics including exterior hardware, upholstery, fi berglass and canvas are covered along with major equipment and systems. As always, refer to the owner’s information packet and the appropriate engine manufacturer’s owner’s manuals for further detailed instructions.
Upholstery
Cockpit and interior vinyl require periodic cleaning to maintain a neat appearance and to prevent the build up of dirt, mildew and contaminants that may stain and reduce the vinyl life if they are not removed.
The frequency of cleaning depends on the amount of use and conditions to which the vinyl is subjected.
Most common stains can be cleaned using warm, soapy water and clear rinses. Scrubbing with a soft bristle brush will help loosen soiled material from embossed surfaces and under welting. If the stains are not removed with the above method use a mild cleaner such as Fantastic. This cleaner should be used only as needed and not the normal means.
With more stubborn stains, rubbing alcohol or mineral spirits may be tried cautiously. Widespread solvent use can severely damage or discolor vinyl. Try to remove stains immediately before they have a chance to
7-1
Cosmetic Care &
Maintenance
COSMETIC CARE
This section covers the care and maintenance of your 2300, 2500 or 2550 Regal boat. Many cosmetic care topics including exterior hardware, upholstery, fi berglass and canvas are covered along with major equipment and systems. As always, refer to the owner’s information packet and the appropriate engine manufacturer’s owner’s manuals for further detailed instructions.
Upholstery
Cockpit and interior vinyl require periodic cleaning to maintain a neat appearance and to prevent the build up of dirt, mildew and contaminants that may stain and reduce the vinyl life if they are not removed.
The frequency of cleaning depends on the amount of use and conditions to which the vinyl is subjected.
Most common stains can be cleaned using warm, soapy water and clear rinses. Scrubbing with a soft bristle brush will help loosen soiled material from embossed surfaces and under welting. If the stains are not removed with the above method use a mild cleaner such as Fantastic. This cleaner should be used only as needed and not the normal means.
With more stubborn stains, rubbing alcohol or mineral spirits may be tried cautiously. Widespread solvent use can severely damage or discolor vinyl. Try to remove stains immediately before they have a chance to
7-1
CHAPTER 7 penetrate the surface of the vinyl.
Powdered abrasives, steel wool, or industrial strength cleaners are not recommended for cleaning our vinyl. Lacquer solvents will cause immediate damage. Dilute chlorine bleach before using. Do not wax the vinyl as it may cause cracking. Always wear protective gloves and make sure there is suffi cient ventilation when cleaning vinyl. Wear eye protection.
Remember that suntan oil will damage vinyl. Use suntan lotion instead of suntan oil. Exposure to the sun is a natural enemy of vinyl upholstery. For maximum life, keep the vessel covered with a cockpit cover when not in use
Carpet
Use approved cleaners on carpet. Always try on a test area fi rst. Many spots and spills can be removed using a cleaner combined with a clean, white terry towel. Try not to soak an area excessively and do not use solvents because most interior carpet is rubber backed and glued in place. Solvents and abrasives will break down the backing and fi bers.
Plastics
Use plastic cleaners and polishes recommended for marine use only. Use proper applicators. Read all instructions carefully. Test the product in a small area fi rst. Use a soft rag and always rinse the surface with water.
Ammonia based cleaners and abrasives will damage plastic parts.
NOTICE
NEVER CLEAN PLASTIC SURFACES WITH A DRY
CLOTH OR GLASS CLEANING SOLUTIONS
CONTAINING AMMONIA. NEVER USE SOLVENTS
OR WIPE WITH ABRASIVES
7-2
CHAPTER 7 penetrate the surface of the vinyl.
Powdered abrasives, steel wool, or industrial strength cleaners are not recommended for cleaning our vinyl. Lacquer solvents will cause immediate damage. Dilute chlorine bleach before using. Do not wax the vinyl as it may cause cracking. Always wear protective gloves and make sure there is suffi cient ventilation when cleaning vinyl. Wear eye protection.
Remember that suntan oil will damage vinyl. Use suntan lotion instead of suntan oil. Exposure to the sun is a natural enemy of vinyl upholstery. For maximum life, keep the vessel covered with a cockpit cover when not in use
Carpet
Use approved cleaners on carpet. Always try on a test area fi rst. Many spots and spills can be removed using a cleaner combined with a clean, white terry towel. Try not to soak an area excessively and do not use solvents because most interior carpet is rubber backed and glued in place. Solvents and abrasives will break down the backing and fi bers.
Plastics
Use plastic cleaners and polishes recommended for marine use only. Use proper applicators. Read all instructions carefully. Test the product in a small area fi rst. Use a soft rag and always rinse the surface with water.
Ammonia based cleaners and abrasives will damage plastic parts.
NOTICE
NEVER CLEAN PLASTIC SURFACES WITH A DRY
CLOTH OR GLASS CLEANING SOLUTIONS
CONTAINING AMMONIA. NEVER USE SOLVENTS
OR WIPE WITH ABRASIVES
7-2
Cosmetic Care & Maintenance
Interior Fabrics
Clean fl at good interior fabrics with dry cleaning fl uid style cleaners approved for use with soft fabrics. Allow adequate ventilation and follow the label instructions carefully. Use a soft cleanser with feldspar to clean stubborn marks or stains on wallpaper. Normal interior vinyl such as used on the headliner on cruisers and head clean up with a mild soap and water solution. Rinse immediately with clean water and wipe dry.
Always test an area with a cleaner before applying it to a larger area.
Fiberglass & Gelcoat
!
CAUTION
AVOID BODILY INJURY!
WAXED GELCOAT SURFACES
CAN BE VERY SLIPPERY.
DO NOT WAX NORMALLY USED AREAS
OF THE DECK, LINER, OR GUNWALES.
DO NOT WAX ANY TEXTURED
OR NONSKID SURFACES
SUCH AS FLOORS, WALKWAYS,
STEPS, LADDERS OR SWIM PLATFORMS.
WEAR NON-SLIP FOOTWEAR WHEN WALKING
ON VESSEL SURFACES.
Routine maintenance is the only practical way to keep the surface of your boat looking shiny and new. Most objects left outdoors will gradually deteriorate from exposure to the sun, water, dust and pollution. Such outdoor exposure can cause your boat’s gelcoated surface to change or fade. Darker colors tend to fade more rapidly than lighter colors because they absorb more of the sun’s rays (ultraviolet and infrared).
Basic maintenance includes monthly washing of the boat’s surface to remove normal accumulation of soil and stain.
7-3
Cosmetic Care & Maintenance
Interior Fabrics
Clean fl at good interior fabrics with dry cleaning fl uid style cleaners approved for use with soft fabrics. Allow adequate ventilation and follow the label instructions carefully. Use a soft cleanser with feldspar to clean stubborn marks or stains on wallpaper. Normal interior vinyl such as used on the headliner on cruisers and head clean up with a mild soap and water solution. Rinse immediately with clean water and wipe dry.
Always test an area with a cleaner before applying it to a larger area.
Fiberglass & Gelcoat
!
CAUTION
AVOID BODILY INJURY!
WAXED GELCOAT SURFACES
CAN BE VERY SLIPPERY.
DO NOT WAX NORMALLY USED AREAS
OF THE DECK, LINER, OR GUNWALES.
DO NOT WAX ANY TEXTURED
OR NONSKID SURFACES
SUCH AS FLOORS, WALKWAYS,
STEPS, LADDERS OR SWIM PLATFORMS.
WEAR NON-SLIP FOOTWEAR WHEN WALKING
ON VESSEL SURFACES.
Routine maintenance is the only practical way to keep the surface of your boat looking shiny and new. Most objects left outdoors will gradually deteriorate from exposure to the sun, water, dust and pollution. Such outdoor exposure can cause your boat’s gelcoated surface to change or fade. Darker colors tend to fade more rapidly than lighter colors because they absorb more of the sun’s rays (ultraviolet and infrared).
Basic maintenance includes monthly washing of the boat’s surface to remove normal accumulation of soil and stain.
7-3
CHAPTER 7
Use a mild detergent such as dishwasher powder or liquid. Do not use automatic dishwasher detergent. Avoid any kind of alkaline cleaners such as trisodium phosphate (TSP), abrasives, bleaches and ammonia.
For best results use cleaners that are recommended for fi berglass.
NOTICE
WIRE BRUSHES, SCOURING PADS, OR OTHER
ABRASIVE TYPE MATERIALS AND SOLUTIONS
SHOULD NEVER BE USED ON THE HULL
OR DECK OF YOUR BOAT.
THEY CREATE SMALL SCRATCH MARKS
THAT WILL COLLECT MARINE GROWTH
AND OTHER FOREIGN MATERIALS.
It is recommended that you wax the gelcoat surface twice yearly to prevent loss of gloss and to protect the fi nish. Use only waxes for fi berglass and follow the label instructions. Apply a 3’ x 3’ section at a time using clean applicator cloths or a buffi ng bonnet. When a haze develops, use a power buffer at low speeds (1200-2000 rpm) to remove the haze. Keep the buffer moving to avoid heat buildup. The power buffer is very effi cient at removing contaminants from gelcoat. Never wax gelcoat in the direct sun.
When the washing and waxing as recommended does not restore the shine it may be necessary to use a fi ne rubbing compound. Do not apply rubbing compound in direct sunlight. A power buffer at low speed does an excellent job to remove impurities from the gel coat that cause dulling. Use light pressure and keep the buffer moving. Re-wax after compounding to buff the surface.
“Hairline cracks” or “spider webbing” could develop in the gelcoat surface of a hull or deck. This can be caused by impact or other factors. Small air pockets or gouges may also occur through normal wear.
7-4
CHAPTER 7
Use a mild detergent such as dishwasher powder or liquid. Do not use automatic dishwasher detergent. Avoid any kind of alkaline cleaners such as trisodium phosphate (TSP), abrasives, bleaches and ammonia.
For best results use cleaners that are recommended for fi berglass.
NOTICE
WIRE BRUSHES, SCOURING PADS, OR OTHER
ABRASIVE TYPE MATERIALS AND SOLUTIONS
SHOULD NEVER BE USED ON THE HULL
OR DECK OF YOUR BOAT.
THEY CREATE SMALL SCRATCH MARKS
THAT WILL COLLECT MARINE GROWTH
AND OTHER FOREIGN MATERIALS.
It is recommended that you wax the gelcoat surface twice yearly to prevent loss of gloss and to protect the fi nish. Use only waxes for fi berglass and follow the label instructions. Apply a 3’ x 3’ section at a time using clean applicator cloths or a buffi ng bonnet. When a haze develops, use a power buffer at low speeds (1200-2000 rpm) to remove the haze. Keep the buffer moving to avoid heat buildup. The power buffer is very effi cient at removing contaminants from gelcoat. Never wax gelcoat in the direct sun.
When the washing and waxing as recommended does not restore the shine it may be necessary to use a fi ne rubbing compound. Do not apply rubbing compound in direct sunlight. A power buffer at low speed does an excellent job to remove impurities from the gel coat that cause dulling. Use light pressure and keep the buffer moving. Re-wax after compounding to buff the surface.
“Hairline cracks” or “spider webbing” could develop in the gelcoat surface of a hull or deck. This can be caused by impact or other factors. Small air pockets or gouges may also occur through normal wear.
7-4
Cosmetic Care & Maintenance
These do not affect the strength of the hull or deck and can be repaired by yourself, a marine professional or a Regal dealer.
The affected area should be chipped or sanded away and a thin layer of color matched gelcoat applied. This layer is then sanded smooth and buffed to its original luster.
Most minor scratches, nicks, and dents can be removed by compounding the surface. Marine type compounds can be found at most auto body supply stores. Specify a number 25 which is a coarser compound up to a number 55 being less coarse. Various glazes and polishes are available as needed. Ask your marine professional or Regal dealer for more information. Fiberglass hulls are strong but they can be damaged.
A fi berglass hull has virtually no internal stresses. Thus when a part is broken or punctured, the rest of the hull retains its original shape.
A severe blow will either be absorbed or result in a defi nite localized break. A break of this nature should be checked and repaired by a marine professional or a Regal dealer.
Minor Repairs
You will need the following materials for minor repairs:
• Gelcoat
• Clear Liquid Catalyst
• Putty Knife
• Razor Blade
•
Fine Sandpaper (400,600,1000)
• Wax Paper (to cover repair area)
!
WARNING
AVOID BODILY INJURY!
GELCOAT & FIBERGLASS RESIN ARE FLAMMABLE.
WORK IN A WELL VENTILATED AREA FREE FROM
OPEN FLAMES. DO NOT SMOKE!
7-5
Cosmetic Care & Maintenance
These do not affect the strength of the hull or deck and can be repaired by yourself, a marine professional or a Regal dealer.
The affected area should be chipped or sanded away and a thin layer of color matched gelcoat applied. This layer is then sanded smooth and buffed to its original luster.
Most minor scratches, nicks, and dents can be removed by compounding the surface. Marine type compounds can be found at most auto body supply stores. Specify a number 25 which is a coarser compound up to a number 55 being less coarse. Various glazes and polishes are available as needed. Ask your marine professional or Regal dealer for more information. Fiberglass hulls are strong but they can be damaged.
A fi berglass hull has virtually no internal stresses. Thus when a part is broken or punctured, the rest of the hull retains its original shape.
A severe blow will either be absorbed or result in a defi nite localized break. A break of this nature should be checked and repaired by a marine professional or a Regal dealer.
Minor Repairs
You will need the following materials for minor repairs:
• Gelcoat
• Clear Liquid Catalyst
• Putty Knife
• Razor Blade
•
Fine Sandpaper (400,600,1000)
• Wax Paper (to cover repair area)
!
WARNING
AVOID BODILY INJURY!
GELCOAT & FIBERGLASS RESIN ARE FLAMMABLE.
WORK IN A WELL VENTILATED AREA FREE FROM
OPEN FLAMES. DO NOT SMOKE!
7-5
CHAPTER 7
For minor repairs refer to the following procedure:
1. Clean the area to be repaired and get rid of any wax or grease residues.
2. Clean out scratches, chips, and nicks.
3. Sand area to be repaired so gelcoat will bond.
4. In a separate container, measure only the amount of gelcoat you will need. Mix a ratio of 2% ratio of catalyst to the amount of gelcoat being used (a spoonful of gelcoat will require only a drop or two of catalyst). Do not pour any unused portions of the gelcoat/catalyst mixture back into either original container.
5. Apply gelcoat to area leaving a slight lift above the surface.
6. Cover the area with wax paper. It will help the mixture to set up faster.
7. Remove wax paper and shave off any extra gelcoat with a razor blade.
8. After the area is shaved smooth, start with the 400, 600, and fi nally
1000 grit sand papers.
9. Buff the area with compound, polish and a fi nish wax. You may notice a difference between the repaired area and the original fi nish due to the natural weathering process.
Canvas
Boat canvas is in most cases subjected to more severe punishment than practically any other type of material. Moisture, dirt and chemicals from industrial fallout, heat, ultraviolet rays and salt water are all factors which accelerate the deterioration of your boat canvas.
7-6
CHAPTER 7
For minor repairs refer to the following procedure:
1. Clean the area to be repaired and get rid of any wax or grease residues.
2. Clean out scratches, chips, and nicks.
3. Sand area to be repaired so gelcoat will bond.
4. In a separate container, measure only the amount of gelcoat you will need. Mix a ratio of 2% ratio of catalyst to the amount of gelcoat being used (a spoonful of gelcoat will require only a drop or two of catalyst). Do not pour any unused portions of the gelcoat/catalyst mixture back into either original container.
5. Apply gelcoat to area leaving a slight lift above the surface.
6. Cover the area with wax paper. It will help the mixture to set up faster.
7. Remove wax paper and shave off any extra gelcoat with a razor blade.
8. After the area is shaved smooth, start with the 400, 600, and fi nally
1000 grit sand papers.
9. Buff the area with compound, polish and a fi nish wax. You may notice a difference between the repaired area and the original fi nish due to the natural weathering process.
Canvas
Boat canvas is in most cases subjected to more severe punishment than practically any other type of material. Moisture, dirt and chemicals from industrial fallout, heat, ultraviolet rays and salt water are all factors which accelerate the deterioration of your boat canvas.
7-6
Cosmetic Care & Maintenance
These elements can cause serious damage if left unchecked.
The boat top and other canvas supplied on your Regal boat are manufactured from top quality materials to provide you with years of trouble free service. The following information on the care, cleaning and proper storage of the fabrics and fasteners that make up your marine canvas is being provided to help you maintain the appearance and ease of operation.
Sunbrella is used on most Regal tops, aft curtains, camper enclosures, bow tonneaus and cockpit covers. Sunbrella is a woven fabric made from
100% solution dyed acrylic fi ber. It is color fast and will withstand long term exposure to the sun (ultraviolet rays) without excessive fading.
Sunbrella is a woven fabric. Even though it is treated with water repellency some “misting” through the fabric is typical. With new canvas, the greatest potential for leakage is through the sewn seams. Because
Sunbrella and the long term thread used is synthetic, the holes created by sewing will not swell up and seal when exposed to water as cotton does. Usually the movement of the fabric in use will move the fi bers enough to seal the holes. You may apply Apseal or Uniseal to the seams to speed up this process.
When the canvas is new, the fi t will normally be tight. It is designed this way because Sunbrella stretches as it ages, The initial tight fi t allows for a suitable fi t for the life of the canvas. The Sunbrella fi t will vary slightly in the heat, cold, and rain.
Sunbrella Cleaning Instructions
Sunbrella should be cleaned regularly before substances such as dirt, roof particles, etc., are allowed to accumulate on and become embedded in the fabric. The fabric can be cleaned without being removed from the boat. Simply brush off any loose dirt, hose down, and clean with a mild solution of natural soap in lukewarm water. Rinse thoroughly to remove soap. DO NOT USE DETERGENTS! Allow to air dry.
For heavily soiled fabric, remove the top from the frame.
7-7
Cosmetic Care & Maintenance
These elements can cause serious damage if left unchecked.
The boat top and other canvas supplied on your Regal boat are manufactured from top quality materials to provide you with years of trouble free service. The following information on the care, cleaning and proper storage of the fabrics and fasteners that make up your marine canvas is being provided to help you maintain the appearance and ease of operation.
Sunbrella is used on most Regal tops, aft curtains, camper enclosures, bow tonneaus and cockpit covers. Sunbrella is a woven fabric made from
100% solution dyed acrylic fi ber. It is color fast and will withstand long term exposure to the sun (ultraviolet rays) without excessive fading.
Sunbrella is a woven fabric. Even though it is treated with water repellency some “misting” through the fabric is typical. With new canvas, the greatest potential for leakage is through the sewn seams. Because
Sunbrella and the long term thread used is synthetic, the holes created by sewing will not swell up and seal when exposed to water as cotton does. Usually the movement of the fabric in use will move the fi bers enough to seal the holes. You may apply Apseal or Uniseal to the seams to speed up this process.
When the canvas is new, the fi t will normally be tight. It is designed this way because Sunbrella stretches as it ages, The initial tight fi t allows for a suitable fi t for the life of the canvas. The Sunbrella fi t will vary slightly in the heat, cold, and rain.
Sunbrella Cleaning Instructions
Sunbrella should be cleaned regularly before substances such as dirt, roof particles, etc., are allowed to accumulate on and become embedded in the fabric. The fabric can be cleaned without being removed from the boat. Simply brush off any loose dirt, hose down, and clean with a mild solution of natural soap in lukewarm water. Rinse thoroughly to remove soap. DO NOT USE DETERGENTS! Allow to air dry.
For heavily soiled fabric, remove the top from the frame.
7-7
CHAPTER 7
Soak the fabric in a solution that has been mixed to the following proportions.: 1/2 cup of bleach and 1/4 cup of Ivory or Lux soap
(liquid or soap) per each gallon of lukewarm water. Allow the fabric to soak until the bleach has killed the mildew and the stains can be brushed out with a common kitchen scrub brush. Rinse the fabric thoroughly in cold water to remove all the soap. This may require several rinsings. Incomplete rinsing can cause deterioration of sewing threads and prohibit the fabric from being properly retreated. Allow the fabric to dry completely. DO NOT STEAM PRESS OR DRY
IN AN ELECTRIC OR GAS DRYER! Excessive heat can damage and shrink the fabric since it is heat sensitive.
This method of cleaning may remove part of the water and stain repellent that was applied to the fabric during its manufacture. It is recommended to retreat with such water repellency products as Apseal and Uniseal. We do not recommend any wax based treatments such as
Thompson’s Water Seal or any of the silicone products such as SC-15 or Aqua-Tite. Wax based products prevent the fabric from breathing, and encourage mildew growth while the silicone products interact with the original fl uorocarbon fi nish and seem to cause a rapid loss of water repellency.
Clear Vinyl, Zipper & Snap Care
Never store canvas wet or in an unventilated, moist area. Always roll the canvas instead of folding. This is of particular importance on side curtains or any other part with the clear vinyl “glass”. Roll the top carefully around the bows and cover with the storage boot provided.
The clear vinyl “glass” used in side curtains, aft curtains, visors, and camper enclosures is very susceptible to heat and cold. Keep vinyl curtains from touching metal tubing to minimize burning the vinyl.
If the boat is stored with top, side curtains and aft curtain in place, heat build up inside the boat may discolor the vinyl.
To clean the clear “vinyl” glass, use a solution of Ivory or Lux soap, liquid or fl akes, and lukewarm water. Allow to air dry. Never use any
7-8
CHAPTER 7
Soak the fabric in a solution that has been mixed to the following proportions.: 1/2 cup of bleach and 1/4 cup of Ivory or Lux soap
(liquid or soap) per each gallon of lukewarm water. Allow the fabric to soak until the bleach has killed the mildew and the stains can be brushed out with a common kitchen scrub brush. Rinse the fabric thoroughly in cold water to remove all the soap. This may require several rinsings. Incomplete rinsing can cause deterioration of sewing threads and prohibit the fabric from being properly retreated. Allow the fabric to dry completely. DO NOT STEAM PRESS OR DRY
IN AN ELECTRIC OR GAS DRYER! Excessive heat can damage and shrink the fabric since it is heat sensitive.
This method of cleaning may remove part of the water and stain repellent that was applied to the fabric during its manufacture. It is recommended to retreat with such water repellency products as Apseal and Uniseal. We do not recommend any wax based treatments such as
Thompson’s Water Seal or any of the silicone products such as SC-15 or Aqua-Tite. Wax based products prevent the fabric from breathing, and encourage mildew growth while the silicone products interact with the original fl uorocarbon fi nish and seem to cause a rapid loss of water repellency.
Clear Vinyl, Zipper & Snap Care
Never store canvas wet or in an unventilated, moist area. Always roll the canvas instead of folding. This is of particular importance on side curtains or any other part with the clear vinyl “glass”. Roll the top carefully around the bows and cover with the storage boot provided.
The clear vinyl “glass” used in side curtains, aft curtains, visors, and camper enclosures is very susceptible to heat and cold. Keep vinyl curtains from touching metal tubing to minimize burning the vinyl.
If the boat is stored with top, side curtains and aft curtain in place, heat build up inside the boat may discolor the vinyl.
To clean the clear “vinyl” glass, use a solution of Ivory or Lux soap, liquid or fl akes, and lukewarm water. Allow to air dry. Never use any
7-8
Cosmetic Care & Maintenance type of abrasive cleaner as it will scratch the “vinyl” glass. There are many cleaners and scratch removers on the market specifi cally for clear vinyl. Handle the clear curtains carefully. They are soft and prone to scratching.
Canvas parts are designed with zippers. When zippers are new they can be a little diffi cult to use. Zip carefully without forcing the zipper or the material. They will loosen with use. A zipper lubricant may be used to help new zippers as well as maintaining used ones. The most vulnerable part of the zipper is the starts. Use care when beginning to close the zipper.
Canvas snap fasteners should be unsnapped as close to the button as possible. Never remove canvas by pulling roughly on the edge of the material. This can damage the canvas as well as the fasteners. Use petroleum jelly on snaps to keep them from developing corrosion especially in harsh environments.
Metal
Keep all stainless steel and other metal parts rinsed and wiped dry. To maintain their fi nish annually polish the stainless steel and other bright works at least annually. Use commercially available metal products and read the labels carefully before use. Refer to the fl yer in the owners information pouch. Most marinas and boating retail outlets carry metal care products.
Hull Bottom
Never use wire brushes or highly abrasive scouring pads on your hull bottom. It could damage the gel coat surface or the bottom paint. The bottom of your boat needs to be clean since the build up of natural coatings from water or marine life can potentially create drag and affect your boat’s performance. Contact a marine professional or Regal dealer for more information.
7-9
Cosmetic Care & Maintenance type of abrasive cleaner as it will scratch the “vinyl” glass. There are many cleaners and scratch removers on the market specifi cally for clear vinyl. Handle the clear curtains carefully. They are soft and prone to scratching.
Canvas parts are designed with zippers. When zippers are new they can be a little diffi cult to use. Zip carefully without forcing the zipper or the material. They will loosen with use. A zipper lubricant may be used to help new zippers as well as maintaining used ones. The most vulnerable part of the zipper is the starts. Use care when beginning to close the zipper.
Canvas snap fasteners should be unsnapped as close to the button as possible. Never remove canvas by pulling roughly on the edge of the material. This can damage the canvas as well as the fasteners. Use petroleum jelly on snaps to keep them from developing corrosion especially in harsh environments.
Metal
Keep all stainless steel and other metal parts rinsed and wiped dry. To maintain their fi nish annually polish the stainless steel and other bright works at least annually. Use commercially available metal products and read the labels carefully before use. Refer to the fl yer in the owners information pouch. Most marinas and boating retail outlets carry metal care products.
Hull Bottom
Never use wire brushes or highly abrasive scouring pads on your hull bottom. It could damage the gel coat surface or the bottom paint. The bottom of your boat needs to be clean since the build up of natural coatings from water or marine life can potentially create drag and affect your boat’s performance. Contact a marine professional or Regal dealer for more information.
7-9
CHAPTER 7
FREQUENT STAINS/CLEAN-UP STEPS 1 2 3
Coffee, Tea, Chocolate................................... B
Permanent Marker*........................................ E B C
Household Dirt............................................... A B
Grease............................................................... D B
Ketchup, Tomato Products............................ A
Latex Paint....................................................... A
Oil Base Paint.................................................. D
B
B
B
Mustard............................................................. A B C
Suntan Oil........................................................ A B
Asphalt/Road Tar........................................... D B
Crayon.............................................................. D B
Engine Oil........................................................ B
Spray Paint....................................................... B
Chewing Gum................................................. D
Shoe Polish*..................................................... D
Ballpoint Pen*.................................................. E
A
Lipstick............................................................. A B
B
B A
Eyeshadow........................................................ E B
Mildew*............................................................ C B A
Wet Leaves *.................................................... C B A
A= Soft brush; warm soapy water/rinse/ dry
B= Fantastik cleaner
C= One tablespoon ammonia, 1/4 cup of hydrogen peroxide, 3/4 cup of warm water/ rinse/dry
D= Scrape off residue ( use ice to lift gum)
E= Denatured alcohol/rinse/dry
* These products contain dyes which leave permanent stains.
7-10
CHAPTER 7
FREQUENT STAINS/CLEAN-UP STEPS 1 2 3
Coffee, Tea, Chocolate................................... B
Permanent Marker*........................................ E B C
Household Dirt............................................... A B
Grease............................................................... D B
Ketchup, Tomato Products............................ A
Latex Paint....................................................... A
Oil Base Paint.................................................. D
B
B
B
Mustard............................................................. A B C
Suntan Oil........................................................ A B
Asphalt/Road Tar........................................... D B
Crayon.............................................................. D B
Engine Oil........................................................ B
Spray Paint....................................................... B
Chewing Gum................................................. D
Shoe Polish*..................................................... D
Ballpoint Pen*.................................................. E
A
Lipstick............................................................. A B
B
B A
Eyeshadow........................................................ E B
Mildew*............................................................ C B A
Wet Leaves *.................................................... C B A
A= Soft brush; warm soapy water/rinse/ dry
B= Fantastik cleaner
C= One tablespoon ammonia, 1/4 cup of hydrogen peroxide, 3/4 cup of warm water/ rinse/dry
D= Scrape off residue ( use ice to lift gum)
E= Denatured alcohol/rinse/dry
* These products contain dyes which leave permanent stains.
7-10
Cosmetic Care & Maintenance
MAINTENANCE
Engine
Each engine package is unique and quite complex. A select portion of the maintenance items are covered in this chapter. Many times because of the advanced ignition and fuel injection systems used on marine engines it is best to use trained marine professionals. This is especially true with the new DTS and EVC systems. For more detailed information, refer to the manufacturer’s engine owner’s manual or call your closest Regal dealer.
Stern Drive
The stern drive unit should be checked before each outing. Tilt up the drive and check for any debris around the intake and any fi sh line tangled in the propeller. Check your engine manual for stern drive maintenance schedules.
Propellers
Out-of-balance or nicked props will effect performance or cause vibration. Damaged props should be replaced, but those that are chipped or bent can usually be reconditioned by a marine dealer or a propeller repair facility. When cruising, consider carrying a spare set of props on board because many marinas do not carry a full inventory of replacement propellers. Also, carry an extra set of prop hardware.
Refer to the manufacturer’s engine manual for appropriate stern drive and inboard propeller replacement.
Be sure to make a note of the propeller diameter and pitch while the vessel is in dry dock. They are pressed into the prop for easy reading.
In an emergency an aluminum propeller blade can be straightened by laying the propeller blade on a 2 x 4 and hammering the bent portion of the blade until straight. This procedure will assist the operator in reaching port so he can have the propeller re-pitched.
7-11
Cosmetic Care & Maintenance
MAINTENANCE
Engine
Each engine package is unique and quite complex. A select portion of the maintenance items are covered in this chapter. Many times because of the advanced ignition and fuel injection systems used on marine engines it is best to use trained marine professionals. This is especially true with the new DTS and EVC systems. For more detailed information, refer to the manufacturer’s engine owner’s manual or call your closest Regal dealer.
Stern Drive
The stern drive unit should be checked before each outing. Tilt up the drive and check for any debris around the intake and any fi sh line tangled in the propeller. Check your engine manual for stern drive maintenance schedules.
Propellers
Out-of-balance or nicked props will effect performance or cause vibration. Damaged props should be replaced, but those that are chipped or bent can usually be reconditioned by a marine dealer or a propeller repair facility. When cruising, consider carrying a spare set of props on board because many marinas do not carry a full inventory of replacement propellers. Also, carry an extra set of prop hardware.
Refer to the manufacturer’s engine manual for appropriate stern drive and inboard propeller replacement.
Be sure to make a note of the propeller diameter and pitch while the vessel is in dry dock. They are pressed into the prop for easy reading.
In an emergency an aluminum propeller blade can be straightened by laying the propeller blade on a 2 x 4 and hammering the bent portion of the blade until straight. This procedure will assist the operator in reaching port so he can have the propeller re-pitched.
7-11
CHAPTER 7
It is advantageous to carry the needed tools to change propellers. Use the following procedure to remove single stern drive propellers.
This method provides a safety margin from sharp blades especially those with stainless steel propellers. A 2” x 4” piece of wood placed across the ventilation plate allows safe removal of the propeller. With propeller units you may need to add a shim to the 2” x 4” piece of wood to remove the propeller safely. See the engine manufacturer’s owner’s manual for further information.
SINGLE PROPELLER INSTALLATION
2X4 WOOD
ZINC ANODE
COUNTERCLOCKWISE
TO LOOSEN
CLOCKWISE
TO TIGHTEN
PROPELLER SHAFT NUT
CHAPTER 7
It is advantageous to carry the needed tools to change propellers. Use the following procedure to remove single stern drive propellers.
This method provides a safety margin from sharp blades especially those with stainless steel propellers. A 2” x 4” piece of wood placed across the ventilation plate allows safe removal of the propeller. With propeller units you may need to add a shim to the 2” x 4” piece of wood to remove the propeller safely. See the engine manufacturer’s owner’s manual for further information.
SINGLE PROPELLER INSTALLATION
2X4 WOOD
ZINC ANODE
COUNTERCLOCKWISE
TO LOOSEN
CLOCKWISE
TO TIGHTEN
PROPELLER SHAFT NUT
7-12 7-12
Cosmetic Care & Maintenance
VOLVO DUO PROP INSTALLATION
Coat both shafts with marine
grease. Place the remote control in forward position to lock shafts.
Install the front propeller.
Cosmetic Care & Maintenance
VOLVO DUO PROP INSTALLATION
Coat both shafts with marine
grease. Place the remote control in forward position to lock shafts.
Install the front propeller.
Install propeller nut. Tighten to 45 ft. lbs. Make sure the chamfered edge of the prop nut is facing forward. Failure to install prop nut correctly could result in loss of prop or damage to the lower unit.
7-13
Install propeller nut. Tighten to 45 ft. lbs. Make sure the chamfered edge of the prop nut is facing forward. Failure to install prop nut correctly could result in loss of prop or damage to the lower unit.
7-13
7-14
CHAPTER 7
VOLVO DUO PROP INSTALLATION
Shift remote control to reverse to lock the propeller shaft. Install the rear propeller.
Install the rear propeller nut and tightenit to 50 foot pounds using a torque wrench. Shift the remote control to neutral. The propeller shoud turn freely.
CHAPTER 7
VOLVO DUO PROP INSTALLATION
Shift remote control to reverse to lock the propeller shaft. Install the rear propeller.
Install the rear propeller nut and tightenit to 50 foot pounds using a torque wrench. Shift the remote control to neutral. The propeller shoud turn freely.
7-14
Cosmetic Care & Maintenance
MERCRUISER BRAVO ONE
Cosmetic Care & Maintenance
MERCRUISER BRAVO ONE
MERCRUISER BRAVO THREE MERCRUISER BRAVO THREE
7-15 7-15
CHAPTER 7
Steering
Your boat uses a rack or rotary style steering system featuring a cable that functions with assistance through the engine power steering pump.
As you turn the wheel force is applied through the system to a hydraulic cylinder found at the aft end of the engine and attached through the engine power steering pump hoses.
With the engine running, check the engine power steering pump level before each outing. Add the appropriate power steering fl uid.
Periodically inspect the entire steering system for tightness and signs of wear and leaks including the steering wheel. Lubricate the steering shaft at the engine. Refer to the manufacturer’s engine manual in the owner’s pouch for additional information along with the maintenance chart in this chapter.
CHECK HOSE CONNECTIONS
FOR LEAKS & TIGHTNESS
.
CHECK NUT FOR
TIGHTNESS.
CHAPTER 7
Steering
Your boat uses a rack or rotary style steering system featuring a cable that functions with assistance through the engine power steering pump.
As you turn the wheel force is applied through the system to a hydraulic cylinder found at the aft end of the engine and attached through the engine power steering pump hoses.
With the engine running, check the engine power steering pump level before each outing. Add the appropriate power steering fl uid.
Periodically inspect the entire steering system for tightness and signs of wear and leaks including the steering wheel. Lubricate the steering shaft at the engine. Refer to the manufacturer’s engine manual in the owner’s pouch for additional information along with the maintenance chart in this chapter.
CHECK HOSE CONNECTIONS
FOR LEAKS & TIGHTNESS
.
CHECK NUT FOR
TIGHTNESS.
7-16 7-16
Cosmetic Care & Maintenance
Battery
Frequently check your battery terminals for corrosion build-up. If you fi nd a greenish, powdery substance, remove the cable connections and clean both the both the terminals and the connectors with a wire brush. When the cleaning is fi nished reconnect the battery cables and coat the terminal with an approved grease or petroleum jelly to help prevent further corrosion. Check the electrolyte level at least every
30 days, more often in hot weather. The level should be maintained between the top of the battery plates and the bottom of the fi ll cap opening. Add distilled water as needed after charging the batteries or periodically as needed. Do not overfi ll because sulfuric acid could run over and cause burns or an explosion.
Batteries should be charged outside the boat. Do not smoke or bring fl ames near a battery that is being or has recently been charged. The hydrogen gas generated by battery charging is highly explosive.
Set batteries on a block of wood rather than concrete since this procedure will help the batteries from losing their charge.
Do not allow a metal object or loose wires to spark across battery posts while working close to the battery. Contact across terminals will cause a short circuit and personal injury may result.
Tighten all battery connectors securely. Check their tightness by pulling on the connectors. They should not move from their tightened position. Be sure to reinstall the positive boot over the battery terminal after tightening the battery post connection. While using the boat, use the volt meter to monitor the charge level of the battery. Monitor the charge with the engines turned off (static condition).
The engine alternators recharge the batteries. A fully charged battery will indicate between 12.3 and 12.6 volts on the voltmeter. Readings below this could indicate a dead battery cell or a charging system malfunction which should be checked by a marine professional.
7-17
Cosmetic Care & Maintenance
Battery
Frequently check your battery terminals for corrosion build-up. If you fi nd a greenish, powdery substance, remove the cable connections and clean both the both the terminals and the connectors with a wire brush. When the cleaning is fi nished reconnect the battery cables and coat the terminal with an approved grease or petroleum jelly to help prevent further corrosion. Check the electrolyte level at least every
30 days, more often in hot weather. The level should be maintained between the top of the battery plates and the bottom of the fi ll cap opening. Add distilled water as needed after charging the batteries or periodically as needed. Do not overfi ll because sulfuric acid could run over and cause burns or an explosion.
Batteries should be charged outside the boat. Do not smoke or bring fl ames near a battery that is being or has recently been charged. The hydrogen gas generated by battery charging is highly explosive.
Set batteries on a block of wood rather than concrete since this procedure will help the batteries from losing their charge.
Do not allow a metal object or loose wires to spark across battery posts while working close to the battery. Contact across terminals will cause a short circuit and personal injury may result.
Tighten all battery connectors securely. Check their tightness by pulling on the connectors. They should not move from their tightened position. Be sure to reinstall the positive boot over the battery terminal after tightening the battery post connection. While using the boat, use the volt meter to monitor the charge level of the battery. Monitor the charge with the engines turned off (static condition).
The engine alternators recharge the batteries. A fully charged battery will indicate between 12.3 and 12.6 volts on the voltmeter. Readings below this could indicate a dead battery cell or a charging system malfunction which should be checked by a marine professional.
7-17
CHAPTER 7
!
WARNING
TO PREVENT BODILY INJURY!
BATTERIES CONTAIN SULFURIC ACID (POISON)
WHICH ALSO CAN CAUSE BURNS.
AVOID CONTACT WITH THE SKIN, EYES & CLOTHING.
IF CONTACTED, FLUSH WITH WATER AT LEAST 15
MINUTES. IF SWALLOWED, DRINK LARGE AMOUNTS
OF WATER OR MILK. FOLLOW UP WITH MILK OF
MAGNESIA, BEATEN EGG OR VEGETABLE OIL. GET
MEDICAL ATTENTION IMMEDIATELY!
!
WARNING
TO PREVENT BODILY INJURY!
WEAR GOGGLES, RUBBER GLOVES
AND A PROTECTIVE APRON
WHEN WORKING WITH A BATTERY.
BATTERY ELECTROLYTE CAUSES SEVERE EYE
DAMAGE AND SKIN BURNS.
IN CASE OF SPILLAGE, WASH AREA WITH
A SOLUTION OF BAKING SODA AND WATER.
CHAPTER 7
!
WARNING
TO PREVENT BODILY INJURY!
BATTERIES CONTAIN SULFURIC ACID (POISON)
WHICH ALSO CAN CAUSE BURNS.
AVOID CONTACT WITH THE SKIN, EYES & CLOTHING.
IF CONTACTED, FLUSH WITH WATER AT LEAST 15
MINUTES. IF SWALLOWED, DRINK LARGE AMOUNTS
OF WATER OR MILK. FOLLOW UP WITH MILK OF
MAGNESIA, BEATEN EGG OR VEGETABLE OIL. GET
MEDICAL ATTENTION IMMEDIATELY!
!
WARNING
TO PREVENT BODILY INJURY!
WEAR GOGGLES, RUBBER GLOVES
AND A PROTECTIVE APRON
WHEN WORKING WITH A BATTERY.
BATTERY ELECTROLYTE CAUSES SEVERE EYE
DAMAGE AND SKIN BURNS.
IN CASE OF SPILLAGE, WASH AREA WITH
A SOLUTION OF BAKING SODA AND WATER.
7-18 7-18
Cosmetic Care & Maintenance
Remote Control
Check the helm control box and the cable attachment at the engine for tightness and shifting without binding. This applies to engines with standard remote controls only.
Shift and throttle controls at both the engine and helm areas must be checked on a periodic basis. At the engine end, make sure all control cable hardware is tight and control cable brackets are secure. An application of silicone spray on the cable ends periodically will keep control cables working freely and fi ghts corrosion. At the helm end check to make sure the control box hardware is tightly secured. Contact a marine professional or Regal dealer for further assistance.
Vessels with Mercruiser DTS and Volvo EVC controls require a different type of periodic maintenance. Both of the above systems shift electronically and operate without a control cable in the system.
See your closest Regal dealer for maintenance information.
Cosmetic Care & Maintenance
Remote Control
Check the helm control box and the cable attachment at the engine for tightness and shifting without binding. This applies to engines with standard remote controls only.
Shift and throttle controls at both the engine and helm areas must be checked on a periodic basis. At the engine end, make sure all control cable hardware is tight and control cable brackets are secure. An application of silicone spray on the cable ends periodically will keep control cables working freely and fi ghts corrosion. At the helm end check to make sure the control box hardware is tightly secured. Contact a marine professional or Regal dealer for further assistance.
Vessels with Mercruiser DTS and Volvo EVC controls require a different type of periodic maintenance. Both of the above systems shift electronically and operate without a control cable in the system.
See your closest Regal dealer for maintenance information.
7-19 7-19
CHAPTER 7
Seating
The bucket seat slider needs periodic inspection and maintenance. Loosen the swivel knob located on the slider and pull the slider off the pedestal.
Inspect all fasteners and metal for fatigue.
Lubricate the points shown in the illustration with a marine type grease. type of grease will not run off under warm temperatures. Use a paint brush to apply the grease. Also, use silicone spray for areas that can not be accessed with the grease. Reassemble slider to pedestal with the delrin cup positioned correctly.
BUCKET SEAT SLIDER MAINTENANCE
LUBRICATE SLIDER PLATE
LUBRICATE
HANDLES &
BOLT
HANDLE
HANDLE
BOLT
HANDLE
LUBRICATE ALL
SPLINES
CHECK FASTENERS
FOR TIGHTNESS
CHAPTER 7
Seating
The bucket seat slider needs periodic inspection and maintenance. Loosen the swivel knob located on the slider and pull the slider off the pedestal.
Inspect all fasteners and metal for fatigue.
Lubricate the points shown in the illustration with a marine type grease. type of grease will not run off under warm temperatures. Use a paint brush to apply the grease. Also, use silicone spray for areas that can not be accessed with the grease. Reassemble slider to pedestal with the delrin cup positioned correctly.
BUCKET SEAT SLIDER MAINTENANCE
LUBRICATE SLIDER PLATE
LUBRICATE
HANDLES &
BOLT
HANDLE
HANDLE
BOLT
HANDLE
LUBRICATE ALL
SPLINES
CHECK FASTENERS
FOR TIGHTNESS
7-20 7-20
Cosmetic Care & Maintenance
Bilge Pump
The bilge pump is usually installed in the engine compartment just below the engine front. Check for foreign materials stuck in the strainer area or discharge hose.
Check all clamps and electrical connections for tightness. A quick check of the bilge pump automatic fl oat switch is afforded by lifting up on the fl oat and listening for the pump operating. Look around the fl oat area for foreign debris and remove as necessary.
Fuel Tank & Fittings
Periodically inspect the fuel tank components for loose clamps at the vent, fi ll and feed locations. Examine each hose for signs of deterioration and leakage. Check the fuel sender for loose bolts, nuts, and leaks at all areas of contact. Also, inspect the fuel tank for signs of leakage or abrasion. Tighten all components as needed.
TYPICAL FUEL TANK
ANTI-SIPHON VALVE
HOSE CLAMPS
FUEL SENDER
FUEL VENT
FUEL FILL
FUEL FEED
7-21
Cosmetic Care & Maintenance
Bilge Pump
The bilge pump is usually installed in the engine compartment just below the engine front. Check for foreign materials stuck in the strainer area or discharge hose.
Check all clamps and electrical connections for tightness. A quick check of the bilge pump automatic fl oat switch is afforded by lifting up on the fl oat and listening for the pump operating. Look around the fl oat area for foreign debris and remove as necessary.
Fuel Tank & Fittings
Periodically inspect the fuel tank components for loose clamps at the vent, fi ll and feed locations. Examine each hose for signs of deterioration and leakage. Check the fuel sender for loose bolts, nuts, and leaks at all areas of contact. Also, inspect the fuel tank for signs of leakage or abrasion. Tighten all components as needed.
TYPICAL FUEL TANK
ANTI-SIPHON VALVE
HOSE CLAMPS
FUEL SENDER
FUEL VENT
FUEL FILL
FUEL FEED
7-21
CHAPTER 7
EVC/DTS Electronics
Engines with Volvo EVC or MerCruiser DTS control technology feature a solid state controller under the helm or at the engine.
Periodically check the connectons for tightness and corrosion. For further information, contact your closest Regal dealer or marine professional.
Note: Do not overfill storage compartments where electrical components are attached such as the helm area.
CHAPTER 7
EVC/DTS Electronics
Engines with Volvo EVC or MerCruiser DTS control technology feature a solid state controller under the helm or at the engine.
Periodically check the connectons for tightness and corrosion. For further information, contact your closest Regal dealer or marine professional.
Note: Do not overfill storage compartments where electrical components are attached such as the helm area.
Volvo EVC Controller Volvo EVC Controller
7-22 7-22
Cosmetic Care & Maintenance
Fuse Panel
The fuse panel is located under the dash area. On select models the panel can be accessed on the bow side of the helm. Lift the starboard bow seat backrest to access the fuse panel. Fuses are of the automotive type and can be obtained at most auto aftermarket stores or your closest authorized Regal dealer who can order it as a designated fuse pack. It is recommended that you carry all the different amperages. When a fuse “blows” determine the cause before replacing the fuse. Never replace with a higher amperage fuse since the equipment, wiring or even worse a fi re could develop due to an overload.
Cosmetic Care & Maintenance
Fuse Panel
The fuse panel is located under the dash area. On select models the panel can be accessed on the bow side of the helm. Lift the starboard bow seat backrest to access the fuse panel. Fuses are of the automotive type and can be obtained at most auto aftermarket stores or your closest authorized Regal dealer who can order it as a designated fuse pack. It is recommended that you carry all the different amperages. When a fuse “blows” determine the cause before replacing the fuse. Never replace with a higher amperage fuse since the equipment, wiring or even worse a fi re could develop due to an overload.
7-23 7-23
CHAPTER 7
Stereo
The Fusion® stereo head unit requires little maintenance. When washing the cockpit, do not discharge water directly at the stereo unit.
Possible damage may result. As with any CD unit clean your CD’s to keep them from skipping. This process also aids in keeping dust out of the unit. Never allow water to enter the iPOD mechanism behind the head cover.
For further information, refer to your stereo owner’s manual located in the owner’s packet.
CHAPTER 7
Stereo
The Fusion® stereo head unit requires little maintenance. When washing the cockpit, do not discharge water directly at the stereo unit.
Possible damage may result. As with any CD unit clean your CD’s to keep them from skipping. This process also aids in keeping dust out of the unit. Never allow water to enter the iPOD mechanism behind the head cover.
For further information, refer to your stereo owner’s manual located in the owner’s packet.
7-24 7-24
Cosmetic Care & Maintenance
Automatic Fire Extinguisher
Vessels with the automatic fi re extinguisher system should check the halon unit for tightness at the engine compartment monthly. At that time the unit itself should be weighed to ensure it is full. If the green dash indicator light is not on when the key is in the ignition position there is a system malfunction that must be investigated immediately.
Refer to the manual in the owner’s packet
Blower
Check the blower hoses to ensure they are fastened in the bilge properly and there are no holes in them. The hose connected to the blower needs to be 3/4 down in the bilge to evacuate fumes properly. All vents need to be checked for debris.
Make sure the blower motor is securely fastened and all hose clamps and or tie wraps are tight. Also, check all electrical connectors for tightness.
Cosmetic Care & Maintenance
Automatic Fire Extinguisher
Vessels with the automatic fi re extinguisher system should check the halon unit for tightness at the engine compartment monthly. At that time the unit itself should be weighed to ensure it is full. If the green dash indicator light is not on when the key is in the ignition position there is a system malfunction that must be investigated immediately.
Refer to the manual in the owner’s packet
Blower
Check the blower hoses to ensure they are fastened in the bilge properly and there are no holes in them. The hose connected to the blower needs to be 3/4 down in the bilge to evacuate fumes properly. All vents need to be checked for debris.
Make sure the blower motor is securely fastened and all hose clamps and or tie wraps are tight. Also, check all electrical connectors for tightness.
7-25 7-25
CHAPTER 7
Galvanic/Stray Current Corrosion
CORROSION TABLE
Gold
Stainless Steel
Bronze
Copper
Brass
Steel
Aluminum
Zinc
Magnesium
Least Active
Most Active
Metal parts underwater can be subjected to two basic styles of electrolysis: galvanic corrosion and stray current corrosion. Both can damage the drive, propeller, underwater parts, boat and motor if not correctly monitored (testing at 2 week intervals) and avoided.
Galvanic corrosion is an electrochemical reaction between two or more metals. Drive systems consist of several different metals. Some are more active than others.
Galvanic corrosion of the more chemically active metals can occur whenever two or more dissimilar metals that are “grounded” (connected by actually touching each other, or through a wire or metal part) are immersed in a conductive solution (any material that can conduct electricity). Anything but pure water is conductive. Saltwater, fresh water with a high mineral content and polluted freshwater are highly conductive. Conductivity increases with temperature. That is why
Florida boats experience more corrosion than boats in Maine.
Specifi cally look at a typical marine drive unit with a stainless steel propeller. The aluminum is the more chemically active metal (called the anode) and the stainless steel propeller is the less chemically active metal (called the cathode).
7-26
CHAPTER 7
Galvanic/Stray Current Corrosion
CORROSION TABLE
Gold
Stainless Steel
Bronze
Copper
Brass
Steel
Aluminum
Zinc
Magnesium
Least Active
Most Active
Metal parts underwater can be subjected to two basic styles of electrolysis: galvanic corrosion and stray current corrosion. Both can damage the drive, propeller, underwater parts, boat and motor if not correctly monitored (testing at 2 week intervals) and avoided.
Galvanic corrosion is an electrochemical reaction between two or more metals. Drive systems consist of several different metals. Some are more active than others.
Galvanic corrosion of the more chemically active metals can occur whenever two or more dissimilar metals that are “grounded” (connected by actually touching each other, or through a wire or metal part) are immersed in a conductive solution (any material that can conduct electricity). Anything but pure water is conductive. Saltwater, fresh water with a high mineral content and polluted freshwater are highly conductive. Conductivity increases with temperature. That is why
Florida boats experience more corrosion than boats in Maine.
Specifi cally look at a typical marine drive unit with a stainless steel propeller. The aluminum is the more chemically active metal (called the anode) and the stainless steel propeller is the less chemically active metal (called the cathode).
7-26
Cosmetic Care & Maintenance
Typically electrons fl ow from the anode (the aluminum drive unit),via the external conducting path to the cathode (stainless steel propeller). If there is a very large anode connected to a small cathode, the anode will corrode very slowly. If a very large cathode is connected to a small anode, the anode will corrode very quickly. Obviously, if you do not control galvanic corrosion, over time the aluminum will corrode away.
The fi rst sign of galvanic corrosion is paint blistering (starting on sharp edges) below the water line- a white powdery substance forms on the exposed metal areas. As the corrosion advances, the exposed metal will become deeply pitted as the metal is actually eaten away.
Another condition which will increase galvanic corrosion is the removal or reduction in surface area of the sacrifi cial anodes. Never add aftermarket products that are connected to the engine ground such as stainless steel steering aids and trim planes.
Zinc connected to aluminum will form a corrosion cell but the aluminum (drive) becomes the cathode and the zinc (anode) corrodes.
Even though your boat may not have shore power aboard current from nearby vessels with shore power can produce stray current galvanic corrosion. Stray current corrosion occurs when metal with an electrical current fl owing into it is immersed in water that is grounded
(lake, ocean, pond). The current can leave the metal and fl ow through the water to ground. This will cause rapid corrosion of the metal at the point where the current leaves.
When a vessel nearby is plugged into shore power, they can potentially tie your aluminum drive unit to their boat via the green grounding shore power lead. Your aluminum drive unit could be the receiving end of a large galvanic cell (a battery) interconnected with nearby vessels or even through the marina’s metal structures via their electricial system.
7-27
Cosmetic Care & Maintenance
Typically electrons fl ow from the anode (the aluminum drive unit),via the external conducting path to the cathode (stainless steel propeller). If there is a very large anode connected to a small cathode, the anode will corrode very slowly. If a very large cathode is connected to a small anode, the anode will corrode very quickly. Obviously, if you do not control galvanic corrosion, over time the aluminum will corrode away.
The fi rst sign of galvanic corrosion is paint blistering (starting on sharp edges) below the water line- a white powdery substance forms on the exposed metal areas. As the corrosion advances, the exposed metal will become deeply pitted as the metal is actually eaten away.
Another condition which will increase galvanic corrosion is the removal or reduction in surface area of the sacrifi cial anodes. Never add aftermarket products that are connected to the engine ground such as stainless steel steering aids and trim planes.
Zinc connected to aluminum will form a corrosion cell but the aluminum (drive) becomes the cathode and the zinc (anode) corrodes.
Even though your boat may not have shore power aboard current from nearby vessels with shore power can produce stray current galvanic corrosion. Stray current corrosion occurs when metal with an electrical current fl owing into it is immersed in water that is grounded
(lake, ocean, pond). The current can leave the metal and fl ow through the water to ground. This will cause rapid corrosion of the metal at the point where the current leaves.
When a vessel nearby is plugged into shore power, they can potentially tie your aluminum drive unit to their boat via the green grounding shore power lead. Your aluminum drive unit could be the receiving end of a large galvanic cell (a battery) interconnected with nearby vessels or even through the marina’s metal structures via their electricial system.
7-27
CHAPTER 7
The vessel should be tested every couple of weeks to determine the integrity of the anode protection system. If not installed, Volvo and
Mercury offer an optional corrosion protection system that utilizes the anode/cathode theory to assist in offsetting galvanic corrosion.
Another way to test the system is to measure the hull potential. This is accomplished by immersing a reference electrode, usually a silver/ silver chloride into the water about six inches behind the drive. With leads attached to a digital multi-meter the hull potential is read on the
DC scale and compared to recommended specifi cations for the water body type. See the owner’s information vendor packet for more information or contact your nearest authorized Regal dealer.
Tips To Aid In Maintaining Galvanic Integrity
1. Test the galvanic integrity of your vessel every 2 weeks. Raise the outdrive and inspect anodes/parts for signs of galvanic corrosion, stray current corrosion or loose fasteners. Contact your closest Regal dealer/marine professional where signs of galvanic corrosion exist.
2. Never paint over anodes as they will become inoperative. Always leave at least one inch between bottom paint and any underwater fi tting such as seacocks, swim platform stanchions and all drive and propulsion related underwater parts.
3. Periodically remove vessel from water and clean/pressure wash all outdrive, anode and hull bottom areas to remove growth.
4. Ensure vessel is using the correct anode metal for the body of water that it is moored. See the engine/drive manufacturer information packets for more information or contact an authorized dealer.
5. Ensure that the drive is completely “in” down to provide more complete anode protection when vessel is moored.
6. Do not attempt to use magnesium anodes in saltwater. They will provide overprotection.
7-28
CHAPTER 7
The vessel should be tested every couple of weeks to determine the integrity of the anode protection system. If not installed, Volvo and
Mercury offer an optional corrosion protection system that utilizes the anode/cathode theory to assist in offsetting galvanic corrosion.
Another way to test the system is to measure the hull potential. This is accomplished by immersing a reference electrode, usually a silver/ silver chloride into the water about six inches behind the drive. With leads attached to a digital multi-meter the hull potential is read on the
DC scale and compared to recommended specifi cations for the water body type. See the owner’s information vendor packet for more information or contact your nearest authorized Regal dealer.
Tips To Aid In Maintaining Galvanic Integrity
1. Test the galvanic integrity of your vessel every 2 weeks. Raise the outdrive and inspect anodes/parts for signs of galvanic corrosion, stray current corrosion or loose fasteners. Contact your closest Regal dealer/marine professional where signs of galvanic corrosion exist.
2. Never paint over anodes as they will become inoperative. Always leave at least one inch between bottom paint and any underwater fi tting such as seacocks, swim platform stanchions and all drive and propulsion related underwater parts.
3. Periodically remove vessel from water and clean/pressure wash all outdrive, anode and hull bottom areas to remove growth.
4. Ensure vessel is using the correct anode metal for the body of water that it is moored. See the engine/drive manufacturer information packets for more information or contact an authorized dealer.
5. Ensure that the drive is completely “in” down to provide more complete anode protection when vessel is moored.
6. Do not attempt to use magnesium anodes in saltwater. They will provide overprotection.
7-28
Cosmetic Care & Maintenance
7. If marina moored, contact appropriate personnel if signs of galvanic corrosion appear on your drive system. Ask them to check for stray electrical current which may be arising from a nearby vessel’s faulty DC wiring or from a marina pier, piling or dock carrying leaking marina ground wiring.
GALVANIC/STRAY CURRENT CORROSION
Cause/Observed Condition
Sacrifi cial anodes consumed
Sacrifi cial anodes not grounded to drive
Loss of continuity between underwater parts & ground
Corrective Action
Replace anodes when 30% consumed
Remove anodes, clean contact surface, reinstall, check for continuity
Provide good ground connections
Nearby vessel with stray current Contact appropriate personnel
Remove your vessel from water
Paint on drive heavily worn, exposing more metal
Sacrifi cial anodes painted
Drive tilted/anodes out of water
Power trim cylinders only corroded
Prime and repaint or install additional anodes
Remove paint or replace anodes
Leave drive down, install additional anodes below water
Provide a good ground to drive, all parts must be grounded
Remove deposits Corrosion in area of exhaust outlets
Corrosion occuring after vessel is removed from saltwater
Stainless steel parts corroding
Underwater drive parts corroded, sacrifi cial anodes OK
Wash exterior and fl ush interior with freshwater
Clean parts, remove foreign material, ensure continuity
Oxide fi lm on anode (fresh water only) Replace anode
Poor grd. Remove/scrape anode
7-29
Cosmetic Care & Maintenance
7. If marina moored, contact appropriate personnel if signs of galvanic corrosion appear on your drive system. Ask them to check for stray electrical current which may be arising from a nearby vessel’s faulty DC wiring or from a marina pier, piling or dock carrying leaking marina ground wiring.
GALVANIC/STRAY CURRENT CORROSION
Cause/Observed Condition
Sacrifi cial anodes consumed
Sacrifi cial anodes not grounded to drive
Loss of continuity between underwater parts & ground
Corrective Action
Replace anodes when 30% consumed
Remove anodes, clean contact surface, reinstall, check for continuity
Provide good ground connections
Nearby vessel with stray current Contact appropriate personnel
Remove your vessel from water
Paint on drive heavily worn, exposing more metal
Sacrifi cial anodes painted
Drive tilted/anodes out of water
Power trim cylinders only corroded
Prime and repaint or install additional anodes
Remove paint or replace anodes
Leave drive down, install additional anodes below water
Provide a good ground to drive, all parts must be grounded
Remove deposits Corrosion in area of exhaust outlets
Corrosion occuring after vessel is removed from saltwater
Stainless steel parts corroding
Underwater drive parts corroded, sacrifi cial anodes OK
Wash exterior and fl ush interior with freshwater
Clean parts, remove foreign material, ensure continuity
Oxide fi lm on anode (fresh water only) Replace anode
Poor grd. Remove/scrape anode
7-29
CHAPTER 7
Zinc Anodes
Sacrifi cial zinc anodes are located on the stern drive housing, trim cylinders and/or propshaft to protect softer metals exposed to the water. Electrolysis attacks the least noble metals fi rst. Because zinc is a less noble metal, it will decompose before other metals. Check these zinc anodes periodically and have them replaced when they are 30% consumed. Notwithstanding, zinc is the most popular metal used to protect parts that are exposed to saltwater, freshwater or brackish water.
VOLVO SHOWN
CHAPTER 7
Zinc Anodes
Sacrifi cial zinc anodes are located on the stern drive housing, trim cylinders and/or propshaft to protect softer metals exposed to the water. Electrolysis attacks the least noble metals fi rst. Because zinc is a less noble metal, it will decompose before other metals. Check these zinc anodes periodically and have them replaced when they are 30% consumed. Notwithstanding, zinc is the most popular metal used to protect parts that are exposed to saltwater, freshwater or brackish water.
VOLVO SHOWN
SACRIFICIAL ANODE SACRIFICIAL ANODE
Zinc anodes in brackish or salt water need to be checked more frequently. If the anodes seem to be requiring frequent replacement there may be a boat leaking DC current into the water taxing the anodes.
This is especially possible around a marina environment. Contact a marine professional who can measure the galvanic activity with a special electrode and electric VOA meter. Refer to the engine manufacturer’s manual for exact anode location and detailed information. Stern drive or related parts damage due to galvanic or stray current corrosion is not covered under the Regal limited warranty.
7-30
Zinc anodes in brackish or salt water need to be checked more frequently. If the anodes seem to be requiring frequent replacement there may be a boat leaking DC current into the water taxing the anodes.
This is especially possible around a marina environment. Contact a marine professional who can measure the galvanic activity with a special electrode and electric VOA meter. Refer to the engine manufacturer’s manual for exact anode location and detailed information. Stern drive or related parts damage due to galvanic or stray current corrosion is not covered under the Regal limited warranty.
7-30
Cosmetic Care & Maintenance
VOLVO MAINTENANCE GUIDE
F U N C T I O N
E a c h T r i p
A n o d e s
L e a k s ,
C o o l i n g
S y s t e m
S t o p S w i t c h
L e a k s ,
F u e l S y s t e m
O i l , E n g i n e
O i l , D r i v e
S a f e t y
E q u i p m e n t
S h i f t S y s t e m
F l u i d , P
S t e e r i n g o w e r
S t e e r i n g C a b l e
M o n t h l y
B a t t e r y
A D J U S T
E x h a u s t S y s
E v e r y 5 0 O p e r a t i n g H o u r s
B a t t e r y
C o n n e c t i o n s
A l l B e l t s
E x h a u s t
S y s t e m
H o s e s , C l a m p s
F a s t e n e r s
F u e l S y s t e m
W a t e r P u m p
I m p e l l e r
C H E C K
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
L U B E F I L L R E P L A C E T I G H T E N
*
*
*
E v y e e r a y r s
2
*
*
*
*
*
7-31
Cosmetic Care & Maintenance
VOLVO MAINTENANCE GUIDE
F U N C T I O N
E a c h T r i p
A n o d e s
L e a k s ,
C o o l i n g
S y s t e m
S t o p S w i t c h
L e a k s ,
F u e l S y s t e m
O i l , E n g i n e
O i l , D r i v e
S a f e t y
E q u i p m e n t
S h i f t S y s t e m
F l u i d , P
S t e e r i n g o w e r
S t e e r i n g C a b l e
M o n t h l y
B a t t e r y
A D J U S T
E x h a u s t S y s
E v e r y 5 0 O p e r a t i n g H o u r s
B a t t e r y
C o n n e c t i o n s
A l l B e l t s
E x h a u s t
S y s t e m
H o s e s , C l a m p s
F a s t e n e r s
F u e l S y s t e m
W a t e r P u m p
I m p e l l e r
C H E C K
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
L U B E F I L L R E P L A C E T I G H T E N
*
*
*
E v y e e r a y r s
2
*
*
*
*
*
7-31
CHAPTER 7
VOLVO MAINTENANCE GUIDE CONT.
C H E C K L U B E F I L L R E P L A C E T I G H T E N F U N C T I O N
P e r S e a s o n
B e l l o w s &
C l a m p s
D r i v e
E x h a u s t
M a n i f l o l d ,
R i s e r s
C a r b , F u e l
F i l t e r
W a t e r P u m p
I m p e l l e r
L e a k s , F u e l
S y s t e m
O i l , E n g i n e
O i l , D r i v e
O i l F i l t e r ,
E n g i n e
P r o p e l l e r &
S h a f t
R e m o t e
C o n t r o l
C a b l e
S p a r k P l u g s
S p a r k
W i r e s ,
P l u g s
B o o t s
S t e e r i n g
S y s t e m
C a b l e
T h r o t t l e
C a b l e
S e r p e n t i n e w h e r e a p p l i c a b l e
C a r b A d j .
E n g i n e
A l i g n m e n t
G i m b a l
B e a r i n g
U n i v e r s a l
J o i n t s &
S p l i n e s
7-32
A D J U S T
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
E v e r y 2
Y e a r s
*
E v e r y 2
Y e a r s
*
*
*
*
CHAPTER 7
VOLVO MAINTENANCE GUIDE CONT.
C H E C K L U B E F I L L R E P L A C E T I G H T E N F U N C T I O N
P e r S e a s o n
B e l l o w s &
C l a m p s
D r i v e
E x h a u s t
M a n i f l o l d ,
R i s e r s
C a r b , F u e l
F i l t e r
W a t e r P u m p
I m p e l l e r
L e a k s , F u e l
S y s t e m
O i l , E n g i n e
O i l , D r i v e
O i l F i l t e r ,
E n g i n e
P r o p e l l e r &
S h a f t
R e m o t e
C o n t r o l
C a b l e
S p a r k P l u g s
S p a r k
W i r e s ,
P l u g s
B o o t s
S t e e r i n g
S y s t e m
C a b l e
T h r o t t l e
C a b l e
S e r p e n t i n e w h e r e a p p l i c a b l e
C a r b A d j .
E n g i n e
A l i g n m e n t
G i m b a l
B e a r i n g
U n i v e r s a l
J o i n t s &
S p l i n e s
7-32
A D J U S T
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
E v e r y 2
Y e a r s
*
E v e r y 2
Y e a r s
*
*
*
*
Cosmetic Care & Maintenance
F u e l P u m p
S i t e T u b e
B a t t e r y
C o n n e c t i o n
P r o p e l l e r
S h a f t / N u t
E n g i n e ,
C o r r o s i o n
G u a r d
T o u c h U p
P a i n t
E n g i n e
& F i l t
O i l e r
D r i v e
O i ,l C h a n g e
F u e l F i l t e r ,
R e p l a c e
S t e e r i n g &
R e m o t e
C o n t r o l
O i ,l E n g i n e
O i ,l D r i v e
O i ,l T r i m
P u m p
F l u i d ,
P o w e r
S t e e r i n g
S a l t U s a g e ,
F l u s h
C o o l i n g
W a t e r
P i c k U p s
A n o d e s
MERCRUISER MAINTENANCE GUIDE
E A C H
T R I P
W E E K L Y
E V E R Y
2
M T H S .
E V E R Y
Y E A R
( 1 0 0 H R S )
E V E R Y 3
( 3 0
Y R S .
0 H R S )
E V E R Y
2 Y R S .
E V E R Y
5 Y R S .
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
7-33
Cosmetic Care & Maintenance
F u e l P u m p
S i t e T u b e
B a t t e r y
C o n n e c t i o n
P r o p e l l e r
S h a f t / N u t
E n g i n e ,
C o r r o s i o n
G u a r d
T o u c h U p
P a i n t
E n g i n e
& F i l t
O i l e r
D r i v e
O i ,l C h a n g e
F u e l F i l t e r ,
R e p l a c e
S t e e r i n g &
R e m o t e
C o n t r o l
O i ,l E n g i n e
O i ,l D r i v e
O i ,l T r i m
P u m p
F l u i d ,
P o w e r
S t e e r i n g
S a l t U s a g e ,
F l u s h
C o o l i n g
W a t e r
P i c k U p s
A n o d e s
MERCRUISER MAINTENANCE GUIDE
E A C H
T R I P
W E E K L Y
E V E R Y
2
M T H S .
E V E R Y
Y E A R
( 1 0 0 H R S )
E V E R Y 3
( 3 0
Y R S .
0 H R S )
E V E R Y
2 Y R S .
E V E R Y
5 Y R S .
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
7-33
CHAPTER 7
B e l t s , I n s p e c t
L e a k s &
E
T i g h t n e s s , x h a u s t S y s .
D i s a s s e m b l e
S e a w a t e r P u m p
L e a k s &
T i g h t n e s s ,
C o o l i n g S y s t e m
C l e a n s e a w a t e r s e c t i o n , c o o l i n g s y s t e m
R e p l a c e
C o o l a n t
MERCRUISER MAINTENANCE GUIDE CONT.
E A C H
T R I P
W E E K L Y
E V E R Y 2
M T H S .
E V E R Y
Y E A R
( 1 0 0 H R S )
E V E R Y 3
Y R S .
( 3 0 0 H R S )
E V E R Y 2
Y R S .
E V E R Y 5
Y R S .
U J o i n t s ,
S p l i n e s &
B e l l o w s
L u b e G i m b a l
B e a r i n g &
E n g i n e C o u p l e r
T e s t
M e r C a t h o d e
B r a v o ' s
*
*
*
E n g i n e M o u n t s ,
R e t o r q u e
*
C h e c k i g n i t i o n p a r t s , t i m i n g
*
P C V V a l v e ,
R e p l a c e
F l a m e A r r e s t o r ,
C l e a n
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
L u b e U j o i n t s *
7-34
CHAPTER 7
B e l t s , I n s p e c t
L e a k s &
E
T i g h t n e s s , x h a u s t S y s .
D i s a s s e m b l e
S e a w a t e r P u m p
L e a k s &
T i g h t n e s s ,
C o o l i n g S y s t e m
C l e a n s e a w a t e r s e c t i o n , c o o l i n g s y s t e m
R e p l a c e
C o o l a n t
MERCRUISER MAINTENANCE GUIDE CONT.
E A C H
T R I P
W E E K L Y
E V E R Y 2
M T H S .
E V E R Y
Y E A R
( 1 0 0 H R S )
E V E R Y 3
Y R S .
( 3 0 0 H R S )
E V E R Y 2
Y R S .
E V E R Y 5
Y R S .
U J o i n t s ,
S p l i n e s &
B e l l o w s
L u b e G i m b a l
B e a r i n g &
E n g i n e C o u p l e r
T e s t
M e r C a t h o d e
B r a v o ' s
*
*
*
E n g i n e M o u n t s ,
R e t o r q u e
*
C h e c k i g n i t i o n p a r t s , t i m i n g
*
P C V V a l v e ,
R e p l a c e
F l a m e A r r e s t o r ,
C l e a n
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
L u b e U j o i n t s *
7-34
Cosmetic Care & Maintenance
Engine
Each engine and stern drive package is unique and quite complex. A select portion of the maintenance items are covered in this chapter including lubrication specifi cations and general periodic maintenance.
Because of the advanced ignition and fuel injection systems used on marine engines it is best to contact your Regal dealer for more of the detailed service procedures.
!
CAUTION
AVOID ENGINE DAMAGE!
FOLLOW ALL ENGINE BREAK-IN PROCEDURES
AS RECOMMENDED BY THE ENGINE MANU-
FACTURER. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE BREAK-
IN PROCEDURE MAY VOID THE ENGINE AND
STERN DRIVE WARRANTY.
!
CAUTION
AVOID ENGINE DAMAGE!
DO NOT RUN ENGINE AT A CONSTANT RPM
FOR PROLONGED PERIODS OF TIME DURING
BREAK-IN PERIOD. CHECK ENGINE OIL OFTEN.
!
CAUTION
AVOID ENGINE DAMAGE!
DO NOT RUN ENGINE OUT OF WATER UNLESS
YOU HAVE AN OPTIONAL FLUSHETTE.
FOLLOW MANUFACTURER’S ATTACHING &
RUNNING INSTRUCTIONS.
7-35
Cosmetic Care & Maintenance
Engine
Each engine and stern drive package is unique and quite complex. A select portion of the maintenance items are covered in this chapter including lubrication specifi cations and general periodic maintenance.
Because of the advanced ignition and fuel injection systems used on marine engines it is best to contact your Regal dealer for more of the detailed service procedures.
!
CAUTION
AVOID ENGINE DAMAGE!
FOLLOW ALL ENGINE BREAK-IN PROCEDURES
AS RECOMMENDED BY THE ENGINE MANU-
FACTURER. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE BREAK-
IN PROCEDURE MAY VOID THE ENGINE AND
STERN DRIVE WARRANTY.
!
CAUTION
AVOID ENGINE DAMAGE!
DO NOT RUN ENGINE AT A CONSTANT RPM
FOR PROLONGED PERIODS OF TIME DURING
BREAK-IN PERIOD. CHECK ENGINE OIL OFTEN.
!
CAUTION
AVOID ENGINE DAMAGE!
DO NOT RUN ENGINE OUT OF WATER UNLESS
YOU HAVE AN OPTIONAL FLUSHETTE.
FOLLOW MANUFACTURER’S ATTACHING &
RUNNING INSTRUCTIONS.
7-35
CHAPTER 7
Recommended Lubricant Specifi cations
Volvo Engine
Checking the Engine Oil
A n t
T
3
F e m
2
L
V O L V O E N G I
C H A R T
N E O I L
& o i c i p p e r a
D w e e g
A b s a t e d t u r e r e o t e s v e
Volvo 3.0 uses approximately
4 quarts with oil fi lter.
R e c o m m e n d e d
S A E V i s c o s i t y
O i l s
S A E 3 0 *
S A E 2 0 W 5 0
S A E 1 5 W 5 0
Volvo 4.3 uses approximately
4.5 quarts with oil fi lter.
Volvo 5.0, 5.7 use approximately
6 quarts with oil fi lter.
Volvo 8.1 uses approximately
9 quarts with oil fi lter.
O D e g r e e s
T o 3 2
D e g r e e s F
S A E 2 0 W 2 0
B e l o w 0
D e g r e e s F
S A E 1 0 W
* SAE 30 Volvo Penta DuraPlus synthetic motor oil for API Service
CE/SG (Volvo # 3851230-7). If the recommended oil is not available, use multi-viscosity oil.
1. Remove the dipstick. The oil level must lie between the 2 marks on the dipstick. Add the recommended oil to maintain the proper level.
2. Recheck the engine oil dipstick level.
Note: All fl uid recommendations are based on this manuals printing date. Regal is not responsible for the accuracy of the information since it can change at any time.
For more detailed information and procedures check your engine operators manual or contact your closest Regal dealer .
7-36
CHAPTER 7
Recommended Lubricant Specifi cations
Volvo Engine
Checking the Engine Oil
A n t
T
3
F e m
2
L
V O L V O E N G I
C H A R T
N E O I L
& o i c i p p e r a
D w e e g
A b s a t e d t u r e r e o t e s v e
Volvo 3.0 uses approximately
4 quarts with oil fi lter.
R e c o m m e n d e d
S A E V i s c o s i t y
O i l s
S A E 3 0 *
S A E 2 0 W 5 0
S A E 1 5 W 5 0
Volvo 4.3 uses approximately
4.5 quarts with oil fi lter.
Volvo 5.0, 5.7 use approximately
6 quarts with oil fi lter.
Volvo 8.1 uses approximately
9 quarts with oil fi lter.
O D e g r e e s
T o 3 2
D e g r e e s F
S A E 2 0 W 2 0
B e l o w 0
D e g r e e s F
S A E 1 0 W
* SAE 30 Volvo Penta DuraPlus synthetic motor oil for API Service
CE/SG (Volvo # 3851230-7). If the recommended oil is not available, use multi-viscosity oil.
1. Remove the dipstick. The oil level must lie between the 2 marks on the dipstick. Add the recommended oil to maintain the proper level.
2. Recheck the engine oil dipstick level.
Note: All fl uid recommendations are based on this manuals printing date. Regal is not responsible for the accuracy of the information since it can change at any time.
For more detailed information and procedures check your engine operators manual or contact your closest Regal dealer .
7-36
Cosmetic Care & Maintenance
NOTICE
PREVENT ENGINE DAMAGE!
DO NOT ALLOW THE CRANKCASE OIL LEVEL TO
RECEDE BELOW THE ADD MARK, AND DO NOT FILL
ABOVE THE FULL MARK. OVERFILLING RESULTS
IN REDUCED ENGINE LIFE, HIGH OPERATING
TEMPERATURES, FOAMING & LOSS OF POWER.
Checking the Power Trim/Tilt Fluid Level
Fill Cap
1. At least once annually preferably at the start of the boating season check the system fl luid level. Begin with the stern drive trimmed in (down) as far as possible.
2. Remove the fi ll cap on the power trim pump reservoir.
3. Check the fl uid level. It should be between the minimum and maximum marks on the reservoir.
4. Add Volvo Penta DuraPlus Power Trim/Tilt and Steering Fluid as required.
5. Replace the fi ll cap and tighten cap securely.
Cosmetic Care & Maintenance
NOTICE
PREVENT ENGINE DAMAGE!
DO NOT ALLOW THE CRANKCASE OIL LEVEL TO
RECEDE BELOW THE ADD MARK, AND DO NOT FILL
ABOVE THE FULL MARK. OVERFILLING RESULTS
IN REDUCED ENGINE LIFE, HIGH OPERATING
TEMPERATURES, FOAMING & LOSS OF POWER.
Checking the Power Trim/Tilt Fluid Level
Fill Cap
1. At least once annually preferably at the start of the boating season check the system fl luid level. Begin with the stern drive trimmed in (down) as far as possible.
2. Remove the fi ll cap on the power trim pump reservoir.
3. Check the fl uid level. It should be between the minimum and maximum marks on the reservoir.
4. Add Volvo Penta DuraPlus Power Trim/Tilt and Steering Fluid as required.
5. Replace the fi ll cap and tighten cap securely.
7-37 7-37
CHAPTER 7
Checking Power Steering Fluid
1. Check the power steering fl uid before each boating outing. Remove the steering reservoir and check the fl uid level. If the engine has not been running use the “COLD” mark. Use the “HOT” mark for engines that have been running at normal operating temperature as indicated by the temperature gauge.
2. The fl luid shoud be between the minimum and maximum marks on the dipstick. If needed, fi ll to the proper level with Volvo Penta Dura
Plus Power Trim/Tilt & Steering Fluid. DO NOT OVERFILL THE
STEERING PUMP RESERVOIR.
!
CAUTION
PREVENT STEERING OPERATION IMPAIRMENT
OR COMPONENT DAMAGE!
NEVER FILL THE POWER STEERING SYSTEM
WITH AN UNKNOWN OIL.
3. Replace the fi ll cap and tighten securely.
7-38
NOTICE
HELPFUL HINT:
TO FILL TRIM, CRANKCASE & POWER STEERING
LEVELS WITHOUT SPILLING FLUID
PURCHASE A FUNNEL AT AN AUTOMOTIVE
STORE WITH A LONGER NECK THAT WILL FIT THE
RESERVOIR OPENINGS.
CHAPTER 7
Checking Power Steering Fluid
1. Check the power steering fl uid before each boating outing. Remove the steering reservoir and check the fl uid level. If the engine has not been running use the “COLD” mark. Use the “HOT” mark for engines that have been running at normal operating temperature as indicated by the temperature gauge.
2. The fl luid shoud be between the minimum and maximum marks on the dipstick. If needed, fi ll to the proper level with Volvo Penta Dura
Plus Power Trim/Tilt & Steering Fluid. DO NOT OVERFILL THE
STEERING PUMP RESERVOIR.
!
CAUTION
PREVENT STEERING OPERATION IMPAIRMENT
OR COMPONENT DAMAGE!
NEVER FILL THE POWER STEERING SYSTEM
WITH AN UNKNOWN OIL.
3. Replace the fi ll cap and tighten securely.
7-38
NOTICE
HELPFUL HINT:
TO FILL TRIM, CRANKCASE & POWER STEERING
LEVELS WITHOUT SPILLING FLUID
PURCHASE A FUNNEL AT AN AUTOMOTIVE
STORE WITH A LONGER NECK THAT WILL FIT THE
RESERVOIR OPENINGS.
Cosmetic Care & Maintenance
Volvo Stern Drive
Checking Volvo Stern Drive Oil
Pulling Dipstick
Drive Housing Top
Cosmetic Care & Maintenance
Volvo Stern Drive
Checking Volvo Stern Drive Oil
Pulling Dipstick
Drive Housing Top
Dipstick Shown At Full Level
!
CAUTION
FULLY THREAD OIL DIPSTICK INTO THE OIL
LEVEL HOLE IN THE DRIVE UNIT TO PROPERLY
CHECK THE OIL LEVEL. IMPROPER OIL LEVELS
MAY RESULT IN SERIOUS
STERN DRIVE COMPONENT DAMAGE.
It is recommended to check the drive oil level on a weekly schedule.
Fully thread the dipstick into the hole. At this point, remove the dipstick and make sure the oil level is at the top of the mark as shown above.
If the oil level is low, add enough oil to bring the level to the top of the mark on the dipstick. DO NOT OVERFILL. Tighten up the dipstick with a slotted screwdriver.
If the oil color is milky in appearance there probably is water in the unit normally caused by a leaking seal.
No metal fl akes should be present in the oil. If the above conditions exist contact a Regal dealer.
7-39
Dipstick Shown At Full Level
!
CAUTION
FULLY THREAD OIL DIPSTICK INTO THE OIL
LEVEL HOLE IN THE DRIVE UNIT TO PROPERLY
CHECK THE OIL LEVEL. IMPROPER OIL LEVELS
MAY RESULT IN SERIOUS
STERN DRIVE COMPONENT DAMAGE.
It is recommended to check the drive oil level on a weekly schedule.
Fully thread the dipstick into the hole. At this point, remove the dipstick and make sure the oil level is at the top of the mark as shown above.
If the oil level is low, add enough oil to bring the level to the top of the mark on the dipstick. DO NOT OVERFILL. Tighten up the dipstick with a slotted screwdriver.
If the oil color is milky in appearance there probably is water in the unit normally caused by a leaking seal.
No metal fl akes should be present in the oil. If the above conditions exist contact a Regal dealer.
7-39
CHAPTER 7
MerCruiser Engine
Checking Engine Crankcase Oil
1. Check the engine oil by fi rst allowing the engine to warm up. Stop the engine and allow about 5 minutes for the oil to drain to the oil pan to obtain an accurate reading.
2. Remove the dipstick. Wipe it clean and reinstall it into the dipstick tube. Wait 1 minute to allow any trapped air to vent. ( Install dipstick with oil indication marks facing the fl ywheel end of the engine. Add
Mercury/Quicksilver Synthetic Blend MerCruiser Engine Oil 25W-40 to bring the level up to the full or OK points on the oil dipstick.
DO NOT OVERFILL.
3. Remove the dipstick and look at the oil level. Level must be between full or OK range and add. Reinstall dipstick into the tube.
NOTICE
ADDING 1 QUART OF ENGINE OIL WILL RAISE
THE OIL LEVEL FROM THE ADD MARK
TO THE TOP OF THE OK RANGE.
4. When checking or fi lling the engine crankcase oil ensure that the vessel is level in the water or on a trailer.
For changing the engine oil & fi lter see the MerCruiser maintenance schedule and operation manual or contact your Regal dealer.
Note: Above are basic recommendations. Regal is not responsible for the accuracy of the information since it can change at any time. For more detailed information and procedures check your engine operators manual or call your closest Regal dealer.
7-40
CHAPTER 7
MerCruiser Engine
Checking Engine Crankcase Oil
1. Check the engine oil by fi rst allowing the engine to warm up. Stop the engine and allow about 5 minutes for the oil to drain to the oil pan to obtain an accurate reading.
2. Remove the dipstick. Wipe it clean and reinstall it into the dipstick tube. Wait 1 minute to allow any trapped air to vent. ( Install dipstick with oil indication marks facing the fl ywheel end of the engine. Add
Mercury/Quicksilver Synthetic Blend MerCruiser Engine Oil 25W-40 to bring the level up to the full or OK points on the oil dipstick.
DO NOT OVERFILL.
3. Remove the dipstick and look at the oil level. Level must be between full or OK range and add. Reinstall dipstick into the tube.
NOTICE
ADDING 1 QUART OF ENGINE OIL WILL RAISE
THE OIL LEVEL FROM THE ADD MARK
TO THE TOP OF THE OK RANGE.
4. When checking or fi lling the engine crankcase oil ensure that the vessel is level in the water or on a trailer.
For changing the engine oil & fi lter see the MerCruiser maintenance schedule and operation manual or contact your Regal dealer.
Note: Above are basic recommendations. Regal is not responsible for the accuracy of the information since it can change at any time. For more detailed information and procedures check your engine operators manual or call your closest Regal dealer.
7-40
Cosmetic Care & Maintenance
Checking MerCrusier Stern Drive Oil
!
CAUTION
ENVIRONMENTAL HAZARD!
DISCHARGE OF OIL OR OIL WASTE
INTO THE ENVIRONMENT IS RESTRICTED BY
LAW. DO NOT SPILL OIL OR OIL WASTE INTO THE
ENVIRONMENT WHEN USING OR SERVICING
YOUR VESSEL. DISPOSE OF OIL OR OIL WASTE
AS DEFINED BY LOCAL & STATE AUTHORITIES.
1. Drive oil level must be checked with the engine cold before starting.
2. Check the gear oil level in the reservoir located on the engine. Keep the gear oil level at the recommended ranges as marked on the reservoir.
If any water is visible at the bottom of the reservoir or there are any metal chips in the drive oil do not run the engine since component damage can result. Contact your Regal dealer for more information.
A
Filling the Stern Drive
1. If more than 2 ounces of High Performance
Gear Lubricant is required to fi ll the monitor reservoir a seal may be leaking. Contact your
Regal dealer.
2. If drive lubricant is free from water and metal chips proceed to fill the reservoir.
Remove the gear lube monitor cap. Fill the reservoir with High Performance Gear
Lubricant (Merc part # 92-802854A1).
A=Drive Reservoir
7-41
Cosmetic Care & Maintenance
Checking MerCrusier Stern Drive Oil
!
CAUTION
ENVIRONMENTAL HAZARD!
DISCHARGE OF OIL OR OIL WASTE
INTO THE ENVIRONMENT IS RESTRICTED BY
LAW. DO NOT SPILL OIL OR OIL WASTE INTO THE
ENVIRONMENT WHEN USING OR SERVICING
YOUR VESSEL. DISPOSE OF OIL OR OIL WASTE
AS DEFINED BY LOCAL & STATE AUTHORITIES.
1. Drive oil level must be checked with the engine cold before starting.
2. Check the gear oil level in the reservoir located on the engine. Keep the gear oil level at the recommended ranges as marked on the reservoir.
If any water is visible at the bottom of the reservoir or there are any metal chips in the drive oil do not run the engine since component damage can result. Contact your Regal dealer for more information.
A
Filling the Stern Drive
1. If more than 2 ounces of High Performance
Gear Lubricant is required to fi ll the monitor reservoir a seal may be leaking. Contact your
Regal dealer.
2. If drive lubricant is free from water and metal chips proceed to fill the reservoir.
Remove the gear lube monitor cap. Fill the reservoir with High Performance Gear
Lubricant (Merc part # 92-802854A1).
A=Drive Reservoir
7-41
CHAPTER 7
3. Fill the reservoir so that drive oil level is in the operating range.
Do not overfi ll reservoir. For changing the drive oil refer to the
MerCruiser operation manual or contact a Regal dealer for more information.
Checking Power Steering Fluid
1. Stop the engine and center the sterndrive unit.
2. Remove the combo fi ll cap/dipstick and observe the level.
a. Proper fl uid level with engine at normal operating temperature should be within the warm range.
b. Proper fl uid level with engine cold should be within cold range.
3. Fill to line with Quicksilver Power Trim & Steering Fluid (Merc #
92-802880A1) or Dextron III automatic transmission fl uid. If you can not see any fl uid in the power steering reservoir contact your Regal dealer since a leak must of developed in the system.
CHAPTER 7
3. Fill the reservoir so that drive oil level is in the operating range.
Do not overfi ll reservoir. For changing the drive oil refer to the
MerCruiser operation manual or contact a Regal dealer for more information.
Checking Power Steering Fluid
1. Stop the engine and center the sterndrive unit.
2. Remove the combo fi ll cap/dipstick and observe the level.
a. Proper fl uid level with engine at normal operating temperature should be within the warm range.
b. Proper fl uid level with engine cold should be within cold range.
3. Fill to line with Quicksilver Power Trim & Steering Fluid (Merc #
92-802880A1) or Dextron III automatic transmission fl uid. If you can not see any fl uid in the power steering reservoir contact your Regal dealer since a leak must of developed in the system.
7-42 a=Power Steering Pump b=Engine Cold Range c=Engine Warm Range
7-42 a=Power Steering Pump b=Engine Cold Range c=Engine Warm Range
Cosmetic Care & Maintenance
Checking Power Trim Fluid
!
CAUTION
ALWAYS CHECK THE OIL LEVEL
WITH THE STERN DRIVE
IN THE “FULL” DOWN OR “IN” POSITION.
1. Place the stern drive unit in the full down position.
2. Observe the oil level. Level must be between the “MIN” or “MAX” lines on the reservoir.
3. Fill as necessary with Power Trim & Steering Fluid (Merc part #
92-802880Al).
Refi lling The Reservoir
1. Remove the fi ll cap from the reservoir. Fill cap is vented.
2. Add lubricant to bring level to the within the “MIN” and “MAX” lines on the reservoir. Use Power Trim & Steering Fluid (92- 802880A1).
3. Install the cap.
Changing Power Trim Fluid
1. Power steering fl uid does not require changing unless it becomes comtaminated with water or debris. Contact a Regal dealer to change the fl uid.
7-43
Cosmetic Care & Maintenance
Checking Power Trim Fluid
!
CAUTION
ALWAYS CHECK THE OIL LEVEL
WITH THE STERN DRIVE
IN THE “FULL” DOWN OR “IN” POSITION.
1. Place the stern drive unit in the full down position.
2. Observe the oil level. Level must be between the “MIN” or “MAX” lines on the reservoir.
3. Fill as necessary with Power Trim & Steering Fluid (Merc part #
92-802880Al).
Refi lling The Reservoir
1. Remove the fi ll cap from the reservoir. Fill cap is vented.
2. Add lubricant to bring level to the within the “MIN” and “MAX” lines on the reservoir. Use Power Trim & Steering Fluid (92- 802880A1).
3. Install the cap.
Changing Power Trim Fluid
1. Power steering fl uid does not require changing unless it becomes comtaminated with water or debris. Contact a Regal dealer to change the fl uid.
7-43
CHAPTER 7
Checking Engine Coolant
!
WARNING
AVOID BODILY INJURY!
ALLOW ENGINE TO COOL DOWN BEFORE REMOVING
THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP. A SUDDEN LOSS OF
PRESSURE COULD CAUSE HOT COOLANT TO BOIL
AND DISCHARGE VIOLENTLY. AFTER THE ENGINE
HAS COOLED, TURN THE CAP 1/4 TURN TO ALLOW
PRESSURE TO ESCAPE SLOWLY, THEN PUSH DOWN
AND TURN THE CAP COMPLETELY OFF.
1. Remove the cap from the heat exchanger and observe the level of the fl uid.
2. The coolant level in the heat exchanger should be at the bottom of the fi ller neck. A low coolant level means you should contact your
Regal dealer.
3.Install the cap onto the heat exchanger.
4. When reinstalling the pressure cap, be sure to tighten it until it seats on the fi ller neck.
5. With the engine at normal operating temperature, check the coolant level in the coolant recovery canister.
CHAPTER 7
Checking Engine Coolant
!
WARNING
AVOID BODILY INJURY!
ALLOW ENGINE TO COOL DOWN BEFORE REMOVING
THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP. A SUDDEN LOSS OF
PRESSURE COULD CAUSE HOT COOLANT TO BOIL
AND DISCHARGE VIOLENTLY. AFTER THE ENGINE
HAS COOLED, TURN THE CAP 1/4 TURN TO ALLOW
PRESSURE TO ESCAPE SLOWLY, THEN PUSH DOWN
AND TURN THE CAP COMPLETELY OFF.
1. Remove the cap from the heat exchanger and observe the level of the fl uid.
2. The coolant level in the heat exchanger should be at the bottom of the fi ller neck. A low coolant level means you should contact your
Regal dealer.
3.Install the cap onto the heat exchanger.
4. When reinstalling the pressure cap, be sure to tighten it until it seats on the fi ller neck.
5. With the engine at normal operating temperature, check the coolant level in the coolant recovery canister.
a=Coolant Cap a=Coolant Cap
7-44 7-44
Cosmetic Care & Maintenance
6. The coolant level should be between the “ADD” and “FULL” marks.
7. Add Extended Life Antifreeze/Coolant (Mercury part # 92-
877770K1).
!
CAUTION
AVOID ENGINE DAMAGE!
DO NOT USE ALCOHOL OR METHANOL BASED
ANTIFREEZE OR PLAIN WATER IN THE COOLANT
SECTION OF THE CLOSED COOLING SYSTEM
AT ANY TIME.
NOTICE
ADD COOLANT ONLY WHEN THE ENGINE IS AT A
NORMAL OPERATING TEMPERATURE.
Filling Engine Coolant
1. Remove the fi ll cap from the coolant recovery canister.
2. Fill to the “FULL” line with Extended
Life Antifreeze/Coolant Mercury part #
92-877770K1.
3. Reinstall the cap onto the coolant recovery canister.
Changing Engine Coolant
Call your Regal dealer to change coolant in the entire system.
7-45
Cosmetic Care & Maintenance
6. The coolant level should be between the “ADD” and “FULL” marks.
7. Add Extended Life Antifreeze/Coolant (Mercury part # 92-
877770K1).
!
CAUTION
AVOID ENGINE DAMAGE!
DO NOT USE ALCOHOL OR METHANOL BASED
ANTIFREEZE OR PLAIN WATER IN THE COOLANT
SECTION OF THE CLOSED COOLING SYSTEM
AT ANY TIME.
NOTICE
ADD COOLANT ONLY WHEN THE ENGINE IS AT A
NORMAL OPERATING TEMPERATURE.
Filling Engine Coolant
1. Remove the fi ll cap from the coolant recovery canister.
2. Fill to the “FULL” line with Extended
Life Antifreeze/Coolant Mercury part #
92-877770K1.
3. Reinstall the cap onto the coolant recovery canister.
Changing Engine Coolant
Call your Regal dealer to change coolant in the entire system.
7-45
CHAPTER 7
Notes
CHAPTER 7
Notes
7-46 7-46
Troubleshooting
DIAGNOSTIC CHARTS
The following diagnostic charts will assist you in identifying minor electrical, fuel, and mechanical problems. Some of the items listed require technical training and tools. Additional assistance is available in the engine manufacturer’s manual. Also, you can contact your closest Regal dealer or marine professional for more information.
Most problems can be solved by following a logical sequence of elimination.
!
CAUTION
TO AVOID BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE!
USE ONLY APPROVED MARINE
REPLACEMENT PARTS.
!
WARNING
TO AVOID BODILY INJURY AND DEATH!
BEFORE PERFORMING ANY MAINTENANCE WORK
TURN OFF THE BATTERY SWITCH AND REMOVE
THE KEYS FROM THE IGNITION SWITCH.
8-1
Troubleshooting
DIAGNOSTIC CHARTS
The following diagnostic charts will assist you in identifying minor electrical, fuel, and mechanical problems. Some of the items listed require technical training and tools. Additional assistance is available in the engine manufacturer’s manual. Also, you can contact your closest Regal dealer or marine professional for more information.
Most problems can be solved by following a logical sequence of elimination.
!
CAUTION
TO AVOID BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE!
USE ONLY APPROVED MARINE
REPLACEMENT PARTS.
!
WARNING
TO AVOID BODILY INJURY AND DEATH!
BEFORE PERFORMING ANY MAINTENANCE WORK
TURN OFF THE BATTERY SWITCH AND REMOVE
THE KEYS FROM THE IGNITION SWITCH.
8-1
CHAPTER 8
REMOTE CONTROL DIAGNOSTIC CHART
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE POSSIBLE FIX
Remote control stiff/inoperative
Corroded cable Clean/lubricate cable
Kinked cable Replace cable
Broken cable
Remote control box jammed
Replace cable
Repair/Replace box
Throttle only control inoperative (neutral)
Does not apply to
EVC/DTS systems
Worn throttle cable
Binding Cable
Replace cable
Follow cable routing; look for pinched cable
Broken cable
Control box worn or in need of lubrication
Replace cable
Refer to information supplied by control mfg.
INSTRUMENT DIAGNOSTIC CHART
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE
Faulty gauge
No reading on gauge or gauge reads wrong
Wiring to gauge faulty
Faulty sender
POSSIBLE FIX
Replace gauge
Inspect/repair wiring
Replace sender
Gauge reads erratic
8-2
Loose ground or hot wire
Repair or replace wire and or connection
CHAPTER 8
REMOTE CONTROL DIAGNOSTIC CHART
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE POSSIBLE FIX
Remote control stiff/inoperative
Corroded cable Clean/lubricate cable
Kinked cable Replace cable
Broken cable
Remote control box jammed
Replace cable
Repair/Replace box
Throttle only control inoperative (neutral)
Does not apply to
EVC/DTS systems
Worn throttle cable
Binding Cable
Replace cable
Follow cable routing; look for pinched cable
Broken cable
Control box worn or in need of lubrication
Replace cable
Refer to information supplied by control mfg.
INSTRUMENT DIAGNOSTIC CHART
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE
Faulty gauge
No reading on gauge or gauge reads wrong
Wiring to gauge faulty
Faulty sender
POSSIBLE FIX
Replace gauge
Inspect/repair wiring
Replace sender
Gauge reads erratic
8-2
Loose ground or hot wire
Repair or replace wire and or connection
Troubleshooting
PERFORMANCE DIAGNOSTIC CHART
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE
Material obstructing propeller
Bent propeller shaft
POSSIBLE FIX
Remove material by reversing engine
Call Regal dealer
Excessive vibration
Bent propeller blade
Propeller hub slipping
Repair/replace propeller
Replace propeller
Poor performance
Engine trim incorrect
Uneven load distribution
Engine problem
Adjust trim
Adjust boat load
Call Regal dealer
FUEL SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC CHART
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE POSSIBLE FIX
Fuel tank vent obstructed
Clean vent hose or and fitting. Check for kinks.
Fuel line blocked Check for kinked hose
Lack of fuel
Engine won't start or
not running right
Water in fuel
Clogged fuel filter
No fuel reaching engine
Clean filter. Check for clogged anti-siphon valve
Eliminate water
Replace filter element
Check fuel pump output.
Clean filters. Check fuel tank gauge level.
8-3
Troubleshooting
PERFORMANCE DIAGNOSTIC CHART
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE
Material obstructing propeller
Bent propeller shaft
POSSIBLE FIX
Remove material by reversing engine
Call Regal dealer
Excessive vibration
Bent propeller blade
Propeller hub slipping
Repair/replace propeller
Replace propeller
Poor performance
Engine trim incorrect
Uneven load distribution
Engine problem
Adjust trim
Adjust boat load
Call Regal dealer
FUEL SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC CHART
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE POSSIBLE FIX
Fuel tank vent obstructed
Clean vent hose or and fitting. Check for kinks.
Fuel line blocked Check for kinked hose
Lack of fuel
Engine won't start or
not running right
Water in fuel
Clogged fuel filter
No fuel reaching engine
Clean filter. Check for clogged anti-siphon valve
Eliminate water
Replace filter element
Check fuel pump output.
Clean filters. Check fuel tank gauge level.
8-3
CHAPTER 8
DC ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTIC CHART
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE POSSIBLE FIX
No 12 volt power
Battery not charging;
(Engine running)
Battery will not hold charge
12 volt equipment not working
Battery switch in "off" position
Weak or dead battery
Loose belt
Faulty alternator
Faulty volt meter
Turn selector switch to
"on" position
Charge or replace battery
Tighten belt
Repair/Replace alternator
Replace volt meter
Faulty/Old battery Replace battery
Equipment switch "off" Switch to "on" position
Circuit breaker blown Push reset on circuit breaker
Weak or dead battery
Corroded connection
Loose wire
Internal equipment short
Replace battery
Eliminate corrosion
Tighten connection
Replace equipment
CHAPTER 8
DC ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTIC CHART
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE POSSIBLE FIX
No 12 volt power
Battery not charging;
(Engine running)
Battery will not hold charge
12 volt equipment not working
Battery switch in "off" position
Weak or dead battery
Loose belt
Faulty alternator
Faulty volt meter
Turn selector switch to
"on" position
Charge or replace battery
Tighten belt
Repair/Replace alternator
Replace volt meter
Faulty/Old battery Replace battery
Equipment switch "off" Switch to "on" position
Circuit breaker blown Push reset on circuit breaker
Weak or dead battery
Corroded connection
Loose wire
Internal equipment short
Replace battery
Eliminate corrosion
Tighten connection
Replace equipment
8-4 8-4
Storage & Winterization
Storage procedures are outlined in this chapter. These are general
guidelines to follow before longer periods of storage such as over the winter in colder climates. Be sure to familiarize yourself with all relevant information in the owner’s pouch. Special winterization procedures are necessary for the boat equipment and systems. Use the enclosed checklists to help you identify areas of concern and maintenance. These lists cover land stored boats either inside or outside. Call a Regal dealer or marine professional for further information.
!
WARNING
EXPLOSION, FIRE AND POLLUTION HAZARD!
DO NOT FILL FUEL TANK TO RATED CAPACITY
LEAVE ROOM FOR EXPANSION.
!
CAUTION
REMOVE BATTERY(IES) WHEN VESSEL
IS IN LONG PERIODS OF STORAGE.
!
CAUTION
TO PREVENT ENGINE DAMAGE!
USE ONLY ETHYLENE GLYCOL BASE ANTIFREEZE.
DO NOT USE ALCOHOL BASE PRODUCTS.
9-1
Storage & Winterization
Storage procedures are outlined in this chapter. These are general
guidelines to follow before longer periods of storage such as over the winter in colder climates. Be sure to familiarize yourself with all relevant information in the owner’s pouch. Special winterization procedures are necessary for the boat equipment and systems. Use the enclosed checklists to help you identify areas of concern and maintenance. These lists cover land stored boats either inside or outside. Call a Regal dealer or marine professional for further information.
!
WARNING
EXPLOSION, FIRE AND POLLUTION HAZARD!
DO NOT FILL FUEL TANK TO RATED CAPACITY
LEAVE ROOM FOR EXPANSION.
!
CAUTION
REMOVE BATTERY(IES) WHEN VESSEL
IS IN LONG PERIODS OF STORAGE.
!
CAUTION
TO PREVENT ENGINE DAMAGE!
USE ONLY ETHYLENE GLYCOL BASE ANTIFREEZE.
DO NOT USE ALCOHOL BASE PRODUCTS.
9-1
CHAPTER 9
DECOMISSIONING CHECKLIST
ENGINE
Run engine. Pour a fuel stabilizer/conditioner in the fuel tank.
Allow time for it to circulate through the fuel system.
Change all engine fl uids as referenced in the engine manufacturer’s owners manual. Contact a Regal dealer.
Drain cooling and exhaust system or have a marine professional
“pickle” the engine. Contact a Regal dealer.
Spray all exterior parts with a rust preventative.
STERN DRIVE
Remove drive. Perform maintenance as referenced in the manufacturer’s owners manual. Contact your Regal dealer.
Remove propeller. Refurbish as needed.
Touch up paint on stern drive upper and lower gear housings as required.
Apply coat of wax to stern drive.
BOAT
Check hull bottom for any fiberglass damage. Repair as needed.
Apply a coat of wax to hull and deck surfaces.
Pour a pint of 50/50 antifreeze into bilge pump.
9-2
CHAPTER 9
DECOMISSIONING CHECKLIST
ENGINE
Run engine. Pour a fuel stabilizer/conditioner in the fuel tank.
Allow time for it to circulate through the fuel system.
Change all engine fl uids as referenced in the engine manufacturer’s owners manual. Contact a Regal dealer.
Drain cooling and exhaust system or have a marine professional
“pickle” the engine. Contact a Regal dealer.
Spray all exterior parts with a rust preventative.
STERN DRIVE
Remove drive. Perform maintenance as referenced in the manufacturer’s owners manual. Contact your Regal dealer.
Remove propeller. Refurbish as needed.
Touch up paint on stern drive upper and lower gear housings as required.
Apply coat of wax to stern drive.
BOAT
Check hull bottom for any fiberglass damage. Repair as needed.
Apply a coat of wax to hull and deck surfaces.
Pour a pint of 50/50 antifreeze into bilge pump.
9-2
Storage & Winterization
Remove battery. Use a trickle charge as needed.
Remove all loose gear and electronics from boat. Inspect all equipment for wear and damage. Store in a clean, dry environment.
Remove drain plug. Clean drain plug hole of debris as needed.
Enclose drain plug in plastic bag and tie to steering wheel.
Make sure bow is higher than stern to permit proper drainage.
Clean all upholstery and store so it breathes.
Conduct a visual inspection to ensure boat is balanced properly on the trailer, cradle or blocks.
Cover boat with appropiate cover. Tie down for protection from rain, snow and/or wind. Prop up cover to provide proper ventilation.
Do not cover up the fuel vents.
Drain the fresh water system per instructions in this chapter.
TRAILER
Repack all wheel bearings per manufacturer’s specifi cations.
Check all trailer parts for excessive wear. Replace/refurbish as needed.
Use touch up paint on trailer as needed.
Lubricate all moving parts as needed.
Block the trailer up to remove wheel strain.
9-3
Storage & Winterization
Remove battery. Use a trickle charge as needed.
Remove all loose gear and electronics from boat. Inspect all equipment for wear and damage. Store in a clean, dry environment.
Remove drain plug. Clean drain plug hole of debris as needed.
Enclose drain plug in plastic bag and tie to steering wheel.
Make sure bow is higher than stern to permit proper drainage.
Clean all upholstery and store so it breathes.
Conduct a visual inspection to ensure boat is balanced properly on the trailer, cradle or blocks.
Cover boat with appropiate cover. Tie down for protection from rain, snow and/or wind. Prop up cover to provide proper ventilation.
Do not cover up the fuel vents.
Drain the fresh water system per instructions in this chapter.
TRAILER
Repack all wheel bearings per manufacturer’s specifi cations.
Check all trailer parts for excessive wear. Replace/refurbish as needed.
Use touch up paint on trailer as needed.
Lubricate all moving parts as needed.
Block the trailer up to remove wheel strain.
9-3
CHAPTER 9
FRESH WATER SYSTEM
1. Activate the fresh water pump switch.
2. Open all faucets including transom shower (if equipped) and allow tank to empty.
3. Drain the water tank. Shut off fresh water pump switch.
4. Mix nontoxic antifreeze with water in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. (Available at marina & RV stores)
5. Pour solution into the fresh water tank.
6. Turn on fresh water pump switch.
7. Open water faucet and purge until a steady stream of nontoxic antifreeze fl ows from the faucet. If equipped, do the same to the transom shower. Turn the fresh water switch to the “off ” position.
WASTE SYSTEM
1. With chemical heads, make sure to dump both upper and lower tanks. Rinse well with fresh water.
2. With vacuum designed head, pump out holding tank. Add nontoxic antifreeze to toilet and holding tank. Pump from toilet to holding tank to eliminate any water remaining in supply lines.
NOTICE
AVOID VESSEL AND ENGINE DAMAGE!
CONTACT MARINE PROFESSIONAL FOR
WINTERIZATION INSTRUCTIONS. DAMAGE IS
NOT COVERED BY REGAL WARRANTY.
9-4
CHAPTER 9
FRESH WATER SYSTEM
1. Activate the fresh water pump switch.
2. Open all faucets including transom shower (if equipped) and allow tank to empty.
3. Drain the water tank. Shut off fresh water pump switch.
4. Mix nontoxic antifreeze with water in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. (Available at marina & RV stores)
5. Pour solution into the fresh water tank.
6. Turn on fresh water pump switch.
7. Open water faucet and purge until a steady stream of nontoxic antifreeze fl ows from the faucet. If equipped, do the same to the transom shower. Turn the fresh water switch to the “off ” position.
WASTE SYSTEM
1. With chemical heads, make sure to dump both upper and lower tanks. Rinse well with fresh water.
2. With vacuum designed head, pump out holding tank. Add nontoxic antifreeze to toilet and holding tank. Pump from toilet to holding tank to eliminate any water remaining in supply lines.
NOTICE
AVOID VESSEL AND ENGINE DAMAGE!
CONTACT MARINE PROFESSIONAL FOR
WINTERIZATION INSTRUCTIONS. DAMAGE IS
NOT COVERED BY REGAL WARRANTY.
9-4
Storage & Winterization
RECOMISSIONING CHECKLIST
ENGINE/STERN DRIVE
Check all components per engine manufacturer’s owners manual especially fl uid levels.
Run engine on “ear muffs” before launching. Check for fuel, exhaust, oil, and water leaks.
BOAT
Install drain plug.
Install battery and tighten all terminals.
Check all equipment, switches, alarms, gauges and breakers for proper operation.
Add necessary chemicals and water to chemical head.
Add water to fresh water tank. Turn on faucet to purge tank.
Refi ll water tank.
Make sure all safety gear is on board and in excellent working condition.
After launching, check controls and gauges for proper operation.
TRAILER
Make sure all equipment is in excellent working condition.
9-5
Storage & Winterization
RECOMISSIONING CHECKLIST
ENGINE/STERN DRIVE
Check all components per engine manufacturer’s owners manual especially fl uid levels.
Run engine on “ear muffs” before launching. Check for fuel, exhaust, oil, and water leaks.
BOAT
Install drain plug.
Install battery and tighten all terminals.
Check all equipment, switches, alarms, gauges and breakers for proper operation.
Add necessary chemicals and water to chemical head.
Add water to fresh water tank. Turn on faucet to purge tank.
Refi ll water tank.
Make sure all safety gear is on board and in excellent working condition.
After launching, check controls and gauges for proper operation.
TRAILER
Make sure all equipment is in excellent working condition.
9-5
CHAPTER 9
Notes
CHAPTER 9
Notes
Trailering
This chapter covers trailering/towing basics including equipment, maintenance, and techniques of using a trailer. Check with state and local agencies for detailed information on required equipment, safety issues, and licensing.
BEFORE TOWING
Before towing your boat, be sure to check the air pressure of your tires for the recommended infl ation rating. Also, be certain that your tow vehicle is in good working order.
Stow all gear to be carried properly, especially heavy items such as batteries or anchors. Be sure these items are secured. Don’t overload and try to carry excessive weight on your trailer.
Give consideration to the weight distribution of your trailer. If the rear end of your vehicle sags, chances are the load is positioned too far forward on your trailer.
This can make it especially diffi cult to drive safely, as the hitch may be in danger of striking the road. Also, this situation can be caused by worn vehicle rear shock absorbers. One option is to install a set of air shocks which will assist in supporting the load. As a rule of thumb 5 to 7 percent of the total trailer load should be on the trailer tongue.
Check all lights to ensure they all work properly. You may fi nd it helpful at ask someone to check your turn signals, brake lights, and towing lights while you remain in the vehicle. Be certain that the trailer winch cable is securely attached to the boat’s bow eye and the cable lock is engaged. Make sure the bow of the boat is snug against the bow stop at the winch stand.
10-1
Trailering
This chapter covers trailering/towing basics including equipment, maintenance, and techniques of using a trailer. Check with state and local agencies for detailed information on required equipment, safety issues, and licensing.
BEFORE TOWING
Before towing your boat, be sure to check the air pressure of your tires for the recommended infl ation rating. Also, be certain that your tow vehicle is in good working order.
Stow all gear to be carried properly, especially heavy items such as batteries or anchors. Be sure these items are secured. Don’t overload and try to carry excessive weight on your trailer.
Give consideration to the weight distribution of your trailer. If the rear end of your vehicle sags, chances are the load is positioned too far forward on your trailer.
This can make it especially diffi cult to drive safely, as the hitch may be in danger of striking the road. Also, this situation can be caused by worn vehicle rear shock absorbers. One option is to install a set of air shocks which will assist in supporting the load. As a rule of thumb 5 to 7 percent of the total trailer load should be on the trailer tongue.
Check all lights to ensure they all work properly. You may fi nd it helpful at ask someone to check your turn signals, brake lights, and towing lights while you remain in the vehicle. Be certain that the trailer winch cable is securely attached to the boat’s bow eye and the cable lock is engaged. Make sure the bow of the boat is snug against the bow stop at the winch stand.
10-1
CHAPTER 10 CHAPTER 10
10-2 10-2
Trailering Trailering
HUB
BEARING
LUG NUT
WHEEL
LEAF SPRING
TYPICAL WHEEL PARTS DESCRIPTION
BOW CHAIN
WINCH/CABLE
WINCH STAND
TONGUE JACK
MASTER
CYLINDER
BRAKE
ACTUATOR
COUPLER
TYPICAL TONGUE SECTION
10-3
HUB
BEARING
LUG NUT
WHEEL
LEAF SPRING
TYPICAL WHEEL PARTS DESCRIPTION
BOW CHAIN
WINCH/CABLE
WINCH STAND
TONGUE JACK
MASTER
CYLINDER
BRAKE
ACTUATOR
COUPLER
TYPICAL TONGUE SECTION
10-3
CHAPTER 10
It is a good idea to tie another line or secure an extra cable to the winch stand and boat bow eye as a backup system.
Be certain that your trailer is of rated capacity for the size and weight of your boat, including the weight for all fuel, water and gear. Your authorized Regal dealer can advise you on the proper trailer capacity and tongue weight ( the weight exerted on the rear of your vehicle).
Never use a bumper mounted trailer hitch. Always use a bolted or welded frame-mounted hitch, class 2 or 3. Consult your Regal dealer for more information.
Should your trailer be equipped with surge brakes, that is brakes on the trailer that cut in with a very slight delay when your brakes are applied, be sure to follow recommended service and maintenance instructions.
Be sure that the trailer master cylinder is fi lled with the recommended fl uid before towing your boat. Inspect the trailer brake lines for any leakage. Also, if you notice brake fl uid on the inside of the tires, you may have a wheel cylinder leaking. Consult a professional.
Never place your hands between the trailer hitch coupling and the hitch ball on your towing vehicle while hooking up. Be sure the tongue jack is in the full up position before departure. Be certain safety chains are crisscrossed and secured; do not allow them to drag on the road.
Be sure to buy a suitable set of tie downs which can be attached to the boats’ stern eyes and the eyelets provided on most trailers. Tighten them securely and neatly fold up the extra strap material and secure it with tape so it doesn’t loosen and dangle on the road.
Check the trailer lug nuts for the proper torque. Use a foot pound wrench and torque in a star sequence to the correct poundage as recommended by the trailer manufacturer. Torque the lug nuts at half the poundage on all nuts. Then set the torque wrench to the full poundage and fasten to the last foot poundage fi gure.
Check the trailer tires often for voids, excessive wear or out of round tire conditions. If the trailer seems to vibrate you may have a bad tire or one that is unbalanced. These wheels can be rebalanced at most automotive or tire shops. Never pull a boat on a patched tire. Buy a spare tire and wheel including a hub and wheel bearing assembly. Mount it on the trailer for speedy installation should a blow out occur.
10-4
CHAPTER 10
It is a good idea to tie another line or secure an extra cable to the winch stand and boat bow eye as a backup system.
Be certain that your trailer is of rated capacity for the size and weight of your boat, including the weight for all fuel, water and gear. Your authorized Regal dealer can advise you on the proper trailer capacity and tongue weight ( the weight exerted on the rear of your vehicle).
Never use a bumper mounted trailer hitch. Always use a bolted or welded frame-mounted hitch, class 2 or 3. Consult your Regal dealer for more information.
Should your trailer be equipped with surge brakes, that is brakes on the trailer that cut in with a very slight delay when your brakes are applied, be sure to follow recommended service and maintenance instructions.
Be sure that the trailer master cylinder is fi lled with the recommended fl uid before towing your boat. Inspect the trailer brake lines for any leakage. Also, if you notice brake fl uid on the inside of the tires, you may have a wheel cylinder leaking. Consult a professional.
Never place your hands between the trailer hitch coupling and the hitch ball on your towing vehicle while hooking up. Be sure the tongue jack is in the full up position before departure. Be certain safety chains are crisscrossed and secured; do not allow them to drag on the road.
Be sure to buy a suitable set of tie downs which can be attached to the boats’ stern eyes and the eyelets provided on most trailers. Tighten them securely and neatly fold up the extra strap material and secure it with tape so it doesn’t loosen and dangle on the road.
Check the trailer lug nuts for the proper torque. Use a foot pound wrench and torque in a star sequence to the correct poundage as recommended by the trailer manufacturer. Torque the lug nuts at half the poundage on all nuts. Then set the torque wrench to the full poundage and fasten to the last foot poundage fi gure.
Check the trailer tires often for voids, excessive wear or out of round tire conditions. If the trailer seems to vibrate you may have a bad tire or one that is unbalanced. These wheels can be rebalanced at most automotive or tire shops. Never pull a boat on a patched tire. Buy a spare tire and wheel including a hub and wheel bearing assembly. Mount it on the trailer for speedy installation should a blow out occur.
10-4
Trailering
SPARE PARTS CHECKLIST
Longer towing trips increase the need for special preparations.
Sometimes these extended trips cover areas where it is diffi cult in locating repair parts due to a breakdown. Following is a checklist of recommended items to add a safety net to your trip.
Trailer-
1. Trailer tire jack
2. Spare hub assembly including wheel bearings
3. Spare tire
4. Lug wrench
5. Jackstand
6. 12 volt air compressor- found at automotive box stores
7. Spare bearing protector
8. Extra tie-down straps
9. Trailer light bulbs
10. Brake pads and brake fl uid
11. Grease gun
Tow Vehicle-
1. Tool kit including necessary ratchet and sockets
2. Jumper cables
3. Extra fuses
4. Engine oil
5. Transmission fl uid
6. Wheel chocks
7. Highway fl ares
8. 12 volt spotlight- type that plugs into 12 volt accessory outlet
9. Flashlight & spare batteries
10. Waterless hand cleaner and rags
11. Electrical connectors and crimpers
12. Low voltage electrical tester
10-5
Trailering
SPARE PARTS CHECKLIST
Longer towing trips increase the need for special preparations.
Sometimes these extended trips cover areas where it is diffi cult in locating repair parts due to a breakdown. Following is a checklist of recommended items to add a safety net to your trip.
Trailer-
1. Trailer tire jack
2. Spare hub assembly including wheel bearings
3. Spare tire
4. Lug wrench
5. Jackstand
6. 12 volt air compressor- found at automotive box stores
7. Spare bearing protector
8. Extra tie-down straps
9. Trailer light bulbs
10. Brake pads and brake fl uid
11. Grease gun
Tow Vehicle-
1. Tool kit including necessary ratchet and sockets
2. Jumper cables
3. Extra fuses
4. Engine oil
5. Transmission fl uid
6. Wheel chocks
7. Highway fl ares
8. 12 volt spotlight- type that plugs into 12 volt accessory outlet
9. Flashlight & spare batteries
10. Waterless hand cleaner and rags
11. Electrical connectors and crimpers
12. Low voltage electrical tester
10-5
CHAPTER 10
Check the trailer harness often for signs of fraying. Check the harness connector for corrosion. Make sure the trailer harness when connected to the trailer has enough slack for turning
Check the wheel bearings for wear periodically by a professional. On most trailers, there is a zerk fi tting on the wheel hub to add the proper lubricant to the wheel bearing with a grease gun. These wheel bearing waterproof covers for the bearings can be purchased at retail outlets.
Be sure everything is secured in the boat and canvas is down in the towing position with the bimini stored in the boot. Tilt the stern drive up to clear the road and any bumps that might occur while in transit.
DRIVING
Practice maneuvering the vehicle and trailer in a large, empty parking lot or open space. If you practice slowly and cautiously, you will soon develop a feel for maneuvering the trailer .
Test your vehicle and trailer brakes before departure along with the lights. Pack a tool kit with extra bulbs, fuses and fl uids.
Drive as smoothly as possible, anticipating your stops and giving yourself plenty of room for turning and stopping. Avoid any quick turns or sudden jerks of the steering wheel.
Remember to maintain safe speed limits. It takes longer to stop your loaded boat. Allow enough room to the front in bad weather.
Keep an eye on your rig through the rear view and side mirrors. If your rear view mirror is obstructed, purchase a set of side mirrors that extend out over the side of the vehicle for increased visibility. In addition, it is a good idea to install a set of round mirrors to the side mirrors as they help identify blind spots.
Plan to stop periodically on your way to check the trailer hitch for tightness, harness connector, tires and wheel bearings. Also, check to make sure the cockpit cover is secure and the load is balanced.
10-6
CHAPTER 10
Check the trailer harness often for signs of fraying. Check the harness connector for corrosion. Make sure the trailer harness when connected to the trailer has enough slack for turning
Check the wheel bearings for wear periodically by a professional. On most trailers, there is a zerk fi tting on the wheel hub to add the proper lubricant to the wheel bearing with a grease gun. These wheel bearing waterproof covers for the bearings can be purchased at retail outlets.
Be sure everything is secured in the boat and canvas is down in the towing position with the bimini stored in the boot. Tilt the stern drive up to clear the road and any bumps that might occur while in transit.
DRIVING
Practice maneuvering the vehicle and trailer in a large, empty parking lot or open space. If you practice slowly and cautiously, you will soon develop a feel for maneuvering the trailer .
Test your vehicle and trailer brakes before departure along with the lights. Pack a tool kit with extra bulbs, fuses and fl uids.
Drive as smoothly as possible, anticipating your stops and giving yourself plenty of room for turning and stopping. Avoid any quick turns or sudden jerks of the steering wheel.
Remember to maintain safe speed limits. It takes longer to stop your loaded boat. Allow enough room to the front in bad weather.
Keep an eye on your rig through the rear view and side mirrors. If your rear view mirror is obstructed, purchase a set of side mirrors that extend out over the side of the vehicle for increased visibility. In addition, it is a good idea to install a set of round mirrors to the side mirrors as they help identify blind spots.
Plan to stop periodically on your way to check the trailer hitch for tightness, harness connector, tires and wheel bearings. Also, check to make sure the cockpit cover is secure and the load is balanced.
10-6
Trailering
LAUNCHING
Serious accidents can occur at the launching ramp. Therefore, it is imperative you be alert and attentive during launching and docking activities. Study the ramp area and surrounding water for any potential hazards, such as a short ramp or one with a drop off at the end. If you are uncertain of the conditions, ask someone else who has just used the ramp if there are any peculiarities to the area.
Install the drain plug. Attach 2 lines, one each at the bow and stern, to control your boat once it is off the trailer. If you need additional fenders to keep the sides of the boat from banging against the ramp walls, use those as well.
Unhook the stern tie-downs and the winch line to the bow. Unplug the trailer harness connector so the hot trailer light bulbs won’t blow out when they come in contact with water.
When backing in, have someone assist, giving the palms up stop signal when the boat is in deep enough water to fl oat off, or when the rear wheels of your vehicle approach the water’s edge.
After your boat is fl oating freely, position it clear of the trailer before pulling out of the water. If there is no one to help you, secure one of the lines you’ve attached from the boat to the dock and use the other line to pull the boat off trailer. The process is easier with 2 people.
!
CAUTION
AVOID LOSING VEHICLE TRACTION!
DO NOT ALLOW REAR WHEELS TO ENCOUNTER
SAND OR SLIPPERY CONCRETE CONDITIONS.
!
WARNING
AVOID BODILY INJURY!
RAMPS ARE VERY SLIPPERY. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO
WALK OR STAND ON AN ANGLED BOAT RAMP.
10-7
Trailering
LAUNCHING
Serious accidents can occur at the launching ramp. Therefore, it is imperative you be alert and attentive during launching and docking activities. Study the ramp area and surrounding water for any potential hazards, such as a short ramp or one with a drop off at the end. If you are uncertain of the conditions, ask someone else who has just used the ramp if there are any peculiarities to the area.
Install the drain plug. Attach 2 lines, one each at the bow and stern, to control your boat once it is off the trailer. If you need additional fenders to keep the sides of the boat from banging against the ramp walls, use those as well.
Unhook the stern tie-downs and the winch line to the bow. Unplug the trailer harness connector so the hot trailer light bulbs won’t blow out when they come in contact with water.
When backing in, have someone assist, giving the palms up stop signal when the boat is in deep enough water to fl oat off, or when the rear wheels of your vehicle approach the water’s edge.
After your boat is fl oating freely, position it clear of the trailer before pulling out of the water. If there is no one to help you, secure one of the lines you’ve attached from the boat to the dock and use the other line to pull the boat off trailer. The process is easier with 2 people.
!
CAUTION
AVOID LOSING VEHICLE TRACTION!
DO NOT ALLOW REAR WHEELS TO ENCOUNTER
SAND OR SLIPPERY CONCRETE CONDITIONS.
!
WARNING
AVOID BODILY INJURY!
RAMPS ARE VERY SLIPPERY. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO
WALK OR STAND ON AN ANGLED BOAT RAMP.
10-7
CHAPTER 10
BACKING A TRAILER
1
LAUNCHING
RAMP
3 4
2
CHAPTER 10
BACKING A TRAILER
1
LAUNCHING
RAMP
3
2
4
A trailer backs in a direction opposite to an automobile. In 1, driver swings the rig near the launching ramp. In 2, the driver cuts the vehicle toward the driveway. In 3, the driver cuts the vehicle wheels to the left and then backs into the ramp as the trailer moves to the right. In 4, the driver straightens the vehicle wheels to follow the trailer as it backs down the ramp.
NOTICE
10-8
ALLOW TRAILER WHEEL BEARINGS AND LIGHTS
TO COOL BEFORE SUBMERGING
A trailer backs in a direction opposite to an automobile. In 1, driver swings the rig near the launching ramp. In 2, the driver cuts the vehicle toward the driveway. In 3, the driver cuts the vehicle wheels to the left and then backs into the ramp as the trailer moves to the right. In 4, the driver straightens the vehicle wheels to follow the trailer as it backs down the ramp.
NOTICE
10-8
ALLOW TRAILER WHEEL BEARINGS AND LIGHTS
TO COOL BEFORE SUBMERGING
Trailering
LOADING
The most important thing to remember when pulling your boat out of the water is that often the ramp will be crowded. As you approach the ramp, make a visual inspection of the traffi c and people, both at the ramp and all around you. This is an important time to use caution, courtesy, and common sense. While you may feel it’s your next turn, another boater may not be as courteous. Don’t insist on your rightful place in line; it could lead to disastrous consequences in the confi nes of a crowded boat ramp. If there is any perceived danger, stand off until you can safely approach the ramp.
Back your trailer down to the water’s edge. At this point it is a good idea to let a suffi cient amount of line out of the winch to reach the bow eye. Make sure you disconnect the trailer harness to keep the bulbs from blowing out due them being subjected to the cold water.
On roller or bunk style trailers back up until the aft roller is just at the water level. This allows you to hook up the winch cable and to start cranking the boat on to the trailer properly. This method gives you a good starting point and helps keep the boat centered on the trailer as it is reloaded. It may be necessary to further back the trailer into the water. This permits cranking the boat easier on to the trailer.
Once the boat is positioned correctly on the trailer have someone hook up the winch cable hook to the bow eye. Also, this will help keep the boat bow against the trailer roller. Shut down the engine and run the stern drive up to the top of the trailer position.
With the bow snug against the roller, start to crank the boat up on to the trailer. Make sure the hull bottom or keel stays in the center of each roller as it is being cranked on the trailer. On bunk style trailers, watch the bunks to make sure the boat is centered as they usually do not touch any rollers other than the aft one because the boat weight is being supported more by the bunks as it is cranked onto the trailer.
Stop cranking the winch when the boat bow contacts the bow roller.
Be sure the winch is in the locked position. Stand back and visually check to see that the boat is centered on the trailer.
10-9
Trailering
LOADING
The most important thing to remember when pulling your boat out of the water is that often the ramp will be crowded. As you approach the ramp, make a visual inspection of the traffi c and people, both at the ramp and all around you. This is an important time to use caution, courtesy, and common sense. While you may feel it’s your next turn, another boater may not be as courteous. Don’t insist on your rightful place in line; it could lead to disastrous consequences in the confi nes of a crowded boat ramp. If there is any perceived danger, stand off until you can safely approach the ramp.
Back your trailer down to the water’s edge. At this point it is a good idea to let a suffi cient amount of line out of the winch to reach the bow eye. Make sure you disconnect the trailer harness to keep the bulbs from blowing out due them being subjected to the cold water.
On roller or bunk style trailers back up until the aft roller is just at the water level. This allows you to hook up the winch cable and to start cranking the boat on to the trailer properly. This method gives you a good starting point and helps keep the boat centered on the trailer as it is reloaded. It may be necessary to further back the trailer into the water. This permits cranking the boat easier on to the trailer.
Once the boat is positioned correctly on the trailer have someone hook up the winch cable hook to the bow eye. Also, this will help keep the boat bow against the trailer roller. Shut down the engine and run the stern drive up to the top of the trailer position.
With the bow snug against the roller, start to crank the boat up on to the trailer. Make sure the hull bottom or keel stays in the center of each roller as it is being cranked on the trailer. On bunk style trailers, watch the bunks to make sure the boat is centered as they usually do not touch any rollers other than the aft one because the boat weight is being supported more by the bunks as it is cranked onto the trailer.
Stop cranking the winch when the boat bow contacts the bow roller.
Be sure the winch is in the locked position. Stand back and visually check to see that the boat is centered on the trailer.
10-9
CHAPTER 10
After pulling your boat away from the ramp, be sure to go through all the checks involved before departure. Reinstall the harness connector and check the lights, brakes, safety chain, winch, hitch, and tie downs.
Double check to ensure the hitch is locked tight on the vehicle ball.
Make sure the boat is covered properly and all loose gear is stowed.
Remove the drain plug to exit any excess water in the bilge. Reinstall the hull drain plug and tighten it. For longer storage periods remove the drain plug and keep in a plastic bag tied to the steering wheel.
!
WARNING
AVOID PERSON INJURY!
DO NOT LET ANYONE STAND NEAR THE WINCH OR
CABLE. THE CABLE COULD BREAK.
!
CAUTION
HULL BOTTOM DAMAGE COULD RESULT
FROM THE BOAT NOT BEING POSITIONED
ON THE ROLLERS BUT RESTING
ON THE TRAILER FRAME.
AVOID BACKING TRAILER
TOO FAR INTO THE WATER!
CHAPTER 10
After pulling your boat away from the ramp, be sure to go through all the checks involved before departure. Reinstall the harness connector and check the lights, brakes, safety chain, winch, hitch, and tie downs.
Double check to ensure the hitch is locked tight on the vehicle ball.
Make sure the boat is covered properly and all loose gear is stowed.
Remove the drain plug to exit any excess water in the bilge. Reinstall the hull drain plug and tighten it. For longer storage periods remove the drain plug and keep in a plastic bag tied to the steering wheel.
!
WARNING
AVOID PERSON INJURY!
DO NOT LET ANYONE STAND NEAR THE WINCH OR
CABLE. THE CABLE COULD BREAK.
!
CAUTION
HULL BOTTOM DAMAGE COULD RESULT
FROM THE BOAT NOT BEING POSITIONED
ON THE ROLLERS BUT RESTING
ON THE TRAILER FRAME.
AVOID BACKING TRAILER
TOO FAR INTO THE WATER!
10-10 10-10
Glossary & Index
Below is a brief list of nautical terminology. For more detailed glossaries we recommend you check your local library, book retailer, marine store or internet.
GLOSSARY
Abeam: at right angles to the fore and aft line and off the boat
Aboard: on or in the boat
Above: the part of the boat on a vessel which is above the interior of the boat
Aft, After:: aft is the boat section toward the stern or back of the boat
Admidships: toward the center of the boat from either side to side or rear to front
Beam: the width of a boat at its widest part
Bilge: the lower interior of the hull of the boat
Bitter end: the end of a line also the end of an anchor line
Bow: the front, or forward part of the boat
Bulkhead: the vertical partition or wall of a boat
11-1
Glossary & Index
Below is a brief list of nautical terminology. For more detailed glossaries we recommend you check your local library, book retailer, marine store or internet.
GLOSSARY
Abeam: at right angles to the fore and aft line and off the boat
Aboard: on or in the boat
Above: the part of the boat on a vessel which is above the interior of the boat
Aft, After:: aft is the boat section toward the stern or back of the boat
Admidships: toward the center of the boat from either side to side or rear to front
Beam: the width of a boat at its widest part
Bilge: the lower interior of the hull of the boat
Bitter end: the end of a line also the end of an anchor line
Bow: the front, or forward part of the boat
Bulkhead: the vertical partition or wall of a boat
11-1
CHAPTER 11
Cast off: to let go or release
Chine: the line fore and aft formed by the intersection of the side and bottom of the boat
Chock: deck fi tting used to secure or guide anchor or tie lines
Cleat: deck fi tting with protruding arms around which lines are secured
Cockpit: the seating space used to accommodate passengers
Cuddy: a small cabin in the fore part of the boat
Deck: the open fl ooring surface on which crew and passengers walk
Draft the depth from the waterline of the boat to the lowest part of the boat, which indicates how much water is required to fl oat the boat
Fathom: a measurement of depth; one fathom equals six feet
Fender: a cushion hung from the side of a boat to prevent it from rubbing against a dock or against other boats
Fend off: to push off to avoid sharp contact with dock or other vessel
Fore: the part of the boat toward the bow or front
Freeboard: the height of the top side from the waterline to the deck at its shortest point. (The distance from the sheer or gunwale to the water)
Galley: cooking area
Gunwale: rail or upper edge of the side of the boat
11-2
CHAPTER 11
Cast off: to let go or release
Chine: the line fore and aft formed by the intersection of the side and bottom of the boat
Chock: deck fi tting used to secure or guide anchor or tie lines
Cleat: deck fi tting with protruding arms around which lines are secured
Cockpit: the seating space used to accommodate passengers
Cuddy: a small cabin in the fore part of the boat
Deck: the open fl ooring surface on which crew and passengers walk
Draft the depth from the waterline of the boat to the lowest part of the boat, which indicates how much water is required to fl oat the boat
Fathom: a measurement of depth; one fathom equals six feet
Fender: a cushion hung from the side of a boat to prevent it from rubbing against a dock or against other boats
Fend off: to push off to avoid sharp contact with dock or other vessel
Fore: the part of the boat toward the bow or front
Freeboard: the height of the top side from the waterline to the deck at its shortest point. (The distance from the sheer or gunwale to the water)
Galley: cooking area
Gunwale: rail or upper edge of the side of the boat
11-2
Glossary & Index
Head: toilet
Hull: the part of the hull from the deck down
Keel: the lowest point of a boat; the backbone of the vessel
Knots: a measurement of speed indicating nautical miles per hour
Lee: the side opposite that from which the wind is blowing: the side sheltered from the wind
Leeward: the direction toward which the wind is blowing
PFD: personal fl otation device; required for each person aboard
Port: the left side of the boat when facing forward (an easy way to remember the difference between “port” and “starboard” is that both
“port” and “left” have four letters)
Shank: the main body of an anchor
Sheer: the curve of the boat’s deck from fore to aft when seen from the side
Starboard: the right side of the boat when facing forward
Stern: the aft end of the boat
Stern drive: an inboard/outboard (I/O) unit
Stringer: strengthening integral unit fastened from fore to aft inside the hull and fi berglass encapsulated for added strength: much like the skeleton system of our body
Top off: to fi ll up a tank
Transom: the vertical part of the stern
11-3
Glossary & Index
Head: toilet
Hull: the part of the hull from the deck down
Keel: the lowest point of a boat; the backbone of the vessel
Knots: a measurement of speed indicating nautical miles per hour
Lee: the side opposite that from which the wind is blowing: the side sheltered from the wind
Leeward: the direction toward which the wind is blowing
PFD: personal fl otation device; required for each person aboard
Port: the left side of the boat when facing forward (an easy way to remember the difference between “port” and “starboard” is that both
“port” and “left” have four letters)
Shank: the main body of an anchor
Sheer: the curve of the boat’s deck from fore to aft when seen from the side
Starboard: the right side of the boat when facing forward
Stern: the aft end of the boat
Stern drive: an inboard/outboard (I/O) unit
Stringer: strengthening integral unit fastened from fore to aft inside the hull and fi berglass encapsulated for added strength: much like the skeleton system of our body
Top off: to fi ll up a tank
Transom: the vertical part of the stern
11-3
CHAPTER 11
Trim: the boat’s balance when properly loaded
Wake: the path of a boat left astern in the water
Windward: the direction from which the wind blows; opposite of leeward
CHAPTER 11
Trim: the boat’s balance when properly loaded
Wake: the path of a boat left astern in the water
Windward: the direction from which the wind blows; opposite of leeward
11-4 11-4
Glossary & Index
A
Accidents
Accident Reporting
Aids To Navigation
Air compressor
Alcohol
Anchor Light
Anchoring
Audible Alarms
INDEX
1-27
1-28
2-6
6-2
1-25
1-16
5-25
3-14
Audible Producing Devices 1-15
Automatic Fire Extinguisher 3-10
6-2
7-24
C
Canvas 6-11
7-6
Carbon Monoxide 1-21
Capacity Plate Int-14
Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation 5-29
Cockpit Carpet/Table 6-18
Cockpit Refreshment Center 6-19
Cosmetics 7-1
Compass 6-20
Controls 3-5
D
Dealer Responsibilities Int-15
B
Battery
Battery Switch
Berth Conversion
Bilge Pump
Blower
Breakers & Fuses
Breast Lines
Bridge Clearance
4-1
6-7
7-16
4-10
6-8
6-67
4-6
6-10
7-20
4-5
5-6
7-23
4-8
6-6
5-11
2-10
Depth Sounder 3-9
6-22
Diagnostic Charts 8-1
Direct Current (DC) 4-1
Distress Signals 1-12
1-13
Diver’s Flag 1-29
Docking 5-15
Dock Lines 5-12
Drain Plug 6-21
Doors-Bow 6-25
E
EPIRB 1-20
Electrical 4-1
8-6
Electronics 6-26
Emergencies 5-29
Engine 3-1
7-11
7-33
Engine Hatch 6-46
9-2
Environmental Awareness 5-32
Exhaust 1-21
11-5
Glossary & Index
A
Accidents
Accident Reporting
Aids To Navigation
Air compressor
Alcohol
Anchor Light
Anchoring
Audible Alarms
INDEX
1-27
1-28
2-6
6-2
1-25
1-16
5-25
3-14
Audible Producing Devices 1-15
Automatic Fire Extinguisher 3-10
6-2
7-24
C
Canvas 6-11
7-6
Carbon Monoxide 1-21
Capacity Plate Int-14
Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation 5-29
Cockpit Carpet/Table 6-18
Cockpit Refreshment Center 6-19
Cosmetics 7-1
Compass 6-20
Controls 3-5
D
Dealer Responsibilities Int-15
B
Battery
Battery Switch
Berth Conversion
Bilge Pump
Blower
Breakers & Fuses
Breast Lines
Bridge Clearance
4-1
6-7
7-16
4-10
6-8
6-67
4-6
6-10
7-20
4-5
5-6
7-23
4-8
6-6
5-11
2-10
Depth Sounder 3-9
6-22
Diagnostic Charts 8-1
Direct Current (DC) 4-1
Distress Signals 1-12
1-13
Diver’s Flag 1-29
Docking 5-15
Dock Lines 5-12
Drain Plug 6-21
Doors-Bow 6-25
E
EPIRB 1-20
Electrical 4-1
8-6
Electronics 6-26
Emergencies 5-29
Engine 3-1
7-11
7-33
Engine Hatch 6-46
9-2
Environmental Awareness 5-32
Exhaust 1-21
11-5
CHAPTER 11
F
Fenders 5-11
Fiberglass Maintenance 7-3
Filters 7-21
Fire Extinguishers 1-10
6-3
7-23
First Aid 5-30
Float Plan Int-9
Fresh Water System 4-7
4-14
6-38
7-21
Fuel 4-13
5-3
7-20
8-3
G
Galvanic/Stray Current Corrosion 7-26
Garbage Placard
Gas Vapor Detector
1-18
6-47
Gathering Headway 5-16
Gauges (Instrumentation) 3-7
Gelcoat Maintenance 7-12
General Boating Safety 1-3
Getting Underway
Glossary
5-1
11-1
Gray Water
Grill
6-55
6-50
7-11
H
HIN
Horn
Hour Meter
Hull Bottom
Hypothermia
Int-9
1-19
4-5
3-7
7-9
5-31
I
Ignition Switch 3-15
Index 11-5
Instruments (Gauges) 3-5
Interior Fabrics
8-2
7-3
International Distress Signals 1-14
Interrupt Switch 3-15
K
Knots 5-28
L
Labels
Ladder
Law of Salvage
Lighting-Docking
Lighting-Stern
Loading
Lanyard
1-1
6-56
5-27
6-57
1-16
6-58
5-20
Int-14
3-24
Launch & Cruise Checklist Int-12
M
Maneuvering 5-17
Maintenance Guides 7-25
Maintaining PFD’S
Masthead Light
Mayday
MerCruiser
1-9
1-16
1-19
1-15
7-15
7-20
7-33
7-41
Metal (Cleaning) 7-9
Minimum Required Equipment 1-19
Mooring 5-12
11-6
CHAPTER 11
F
Fenders 5-11
Fiberglass Maintenance 7-3
Filters 7-21
Fire Extinguishers 1-10
6-3
7-23
First Aid 5-30
Float Plan Int-9
Fresh Water System 4-7
4-14
6-38
7-21
Fuel 4-13
5-3
7-20
8-3
G
Galvanic/Stray Current Corrosion 7-26
Garbage Placard
Gas Vapor Detector
1-18
6-47
Gathering Headway 5-16
Gauges (Instrumentation) 3-7
Gelcoat Maintenance 7-12
General Boating Safety 1-3
Getting Underway
Glossary
5-1
11-1
Gray Water
Grill
6-55
6-50
7-11
H
HIN
Horn
Hour Meter
Hull Bottom
Hypothermia
Int-9
1-19
4-5
3-7
7-9
5-31
I
Ignition Switch 3-15
Index 11-5
Instruments (Gauges) 3-5
Interior Fabrics
8-2
7-3
International Distress Signals 1-14
Interrupt Switch 3-15
K
Knots 5-28
L
Labels
Ladder
Law of Salvage
Lighting-Docking
Lighting-Stern
Loading
Lanyard
1-1
6-56
5-27
6-57
1-16
6-58
5-20
Int-14
3-24
Launch & Cruise Checklist Int-12
M
Maneuvering 5-17
Maintenance Guides 7-25
Maintaining PFD’S
Masthead Light
Mayday
MerCruiser
1-9
1-16
1-19
1-15
7-15
7-20
7-33
7-41
Metal (Cleaning) 7-9
Minimum Required Equipment 1-19
Mooring 5-12
11-6
Glossary & Index
N
Navigation Aids
Navigation Lights
2-6
1-15
Navigation Rules
Neutra-Salt System
1-19
2-9
2-1
6-59
Neutral Safety Switch 3-13
New Boat Delivery Checklist Int-17
Night Running 2-9
R
Recommissioning 9-5
Registration Information Int-19
Remote Control 3-16
5-7
7-18
8-2
Remote Control (DTS-Mercury) 3-18
Remote Control (EVC-Volvo) 3-21
Right-Of-Way
Rules Of The Road
2-2
2-1
O
Oil Pressure Gauge
Oil Spills
Overloading
3-8
1-17
Int-14
Owner’s Information Packet Int-8
Owner’s Registration Int-15
Owner Responsibilities Int-15
P
Personal Flotation Devices 1-7
Plastics
1-19
7-2
Power Trim 5-19
Precautionary Safety Labels 1-12
Pre-departure questionnaire 5-1
Pressurized Fresh Water 4-16
Propellers
6-61
3-3
Propulsion
Pump Out Fittings
7-12
8-3
3-3
7-21
S
Safety
Seating-
1-1
Int-14
7-19
6-63
Shallow Water Operation 5-22
Sirius Satellite Radio
Ski Pylon
Specifi cations
6-71
1-31
6-72
Tech
Speedometer
Sport Tower
3-9
6-73
Spring Line 5-11
Starting & Stopping 5-6
Stern Line
Steering
5-11
5-8
7-16
7-26
Stereo 6-77
7-22
Stereo iPod Adapter 6-83
6-88
Stereo Performance Package 6-88
Stereo Remote 6-85
Swim Platform 6-90
11-7
Glossary & Index
N
Navigation Aids
Navigation Lights
2-6
1-15
Navigation Rules
Neutra-Salt System
1-19
2-9
2-1
6-59
Neutral Safety Switch 3-13
New Boat Delivery Checklist Int-17
Night Running 2-9
R
Recommissioning 9-5
Registration Information Int-19
Remote Control 3-16
5-7
7-18
8-2
Remote Control (DTS-Mercury) 3-18
Remote Control (EVC-Volvo) 3-21
Right-Of-Way
Rules Of The Road
2-2
2-1
O
Oil Pressure Gauge
Oil Spills
Overloading
3-8
1-17
Int-14
Owner’s Information Packet Int-8
Owner’s Registration Int-15
Owner Responsibilities Int-15
P
Personal Flotation Devices 1-7
Plastics
1-19
7-2
Power Trim 5-19
Precautionary Safety Labels 1-12
Pre-departure questionnaire 5-1
Pressurized Fresh Water 4-16
Propellers
6-61
3-3
Propulsion
Pump Out Fittings
7-12
8-3
3-3
7-21
S
Safety
Seating-
1-1
Int-14
7-19
6-63
Shallow Water Operation 5-22
Sirius Satellite Radio
Ski Pylon
Specifi cations
6-71
1-31
6-72
Tech
Speedometer
Sport Tower
3-9
6-73
Spring Line 5-11
Starting & Stopping 5-6
Stern Line
Steering
5-11
5-8
7-16
7-26
Stereo 6-77
7-22
Stereo iPod Adapter 6-83
6-88
Stereo Performance Package 6-88
Stereo Remote 6-85
Swim Platform 6-90
11-7
CHAPTER 11
Stern Drive
Sunbrella Cleaning
Swim Platform
Switches (DC)
T
Tachometer
Table
Technical
3-7
3-12
6-60
12-1
Temperature Gauge 3-8
Toilet 4-16
6-80
6-81
7-21
Towing
Trailering
5-26
10-1
Trailer Switch 6-69
Transom Filler Cushion 6-70
Transom Remote
Trim Angle
Trim Gauge
Troubleshooting
Turning
6-42
5-20
3-9
8-1
5-17
3-3
3-13
5-7
5-14
5-16
7-11
7-31
7-39
9-2
9-5
7-7
1-31
6-90
4-4
V
VHF
Ventilation
Visibility
6-20
1-22
3-2
5-6
7-24
2-9
5-23
Visual Distress Signals 1-12
Volt Meter
Volvo
3-8
7-14
7-31
Volvo Engine Alarm 3-11
Volvo EVC Controller 7-20
W
Wake
Wakeboarding
Warning Labels
Warranty
Waste
Water Skiing
1-33
8-5
1-1
Int-18
4-17
7-21
8-5
1-29
Weather 1-34
Windshield-Center Latch 6-101
Winterizing 9-1
Wiring Color Codes 4-2
U
Upholstery 7-1
Z
Zinc Anodes 7-30
11-8
CHAPTER 11
Stern Drive
Sunbrella Cleaning
Swim Platform
Switches (DC)
T
Tachometer
Table
Technical
3-7
3-12
6-60
12-1
Temperature Gauge 3-8
Toilet 4-16
6-80
6-81
7-21
Towing
Trailering
5-26
10-1
Trailer Switch 6-69
Transom Filler Cushion 6-70
Transom Remote
Trim Angle
Trim Gauge
Troubleshooting
Turning
6-42
5-20
3-9
8-1
5-17
3-3
3-13
5-7
5-14
5-16
7-11
7-31
7-39
9-2
9-5
7-7
1-31
6-90
4-4
V
VHF
Ventilation
Visibility
6-20
1-22
3-2
5-6
7-24
2-9
5-23
Visual Distress Signals 1-12
Volt Meter
Volvo
3-8
7-14
7-31
Volvo Engine Alarm 3-11
Volvo EVC Controller 7-20
W
Wake
Wakeboarding
Warning Labels
Warranty
Waste
Water Skiing
1-33
8-5
1-1
Int-18
4-17
7-21
8-5
1-29
Weather 1-34
Windshield-Center Latch 6-101
Winterizing 9-1
Wiring Color Codes 4-2
U
Upholstery 7-1
Z
Zinc Anodes 7-30
11-8
Technical Information
NOTICE
The following technical information and drawings are accurate up to the printing date listed at the beginning of this manual. These drawings can be an aid to troubleshooting electrical and mechanical problems along with the charts located in the troubleshooting chapter.
Note that all product specifications, models, standard and optional equipment, systems, along with the technical information is subject to change without notice.
For more information contact your nearest authorized Regal dealer.
For the location of your nearest authorized dealer call 407-851-4360. or visit the web-site at www.RegalBoats.com.
Your Regal dealer has received special factory training on the entire product line and his services should be employed to solve more technical problems.
Technical Information
NOTICE
The following technical information and drawings are accurate up to the printing date listed at the beginning of this manual. These drawings can be an aid to troubleshooting electrical and mechanical problems along with the charts located in the troubleshooting chapter.
Note that all product specifications, models, standard and optional equipment, systems, along with the technical information is subject to change without notice.
For more information contact your nearest authorized Regal dealer.
For the location of your nearest authorized dealer call 407-851-4360. or visit the web-site at www.RegalBoats.com.
Your Regal dealer has received special factory training on the entire product line and his services should be employed to solve more technical problems.
12-1 12-1
12-2 12-2
Technical Information Technical Information
12-3 12-3
12-4 12-4
Technical Information
LENGTH OVER-
ALL W/ EXTENDED
PLATFORM
2300 SPECIFICATIONS
USA
22’’11”
CENTERLINE
LENGTH
20’1”
8’ 6” BEAM
APPROXIMATE DRY
WEIGHT W/ 5.0 L
3870 LBS.
APPROX. BRIDGE
CLEARANCE-TOP
OF TOWER
APPROX. BRIDGE
CLEARANCE W/
TOWER IN FULL
FORWARD POSI-
TION
COCKPIT DEPTH
APPROX. DRAFT-
DRIVE DOWN
7’ 7”
4’ 8”
32 1/2”
18”-20”
FUEL CAPACITY
WATER CAPACITY
WASTE CAPACITY
SLEEPING CAPAC-
ITY
PERSONS
CAPACITY
54 GALS.
N/A
N/A
N/A
12
CE
6.95 M
6.12 M
2.60 M
1714.57 KG
2.31 M
1.42 M
.82 M
.45-.50 M
204.41 L
N/A
N/A
N/A
10
Technical Information
LENGTH OVER-
ALL W/ EXTENDED
PLATFORM
2300 SPECIFICATIONS
USA
22’’11”
CENTERLINE
LENGTH
20’1”
8’ 6” BEAM
APPROXIMATE DRY
WEIGHT W/ 5.0 L
3870 LBS.
APPROX. BRIDGE
CLEARANCE-TOP
OF TOWER
APPROX. BRIDGE
CLEARANCE W/
TOWER IN FULL
FORWARD POSI-
TION
COCKPIT DEPTH
APPROX. DRAFT-
DRIVE DOWN
7’ 7”
4’ 8”
32 1/2”
18”-20”
FUEL CAPACITY
WATER CAPACITY
WASTE CAPACITY
SLEEPING CAPAC-
ITY
PERSONS
CAPACITY
54 GALS.
N/A
N/A
N/A
12
CE
6.95 M
6.12 M
2.60 M
1714.57 KG
2.31 M
1.42 M
.82 M
.45-.50 M
204.41 L
N/A
N/A
N/A
10
12-5 12-5
LENGTH OVER-
ALL W/ EXTENDED
PLATFORM
2500 SPECIFICATIONS
USA
26’ 3”
CENTERLINE
LENGTH 24’6”
8’ 6” BEAM
APPROXIMATE DRY
WEIGHT W/ 5.0 L
4600 LBS.
APPROX. BRIDGE
CLEARANCE-TOP
OF TOWER
APPROX. BRIDGE
CLEARANCE W/
TOWER IN FULL
FORWARD POSI-
TION
COCKPIT DEPTH
APPROX. DRAFT-
DRIVE DOWN
8’
6’ 3”
33.5”
18”-20”
FUEL CAPACITY
WATER CAPACITY
WASTE CAPACITY
68 GALS.
11
2.5 GAL. W/
CHEMICAL HEAD
CE
8 M
7.46 M
2.60 M
2086.52 KG
2.43 M
1.98 M
.85 M
.45-.50 M
257.40 L
60.56 L
41L W/
CHEMICAL HEAD
SLEEPING
CAPACITY
PERSONS
CAPACITY
N/A
13
N/A
13
LENGTH OVER-
ALL W/ EXTENDED
PLATFORM
2500 SPECIFICATIONS
USA
26’ 3”
CENTERLINE
LENGTH 24’6”
8’ 6” BEAM
APPROXIMATE DRY
WEIGHT W/ 5.0 L
4600 LBS.
APPROX. BRIDGE
CLEARANCE-TOP
OF TOWER
APPROX. BRIDGE
CLEARANCE W/
TOWER IN FULL
FORWARD POSI-
TION
COCKPIT DEPTH
APPROX. DRAFT-
DRIVE DOWN
8’
6’ 3”
33.5”
18”-20”
FUEL CAPACITY
WATER CAPACITY
WASTE CAPACITY
68 GALS.
11
2.5 GAL. W/
CHEMICAL HEAD
CE
8 M
7.46 M
2.60 M
2086.52 KG
2.43 M
1.98 M
.85 M
.45-.50 M
257.40 L
60.56 L
41L W/
CHEMICAL HEAD
SLEEPING
CAPACITY
PERSONS
CAPACITY
N/A
13
N/A
13
12-6 12-6
Technical Information
LENGTH OVER-
ALL W/ EXTENDED
PLATFORM
2550 SPECIFICATIONS
USA
26’ 3”
CENTERLINE
LENGTH 24’6”
8’ 6” BEAM
APPROXIMATE DRY
WEIGHT W/ 5.0 L
APPROX. BRIDGE
CLEARANCE-TOP
OF TOWER
APPROX. BRIDGE
CLEARANCE W/
TOWER FULL FOR-
WARD
COCKPIT DEPTH
APPROX. DRAFT-
DRIVE DOWN
4828 LBS.
7’ 11”
6’2”
35”
18”-20”
FUEL CAPACITY
WATER CAPACITY
WASTE CAPACITY
68 GALS.
11
2.5 GAL. W/
CHEMICAL HEAD
CE
8.07 M
7.46 M
2.60 M
2189.44 KG
2.31 M
1.98 M
.82 M
.45-.50 M
257.40 L
60.56 L
41 L W/
CHEMICAL HEAD
SLEEPING
CAPACITY
PERSONS
CAPACITY
2
12
2
8
Technical Information
LENGTH OVER-
ALL W/ EXTENDED
PLATFORM
2550 SPECIFICATIONS
USA
26’ 3”
CENTERLINE
LENGTH 24’6”
8’ 6” BEAM
APPROXIMATE DRY
WEIGHT W/ 5.0 L
APPROX. BRIDGE
CLEARANCE-TOP
OF TOWER
APPROX. BRIDGE
CLEARANCE W/
TOWER FULL FOR-
WARD
COCKPIT DEPTH
APPROX. DRAFT-
DRIVE DOWN
4828 LBS.
7’ 11”
6’2”
35”
18”-20”
FUEL CAPACITY
WATER CAPACITY
WASTE CAPACITY
68 GALS.
11
2.5 GAL. W/
CHEMICAL HEAD
CE
8.07 M
7.46 M
2.60 M
2189.44 KG
2.31 M
1.98 M
.82 M
.45-.50 M
257.40 L
60.56 L
41 L W/
CHEMICAL HEAD
SLEEPING
CAPACITY
PERSONS
CAPACITY
2
12
2
8
12-7 12-7
STATEMENT CONCERNING OZONE IMCI STANDARD 1005
The Regal boat models set forth in this owner’s manual (2300, 2500, 2550) do not content or do not depend from substances that deplete the Ozone layer and are controlled from the Regulation (EC)
Number 1005/2009 of the European Parliament and of the Council of the 16 September 2009 on substances that deplete the Ozone layer.
12-8
2300 Volvo Deck Harness (1 of 2)
IPA RECEPTACLE 1
16 RED/BLK (STEREO ON)
14 DK BLU (DOCKING LTS)
16 DK BLU/WHT (AFT LTS)
16 DK BLU/WHT (FWD LTS)
SEAL PLUG
SEAL PLUG
4
5
6
1
2
3
9
8
7
12
11
10
SEAL PLUG
SEAL PLUG
SEAL PLUG
SEAL PLUG
SEAL PLUG
SEAL PLUG
12WAY DEUTSCH DT RECEPTACLE
54-1202-004 ( DT04-12PA )
54-1202-005 ( W12P )
DASH CONNECTORS AND MISC WIRING
IPA RECEPT 2 IPA RECEPT 3
14 BRN (BILGE PUMP)
14 BLK/WHT (FIRE EXTING)
14 GRY/BLK (ANCHOR LT)
1
2
3
54-0602-011 ( W6P )
6
5
4
14 YEL/BLK (HORN)
16 PNK (FUEL SNEDER)
12 YEL (BLOWER)
14 GRY (NAV LT)
2
6WAY DEUTSCH DT RECEPTACLE
54-0601-010 ( DT04-6P-E005 )
1
12 ORN/BLK (FRESH WATER PUMP)
2WAY DEUTSCH DTP RECEPTACLE
54-0202-052 ( DTP04-2P )
54-0202-051 ( WP2P )
MAINPOWER
4 RED - 1/4 RING
ENGINE CONNECTOR
8-WAY MOLDED
FWD/AFT SPEAKERS (SOCKETS)
16 CLR/GRN (AFT STBD) 16 CLR (FWD STBD)
16 CLR/RED (FWD PORT)
16 CLR (AFT STBD)
3 2
6
9
5
8
1
4
7
16 CLR/GRN (FWD STBD)
16 CLR (FWD PORT)
16 CLR/RED (AFT PORT)
16 CLR (AFT PORT)
9 WAY PLUG MNL II
54-0902-005 ( 770021-1 )
STEREO AND SPEAKERS
STEREO PLUG (SOCKETS)
14 BLK (STEREO GRND)
16 RED/BLK (STEREO ON)
BLANK
14 YEL/BLK (STEREO MEM)
BLANK
3 2
6 5
1
4
BLANK
6 WAY PLUG MNL II
54-0602-007 ( 770020-1 )
PORT AFT SPEAKER
16 CLR/RED - .25 UF FEM
16 CLR - .1875 UF FEM
STBD AFT SPEAKER
16 CLR/RED - .25 UF FEM
16 CLR - .1875 UF FEM
PORT MID SPEAKER
16 CLR/RED - .25 UF FEM
16 CLR - .1875 UF FEM
STBD MID SPEAKER
16 CLR/RED - .25 UF FEM
16 CLR - .1875 UF FEM
ANTENNA GRND
16 GRN - 3/8 RING
FIREBOY INDICATOR
16 PUR - BUTT
16 BLK/WHT - BUTT
TEMP ALARM
16 PUR - BUTT
16 TAN/BLU - BUTT
FRESH WATER PUMP
12 ORN/BLK (PWR) - .25 UF FEM
12 BRN (TO PUMP) - .25 UF FEM
SHIFTER
NEUTRAL SWITCH
16 YEL/RED #1 - .25 UF FEM
16 YEL/RED #2 - .25 UF FEM
LANYARD SWITCH
16 PUR #1 - .25 UF FEM
16 PUR #2 - .25 UF FEM
COCKPIT LTS - WIRED TO COCKPIT LT SWITCH
PORT HATCH LT
16 BLU/WHT - BUTT
16 BLK - BUTT
STBD HATCH LT
16 BLU/WHT - BUTT
16 BLK - BUTT
PORT COCKPITLT
16 BLU/WHT - BUTT
16 BLK - BUTT
STBD COCKPITLT
16 BLU/WHT - BUTT
16 BLK - BUTT
FWD COCKPIT LIGHT
16 BLK
2 1
16 BLU/WHT
2WAY DEUTSCH DT RECEPTACLE
54-0201-047 ( DT04-2P )
54-0202-043 ( W2P )
FWD CONNECTORS AND WIRING
B
C
A
3WAY DEUTSCH DT PLUG
CONN 54-0302-017 ( DT06-3S )
WEDGE 54-0301-018 ( W3S )
BRAKE LIGHT 1
16 YEL
1 2
16 BLK
2WAY DEUTSCH DTM PLUG
CONNECTOR 54-0202-056 (DTM06-2S)
LOCKING WEDGE 54-0202-057 (WM-2S)
BRAKE LIGHT 2
16 DK. GRN 1 2 16 BLK
2WAY DEUTSCH DTM PLUG
CONNECTOR 54-0202-056 (DTM06-2S)
LOCKING WEDGE 54-0202-057 (WM-2S)
NAVIGATION LT
14 GRY 1 2 14 BLK
2WAY DEUTSCH DT PLUG
CONNECTOR 54-0202-042 ( DT06-2S )
LOCKING WEDGE 54-0201-043 ( W2S )
AFT CONNECTORS AND WIRING
MAINPOWER
4 RED - 1/4 RING
AFT AUTO BILGE
14 BRN/WHT - FUSE HOLDER 10A
14 BRN/WHT - 3/8 RING
STEREO MEMORY
14 YEL/BLK - FUSE HOLDER 15A
14 YEL/BLK - 3/8 RING
ANCHOR LT
PORT DOCKING LT
14 DKBLU 1 2 14 BLK
2WAY DEUTSCH DT PLUG
CONNECTOR 54-0202-042 ( DT06-2S )
LOCKING WEDGE 54-0201-043 ( W2S )
14 GRY/BLK
1 2
14 BLK
2WAY DEUTSCH DT PLUG
CONNECTOR 54-0202-042 ( DT06-2S )
LOCKING WEDGE 54-0201-043 ( W2S )
HORN
14 YEL/BLK - .25 UF FEM
14 BLK - .25 UF FEM
STBD DOCKING LT
14 DKBLU 1 2 14 BLK
2WAY DEUTSCH DT PLUG
CONNECTOR 54-0202-042 ( DT06-2S )
LOCKING WEDGE 54-0201-043 ( W2S )
SPLICE 1
16 BLK (PORT HATCH LT)
16 BLK (PORT COCKPIT LT)
16 BLK - TO SPLICE 2
SPLICE 2
16 BLK (FROM SPLICE 1)
16 BLK (STBD HATCH LT)
16 BLK - TO SPLICE 3
SPLICE 3
16 BLK (FROM SPLICE 2)
16 BLK (STBD COCKPIT LT)
14 BLK - TO FWD GRND BUSS
SPLICE 4
14 BLK (HORN)
16 BLK (FWD COCKPIT LT)
16 BLK - (FWD BRAKE LT CONNECTOR)
14 BLK - FWD GRND BUSS
SPLICE 5
16 BLK (PORT BRAKE LT)
16 BLK (STBD BRAKE LT)
16 BLK - TO SPLICE 6
SPLICE 6
16 BLK (FROM SPLICE 6)
14 BLK (ANCHOR LT)
14 BLK - TO FWD GRND BUSS
AFT GROUND BUSS
4 BLK (TO FWD GRND BUSS) - 5/16 RING
10 BLK (ENGINE NEG) - 5/16 RING
FWD GROUND BUSS
LOOP EXTRA GRN WIRE AT GROUND BUSS
ENGINE AND HULL CONNECTORS
TO HULL HARNESS
12 BRN (FRESH WTR PMP)
1 2
12 YEL (BLOWER)
2WAY DEUTSCH DTP PLUG
CONNECTOR 54-0201-061 ( DTP06-2S )
LOCKING WEDGE 54-0201-062 ( WP2S )
TO HULL HARNESS
BRN/WHT
TAN
<10
SEALING PLUG <9
LT BLUE
10 BLK (ENGINE NEG)
<8
<1
GRAY (TACH) <2
<3
14 BRN/WHT (AUTO BILGE)
14 BRN (BILGE PUMP)
4
3
1
2
16 PNK (FUEL SNDR)
16 BLK/WHT (HALON OPTION)
4WAY DEUTSCH DT PLUG
CONNECTOR 54-0401-018 ( DT06-4S )
LOCKING WEDGE 54-0401-019 ( W4S )
ENGINE CONNECTOR
8 9 10
11
12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
11> SEALING PLUG
12> SEALING PLUG
13> SEALING PLUG
14>
7>
SEALING PLUG
YEL/RED (START)
6> 10 RED (ENGINE POS)
5> PURPLE (IGNITION)
14WAY APEX SEALED PLUG W/ PINS
54-1402-006 ( FCI 5420-1415)
65-0101-060 CAVITY PLUG
14 BLK (PORT DOCK LT)
14 BLK (NAV LTS)
14 BLK (SPLICE 3)
HATCH LTS/AFT COCKPIT LTS
14 BLK (STEREO)
16 GRN (ANTENNA GRND)
4 BLK (TO AFT GRND BUSS)
14 BLK (STBD DOCK LT)
14 BLK (SPLICE 6)
ANCHORLT/BRAKE LTS
14 BLK (SPLICE 4)
HORN/FWD COCPIT LT/FWD BRAKE
16 GRN
REVISION DESCRIPTION DR. BY APP. BY REV. DATE
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL
THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS DRAWING IS THE SOLE
PROPERTY OF REGAL MARINE INDUSTRIES. ANY REPRODUCTION
IN PART OR AS WHOLE WITHOUT THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
REGAL MARINE INDUSTRIES IS PROHIBITED
REGAL MARINE INDUSTRIES
2300 JETPORT DRIVE
ORLANDO, FLORIDA 32809
TEL (407) 851-4360 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DRAWING TITLE:
2300 Volvo Deck Harness
DATE:
01-15-09
DRAWN BY:
M&G Electronics
SCALE:
X
APPROVED BY:
R.Gills
SHEET:
2 OF 2
DWG. NO.:
EDR22A
2300 DECK HARNESS LAYOUT (1 OF 2)
12-9
2300 Volvo Deck Harness (1 of 2)
HATCH LT
24
30 54
10
PORT AFT
SPEAKER
FLEX
SPLICE 1
34
FLEX
COCKPIT LT
PORT FWD
SPEAKER
6
BRAKE LTS 6
SPLICE 5
DTM06-2S
DTM06-2S
4
FLEX
6
SPEEDO HOSE
8
FLEX
12
FLEX
WA
HULL
HARNESS
8
F
L
E
X
DT06-4S
DTP06-2S
FLEX
ENGINE
26
5/16
4GA
5 / 1 6 1 2 - 1 0
AFT GROUND BUSS
12
FL
E
X
AUTO BILGE
10A
3 / 8
1 6 - 1 4
15A
3 / 8 1 6 - 1 4
STEREO MEM
MAIN POWER
1/4
4GA
18
FLEX
12
40
ANCHOR LT
DT06-2S
8
SPLICE 6
46
HATCH LT
28
24
32
SPLICE 2
STBD AFT
SPEAKER
12
15
FWD GRND BUSS
8
SPEEDO HOSE
8 MAIN POWER
COCKPIT LT
FL
E
X
45
28
STBD FWD
SPEAKER
FRESH WTR
. 250 UF FEM ALE . 250 UF FEM ALE
DASH
24
24
SPLICE 3
22
BULKHEAD
12
30
8
SHIFTER
. 250 U F
F EM ALE F EM AL E
.25 0 UF
. 250 UF
FEM ALE
. 250 UF
FEM ALE 32
10
4
4
8
10
10
10
8
10
FLEX
10
FLEX
32
FLEX
TEMP ALARM
FIREBOY
ANTENNA
STEREO
FLEX
DOCKING LT
DT06-2S
6
14
FWD
COCKPIT LT
DT04-2P
46
14
18
TRAILER
DT06-3S
8
12
10
6
DT06-2S
DOCKING LT
HORN
SPLICE 4
6
DT06-2S
NAV LT
38
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL
THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS DRAWING IS THE SOLE
PROPERTY OF REGAL MARINE INDUSTRIES. ANY REPRODUCTION
IN PART OR AS WHOLE WITHOUT THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
REGAL MARINE INDUSTRIES IS PROHIBITED
REVISION DESCRIPTION APP. BY
DR. BY REV. DATE
REGAL MARINE INDUSTRIES
2300 JETPORT DRIVE
ORLANDO, FLORIDA 32809
TEL (407) 851-4360 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DRAWING TITLE:
2300 Volvo Deck Harness
DATE:
01-15-09
DRAWN BY:
M&G Electronics
SCALE:
X
APPROVED BY:
R.Gills
SHEET:
1 OF 2
DWG. NO.:
EDR22A
2300 DECK HARNESS LAYOUT (2 OF 2)
12-10
2300 Fuel Plumbing
ITEM
01
02
03
04
QTY.
1
1
1
1
BILL OF MATERIALS
DESCRIPTION
1-1/2" FUEL FILL HOSE - 8FT
5/8" FUEL VENT HOSE- 8FT
3/8" FUEL CARB - 3FT
1-1/8" BILGE FLEX HOSE- 8FT
PART #
1769
1770
1776
1463
BILGE PUMP
TO ENGINE
FUEL TANK
BILGE THRU HULL
FUEL VENT FUEL FILL
NOTE: DO NOT STRAP HOSES TOGETHER.
2300 FUEL SYSTEM
REVISION DESCRIPTION DR. BY APP. BY REV. DATE
DRAWING TITLE:
2300 Fuel Plumbing
DATE:
12.12.08
DRAWN BY:
RYAN.WB
REGAL MARINE INDUSTRIES
2300 JETPORT DRIVE
ORLANDO, FLORIDA 32809
TEL (407) 851-4360 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
APPROVED BY:
D. Linder
Page:
1 of 1
DWG. NO.:
MDR23A
12-11
12-12
2300 Sump Hardware
Battery
Battery Tray
Water Pump (OPTION)
Blower
Breaker Box
Battery Switch
Bilge Pump
Bilge Switch
Ground Bar
Fuel Tank
2300 SUMP HARDWARE
Water Tank
(Option)
ITEM
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
1
1
1
1
1
1
QTY.
1
1
1
1
BILL OF MATERIALS
DESCRIPTION
Battery Tray
Bilge Pump
Bilge Switch
Blower
Ground Bar
Battery Switch
Breaker Box
Water Pump (Option)
Fuel Tank
Water Tank (Option)
PART #
1479
57661
57674
68312
956733
147141
14670
14541
68272
66781
REVISION DESCRIPTION APP. BY DR. BY REV. DATE
REGAL MARINE INDUSTRIES
2300 JETPORT DRIVE
ORLANDO, FLORIDA 32809
TEL (407) 851-4360 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DRAWING TITLE:
2300 Sump Hardware
DATE:
12.16.08
DRAWN BY:
RYAN.WB
APPROVED BY:
D.Linder
1 of 1
DWG. NO.:
MDR24Q
G
REGAL 2300
MANUAL DRAWING
REGAL MARINE INDUSTRIES
K
B
L
A F P
2300 CE EQUIPMENT LOCATION
Key
A) Fuel Tank
B) Fuel Tank Filling Point
C) Oil Tank
D) Oil Tank Filling Point
E) Oil Tank Emptying Point
F) Water Tank
G) Water Tank Filling Point
H) Holding Tank
I) Holding Tank Emptying Point
J) Seacocks
K) Through-Hull Fittings
L) Fire Extinguisher
M) Carbon Monoxide Detector
N) Escape Hatch
O) Fire Escapes
P) Life Raft Stowage
12-13
2500 ELECTRICAL LAYOUT (1 OF 2)
BRAKE LT
DTM06-2S
FLEX
HATCH LT
FLEX
38
FLEX
SPEEDO
HOSE
12
FLEX
12
FLEX
ENGINE
WA
46
16
4
BRAKE LT 6
DTM06-2S
4
FLEX
6
FLEX
24
FLEX
HULL
HARNESS
FL
EX
FLEX
DT06-4S
DTP06-2S
BATTERY
NEGATIVE
FL
EX
24
FLE
X
24
FLEX
5/16
4GA
10A
3 /8
1 6 - 1 4
AUTO BILGE
STEREO MEM
3 / 8
1 6 - 1 4
15A
12
1/4
4GA
MAIN
POWER
HATCH LT
FLEX
38
FLEX
FLEX
FLEX
24
32
36
52
ANCHOR LT
DT06-2S
8
16
34
COCKPIT LT
20
36
PORT AFT
SPEAKER
60
COCKPIT LT
20
PORT FWD
SPEAKER
HEAD LT
32
51
2500
36
20
STBD AFT
SPEAKER
FRESH WTR . 250 UF
FEMALE
.250 UF
FEMALE
SPEEDO
HOSE
GROUND
BUSS
8
8
MAIN
POWER
HEAD LT
DASH
24
34
14
32
12
BULKHEAD
43
ANTENNA
8
SHIFTER
. 250 UF
FEMALE
.250 UF
FEMALE
. 250 UF
FEM ALE
.250 UF
F EMALE 24
10
4
8
10
10 10
8
10
FLEX
10
4
REMOTE
14
STBD FWD
SPEAKER
STEREO
FLEX
32
TEMP
ALARM
FIREBOY
FLEX
FLEX
36
REVISION DESCRIPTION DR. BY APP. BY REV. DATE
REGAL MARINE INDUSTRIES
2300 JETPORT DRIVE
ORLANDO, FLORIDA 32809
TEL (407) 851-4360 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DRAWING TITLE:
2500 ELECTRICAL LAYOUT (1 OF 2)
SCALE: DATE:
10-10-08
DRAWN BY:
C. WOO
APPROVED BY: DWG. NO.:
EME22D
2500 ELECTRICAL LAYOUT (EARLIER KENWOOD STEREO VERSION)
12-14
78
FWD
COCKPIT LT
DT04-2P
TRAILER
DT06-3S
6
12
34
18
DOCKING LT
DT06-2S
14
14
6
DT06-2S
NAV LT
14
12
14
HORN
14
DT06-2S
DOCKING LT
2500 ELECTRICAL LAYOUT (2 of 2)
2500 ELECTRICAL HARNESS & PLUG LAYOUT
REVISION DESCRIPTION DR. BY APP. BY REV. DATE
REGAL MARINE INDUSTRIES
2300 JETPORT DRIVE
ORLANDO, FLORIDA 32809
TEL (407) 851-4360
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DRAWING TITLE:
2500 ELECTRICAL LAYOUT (2 of 2)
SCALE: DATE:
10-10-08
DRAWN BY:
C. WOO
APPROVED BY: DWG. NO.:
EME22D
12-15
2500 TRANSOM SPEAKER ELECTRICAL
12-16
REVISION DESCRIPTION DR. BY APP. BY REV. DATE
REGAL MARINE INDUSTRIES
2300 JETPORT DRIVE
ORLANDO, FLORIDA 32809
TEL (407) 851-4360 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DRAWING TITLE:
2500 TRANSOM SPEAKER ELECTR.
DATE:
10-13-08
DRAWN BY:
C. WOO
APPROVED BY:
SCALE:
DWG. NO.:
EME22F
2500 TRANSOM SPEAKER WIRING (EARLIER KENWOOD STEREO VERSION)
2500 SPP ELECTRICAL LAYOUT
BULKHEAD
24
PORT BOW
SPEAKER
16 CLR/RED - .25 UF FEM
16 CLR - .1875 UF FEM
FLEX
FLEX
48
FLEX
AMP
POWER
8GA RED (AMP +)
1/4 RING
CONNECTS TO
REGAL BREAKER
FLEX
2500 SPP
194
BULKHEAD
RCA JACKS
RED AND WHITE
SPLICES
16 CLR/RED (FWD PORT)
16 CLR/RED (AFT PORT)
16 CLR (FWD PORT)
16 CLR (AFT PORT)
16 CLR/RED (PORT +)
16 CLR (PORT -)
16 CLR/GRN (FWD STBD)
16 CLR/GRN (AFT STBD)
16 CLR (FWD STBD)
16 CLR (AFT STBD)
16 CLR/GRN (STBD +)
16 CLR (STBD -)
OPTION BOW SPEAKERS (SOCKETS)
BLANK 16 CLR (STBD BOW -)
16 CLR/RED (PORT BOW +)
BLANK
BLANK
3
6
9
2 1
5
8
4
7
16 CLR/GRN (STBD BOW +)
16 CLR (PORT BOW -)
BLANK
BLANK
9 WAY PLUG MNL II54-0902-005 ( 770021-1 )
CONNECTS TO
STEREO
24
12
*
18
AMPLIFIER
16 CLR/RED (PORT +) - #8 RING
16 CLR (PORT -) - #8 RING
16 CLR/GRN (STBD +) - #8 RING
16 CLR (STBD -) - #8 RING
16 BLU (AMP ON) - #8 RING
8 RED (AMP PWR) - #10 RING
8 BLK (AMP GRND) - #10 RING
* use only in RX option
8 BLK (AMP GRND) - 1/4 RING
CONNECTS TO GRND BUSS
40
FLEX
FLEX
FLEX
32
FLEX
12
8
STD COCKPIT SPEAKERS (PINS)
12
8
16 CLR (FWD STBD)
16 CLR/GRN (FWD STBD)
16 CLR (FWD PORT)
16 CLR/RED (AFT PORT)
1 2
4
7
5
8
3
6
9
16 CLR/GRN (AFT STBD)
16 CLR/RED (FWD PORT)
16 CLR (AFT STBD)
BLANK
16 CLR (AFT PORT)
9 WAY CAP MNL II54-0901-005 ( 770028-1 )
MNLII SOCKET
16 BLU (AMP ON)
REGAL WILL INSERT
SOCKET INTO 6-WAY
MNLII GOING TO STEREO
CONNECTS TO
SPEAKER CONNECTOR
IN DECK HARNESS
WHITE
RCA JACKS
RED AND WHITE
INSERT INTO
BACK OF STEREO
FLEX
24
STBD BOW
SPEAKER
16 CLR/GRN - .25 UF FEM
16 CLR - .1875 UF FEM
24
136
REVISION DESCRIPTION DR. BY APP. BY REV. DATE
REGAL MARINE INDUSTRIES
2300 JETPORT DRIVE
ORLANDO, FLORIDA 32809
TEL (407) 851-4360
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DRAWING TITLE:
2500 SPP ELECTRICAL LAYOUT
SCALE: DATE:
10-20-08
DRAWN BY:
C. WOO
APPROVED BY: DWG. NO.:
EME22G
2500 STEREO PERFORMANCE PACKAGE (EARLIER KENWOOD STEREO VERSION)
12-17
2500 FUEL SYSTEM
ITEM
01
02
03
04
QTY.
1
1
1
1
BILL OF MATERIALS
DESCRIPTION
1-1/2" FUEL FILL HOSE - 8FT
5/8" FUEL VENT HOSE- 8FT
3/8" FUEL CARB - 3FT
1-1/8" BILGE FLEX HOSE- 8FT
PART #
1769
1770
1776
1463
BILGE PUMP
TO ENGINE
FUEL TANK
WATER
TANK
12-18
BILGE THRU HULL
FUEL VENT FUEL FILL
NOTE: DO NOT STRAP HOSES TOGETHER.
2500 FUEL SYSTEM
REVISION DESCRIPTION
DR. BY APP. BY REV. DATE
REGAL MARINE INDUSTRIES
2300 JETPORT DRIVE
ORLANDO, FLORIDA 32809
TEL (407) 851-4360 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DRAWING TITLE:
2500 FUEL SYSTEM
DATE:
10-31-08
DRAWN BY:
C. WOO
APPROVED BY:
SCALE:
DWG. NO.:
MME23A
HEAD SINK
2500 PRESSURE WATER SYSTEM
12-19
WATER PUMP
P#: 14541
(OPTION)
FUEL TANK
P#: 68256
BILGE SWITCH
P#: 57674
BILGE PUMP
P#: 57661
12-20
BLOWER
P#: 68312
WATER
TANK
FUEL
TANK
WATERPUMP LOCATION
TOP VIEW
WATER TANK
P#: 66781
(OPTION)
W
AT
ER
TA
N
K
15
GAS VAPOR
DETECTOR
P#18755
(OPTION)
8
11 1 2
ENGINE BULKHEADS
2
BREAKER BOX
BATTERY SWITCH
P#: 147141
GROUND BAR
P#: 956733
BATTERY / BATTERY TRAY
P#: 1479
NOTE: FOR TRANSDUCER
LOCATION REFER TO
DRAWING MME25F.
NEUTRA SALT
P#: 501667
(OPTION)
REVISION DESCRIPTION DR. BY APP. BY REV. DATE
REGAL MARINE INDUSTRIES
2300 JETPORT DRIVE
ORLANDO, FLORIDA 32809
TEL (407) 851-4360 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DRAWING TITLE:
2500 SUMP LAYOUT
SCALE:
DATE:
11-03-08
DRAWN BY:
C. WOO
APPROVED BY: DWG. NO.:
MME22F
2500 SUMP EQUIPMENT LAYOUT
2500 DECK PLAN w/ Fuel and Water tanks
Deck Parts & Features Locations
WAKEBOARD STORAGE
SS COMMON VENT
OPTIONAL SUNPAD SPEAKER
6" SPEAKER LOCATION
SWIM PLATFORM LADDER
HOT TUB STYLE SEATING
BOW SPEAKER LOCATION
BOW NAV LIGHT
FUEL TANK
REMOVEABLE BACKREST
WATER
TANK
SKI PYLON
6" CLEAT
6" CLEAT
6" CLEAT
CUPHOLDER (1 EACH SIDE) COOLER LARGE 36QT
6" CLEAT
CUP HOLDERS (3 EACH SIDE)
TRASH COMPARTMENT
2500 DECK HARDWARE
ADJUSTABLE ARMREST
© REGAL MARINE INDUSTRIES
SCALE: 1/2" = 1' 3-20-2008
12-21
B
REGAL 2500
MANUAL DRAWING
REGAL MARINE INDUSTRIES
K
12-22
I
K
L
A F
P
H
G
2500 CE EQUIPMENT LOCATION
Key
A) Fuel Tank
B) Fuel Tank Filling Point
C) Oil Tank
D) Oil Tank Filling Point
E) Oil Tank Emptying Point
F) Water Tank
G) Water Tank Filling Point
H) Holding Tank
I) Holding Tank Emptying Point
J) Seacocks
K) Through-Hull Fittings
L) Fire Extinguisher
M) Carbon Monoxide Detector
N) Escape Hatch
O) Fire Escapes
P) Life Raft Stowage
2550 DECK HARNESS LAYOUT
12-23
2550 ELECTRICAL LAYOUT (2 of 2)
12-24
2550 ELECTRICAL HARNESS & PLUG LAYOUT
REVISION DESCRIPTION DR. BY APP. BY REV. DATE
REGAL MARINE INDUSTRIES
2300 JETPORT DRIVE
ORLANDO, FLORIDA 32809
TEL (407) 851-4360
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DRAWING TITLE:
2550 ELECTRICAL LAYOUT (2 of 2)
SCALE: DATE:
DRAWN BY:
C. WOO
APPROVED BY: DWG. NO.:
EME22D
2550 FUEL SYSTEM
ITEM
01
02
03
04
QTY.
1
1
1
1
BILL OF MATERIALS
DESCRIPTION
1-1/2" FUEL FILL HOSE - 8FT
5/8" FUEL VENT HOSE- 8FT
3/8" FUEL CARB - 3FT
1-1/8" BILGE FLEX HOSE- 8FT
PART #
1769
1770
1776
1463
BILGE PUMP
TO ENGINE
FUEL TANK
WATER
TANK
BILGE THRU HULL
FUEL VENT FUEL FILL
NOTE: DO NOT STRAP HOSES TOGETHER.
2550 FUEL SYSTEM
REVISION DESCRIPTION DR. BY APP. BY REV. DATE
REGAL MARINE INDUSTRIES
2300 JETPORT DRIVE
ORLANDO, FLORIDA 32809
TEL (407) 851-4360 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DRAWING TITLE:
2550 FUEL SYSTEM
DATE:
10-31-08
DRAWN BY:
C. WOO
APPROVED BY:
SCALE:
DWG. NO.:
MME23A
12-25
7
11*
2
10*
14
1, 5, 6, 12
13
8, 9
Note: Label 3 is not present at SHOWROOM MODEL.
Label 4 is not present since transom door is not in level with the deck
12-26
REGAL 2550
LABEL LOCATIONS
REGAL MARINE INDUSTRIES
LEGEND
1) Carbon Monoxide Cockpit Warning
2) Carbon Monoxide Transom Warning
3) Carbon Monoxide Cabin Warning
4) Transom Door Warning
5) NMMA Propeller Warning
6) U.S. EPA EVAP Standards
7) Propeller Lifetime Warranty
8) NMMA Certified
9) Regal Lifetime Warranty
10) NMMA Fuel Leak Warning*
11) Swim Platform Weight Limit*
12) NMMA Capacity Plate
13) Blower Warning
14) Fireboy Location
* Located underneath engine / ladder hatch accordingly
FUSION STEREO WIRING DIAGRAM
12-27
HORN 10 AMP
MAIN HARNESS FEED
WIPER 10 AMP
NAV LTS. 10 AMP BILGE PUMP 10 AMP
BLOWER 10 AMP
DOCKING LTS.
15 AMP
COCKPIT LTS 10 AMP CABIN LT. HEAD
5 AMP
ACC. SWITCH 5 AMP
CO MONITOR 2 AMP
12 VOLT OUTLET
15 AMP
STEREO REMOTE
2 AMP
EVC RELAY
20 AMP (VOLVO)
GROUND TERMINAL
TYPICAL FUSE PANEL DESCRIPTION W/BREAKER SIZE
12-28
FRESH WATER PUMP
5 AMP
2300,2500,2550 OPTIONAL SPORT TOWER RELAY BOX
12-29
OWNER’S MANUAL
2300, 2500, 2550
Regal Marine Industries, Inc.
2300 Jetport Drive
Orlando, FL 32809-7895
(407) 851-4360
Internet Address: http://www.RegalBoats.com
EMail Address: [email protected]
Advertisement
Key Features
- Lifetime Limited Structural Hull Warranty
- Five-Year Transferable Limited Structural Hull Warranty
- Five-Year Limited Hull Blister Warranty
- Limited General Warranty
- Limited Exterior Finish Warranty